JP2021132927A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can display the same types of icons when a first performance is under execution and when a second performance is under execution. The game machine is configured so as to be capable of executing mutually different performances after displaying icons when the same type of icon is displayed in the first performance and when the same type of icon is displayed in the second performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 266

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine, a pachislot gaming machine, and the like.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-221523

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) Production execution means capable of executing production and
An icon display means capable of displaying an icon (for example, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, etc.) in an effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The icon display means is used when the first effect (for example, the first notice effect) is being executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (for example, the second notice effect) is being executed. It is possible to display icons of the same type as each other (for example, "bell" icon),
The effect executing means differs from each other after the icon is displayed depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect or the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform the production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), it is possible to display icons of the same system as each other when the first effect is executed and when the second effect is executed. Then, it is possible to execute different effects after the icons are displayed depending on whether the icons of the same system are displayed in the first effect and the icons of the same system are displayed in the second effect. It is configured as follows. As a result, while giving variations to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, by making the icons displayed between those effects the same system, it is easy for the player to understand the development of the effects. can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

(2) The gaming machine of (1) above.
The effect executing means has a common effect (for example, the figure) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. After executing the effect number "91" or "92" corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" after the icon is stopped, it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (2), it is possible to execute a common effect between the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is configured to be possible. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the production through the common production, so that the development of the production can be made easier to understand. Further, since it is not necessary to store both the data for the first effect and the data for the second effect as the data for the effect to be performed when the icon of the same system is displayed, the effect control is performed. It can be simplified.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
The effect executing means includes a case where a first icon (for example, a "bell" icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system and a second icon (for example, a "watermelon" icon) different from the first icon. ) Is displayed, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266).
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (3), a common effect is executed depending on whether the first icon is displayed as an icon of the same system or the second icon different from the first icon is displayed. It is configured to be possible. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the production through the common production, so that the development of the production can be made easier to understand. Further, since it is not necessary to store both the data for the first icon and the data for the second icon as the data for the effect to be performed when the icon is displayed, the effect control is simplified. be able to.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means (for example, the sub control circuit 200 that performs the effect shown in FIG. 282) is opposed to the advantageous control being performed throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation,
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (4), when the icon of the same system is displayed, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the control advantageous to the player is performed through the operation time of the movable member. Has been done. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the icon of the same system, and the player's attention to the development of the effect from the display of the icon of the same system to the operation of the movable member. Can attract.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above.
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
Corresponds to the first specific effect (for example, the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) performed when the first icon (for example, the "bell" icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system. In the notice after the icon is stopped, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operating time of the movable member, while a third icon (for example, different from the first icon) is used. , "Cherry" icon) is displayed, in the second specific effect (for example, notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" shown in FIG. 266), the control for operating the movable member is controlled. Not performed,
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (5), in the first specific effect performed when the first icon is displayed as an icon of the same system, control advantageous to the player is performed throughout the operation time of the movable member. It is structured so that it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the icon of the same system, and the player's attention to the development of the effect from the display of the icon of the same system to the operation of the movable member. Can attract. On the other hand, in the second specific effect performed when a third icon different from the first icon is displayed, the control for operating the movable member is not performed. In this way, by making the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member different depending on the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to associate the type of the displayed icon with the effect mode after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the effect after the icon is displayed.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above.
The effect executing means is
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). On the other hand, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, it corresponds to a pre-effect (for example, effect number “16” shown in FIG. 257) that suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to execute (display of icon suggestion items) in the production.
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (6), it is possible to execute a specific effect when an icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, while an icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is also configured so that a specific effect can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the production through the specific production, so that the development of the production can be made easier to understand. Further, in the second effect, it is possible to execute a pre-effect that suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed. As a result, when it is suggested that the icons of the same system are displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above.
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). On the other hand, it is possible to execute the specific effect even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, a roulette effect) is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first suggestion means capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed (for example, a sub control circuit 200 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 257) and
It is provided with a second suggestion means (for example, a sub control circuit 200 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number “15” shown in FIG. 257) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed.
The effect executing means is
When it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed by the first suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (7), it is possible to execute a specific effect when an icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, while an icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is also configured so that a specific effect can be executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the production through the specific production, so that the development of the production can be made easier to understand. Further, in the second effect, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect, and in the predetermined effect, there is a case where it is suggested that an icon of the same system is displayed, and a control advantageous to the player is performed. Expectations for this may be suggested. Then, when it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect, it is possible to execute the specific effect after the icon of the same system is displayed, while the second effect. When the above-mentioned degree of expectation is suggested, the specific effect is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the above degree of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a sense of expectation of the player without developing the effect, so that the attractiveness of the second effect can be improved.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
The effect executing means is
A common specific effect (for example, a first connecting effect (for example, a first connecting effect)) is common between the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. After executing (common)), it is possible to execute the different effects.
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the third effect different from the second effect (for example, the third notice effect), the specific effect different from the common specific effect is displayed. (For example, it is possible to execute the first connecting effect (dedicated)).
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (8), a common specific effect is executed depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. Is configured to be possible. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through a common specific effect, so that the development of the effect can be made easier to understand. Further, since it is not necessary to store both the data for the first effect and the data for the second effect as the data for the effect to be performed when the icon of the same system is displayed, the effect control is performed. It can be simplified. Further, when an icon of the same system is displayed in the third effect, it is configured so that a specific effect different from the above-mentioned common specific effect can be executed. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate specific effect according to the content of the third effect, which is different from the first effect and the second effect.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
It is provided with an operation means (for example, an effect button 62) capable of accepting an operation by a player.
The icon display means is
A first icon capable of displaying an icon when the operating means is operated (for example, when the effect button 62 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 260). Display means and
The icon can be displayed when the operation means is not operated (for example, when the effect button 62 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 260). Equipped with 2 icon display means
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (for example, a connecting effect) in either case where the icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (9), the icon may be displayed when the operating means is operated, or the icon may be displayed even if the operating means is not operated. Then, it is configured so that a specific effect can be executed regardless of the situation in which the icon is displayed. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the specific effect is executed when the operating means is operated and a situation in which the specific effect is executed even if the operating means is not operated. Through such a situation, the effect can be created. Variations can be provided in the development of.

(10) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above.
The effect executing means is
A symbol effect execution means capable of executing a symbol effect on which a symbol is displayed, and a symbol effect execution means.
When a specific symbol display (for example, an image display related to the four symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (for example, a state in which a normal background is displayed), the first effect is performed. It is provided with an effect state switching means capable of switching from the effect state to the second effect state (for example, the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the four symbol tempai).
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to display a first icon (for example, a "bell" icon) as an icon of the same system. can be,
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect after being switched to the second effect state by the effect state switching means, a second icon different from the first icon (for example, "" It is possible to display the "watermelon" icon),
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (10), when a specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to switch from the first effect state to the second effect state. Further, it is possible to display the first icon as an icon of the same system. Then, after switching to the second effect state, when a specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect, a second icon different from the first icon can be displayed. There is. In this way, by displaying the first icon and the second icon step by step and associating a specific symbol display and switching of the effect state, it is possible to create an attractive development of the effect.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above.
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying variable and stop symbols
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game (for example, "pseudo 1") from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. , It is possible to execute the different effects in the second pseudo game (for example, "pseudo 2") after the variable display of the icon is resumed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the invention of (11), when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the temporary stop display of the symbol, the variable display of the symbol is displayed. It is configured so that the above-mentioned different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game after the restart. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo game to the second pseudo game using the display of the icon of the same system as a mark, and it is possible to make the development of the effect easier to understand.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

This is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. This is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment from the back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment as viewed from diagonally above right. This is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display unit and a second special symbol display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is a jackpot. This is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game permission processing of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, (a) a flowchart showing an example of setting processing, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game return processing in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state processing in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-off occurrence in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message setting process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the limiter number of times in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 1 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment for each set value. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the right gate of continuous operation of a character in the pachinko game machine of the extended example 4 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the hall menu screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is executed. This is an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu display process of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hall menu redisplay process of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is executed. This is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed. (B) A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the start port and that the backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process, (c) The backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process, and the start has been performed. This is the screen after the notification period has elapsed, indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where both the abnormal mouth winning errors have occurred. This is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU executes a setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hall menu processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 59. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can perform page update in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen in which each history data was cleared in the setting change / confirmation history screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the example of the initial screen. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows an example when "setting display" is selected. .. The figure which shows another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and shows an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. Is. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected. It is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the example of the page update screen which can perform page update. be. An example of the operation procedure until the setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set value can be confirmed is displayed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows. It is a flowchart which shows an example of maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the maintenance screen of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. This is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the authentication process in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed in the area. This is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. In the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the entered password is inappropriate. It is a figure which shows an example. It is possible to confirm the set value on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the possible setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the volume switch which generates the volume password applied to the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the authentication process in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. In the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed in the area. This is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko game machine which constitutes the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen including the 2D code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system which concerns on modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on modification 3 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. This is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display unit and a second special symbol display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the buffer area which stores the start information of a main RAM in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment, (A) figure which shows one example, (B) figure which shows the other example. It is a figure which shows an example of the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit and the probability of a small hit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a table for demonstrating an example of each gaming state in a non-specific gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot symbol determination table when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a jackpot. This is an example of a small hit symbol determination table when the determination result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a small hit. This is an example of a variation pattern table number setting table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening prize detection processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change start area check process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the backup clear process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and is a time chart showing (a) LG state, (b) HG state, and the like. (C) The case of the RG state is shown. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a time chart which shows another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory and the fluctuation time of the 1st special symbol in each game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the state transition in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the electric support counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special figure shortening counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. This is an example of a normal hit type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol memory check processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing executed by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing executed by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol memory check processing executed by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol display time management processing executed by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. This is an example of a normal hit type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. There is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. There is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit start preparation process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine of the modification of the 5th Embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of ST / GST flag processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. This is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 6th Embodiment. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in pachinko which concerns on the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is an example of the block diagram which shows the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol small hit time variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation counter subtraction processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the attacker opening processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the V winning apparatus opening end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment and the winning timing of the game ball to the V winning opening, and (A) the V shutter is closed. If the first game of the time-saving game is started 1000 msec after that, (B) if the first game of the time-saving game is started 3000 msec after the V shutter is closed, (C) the time-saving game is started immediately after the V shutter is closed. It is a time chart when the first game is started. It is a figure for demonstrating the execution mode of the variation display of the 2nd special symbol in the time saving game and the holding game in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the variation display of each special symbol at the time of simultaneous variation function operation in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol work area table in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st special symbol relation definition data table in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol work area table in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd special symbol relation definition data table in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the 1st special symbol work area table in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting control processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting confirmation processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 1st normal game pre-processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 2nd normal game pre-processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring process in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 1) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 2) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (No. 3) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 4) which shows an example of the main control main processing executed by the main CPU in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the weight processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initial setting process at startup in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting operation preprocessing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power failure process in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol control processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol-related timer update process in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol management processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game standby processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol variation end processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the special symbol game determination processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol game end processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening preparation process in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening opening control processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol per end processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing in 8th Embodiment of this invention. This is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. This is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. This is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. This is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the transition transition of the effect mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. (B) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production stage notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo 1 change main notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 1st notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 2nd notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 3rd notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 4th notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the effect content of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the fluctuation pattern of a decorative pattern. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 1st notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 2nd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 3rd notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the 4th notice production. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an icon. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 1st production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in the 3rd production stage. It is a figure which shows the flow of the 6th notice production. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the 6th notice production. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the 6th notice production and the variation pattern of a decorative pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 7th notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 7th notice production. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the stage change notice production. (B) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change notice effect. (C) is a diagram showing the state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the stage change section hold ball. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start opening winning process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change section determination process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol change start processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stage count process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stage change occurrence lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern selection table. It is a figure which shows the sub-variation pattern replacement table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (B) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. (C) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the third effect stage. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the 8th notice production. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the 8th notice production. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo lamp notice effect. (B) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice effect. (C) is a figure which shows the time chart of the logo lamp notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the notice content lottery contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a probability change mode. It is a flowchart which shows the drum variation effect determination process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start of a drum variation effect which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation which is currently performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the holding ball. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the drum variation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a big hit in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 2nd bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the end of the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the result display processing in a bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing at the end of the 2nd bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (I) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (II) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (III) in the 1st bonus mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining ST number adjustment process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the display | remaining ST number update process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading effect process of a normal figure in a probability change mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability change mode which concerns on 9th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. (B) is a figure which shows the pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the icon stop suggestion notice content which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold change effect lottery process which concerns on 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the production block in the 6th specific super reach. It is a flowchart which shows the 6th specific super reach content lottery processing which concerns on 9th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect notice production for the 1st production stage. (B) is a figure which shows the flow of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage. It is a figure which shows the specific mode of the logo effect notice production for the 2nd production stage.

[1. First Embodiment]
First, the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment will be described.

[1-1. Configuration of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
[1-1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an example of a diagram showing an operation button group 66 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment from the back side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of the gaming board unit 17 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit 17 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment as viewed from diagonally above right. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 70 including the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in the front view. Therefore, for example, "left" is described in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing is "left" in the front view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. It includes 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. Support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting means for producing a notification or an effect by light, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be performed, and may be, for example, a lamp or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when the select button 664 is referred to, it means a general term for the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is a lower front portion of the base door 12 and is arranged below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a jackpot determination of a special symbol described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). In this way, when the launching handle 32 is operated by the player in the launching device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of a special symbol jackpot determination (hereinafter, the special symbol jackpot determination may be simply referred to as "big hit determination" or "special lottery") and various production images related to the game. Is. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification symbol (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the jackpot determination, an effect image during the jackpot, a demo effect image, and the like. The number of pending special symbol variable display (variable display) is included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the first embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the two liquid crystal display devices are used to display the effect image. May be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub-control board 40 having a payout / launch control board 40 having a payout / launch control board 40 having a payout / launch control board 40 having a payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout / launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 (described later) for supplying power. A power supply unit 60 having a power supply unit 60 (see FIG. 9), a power supply switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) are provided, respectively.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the first embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

Inside the main board case that houses the main control board 30, there is a setting switch 332 that is operated when changing the set value, a setting key 328 that is operated when changing or checking the set value, and a performance display monitor. The 334 and the error notification monitor 336 (both of which are described later with reference to FIG. 9) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and set values, which will be described later. For example, an error code or the like described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case in consideration of security, and are referred to as a pachinko gaming machine 1 management manager (hereinafter referred to as "game machine management manager"). This is to prevent a third party (for example, a player) other than) from easily accessing the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. The inside of the main board case means that the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and only the corresponding parts of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the main board case are turned off. When there is a notch and the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine management manager to expose the back surface, the game machine management It also includes those that allow the responsible person to access the configuration switch 332 and / and the configuration key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500 (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a “big hit attacker unit 500”), a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes each accessory such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (hereinafter, referred to as “accessory group 1000”). Each of these accessories 1000 functions as a directing accessory that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 28 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 28 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the direction of travel, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 28 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 28a" and "inner rail 28b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 28. The inner rail 28b, together with the outer rail 28a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 28b is arranged inside the outer rail 28a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow-down area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is said that it can be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A large winning opening switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In addition, in this specification, when it simply refers to "special symbol", it means both 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol. However, in the first embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is what gives. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the first start port switch 421 and is detected by the first start port switch 421, the game ball wins the first start port 420. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed striking.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 420. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it has become difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a big hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74, which will be described later, to display the result of the big hit determination. Is what gives. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the second start port switch 441 and is detected by the second start port switch 441, the game ball wins the second start port 440. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged to the payout port 61. Is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the electric chew solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the electric chew solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode on the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for a normal symbol determination (hereinafter, referred to as "normal lottery") on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 491 is provided at the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491, a normal lottery is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball through the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 is required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A large winning opening switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 and is shifted to the jackpot game state. Is done in.

In addition, in this specification, when it simply refers to "special symbol", it means both 1st special symbol and 2nd special symbol. Similarly, when simply referred to as "special lottery", the winning judgment of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") and the winning judgment of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") It shall mean both (referred to) (the same applies to the second embodiment).

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are arranged in the lower left and lower right of the game board unit 17, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531. NS. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 340, and the upper plate 26 (or the payout port 63) goes down through the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the plate 27). The general winning opening switch 531 may be provided as a switch common to a plurality of general winning openings, or each general winning opening can detect which of the plurality of general winning openings has won a prize. It may be provided corresponding to the mouth.

In the first embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 53 is 15, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540 is 15. Each is set individually. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is provided separately from the above-mentioned out port 450, and is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a symbol hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of the determination (ordinary lottery) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary lottery). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary lottery) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port is opened. The mode in which it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball in 440 is changed to a mode in which it is easy to win.

The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of holds for the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is lit and the display LED 72b is lit. Further, when the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a jackpot, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the first embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is shifted to the big hit game state in which the round game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variable display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of reserved special symbol variable displays"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

[1-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly has a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the first embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start memory, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start information, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as start information, and a second special for an upper limit of four times. A second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4), in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start information, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, and the like. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the electric chew solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the first start port switch 421, the second start port switch 441, the passing gate switch 491, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 531, the performance display monitor 334, and the like are connected to the main control circuit 100. There is. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that serves as an opportunity to execute a setting change process or a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is for changing the set setting value at the time of the setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that they cannot be easily accessed by a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine management manager.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out game balls, a launcher 15 for firing game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. Control is performed so that the payout device 340 pays out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the launch solenoid (shown) is based on the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies power to the wheel and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to light of the LED 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the first embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON / OFF by operating the main button 662, and each of the select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d, which are turned on and off by operation, are connected. In reality, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided, respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively referred to as select button switches 6641 for convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the first embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, and the like, but the storage is not limited to this and can be read by a computer provided with the control means. As long as it is a medium, another aspect may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the first embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering the image data, and an image signal for the image data. It is provided with a D / A converter or the like that converts as.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative symbol image data indicating a decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the sound generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LED 25 including the decorative LED and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory. The accessory control circuit 207 is a accessory data ROM in which a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern are stored for each accessory. Etc.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the mechanical operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

The command input port 208 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 340 for paying out the game balls and a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to an operation of a game hall administrator, and the like are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the pachinko / pachislot machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the person in charge of managing the pachinko / pachislot machine cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case correspond to each other. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the game machine manager, and the back surface is exposed. , Including those that allow the pachinko / pachislot machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data showing the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state to the launch of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout / launch control circuit 300 aggregates the base values based on the past game history, and stores the aggregated results in a specific work area described later in the work area of the main RAM 103. This specific work area will be described later, but it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the performance of a predetermined operation, or the aggregation may be performed at all times so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 300 includes a total history aggregation means that aggregates all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. It is provided with a history aggregation means for each set value that executes aggregation of the base value for each set value based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all base values is performed by the game machine management manager or the like, the total history totaling means executes the totalization of all the base values described above. All the base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the operation of displaying the base value for each set value is performed, the history totaling means for each set value executes the totalization of the base value for each set value. The base value for each set value aggregated by the history aggregation means for each set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The history aggregation means for each set value can also aggregate only the base value for any set value in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base value for the set setting value but also the base value for other setting values other than the set setting value can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other set values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change process described later.

The main CPU 101 has both a total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and a set value-specific base value aggregated by the set value-specific history aggregation means, for example, in response to an operation by the game machine management manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of these can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all set values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by set value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totaling means and set value-based history totaling means, and in addition to these or in place of the set value-based history totaling means, from the execution of the setting change process described later to the present. A means for totaling the history after changing the setting may be provided, which aggregates the base value after changing the setting based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by making all or part of all the base values and the base value for each set value and / and the base value for each set value after the setting change displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game Information based on the past game history of the machine 1 can be easily confirmed.

In the first embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of game balls to be paid out is increased by entering the special electric accessory (large winning opening) or the ordinary electric accessory. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out (paid out by the character) may be displayed. Further, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and may also be displayed as a ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning opening). Moreover, you may display them by setting.

Further, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may display a setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing described later, a setting checking code indicating that the setting confirmation process described later is in progress, and the like. can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a symbol (setting change symbol) that is not normally displayed on the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[1-2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random values (for example, jackpot determination random value and symbol random value) are obtained from various counters (for example, jackpot determination counter and symbol determination counter). It is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the condition that various data such as random values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern). ) Is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variation display control process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that the "big hit" has been achieved, the big hit game state control process for performing the big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game state control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, the game state in the normal state, which is different from the jackpot game state, is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, the game state in which the "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as "normal game state") and the probability of being determined as the "big hit" are A gaming state that increases from the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state") and a gaming state in which a special symbol start prize is easily obtained as a result of the normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "short-time gaming state"). ) And so on. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (big hit determination random value, symbol random value, etc.) extracted at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a random value for jackpot determination) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and the various data held are called starting information.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and the execution of the variable display of the special symbol currently being executed is suspended. The variable display of the special symbols is started in order. In the following, various data on the reserved special symbols will also be referred to as "reserved balls".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start opening prize and second start opening prize) are provided, and the maximum is provided for each special symbol start prize. It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of up to four special symbols. That is, in the first embodiment, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of eight of the four first special symbols and the four second special symbols.

Although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the holding ball, and further It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit judgment counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the fluctuation display control process for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the first embodiment, as various random number value extraction methods, a soft random number method is used in which a random number value is generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101. However, various random number value extraction methods are not limited to this. For example, when a pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a counter (so-called ring) in the random number generator is provided. A hard random number method for extracting a random number value from a counter) may be adopted as the above-mentioned various random number value extraction method.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[1-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14. FIG. 11 is an example of a table showing the probability of a jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 12 is a selection rate of a hit type (hereinafter referred to as “main symbol”) when the result of the jackpot determination of a special symbol is a jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, the terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 not shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

In explaining the probability of the jackpot shown in FIG. 11, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. 1 With reference to the special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), a jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table (not shown), the jackpot determination (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol jackpot determination”) is performed on the extracted random numbers for jackpot determination. It should be noted that the extraction of the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing". Further, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "missing" as in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol. The value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)" is set in the jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively. ) Relationship between the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data"). Is stipulated.

In the first embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for a range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1" (time saving flag ON), and when it is "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0" (time saving flag OFF). Will be. In the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the value of the time-saving counter managed by the main CPU 101 is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being determined as a normal hit (normal hit probability) in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric accessory 460 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is increased as compared with the non-time-saving game state. However, in the time-saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability as compared with the non-time-saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency with which the object 460 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric accessory 460 may be easily won by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Further, two or three aspects of the above three aspects may be combined.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are OFF, the probability change time reduction game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, and the time reduction in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON are It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 in any of the gaming states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as start information until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the random number for determining the jackpot of the extracted second special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as start information until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, and it is determined whether the second special symbol is a jackpot or a loss.

[1-3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/300 for setting 1, about 1/290 for setting 2, and about 1/290 for setting 3. It is 1/280, setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3. Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the first embodiment, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, so that the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set as the set value. By changing according to, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. In addition, the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high-probability gaming state is 21 for setting 1, 22 for setting 2, 23 for setting 3, 24 for setting 4, 25 for setting 5, and 26 for setting 6. It has become.

Also, in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 for setting 1, 1/290 for setting 2, and 280 minutes for setting 3. 1. Setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 for setting 1, 1/29 for setting 2, and 28 for setting 3. It is 1/27, setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, with respect to the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is made different according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for jackpot determination (0 to 65535) which are fixed values. By setting the number, setting 3, 234, setting 4, 243, setting 5, 252, and setting 6, 262, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot judgment value data in the high probability game state, setting 1 is 21 pieces, setting 2 is 22 pieces, setting 3 is 23 pieces, setting 4 is 24 pieces, setting 5 is 25 pieces, and setting 6 is 26 pieces. It is an individual.

It should be noted that the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the first embodiment, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but it is not always necessary to be 6 stages, and any plurality of stages can be set arbitrarily.

Further, in the first embodiment, the jackpot probability is configured to be different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be common to a plurality of set values. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 and The jackpot probability common to setting 6 (third probability higher than the second probability) may be set.

Further, in the first embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random number which is a fixed value is set. On the other hand, by changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value, the jackpot probability is different for each set value, but the method for differentiating the jackpot probability for each set value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment is not limited to this. By making the number of value data common to all settings and changing the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number according to the set value, the jackpot probability may be made different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 common to all settings, and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is set to the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in setting 2. The range from 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), the range from 0 to 61039 in setting 3 (big hit probability is 1/280), and the range from 0 to 58859 in setting 4 (big hit probability is 1/270). , Setting 5 sets the range from 0 to 56679 (big hit probability is 1/260), setting 6 sets the range from 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot judgment), which has more digits than the numerator (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared with the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range as a fixed value, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is all set. It is not always essential to have them in common. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data is set. The number is 219, the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is set to the range of 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 220, and the jackpot judgment random number is The range (width) is set to the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot determination value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method and the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value with the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. In comparison, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set in detail.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 31) in steps S72 and S82, which will be described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number is set as the set value. It may be checked whether or not it is within the corresponding range, and / and whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (step to be described later). (When it corresponds to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[1-3-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 25. 0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 25.0%), and Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 25.0%) Decide on one of them. Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time saving number of 100 times. In Special Figure 1-2, the number of rounds is 4, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed (the time reduction flag is set to OFF when the next jackpot game state is started). It's a big hit. Special Figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and 100 time reductions. Special figures 1-4 are jackpots in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the first special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 13, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

In the first embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, the probability change flag as in the special figure 1-2 or the special figure 1-4). After the jackpot gaming state is completed, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is started, so-called "probability variation loop machine". In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the next jackpot gaming state starts again. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is played. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high-probability gaming state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the first embodiment, the probability changes as in Special Figure 1-1 and Special Figure 1-3). After the big hit game state is completed, the game is controlled to the low probability game state without being controlled to the high probability game state.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol as the special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special figure 2-based on the extracted symbol random numbers. Determined to be 2 (distribution probability 50.0%). Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability change flag OFF, and a time saving number of 100 times. Special Figure 2-2 shows a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10, the probability change flag is ON, and the time reduction continues until the next jackpot game state is executed. When the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 fluctuates and displays the second special symbol over the fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 13, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes a control to stop the special symbol at the determined lost symbol.

The number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. Further, if the probability change flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF, the jackpot game state. The game state after the end of is controlled to the low probability game state (the game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the jackpot with 4 rounds, the probability variation flag OFF, and the number of time reductions of 100 times (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-1) is referred to as "4R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, and the next jackpot game are A jackpot in which the time reduction continues until it is executed (for example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and the number of time reductions is 100 times (for example, Special Figure 1-). 3. The jackpot in Special Figure 2-1 is called "10R normal jackpot", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is ON, and the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, Special Figure 1-4, The jackpot in Special Figure 2-2) is referred to as a "10R probability variation jackpot".

Further, in the first embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but it is not always limited to this, and it is determined based on the extracted symbol random number. It may be decided whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF according to the main symbol.

[1-3-3. Fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured so that the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the fluctuation time and the effect content) can be different depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the main ROM 102. Further, the execution probability of the reach effect may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. ..

As shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. Determine the fluctuation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined using a common table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined by using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol shows the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and the effect selection. The relationship between the random number range, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern), the fluctuation pattern specification command, the fluctuation time, and the effect content is defined. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probabilistic time-saving game state and the time-saving game state are not distinguished. Further, different random number ranges are set according to the set values for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used to determine whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is lost. The main CPU 101 extracts a reach determination random number from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination is performed. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit determination using the random number value for big hit determination when starting the variable display of the special symbol, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not to execute the reach effect using the reach determination random number. In the first embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in settings 1 and 2. It is specified in ~ 25, it is specified in 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and it is specified in 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time reduction game state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. In 2, it is specified as 0 to 10, in settings 3 and 4, it is specified as 0 to 11, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 12.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is more easily executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the settings are set. Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 3 and 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the reach effect.

In the first embodiment, when deciding whether or not to execute the reach effect, the reach determination random number range is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is the same as the setting 5. Although it is common to setting 6, it is not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is an explanation of the case where the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 5), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state and the result of determining whether or not to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). To determine the variation time of the special symbol using. In the first embodiment, the effect selection random value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined to execute the reach effect is It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and the reach effect is not executed is as follows. Will be decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B), is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time saving game state (probability change flag ON and time saving flag ON) and the normal time saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-saving game state (probability change flag ON and time-saving flag ON) and the normal time-saving game state (probability change flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is lost and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 50 to 99.

Since the main symbol is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, what is the determination of the fluctuation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a jackpot is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a jackpot is It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25,000 msec (normal reach in a short time) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is specified as 0 to 3. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35,000 msec (time saving and medium super reach A), is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 4 to 49. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45,000 msec (super reach B in a short time), is defined as 50 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, as long as the gaming state, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect are the same, the special symbol The fluctuation time is more likely to be determined to be shorter in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2, and is more likely to be determined in shorter fluctuation times in settings 5 and 6 than in settings 3 and 4. .. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the larger the number of fluctuations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lottery). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state when viewed in a unit time will increase, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within a unit time will also increase. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the first embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is the setting 5 and the setting 6. However, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of is different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the content of the effect. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the fluctuation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designation command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[1-3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an example of a stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 12 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) sets a stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the set value. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special diagram 1-2, the sub CPU 201 has the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) as all the decorative symbols. Since the distribution probability of each aspect is 0%, all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in the first embodiment) have the same even-numbered symbols (distribution probability 30.0%), or all of them. It is determined that the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In the first embodiment, the specific symbol is set to "7" symbol, but the specific symbol is not limited to this, and if it can be recognized as a big hit with a high degree of profit from the player's point of view, another symbol (for example, "V" symbol) is designated as a specific symbol. May be.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 14 is determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 14 when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, FIG. A symbol other than the symbol shown in is determined as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 14 correspond to, for example, a symbol in which at least one of all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

As described above, according to FIG. 14, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is the jackpot determination of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Whether or not the game state after the jackpot game state ends is a jackpot controlled to a high-probability gaming state, and whether or not the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is 10R. Can vary depending on.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 12 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, or special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON). Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols are always stopped in the same even-numbered symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the first mode or all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol (other than the specific symbol "7" symbol) regardless of the set value. (Hereinafter referred to as "second aspect").

Further, when the main symbol is the special diagram 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), all the decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbol regardless of the set value, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol. (Hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the stop is performed in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Both Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are 10R probability variation big hits, but since Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, it is a big hit in the normal gaming state. There is a high possibility that he won. Further, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, it is highly possible that the big hit was won in the high-probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state.

In this way, when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the 10R probability variation jackpot, which has the highest degree of profit for the player, is determined, and when all the decorative symbols are stopped in the same odd-numbered symbol, the probability variation jackpot (4R probability variation) is determined. Big hit or 10R probability variation big hit) is confirmed. On the other hand, when stopped in the first aspect, it is determined that the 10R probability variation jackpot is not the most profitable for the player, but the possibility of the 4R probability variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the player may be notified of which jackpot the jackpot is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the jackpot game. It may be notified during the execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot game state ends. Further, although it is not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the high-probability game is the high-probability game even though the game state after the big-hit game state ends is a big hit whose game state is controlled to the high-probability game state. It may be controlled to a so-called "latent probability change state" in which the player is not clearly shown to be controlled by the state.

[1-4. Other examples of basic specifications of pachinko machines]
The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment are as described above, but the specifications are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it goes without saying that the following explanation is an example and is not limited to this.
[1-4-1. Deformation example of fluctuation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a modified example of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (that is, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As described above, there are cases where the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation becomes shorter as the number of reserved special symbols increases. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation example of the special symbol described with reference to FIG. 15 counts the number of times the special symbol is changed (that is, the number of times the special symbol is drawn). It is equipped with a counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means is reset at the start of the jackpot gaming state, for example, and starts counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 15, in another example, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is performed. It is performed according to both the number of fluctuations of the special symbol counted from the time when the jackpot game state ends and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time when the big hit game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, a random number range for reach determination is determined to execute the reach effect. Is specified to 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is to be executed is 0 to 10 in settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4, it is specified in 0 to 5, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is lost, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as compared with the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 5 times (in the settings 1 and 2, the execution probability of the reach effect is as high as 10 as compared with the settings 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000 times. Compared with the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is lost and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the jackpot game is also performed for the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where the number of fluctuations is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 0 to 1000, the random number range for effect selection is determined so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is 20000 msec (normal medium reach). Is specified as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A), is defined as 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is specified, and in settings 5 and 6, it is specified in 60 to 89. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally, Super Reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state becomes 1001 or more, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal medium reach) is set to 1. It is not specified in ~ 4, but is specified in 0 to 99 in settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally Super Reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, but not in settings 5 and 6. .. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40,000 msec (normally medium super reach B), is specified in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. No. Therefore, in a so-called big hit situation where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the set value set is suggested to the player by the reach effect executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is lost and it is decided to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot gaming state ends. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol to be performed is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the execution probability of the reach effect. Further, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect with a shorter fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state becomes 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol per one time, and the unit The number of changes in the special symbol per hour (that is, the number of lottery) becomes even larger. As a result, the expectation that the number of times the jackpot game will be executed in a unit time will be higher, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed within the unit time will be even higher.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the jackpot game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will be significantly different depending on the set value. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called big hit is made, the set value set for the player is set without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving a guessable opportunity, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect, but in the first embodiment, it is expected that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value is. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the decrease in motivation to continue the game even if the reach effect is executed infrequently.

In the first embodiment, the starting point at which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is counted is set to the time when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a high-probability gaming state occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed. The starting point can be any time point, such as when the high-probability gaming state ends or when the time-saving gaming state ends in the so-called ST machine, which is the so-called ST machine.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but not necessarily. It does not have to be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that he / she is addicted.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point becomes a predetermined number or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are remarkably different depending on the set value, but the setting What is significantly different depending on the value is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be the big hit and the time when the game is actually controlled to the big hit game state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as “ending time”) from the end of the big hit game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 at the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display 16 at the ending time. In the opening production, for example, a production showing that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a production to congratulate the fact that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, and a game method in the big hit game state (for example, right-handed) The production to teach is performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, the production showing the number of times the big hit game state is continued (the number of consecutive villas), and the game state after the big hit game state ends are high-probability games. An effect indicating that the state is controlled, an effect of teaching a game method (for example, returning to left-handed) in the game state after the jackpot game state is completed, and an effect of displaying the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Etc. are performed.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of fluctuations (that is, the number of lottery) of the special symbol per unit time, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 where the higher the set value is, the higher the expected ball output value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is), a large number of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. In view of the possibility of this, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, the higher the set value with which the expected ball output value is higher, the longer all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time is, so that the fun of the game with the high setting value is guaranteed. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in a unit time.

Even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the above-mentioned opening time, ending time, and jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 wins a prize for the game ball to the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440). When it is detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 31) of steps S74 and S82, which will be described later, is executed. Then, when it is determined in this setting check process that the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot game state. , The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[1-4-2. Big hit distribution and stop design of decorative design Modification example]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the first and second modified examples of the jackpot distribution (selectivity of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second modified examples. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol at the time of the 1st modification and the 2nd modification will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and FIG. 17 is a diagram when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selectivity of the main symbol of. Further, FIG. 18 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[1-4-2-1. First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 18 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol with a probability according to the set value based on the extracted symbol random number. , Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1-4, Special Figure 1-5, Special Figure 1-6, Special Figure 1-7, and Special Figure 1-8 Decide on one of them. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability). Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 10.0%) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for special figures 2-2 and special figures 2-4 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

In this way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is feasible to enable the stop mode of the decorative symbol to be different depending on the set value even if the jackpot type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[1-4-2-2. Second variant]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modification, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. No. More specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a probability variation attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled and the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker is detected, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability change attacker is reached. When the jackpot gaming state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. In this way, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability gaming state based on the entry of a game ball into a probabilistic attacker is also a so-called “probability-changing loop machine”.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the second modification, the ease of entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball is controlled in the jackpot game state in the mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker. Is controlled by. In the first embodiment, the number of time reductions when the big hit is in the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the probabilistic attacker" is 100 times, and in the "mode in which the game ball is easy to enter the probabilistic attacker". If it is a big hit, the time reduction will continue until the next big hit game is executed.

In the first embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability change attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100). It is controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to%). In addition, the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker" is in the big hit game state as long as the game ball is launched toward the placement portion of the probability change attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probabilistic attacker while being controlled (it is controlled to a high probability game state with a probability of almost 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker" is referred to as the "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker". The jackpot is called a "probability change jackpot".

However, if it is "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker", it is controlled to a high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when "a mode in which a game ball can easily enter a probabilistic attacker", "it is difficult for a game ball to enter a probabilistic attacker". The mode may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state with a relatively higher probability than the "mode".

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter, for example, apart from the large winning opening 540 (for example, see FIG. 5) having the probabilistic attacker inside, the probabilistic attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2). In the case of -4), the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is controlled, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (for example, Special Figure 1-1, Special Figure 1-3, Special Figure 1). In the case of -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3), by controlling the big hit game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the special winning opening 540. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker and a mode in which it is easy to enter.

Further, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a probabilistic attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a probabilistic attacker are provided, a large winning prize is opened in the big hit game state. You may make the mouth have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easier to select a big hit game state in which other big winning openings are opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is easier than other big winning openings. The higher the set value, the easier it is to select the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened, such as the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot 540 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 17, in such a second modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted symbol random number. With a certain probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure Determine one of 1-8. However, in this second modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variation jackpot".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 has a common probability in settings 1 to 4, and sets the main symbol as special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%) and special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5). %), Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 12.5%), Special Figure 1-4 One of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%). decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability). Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 10.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 10.0%) %), Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 15.0%). Further, in setting 6, the main symbols are set to Special Figure 1-1 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-2 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), and Special Figure 1-3 (Distribution Probability 20). .0%), Special Figure 1-4 (Distribution Probability 20.0%), Special Figure 1-5 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), Special Figure 1-6 (Distribution Probability 5.0%), It is determined to be either Special Figure 1-7 (Distribution Probability 20.0%) or Special Figure 1-8 (Distribution Probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and the special figures 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (both are high setting values). For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 (15.0 in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, for Toku-zu 1-6 and Toku-zu 1-8 (both are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-8 (15. in setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% in setting 5 and 5.0% in setting 6). 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for special figures 2-2 and special figures 2-4 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits), which have the same big hit type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but it is a high setting value. (For example, in setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. In setting 5) is higher than the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 has the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-5, and the special figure 1-7 as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1 and Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot for which the probability variation flag is not set to ON) are always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the set value. Is controlled to stop in the first aspect.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. ) To stop. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of the special figure 1-2 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6). (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 4R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in the second mode (a mode in which the player has a higher expectation than the first mode) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 1-6 (10.0% at the setting 5 and 5.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 1-6. The selectivity of 8 (15.0% at setting 5 and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figures 1-6 and the special figures 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (the mode having the highest expectation for the player) increases.

Similarly, in the case of the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 has a second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or a specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), the sub CPU 201 is always controlled to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5.6), the selection rate of the special figure 2-2 (20.0% at the setting 5 and 10.0% at the setting 6) is higher than that of the special figure 2-. The selectivity of 4 (30.0% at setting 5 and 40.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both are 10R probability variation jackpots), the high setting value is compared with the low setting value (for example, settings 1 to 4). Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode increases.

As described above, in the second modified example as well, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, even if the jackpot type is the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It becomes feasible to make the stopping mode of the symbol different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, the composite probability determined for a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variation jackpot) is the same. However, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high expectation for the player with a high probability as compared with the case where the set value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first modification and the second modification described above, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be different depending on the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol is controlled according to the set value. The stop symbol of is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different depending on the set value by the control by the sub CPU 201.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the time saving inrush rate. It will be possible.

[1-5. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 40. However, in the following description (explanation of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[1-5-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person involved in the hall turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on processing (step S10), a setting process related to the set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). S30) and are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when a power failure occurs or the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to an OFF operation of the power switch 35 or the like, Performs the processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

[1-5-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process in step S20. For example, a setting key 328 for starting / ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, and the like are used. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches involved in the setting (step S15), then performs a read process (step S16) for each switch, and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 20), the game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the previous power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, there is a high possibility that the power is cut off before the setting change process is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game is allowed to be executed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the first embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON before the power is cut. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power is cut off. Further, even when a power failure occurs during the abnormal state of steps S722 to S727, which will be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. In the initial state where the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 when the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and when the power failure status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710), the game permission flag. Is turned OFF (step S1750), and then the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of the work area also includes a check of whether or not the set value data is within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the first embodiment).

The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when the backup clear process described later is performed, and data is held without being cleared in principle even if the backup clear process described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. For example, performance display data, set setting value data, and the like are stored in this specific work area. It is the data which shows the set value. In the first embodiment, the set value data of "0" to "5" corresponds to each of the set values "1" to "6" in six stages. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if it is normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740, and if it is not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If there is, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the first embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned ON. Is determined to be. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or an abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and when the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is terminated. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power failure that occurs during the normal game, the power failure that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power failure that occurs during the setting change process are regarded as normal power failures, and steps S722 to S727 will be described later. The power failure that occurs in is regarded as an abnormal power failure.

In step S1770, whether or not the power of the main CPU 101 is turned on (the operation of turning on the power switch 35 is performed) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. Whether or not it is determined, if the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). And step S1790, and when the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, even if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the main CPU 101 turns on the setting key switch signal (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the previous power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is ON, the game permission flag is ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag will not be set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process, which will be described later, needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1810, the game permission process ends. By displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336 in this way, the hall personnel are not in a state where the game can be executed by checking the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). It is possible to grasp that. In the first embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game is permitted only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key switch 328 is ON. It is possible to set the flag to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed. Instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the process returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned ON. Is satisfied (in FIG. 21, until YES is determined in step S1780), the processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[1-5-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 22A is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19), and FIG. 22B is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 22A and FIG. 22B is that the processing when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and other processing (step). The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. The main CPU 101 moves to step S22 when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S24). The setting process ends without executing any of steps S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change process (step S24) and turns on the setting key switch signal (YES in step S22). ) And the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) and changes the setting (step S28). The setting process ends without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power failure is a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process described later, and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. If the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). The game returns to the game (step S30) without executing any of the above, and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, even if the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure or the previous power failure is a normal power failure, if the power failure occurs during the setting change process, it is determined as NO in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 has a setting change process (step S24) and a setting confirmation process (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330. And the backup clear flag ON (step S28) is not executed, and the setting process is terminated. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). (That is, when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and controlled to the setting change state), the set value is confirmed. Only in the case, the setting change process (step S24) is executed to move to the game return process of step S30, and after this game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are performed. ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed, and the game returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return process (step S30), the abnormal time process (see step S38 of FIG. 26 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22A, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 at that time, any of the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28). The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a power failure occurs during the setting change process and / or the previous power failure is abnormal as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22B. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. You may do so. When a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on and the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 are pressed. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24) regardless of this, when the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 22A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the backup clear switch 330 pressing operation. It is finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 22B, if NO is determined in step S21, neither the operation status of the setting key 328 nor the operation status of the press operation of the backup clear switch 330 is determined. The change process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and / and the operation status of the operation of pressing the backup clear switch 330 are determined, and regardless of the determination result, the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S24). May be executed.

[1-5-1-3. Setting change process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 22) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be terminated with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. This backup clearing process will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing from the start to the end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323. The setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set correspond to each other, the number does not necessarily have to be displayed on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F", respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" is used. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but it is determined in advance because the previous data is discarded. The initial value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8") on the performance display monitor. It may be controlled so as to be displayed at 334. When the main CPU 101 displays a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. It may be.

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting changing code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process is in progress by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520 and the set value stored in the register is stored. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), steps S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processes of S2440 to S2470 are repeated).

When the setting switch 332 is pressed (determined to be YES in step S2510), the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S2450. ..

Further, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5". (If the setting switch 332 is pressed while the set value data is "5", it returns to "0"). As a result, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0", or the circulation may be increased and circulated depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. It may be possible to perform both reduction and reduction.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2480. Moving to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is fixed. That is, in the setting change process, the set value is determined based on the execution of the operation of turning off the setting key switch signal (determined as YES in step S2470), and the setting key switch signal is turned off. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is only updated. The set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470 and then the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). The set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 is set to be stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, the operation status and backup of the setting key 328 when the power is turned on after the power is turned on (when the power is restored) when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure. When the setting change process (see FIG. 23) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the press operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 22 (b)). The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned on (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change process (step S24) is executed without turning on the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 uses the setting key in step S2470. It is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470). Move to S2480 (determine the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 detects that the setting key switch signal is turned on, and further detects that the setting key switch signal is turned off, so that it can be determined as YES in step S2480. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal has been turned ON, it may be determined as YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has changed from ON to OFF. In the above, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure is an abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. It is stated that the setting change process is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of recovery from the power failure. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure is restored in the setting change state when the power failure occurs (that is, the state is maintained when the power failure occurs, and then the state is maintained. At the time of recovery from power failure, the process of returning to the held state may be executed regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal at the time of recovery from power failure).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, it is a command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed. The initialization command will be sent to the sub CPU 201.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is completed, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 19) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 19).

If the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 22) is executed, the game can be executed for a certain period of time after the game is started, or the game. Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, and the setting value has been changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process (for example, the setting value has been changed by two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4). The information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or decorative pattern performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or to make the setting value higher by the setting change process. It is possible to make it different when it is changed and when it is changed to a low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. You may.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting change security signal and the period during which the setting changing code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. Further, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, every time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and when the process in step S2480 is executed. As a result, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, etc. may be notified that the setting is being changed, that the set value has been changed, that the setting change has been completed, and the like. ..

[1-5-1-4. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clearing process in step S2420 (see FIG. 23). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, in step S2421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), step S2422 Move to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 should be cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, it may be only partially cleared.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. NS. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game is permitted unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 23) is performed. You may not turn on the flag.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process. The above notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is, for example, a command transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) indicates that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 23), in step S2450 of the setting change process, the main CPU 101 causes the set value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Set notification. Similarly to this, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, it is preferable to set the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[1-5-1-5. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is a process for confirming the set set value. The set value is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the set value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating the set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

In step S2650, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2660. When moving to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends each process of steps S2620 to S2650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed in step S37 described later. Will be done.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and sets confirmation processing. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 22) is completed, the setting process in step S20 (see FIG. 19) is completed, and the game returns to the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19).

[1-5-1-6. Game return processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 19), a process of returning to a state in which the game can be executed is performed on the premise that the game permission flag is ON. The game return process will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the error processing in step S38. This abnormal processing will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 moves to step S32 and performs a process of activating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 moves to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure status identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power failure is a high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 makes a notification setting indicating that the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes set value information about the set value. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure recovery has occurred or a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the backup clear process in step S39. Since this backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 24) in step S2420 shown in FIG. 23, the description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear process in step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process in step S30 (see FIG. 19), and a series of power-on processes are completed. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is a command indicating that the setting change process has been completed (the backup clear process has also been executed), or a command indicating that the backup clear process has been executed without the setting change process. Function.

Further, the output period of the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be exactly the same.

[1-5-1-7. Processing when abnormal]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of abnormality. As described above, the abnormal processing in step S38 (see FIG. 26) is executed when it is determined in the processing in step S31 (see FIG. 26) that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31). It is a process.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the sub CPU 201 receives an abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to transmit an abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when it cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may try to do it.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal plate 323.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the person involved in the hall can grasp that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S385 and executes the power failure occurrence processing. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops in steps S382 to S384 (the processing of steps S382 to S384 is repeated).

[1-5-1-8. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, the process when a power failure occurs is performed.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly held at the time of power recovery. In this way, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure status identification flag in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 identifies the situation at the time of power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. Set the flag to ON and set it to OFF if it occurs during the setting change process.

When the main CPU 101 finishes the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power cut operation and the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process when a power failure occurs is started, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop. It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but when the processing when a power failure occurs is entered, the update is not performed. As a result, the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure, and even if the infinite loop shown in FIG. 28 is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main CPU 101 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by the constant supply of electric power. In this case, when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[1-5-1-9. Flow of power-on process as seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as seen from the operator (for example, a person involved in the hall) will be briefly described.

[1-5-1-10. Flow of setting change process]
First, the setting change process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to perform a power off operation (OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned ON.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled and the setting is changed. The process is started and the settings can be changed.

When the setting change processing is started, the setting changing code indicating that the setting change processing is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change process, the backup clear process, that is, the initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notifying the clear of the work area of the main RAM 103, initializing the work area of the main RAM 103, commands at the time of initializing the RWM). When transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, although the message that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup clear process has been executed in place of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24. It may be displayed in the area.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased and displayed. That is, the information indicating the set value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but when the set value is "6", the information indicates the setting switch 332. When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state ends and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting changing code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. .. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[1-5-1-11. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is executed on the condition that the game permission flag is internally ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to confirm the set value, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on while the power is not turned on, provided that the game permission flag is turned ON internally. The power switch 35 is turned on without being pressed.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all the switches, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. It becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, the setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Appears and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, the process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[1-5-1-12. Flow in abnormal processing]
As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally turned off, an operation for executing the setting change process (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed. And, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the ON operation of the power switch 35, the backup process without the setting change process (details will be described later) is performed, or simply. If only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the error processing is executed. The flow of processing at the time of abnormality will be described below.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operations related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches are enabled (internal). The processing at the time of abnormality is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is that the game permission flag can be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the error processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. As a result, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating that an error has occurred.

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, the operations related to the setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, no response is made regardless of which operation is executed, and the pachinko game is in a state where the game can be executed unless the power switch 35 is turned off and the above-mentioned setting change processing is performed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. Note that the operation of all switches is invalidated in a situation where each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, or each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example,). LED25) includes those in a controllable state.

[1-5-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer 700, and the like. NS.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the values of the saved registers (step S57). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-5-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S65). In the ball passing detector passing detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the fact that the passing detection of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passing detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-5-2-2. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol random number for the first special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S74). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S75. When the number of holdings is 4 (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (step S76). ). As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol are created based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol random number value extracted for the first special symbol. With reference to this, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol of FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15), and selects the fluctuation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the reach determination random value, and the effect selection random value. , Perform the process of determining.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 15, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process. The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S79). The hold number increase command for the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold quantity overflow command for the first start opening winning, and proceeds to step S81. The hold quantity overflow command of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the first start opening prize has been made when the hold number of the first special symbol is the upper limit (for example, 4), and the command is sent to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 31, it is determined that the set value data is normally transmitted in the setting check process in step S72, which will be described later, that the hold number overflow command for the first start opening winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol random number for the second special symbol, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S85. When the number of reserved balls is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied (step S86). ). As a result, the variation display of the second special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Similar to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is also for the second special symbol based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and symbol random number value extracted for the second special symbol. With reference to the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the jackpot selection symbol command related to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, a process of selecting a fluctuation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random value and the effect selection random value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening winning (step S89). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

When the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S72 or the setting check process in step S82 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), the number of reserved second start opening prizes is four (NO in step S84). Even so, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the second starting port winning to the sub control circuit 200. The start port winning detection process has been completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed in the non-time saving game state.

[1-5-2-3. Setting check process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and this setting check process is the same process in step S72 and step S82 (both see FIG. 31). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set set value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 21) may be performed, but in the first embodiment, the set value is set. Emphasis is placed on checking whether or not is normal.

As shown in the figure, first, in step S721, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the first embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. Therefore, here, the set value data is stored. Whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5" is determined. When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is terminated. If the set value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. When the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in the variable display (YES in step S723), the process proceeds to step S724, and when it determines that the special symbol is not in the variable display (NO in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the fluctuation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both refer to FIG. 31) has elapsed with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The variable display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. Then, the process proceeds to step S726.

For example, if a game ball wins a prize at the start ports 420 and 440 while the main CPU 101 is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the step is performed during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol ends). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the variable display is not displayed even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal processing is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is executed, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball. That is, the payout / launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) controls the launch solenoid (not shown) so that power is not supplied. Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not fired and the game cannot be played.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the firing of the game ball in step S726, the main CPU 101 shifts to the abnormality processing in step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. When the main CPU 101 finishes the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 moves to step S726.

In the abnormality processing in step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing in step S38 (see FIG. 26). That is, the processes of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 27 are performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence process of step S385, that is, FIG. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 28 are performed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the set value data stored in is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even during the execution of the game, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue the game, and unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. The game cannot be performed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed in a state where the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variation display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, as described above, the power is temporarily turned off and the power is turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is input and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination) stored in the main RAM 103 related to the above hold are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data held are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, all of them are It will be cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the above hold from being processed based on the setting values that are not normal, and it is possible to improve the security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S724, the main CPU 101 Prohibits the stoppage of the second special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S724. The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. , The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S721), the setting value data is also determined in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Further, in the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed not only when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 21) but also when the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. Not limited to, for example, during the setting confirmation process (see step S24 in FIG. 22), during the setting change process (see step S26 in FIG. 22), when executing the backup clear process (see FIG. 24), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. Setting check processing at a predetermined timing, such as when the special symbol stops fluctuating, when the passage gate switch 491 (see FIG. 9) detects passage, when the normal symbol starts fluctuating, when the normal symbol fluctuates, etc. You may try to do. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an example list. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or a part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously performed, for example, in a state where the settings are not normal.

Further, in the first embodiment, when it is determined in the setting check process that the set value data is not normal, the game permission flag is immediately turned off and the game is advanced regardless of whether or not the jackpot game state is in progress. Although it is made impossible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the game cannot be executed may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (for example, big hit determination process) are performed when the set value data is not normal, the change display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time without performing various determination processes. It is preferable to stop the special symbol by losing it.

Although not shown in FIG. 32, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the normal symbol is also prohibited from stopping if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[1-5-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 receives the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, according to the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S93 and S94. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 74). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[1-5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 34, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S102 to S110 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process in steps S102 to S110. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the start opening winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variation display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 35.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S103). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process, and when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag is set to the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is determined when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S103 elapses. Determine if the result is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S105) described later, and sets the jackpot start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, the special symbol game end processing described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S107 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S106) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S109). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value indicating the jackpot end interval process (“07”), and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S109. When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of Special Figure 1-2, Special Figure 1-8, and Special Figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 controls to shift the gaming state to the high-probability gaming state. , When the above-mentioned main symbol is any one of the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3, and the special figure 2-1 the control to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probability change flag OFF) is performed. conduct.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S102) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "miss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", "02", and "08". Set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and special symbol game end process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S102), special symbol variation time management process (step S103), special symbol display time management process (step S104), and jackpot start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S106), the processing for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening (step S107), and the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S106), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), big hit end interval processing (step S109), and special symbol game end processing (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 40 described later) in step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 33 also branches the processing flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. ing. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[1-5-3-2. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of second starting information) of the second starting opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of reserved number of second start opening prizes is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of first start information) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of first start information corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved fluctuation display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. ..

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 31). .. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of second start information corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S117, executes the processes of step S118 and step S119, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[1-5-3-3. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), and the upper limit of the number of rounds corresponding to the special symbol (type of the symbol designation command) (upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving counter subtraction process. The time saving counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[1-5-3-4. Time saving counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time saving counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set time saving counter becomes 0. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving counter subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, the number of times the time reduction counter is set in the first embodiment is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving counter subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag, that is, setting it to "0". When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction counter subtraction process.

[1-5-3-5. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (YES in step S161), the process proceeds to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S162), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S162), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the jackpot flag (S166), and proceeds to step S167.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved, that is, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned ON in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended. If it is a probabilistic jackpot (YES in step S167), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S168. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S167), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169.

In step S168, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag (hereinafter, referred to simply as "setting the probability change flag" in this specification).

Next, in step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (hereinafter, referred to simply as "setting the time saving flag" in this specification).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a predetermined number of time reductions in the time reduction counter (step S170). For example, in the first embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 12, FIG. 16 or FIG. 17), the jackpot with 100 time reductions (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2) When it is (-1, etc.), the time reduction counter is set 100 times, and the time reduction continues until the next big hit game state is executed. 2 etc.), set 10000 times to the time reduction counter. However, the time reduction counter continues until the next big hit game state is executed. The time reduction counter set when the big hit is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall, it is a reality. Any number of times that cannot occur is sufficient. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening to the closing of the hall in the time reduction counter, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. It will be. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time reduction counter), and when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed, flag processing is performed (when the jackpot continues until the next jackpot game state is executed). As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state may be continued).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S171). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[1-5-3-6. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. When the power is not turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). The table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time reduction flag is ON (both jackpot and loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 13 (or FIG. 15).

[1-5-4. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 40 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 40, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any of the processes of steps S192 to S196 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved symbols in the variable display, and the number of pending symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as normal hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be added to the normal symbol control state flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, in the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, it is normal. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is "normal hit". Then, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "ordinary hit", the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. ("03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is not "normal hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the normal hit determination is determined to be "normal hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending fluctuation display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. Update the memory to. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[1-6. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. The sub-control circuit main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). When the watchdog timer is started, a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power interruption process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process for determining the effect mode displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set setting value. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the overflow points of the first start winning opening, and when the hold number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the overflow points of the first starting winning opening. do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 decides to execute the setting suggestion effect in the above-mentioned effect mode determination process. In a non-time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is OFF, such as in a normal game state, it is not easy to win a game ball into the first start winning port 420. Therefore, when the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's disappointment cannot be measured. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without directly causing a loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It will be possible. In addition, some players suspend the launch of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is the upper limit of the hold. In this respect, it is possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the above setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the overflow point of the first start winning opening reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggestion effect is not necessarily limited to this, and the first start opening winning opening is not limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold quantity overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to guess only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting only from the information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to estimate the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

Further, as described above, the hold number overflow command for the first start port winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 on the premise that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process in step S72. be. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. , Sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the overflow point of the first starting winning opening reaches a predetermined point when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (for example, a predetermined point). When the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points), the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 31). If it is determined that the game is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, making it impossible to proceed with the game. ..

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 31), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting is the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make a suggestion effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 randomly determines a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by, for example, a lottery. .. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during the execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, among the players, there is a player who interrupts the launch of the game ball when the reach effect having a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. Further, in the reach production, it may be immediately found that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, the player may not start the variable display next time until the reach effect is completed, which may reduce the interest. In this respect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. Moreover, if the game machine management manager can set the set value, the player may be skeptical that the set value of the pachinko machine in which he / she plays the game is low. According to the example of, such a fear can be reduced, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

When the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53 (see, for example, FIG. 5), for example, by lottery, which of the specific winning openings is specified. It is preferable to keep it confidential without disclosing it. As a result, the player is interested in which winning opening should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is randomly selected from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each general winning opening 53 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by, for example, a lottery. However, it is not always limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may determine it.

If the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (both refer to FIG. 31) is performed if the specific winning opening is the starting opening. Be told. Then, the setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined to be normal in the above setting check process (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the above setting check process (NO in step S721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect, but also prohibits the stop of the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner by the process of step S734. do. Further, even if the sub CPU 201 is in the process of changing the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is continued. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes a control process regarding the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the accessory group based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[1-6-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data is correct or missing.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process separately made into a subroutine. In the first embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as the effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. It has become.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 31) during the execution of the game, and in this setting check process, the set value data is "0" to "0" to ". If it is not within the range of "5" (NO in step S721 in FIG. 32), the process of steps S722 to S726 is executed, and then the error processing of step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illicitly replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process in step S72 or step S82 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the set value data is "0" even though the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82, or the set value may have been changed illegally. ”To“ 5 ”(for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S721), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variation display of the special symbol at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball is won in the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, and the variation display of the special symbol is suspended. A command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. Then, the sub CPU 201 that has received this command determines the suitability of the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "this time set value") indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous set value") indicated by the command received last time and the set value this time match.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the current set value match, and if the previous set value and the current set value do not match, the set value is abnormal. Is determined.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value abnormality processing. In this abnormal execution process, for example, an image notifying that the set value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and in place of or in addition to this, the setting value is abnormal. This is a process to output the voice to be notified.

The suitability judgment of the above-mentioned set value information is not limited to the judgment of whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match. For example, all of the set value information received three times or more match. It may be determined whether or not there is, or the setting value information of a part of the setting value information received multiple times (for example, the setting value indicated by the command received two times before and the setting value this time) matches. It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 22) has been executed, the set value is stored in the work RAM 203 this time. However, it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the current set value match.

Further, it is preferable to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (adequacy determination of the set value information) not only during the execution of the game but also when the power is turned on after the power is cut off as long as the setting change process is not executed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[1-6-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the directory table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[1-6-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the directory buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[1-6-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the direct table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the directory table corresponding to the message set in the directory buffer as the slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the directory table registration process.

[1-6-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direction buffer corresponding to the direction table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary directory table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[1-7. Expandability of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, etc.) are set according to the set values. The time saving rush rate) was changed, but it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of these may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric accessory 460 is used. It goes from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is changed from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the normal electric accessory 460 is changed from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the launch timing of the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the launch timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. Since this backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process is set. You may make them different. For example, after the jackpot game state ends, the game is set to a high-probability game state until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed in a variable number of times), and the game state is low after the execution of the predetermined number of games is completed. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a stochastic gaming state (a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called "ST machine"), when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to a high-probability gaming state (before the execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), the setting change process is performed. When the backup clear process is performed without the above, the probability change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the probability change flag is set to ON (the rest of the high probability gaming state). You may try to keep a memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued, and when the setting value is different from the previous time. May set the probability change flag to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is opened when the count of the game balls winning the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When either of the conditions when the state time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the big winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for changing the large winning opening 540 from the open state to the closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can be won by the large winning opening 540 during one round). (Prepare conditions), and by changing the conditions according to the set value, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select the condition with the higher expected value. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the higher the setting value is, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540 is likely to be. Be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the large winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the large winning opening 540 is likely to increase. It is also possible to make it.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in the normal hit mode, the normal electric accessory 460 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period, but it is normal. By making the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 460 is in the open state different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the normal electric accessory 460 may be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot in which the probability change flag is turned on as in Special Figure 1-2 and Special Figure 1-4, the next jackpot game is performed after the jackpot game state is completed. The high-probability gaming state continues until it is executed, but it is not always limited to this, and when a gaming ball is won at a specific timing (for example, the first starting port 420 / second starting port 440, a variable display of a special symbol is displayed. A transition lottery for whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed at the time of holding (when the variable display of the special symbol is started). In this case, the transition probability from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state differs according to the set value, so that the higher the setting value, the higher the continuation probability of the high-probability gaming state (from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state). (Lower the probability of transition to). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when a game ball is won in the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440. When it is determined that the check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability change flag is also OFF). Is set to).

As described above, in the first embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability variation inrush rate, time reduction inrush rate) are set according to the set value. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be changed has been described, the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a partial configuration may be changed. An example of another extension whose configuration has been partially changed will be described below. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the first embodiment, but in the following, the reference numerals are given to each member such as the main CPU except for the step number. Not attached.

[1-7-1. Expansion example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state ends, and then the high-probability game is started until the next jackpot gaming state is started. A so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the jackpot gaming state ends. The later gaming state is controlled to a low-probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") can be changed according to the set value (such a gaming machine is a "limiter"). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 47. Note that FIG. 47 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 has a loop count checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and a limiter count for drawing a limiter count when the loop count is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means that increments the number of loops when the number of loops is within the specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops is the specified value (5, which is the upper limit of the limiter in this example). If this is the case, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and the loop number reset means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a specified value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, at the start of the jackpot game state, during the jackpot game state, or at the end of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 47, in setting 1, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 25% probability, twice with a 25% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 20% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 5%. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 20%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a 15% probability, twice with a 20% probability, three times with a 25% probability, and four times with a 25% probability. It is decided to be 5 times with a 15% probability. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined four times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined, for example, once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 10%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a 25% probability. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the expectation that the number of limiters will be determined.

In this way, by making the expectation for the number of limiters different according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the more the jackpot game state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, one chance (big hit). It is possible to make the amount of prize balls given to the player different according to the set value (an opportunity until the player is controlled to the low-probability gaming state when he wins once). Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters differs depending on the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value depending on the number of limiters. It has become.

In the above expansion example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be guessed by the player, the setting value is set. The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

The number of limiters described above may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the number of limiters described above is set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the number of first limiters for the first special symbol Is determined, and when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is controlled during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is not incremented, and the number of second limiters for the second special symbol is not incremented. To determine. In this case, the loop may be terminated (controlled to a low-probability gaming state) when either the first limiter count or the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter count may be terminated. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of times of the above limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When is a big hit, the number of limiters is determined, and during the loop, when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the number of times. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop ends.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 1 is a so-called probabilistic loop machine, but it does not necessarily have to be a probabilistic loop machine. For example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine". You can also do it. The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number of times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine that continues until the variation display of the special symbol (referred to as) is performed, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times, the high-probability gaming state is terminated and the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the low-probability gaming state. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. That is, the higher the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (an opportunity to be controlled to the low-probability gaming state when one jackpot is won). ), The amount of prize balls given to the player can be changed according to the set value.

In the so-called "ST machine", the "ST number" can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be changed according to the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by the lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and setting 6 By setting the number to 75, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of STs is different depending on the set value, it is preferable that the number of time reductions is common to all the set values. For example, when the expected value of the number of STs or the number of STs is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. , It is conceivable to set the number of time reductions to, for example, 60 times, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect of grasping that the game is in a high-probability gaming state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games) on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games. Regardless of whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state, it is preferable to perform an effect in which it is difficult to grasp the high-probability gaming state, for example, on a liquid crystal display device. As a result, it is possible to make the ST number of times and the expected value of the ST number of times different according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, a setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting port and the second starting port. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even during the loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The loop count is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) without the loop count reaching the limiter count (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[1-7-2. Expansion example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2 has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 2, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. Based on the small hit game execution means for executing the small hit game and the game ball winning a prize in the specific area which became the open mode by executing the small hit game, the payout / launch control circuit is used. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls.

Further, in the extended example 2, the number of time reductions is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific port is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in a time-saving game state of 5 times, a normal hit occurs and the game ball wins a prize at the starting port. As a result, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece operates and a specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific mouth, the main CPU executes the jackpot game. Further, when the normal hit is not obtained in the time-saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls the non-time-saving game state. In the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed firing toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area. The game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the small hit probability in the second special symbol game is made different according to the set value, so that the second special symbol game is mainly performed, for example, a time-saving game state. In the above, it is possible to make the opening frequency of a specific area and thus the payout different according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and setting 6. To make it a quarter. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of winning the game ball in the specific area, and by extension, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time-saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability change flag to ON.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the above small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[1-7-3. Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of Expansion Example 2-2 includes a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and wins the game ball to the second starting port. Based on this, the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

Further, the main CPU is in the first gaming state (for example, the probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. A normal game state in which both the time saving flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) and a second game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the probability change flag is ON). A game state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of game states including (an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) is provided. In this pachinko gaming machine, if a jackpot is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the second gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

In addition, a normal symbol gate is provided in the right area of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal lottery") is performed. When the result of this ordinary lottery is a specific result (for example, ordinary hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), which facilitates winning of the game ball to the second starting port. Will be done. Therefore, when the game is played by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second starting port is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played. The frequency of winning game balls is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of this jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is used for a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a number is provided.

Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game execution means for executing a jackpot game that is open over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, the main CPU makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, and when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit. It also has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. , Setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 minutes in setting 4. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU has the first big hit game execution means for executing the big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened for a plurality of rounds, and the result of the second special lottery. It has a second big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when the big hit is made. Even if the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big prize opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit are common big prize openings It may be good, or it may be a different big prize opening.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, and 1/7 for setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. , Setting 4 is 1/6, and setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery differs depending on the set set value, but any set value is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When a game ball wins a prize in this large winning opening, the payout / launch control circuit operates a payout device to control a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination in which the small hit probability is 0 when the result of the large hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit that involves the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit that involves the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port. The second special symbol variation display control means for displaying the variation of the second special symbol is provided. The first special symbol variation display control means changes and displays the first special symbol over a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, if the game ball wins the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. However, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If a game ball wins in the first starting port while the second special symbol is variablely displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is in the variable display. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is remarkably different between the case where the probability variation flag is ON and the case where the probability variation flag is OFF. For example, the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, when the game ball wins the second starting port in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time for the result of the second special lottery to be displayed. It becomes.

In this way, in the first game state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second starting port, the second special symbol is displayed. It takes time for the variable display of. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variablely displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a manner indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit). Even if the big winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing when the second special symbol is confirmed as a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform so-called aiming, such as having a game ball win a prize at the large winning opening aiming at the timing when the second special symbol is determined to be a small hit. Further, in the first game state, when the game ball is launched toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, a warning sound is output from the speaker, for example, under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, the game is performed by firing the game ball toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated through the normal lottery by passing the game ball through the normal figure gate, but also the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, a small hit is won with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value. Will be done.

The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state (for example, 1000 sec) is, for example, 50 times or more the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state (for example, 10 sec). Is preferable, but it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). To be equipped. However, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins the second starting port, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not display the variation of the decorative symbol in a conspicuous manner in synchronization with the second special symbol. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, a variable display of a decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the above example of the "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol), and a right symbol (third symbol) at substantially the center of the display area. Can be displayed in a variable manner to display the result of the special lottery. Further, in a small area of, for example, one of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ○ or △) that can be displayed in a variable manner (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Shape) can be displayed. Since the ratio of the first to third symbols occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, the player's gaze is closer to the first to third symbols than the fourth symbol. It will be suitable. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port, the sub CPU does not change the first to third symbols and displays only the fourth symbol in a variable manner, while the sub CPU displays the fourth symbol in a variable manner. 1 When a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the 1st to 3rd symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the 4th symbol is also displayed in a variable manner. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins at the second start port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball is at the first start port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol that is synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner when the prize is won.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the above-mentioned expansion example 2-2, in the first gaming state, even if the gaming ball wins the second starting port, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball wins the second starting port, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1 / 30th to 1 / 25th depending on the setting), the big winning opening is frequently opened by the small hit game, and the time saving flag is not set (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances that the game ball as a prize will be paid out (without increasing the execution frequency of). Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit differs depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the ball is ejected according to the set set value. Can be made different.

Further, if the game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU is displaying the variation of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case as well. .. Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball wins the first start port during the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, in the second game state. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU is set to the above small hit. The game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time processing is executed without executing the small hit game based on the hit. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating that the second game state is included and the information indicating that the second special symbol is a small hit are included. Unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[1-7-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area provided with a specific opening. This specific area is partitioned from the flow-down area of the game ball by, for example, an accessory, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and makes a small hit winning determination when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. Then, when the result of the small hit winning determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in the extended example 3, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in, for example, a probabilistic time saving game state such as a time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. When the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit winning determination.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece and operates the inside of the specific area. It is provided with a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game that allows a game ball to enter the game. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area due to the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way and the game ball that has entered the inside of the specific area is detected to enter (accept) the specific port, the main The CPU controls the jackpot game state. That is, when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port is a jackpot, the main CPU performs a first jackpot game in which a round game for opening the jackpot is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state and the game ball entering the specific mouth when the small hit game is executed, the round game for operating the predetermined movable piece is performed over a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball at the starting port (for example, the execution frequency of a small hit game and the opening pattern of an ordinary electric accessory) is set as a set value. It is different according to. In addition, also in this extended example 3, when the result of the ordinary lottery performed based on the fact that the main CPU detects the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits the right is a normal hit. In addition, the normal electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the starting port. As a method of making the execution frequency of the small hit game different according to the set value, for example, the probability of the normal hit in the normal lottery is made different according to the set value, or the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is made different according to the set value. It can be realized by doing something like that.

As a method of making the ease of winning a game ball to the starting port different according to a set value, a method of making the probability of a normal hit in a normal lottery different according to a set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of normal hit is 1/60 for setting 1, 1/50 for setting 2, 1/40 for setting 3, 1/30 for setting 4, 1/20 for setting 5, and setting 6. Is 1/10. In this case, the higher the setting value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the higher the opening mode of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and by extension, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball ejection speed according to the set value.

Also in this extended example 3, if a game ball wins a prize at the first start port or the second start port while the main CPU 101 is performing the variable display of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Will be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit. Executes abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off and the error processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol displayed in the variable display is a small hit.

[1-7-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is not immediately controlled to the jackpot game state by itself, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. The condition device is operated based on the above, and the accessory continuous operation device is operated based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device has been operated. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating right gate, and FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes through the accessory continuously operating left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 4 includes a bonus continuous operation left gate 1100 and a bonus continuous operation right gate 1110 in the game area. Further, the distribution device 1120 capable of distributing the game ball flowing down the game area to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 is the accessory continuous operation gate 1100. It is located above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (neither shown) capable of detecting the passage of a game ball, respectively. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled from the passage detection of the game ball, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. Further, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball moves one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection that it has passed.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls, for example, the 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU is in a 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which a two-round round game is executed, and 16 rounds. The 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the jackpot game state determined in the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that the big hit is when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the game state is the same.

Further, the game ball that has passed through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball that has reached the upper part of the distribution device 1120 to either the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the right gate 1110 (see FIG. 48), and in the second posture in which the distribution device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball is useful. Object continuous operation It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 (see FIG. 49).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing the game ball differs between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in setting 1, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated with the first posture of 0.5 seconds and the second posture of 1.5 seconds, and in setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1.3. The operation of repeating seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value.

In the extended example 4, the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the accessory continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount to be paid out in the jackpot game state is the same as when it is played. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is paid out in the jackpot game state when the player detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation left gate 1100 and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball through the character continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). Is determined by a lottery performed with the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 1110, which is the continuous operation of the accessory, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%). It is also possible to decide which of the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the more the game balls are controlled to the big hit game state with a high expected value to be paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility of

Further, in the extended example 4, when the game ball passes through any one of the two gates (the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device is operated, the accessory continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball can be used in either of the above two gates. A game ball may win a prize at the starting port before passing. In this case, under the condition that the condition device is activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port (for example, FIG. (See step S72 in step 31) may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 32). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

Further, in the extended example 4, two gates (continuous operation of the accessory) in which the continuous operation device of the accessory is activated when the passage of the game ball is detected on the premise that the condition device is operating below the distribution device 1120. The left gate 1100 and the right gate 1110) are provided, but the one provided below the distribution device 1120 is not necessarily limited to the continuous operation gate of the accessory, for example, the starting port and the general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120 uses the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120 by a regular operation to have a start port that triggers a jackpot determination of a special symbol and a general prize that does not trigger a jackpot determination. Distribute to one of the mouths. Then, the operation of the sorting device 1120 is repeated, for example, in the setting 1 for 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture, and in the setting 2, the first posture is 0.7 seconds and the second posture is 1. The operation of repeating 3 seconds, the operation of repeating the first posture of 0.9 seconds and the second posture of 1.1 seconds in setting 3, and the operation of repeating the first posture of 1.1 seconds and the second posture of 0.9 seconds in setting 4. In setting 5, the first posture is 1.3 seconds and the second posture is 0.7 seconds, and in setting 6, the first posture is 1.5 seconds and the second posture is 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning rate at the starting port different according to the set value, the player can launch the game ball at any set value. It is possible to have the fun of being able to aim for a prize at the starting port.

[1-7-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the set value, but makes it possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value. .. In this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five stages, and may be a plurality of stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of, for example, a probability special symbol of 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, the jackpot probability is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is relatively small, so-called Amadeji. It becomes possible to execute a game in a game-like manner.

Further, when the set value is set to setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to the high-probability gaming state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability gaming state ends and becomes the low-probability gaming state. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probabilistic loop machine.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the probability variation flag ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the jackpot game The gaming state after the state ends is controlled to a high-probability gaming state until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the number of loops reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the jackpot gaming state. Control the gaming state to a low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called limiter machine. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a so-called ST machine may be used in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends is terminated after a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the set value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a ball is ejected). It is controlled to a jackpot game state (about 1500 pieces). That is, when the set value is set to setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the probability variation flag ON when the jackpot gaming state ends, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , Control to high probability gaming state. Further, in the high probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when determining a big hit of a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, the probability change flag is set to OFF. , Execute control to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it is possible to execute the game in a game-like manner in which the lottery for shifting to the low-probability gaming state is performed in the high-probability gaming state.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability, and the pachinko machine has a wide variety of game characteristics. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called Amadeji game, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine, and in setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a probabilistic loop machine, and in setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game-like property called a so-called limiter machine, and in setting 5, it is low in a high-probability game state. It is possible to execute a game in which a lottery for transition to a stochastic game state is performed, but it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game characteristics according to a set value. However, it is preferable that the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine can be switched and executed according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine and the so-called probabilistic loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, but the high-probability gaming state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between two games that are similar at first glance but are substantially different, the managers of the game machines can use the pachinko game machines in a wider range of ways. At the same time, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest.

[1-8. Hall Menu Task]
First, the hall menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. The hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hall menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in the first embodiment.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, that it has received the setting operation command (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu display process of step S302. This hall menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying the hall menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. The hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 even when the process of step S310 described later is executed, but the hall menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hall displayed in step S310. There are some differences from the menu screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example when the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed. 52 and 53 are diagrams showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, when the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the hall menu screen has a hall menu item display area 1610 in the left side area of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left-right direction of the screen, and a preview arranged in the center of the screen. It has a display area 1630 and.

Each item of the hall menu is displayed in the hall menu item display area 1610. For convenience, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hall menu items in FIGS. 51 to 53, but these items are shown. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is a process during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, it is not possible to end the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items in the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, an image corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, an image corresponding to the main button 662 and the up / down / left / right select buttons 664a to 664d is displayed. In the hall menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the disabled operation buttons in the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be able to be distinguished. For example, in FIGS. 51 to 53, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b are enabled), and the disabled operation buttons are displayed. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (up / down select buttons 664a, 664b), the operator can select one of a plurality of hall menu items. In FIGS. 51 and 52, the hall menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hall menu item. For example, FIG. 51 shows that the “time setting” surrounded by the solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 53, it is shown that the “setting change / confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, the highlight display is not always limited as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. The screen in which the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 51 and 52) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for a selected item among a plurality of hall menu items is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 51 and 52), and when the "setting change / confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is made. The change / confirmation history screen is previewed (see FIG. 53). However, it is preferable not to display the set value on the preview screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. It should be noted that the operation cannot be performed in the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, the time setting operation cannot be performed on the preview displayed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and decided. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is set in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 together with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. "Inside" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being confirmed" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator is made to grasp whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 50, the sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu process in step S303. Details of this hall menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hall menu process (step S303), the sub CPU 201 executes a command (initialization command) or setting confirmation indicating whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, that is, the setting change process is completed. It is determined whether or not a command indicating that the process has been completed (power interruption recovery command) has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command is received (NO in step S304), the sub CPU 201 continues to execute the hall menu process in step S303.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits an initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timings as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, when the main CPU 101 transmits the power failure recovery command, it is not necessary to transmit the set value information to the sub CPU 201 because the set value has not been changed, but the set value information is also transmitted to the sub CPU 201. It may be.

When the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed in step S304, that is, the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command or the power failure recovery command from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is increased. It is determined whether or not it is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data to the free area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is intended to prevent the occasional situation where recording is not possible. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to 500, for example, in the first embodiment.

If the number of histories of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is a predetermined number N or more (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and the history information overwriting process (step S306) is executed. The history information overwriting process in step S306 overwrites the history stored in the work RAM 203 in order from the earliest stored history (oldest history information).

In the history information overwriting process in step S306, by overwriting the history information already stored in the work RAM 203 with new history information, the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is eventually erased. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if there is a risk of exceeding a predetermined upper limit when new history information is stored in the work RAM 203 when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, at least a part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 is stored. The history information may be stored after deleting. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 when there is a risk that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the work RAM 203. The part may be erased.

If the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203 is less than a predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S307 and records the history information in the free area of the work RAM 203 (step). S307) is executed.

In this specification, the history information overwriting process in step S306 and the history information recording process in step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording process.

The history information is the time information measured by the RTC209 and the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or setting confirmation) when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101. Information that the process has been executed) and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information that the setting change process is executed, and the setting value information after the setting change sent from the main CPU 101 are used. The information associated with is the history information. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 correspond to each other. The attached information is history information. When the power recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process. It is preferable to include the current set value information in the history information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change / confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu process (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the free area of the work RAM 203.

In the normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) is immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the sub CPU 201 is started. When the sub CPU 201 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start, it determines that the sub CPU 201 is abnormal, and puts the game stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side. Each aspect of the display output, the sound output, and the LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the work RAM 203, stores not only the date and time information but also the information up to the hour and minute or the information up to the hour, minute and second.

The sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S306 or step S307, and then moves to step S308.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power failure recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, it suffices if the sub CPU 201 can determine that the setting has been changed. Therefore, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, the changed setting. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed by receiving the value information.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been performed (YES in step S308), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

The sub CPU 201 executes the hall menu redisplay process in step S310. At this time, the hall menu screen that is redisplayed is different from the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) that is displayed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. It is a screen displayed in a state where it can be executed (or during the game return process in step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 54, an item for ending the hall menu is displayed as one of the items in the hall menu. Will be done. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hall menu redisplay process in step S310 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the operator's intention, but the setting change process. The hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S310) that is redisplayed after the completion of is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended at the will of the operator. The hall menu screen displayed in step S302 (see, for example, FIG. 52) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S310 (see FIG. 54) can be operated by selecting and determining any one of the items. (For example, the functional aspect such as being able to browse the setting change / confirmation history screen) and the like are common.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change has been made in step S308 (YES in step S308), in the hall menu redisplay process of step S310, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is combined with the hall menu screen. , For example, a character such as "Setting has been changed" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) is displayed, "Change the setting" is displayed in the minimum area at the lower right so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen. "Is done" is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" to be output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). This makes it possible for the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. It becomes. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the setting confirmation has been performed (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 is set to step S309. -The game screen return process of step S315 is executed without executing the process of step S314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hall menu redisplay process (step S310) is not executed. In addition, characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed are not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to fully turn on the LED 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. When the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game cannot be executed, whereas when the process of step S310 is executed, the game can be executed. However, as described above, the mode of displaying characters on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed at the end of setting confirmation) when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S310 is executed. ), The mode of the sound output from the speaker 24, and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are significantly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the hall menu item) It is easy to grasp from the appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it is possible to execute a game or a state where it is not possible, without hindering the operation of selecting (or the operation of updating the page, etc.). It is possible to do.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S310, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S311 and executes the hall menu process. The hall menu process in step S311 is basically the same process as step S303, but the process when YES in step S3072 of FIG. 60, which will be described later, is different, and this will be described later.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "End of Hall Menu" is selected on the redisplayed Hall Menu screen in step S312. When it is determined that "End of Hall Menu" is selected (YES in step S312), the sub CPU 201 performs the game screen return display process (step S315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 does not operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period of time in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 for the effect image to be displayed when playing the game. The initial image that is displayed when is displayed is displayed. Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return process in step S315, and then proceeds to step S316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S312 that "end of hall menu" is not selected (NO in step S312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 50, when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is completed (YES in step S304) and the hall menu redisplay processing (step S310) is executed, the hall menu processing (step S311) When any of the hall menu items is selected in the above, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation, and in the process of step S313, is the time counting time elapsed for a predetermined time? It is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not execute any operation for a predetermined time or more, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S313), the sub CPU 201 ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen, and performs the game screen return display process in step S315. Run.

Further, if a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step S314). .. The command to generate the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol fluctuation start command, a symbol fluctuation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, and a jackpot game A command indicating the number of rounds in the above, a round interval command in a big hit game, an end command of a big hit game, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S314 that it has received any of the commands for generating these effect control objects, it ends the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen and returns the game screen to the game screen in step S315. Execute the process. As a result, the game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. For example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed even though the game by the main CPU 101 is progressing. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S314), the process returns to step S311.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S315), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S316 and executes the hall menu display prohibition process. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power OFF operation is performed to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hall menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during the execution of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself / herself does not select the "Hall menu end" item on the hall menu screen (NO in step S312). Under certain conditions such as the operation time not elapsed for a predetermined time (NO in step S313) and the command to generate the effect control object not being received (NO in step S314), the processes of steps S311 to S314 are repeatedly executed. And the hall menu screen will be displayed continuously. Therefore, if the operator performs any operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen), the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed. It will be displayed continuously without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to allow the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "End Hall Menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the Hall Menu screen or the screen of the selected Hall Menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. It is not possible to do so, and it is possible to ensure security.

In the first embodiment, in step S314, when it is determined that the command to generate the effect control object has been received, the game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) are performed. , Not necessarily limited to this, for example, based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, such as the reception of a command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated. The screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including a backup clear process that does not involve a setting change process, will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is an example of a screen in which the error content is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without setting change processing has been executed, and (b) the start port. A screen indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred and a backup clearing process has been executed without setting change processing, (c) a backup clearing process has been executed without setting change processing, and a start port abnormal winning error It is a figure which shows the screen after the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) which shows that the backup clear process was executed with both occurrences.

As shown in FIG. 55, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents generated in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the voice control circuit 205 (in the order of higher priority error). Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the speaker 24 (see FIG. 9), and light emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, if no other error has occurred, the sub CPU 201 is in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 55 (a). It is controlled so that the characters such as "RAM is cleared" are displayed, and the sound such as "RAM is cleared" is output from the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9) is further controlled. A control is performed to fully turn on the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the reference). The characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 54) in which the characters such as "settings have been changed" are displayed.

That is, in the first embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 23), and in the hall menu redisplay process of step S310 executed after the setting change process is completed, as described above. Although characters such as "Settings have been changed" are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, and "Settings have been changed. RAM is initialized." The sound such as "was done" is only output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 54) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In addition to controlling the display of characters such as "RAM cleared", control is performed so that a voice such as "RAM cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 55 (a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear process that involves the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is the backup clear process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the execution of the backup clear process is conservatively notified in a manner that does not interfere with the operation of the redisplayed hall menu screen. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the backup clearing process from being executed illegally.

If, for example, a start port abnormal winning error has also occurred as another error after the backup clear process has been executed, it means that, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), a starting port abnormal winning error has occurred. Both that the backup clearing process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear process has a higher priority than the start port abnormal winning error, the characters indicating that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed at the top regardless of the order in which they occurred. .. In addition, a voice notifying that the backup clear process having a high priority has been executed is output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is emitted in a mode indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed while both the backup clear process has been executed and the start port abnormal winning error has occurred, the backup clear process has occurred. Is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start port abnormality winning error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. NS. Further, the voice output from the speaker 24 changes from a voice notifying that the backup clear process has been executed to a voice notifying that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred, and the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is also backed up and cleared. The mode changes from the mode indicating that the process has been executed to the mode indicating that an abnormal start opening winning error has occurred. In this way, the content of the error that has occurred can be easily grasped.

In the above, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, it is determined that the setting operation command has been received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is advisable to execute it even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed. In the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process, when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328 when the power is not turned on. It is executed (see FIG. 22). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process. Can be determined, and the hall menu display process (step S302) and the hall menu process (step S303) can be executed.

[1-9. Other examples of hall menu tasks]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 20). (See step S1730 in FIG. 21), for example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of “0” to “5” in the first embodiment), the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. It is determined (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 will not be executed. Further, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, similarly to the above-mentioned setting determination process executed during the execution of the game, the set value may not be executed in step S1720 or the set value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of "0" to "5" (for example, when it is determined to be YES in step S1730), the setting determination process (step S317 and step S317) for determining the suitability of the set value information by the sub CPU 201 The process of step S318) may be executed. The hall menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 56 is another example of the hall menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart in the case where the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process for determining the suitability of the set value information. Other examples of hall menu tasks will be described below. However, the description of the process common to FIG. 50 will be omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power interruption recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S317. In step S317, the sub CPU 201 executes the set value check process. This set value check process (step S317) includes the current set value information (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 before the power failure and stored in the work RAM 203) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 (step S317). This is a process for confirming the set value information (set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101) after the power failure. When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S314 are not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S317), the sub CPU 201 determines the set value suitability determination process, that is, whether or not the set value is appropriate. (Step S318). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined that the value is appropriate (YES in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S315. The processing after step S315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined that the setting value information is inappropriate (NO in step S318), and the process proceeds to step S319. Execute the process.

The above-mentioned processing when the set value is abnormal is a process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this set value abnormality processing (step S319), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a voice notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. The process may be executed.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (processes of steps S317 and S318) and sets the set value. When it is determined that is not appropriate (NO in step S318), the game machine manager can be notified that the set value is not appropriate by executing the set value abnormality processing (step S319).

The above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S317 and step S318) is executed when the setting confirmation process is completed, but the setting change process is performed without executing either the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. When the backup process (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328) is executed, or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only inputting. Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure, and the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information is appropriate or not. This is because it is possible to determine.

[1-10. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hall menu processing (step S303) in the hall menu task (see FIGS. 50 and 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the hall menu process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 selects a hall menu item that is a target for confirming various information / settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and / and the main button 662 by the operator. The selection process is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection process of FIG. 57, the hall menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history / setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, and so on. The case of checking the operation of the accessory, setting the liquid crystal brightness, and setting the volume control will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "time setting" (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 performs the time setting process (step S3003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". (Step S3004). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "prize ball information" (YES in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, information on the difference between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of daily prize balls paid out in the past few days. Information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past few days and the number of prize balls fired.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change / confirmation history". Determine (step S3006). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change / confirmation history" (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change / confirmation history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) described later in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operator confirms the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 is operated and the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected, the sub CPU 201 sets the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) is displayed, and the operator displays the change history of the setting (setting value), the confirmation history of the setting (setting value), the browsing history, and the confirmed setting (setting value). And it is possible to check the changed settings (set values). The details of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "setting change / confirmation history" (NO in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "error information history". Determine (step S3008). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "error information history" (YES in step S3008), the sub CPU 201 performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 58) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check or change the error information history. do.

The error history displayed in the error information history processing is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when an abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) without transmitting the abnormal command from the main CPU 101. ) May not be able to receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to) is started.

As shown in FIG. 58, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date and time column in which the date and time when the error code was recorded is displayed, and a release date and time column in which the date and time when the error is cleared is displayed. In addition, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the determination can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it can be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "error information history" (NO in step S3008), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "monitoring history" (NO in step S3008). Step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S3010), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "warning display setting" (NO in step S3010). Step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "warning display setting" (YES in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 performs the warning display setting process (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "warning display setting" (NO in step S3012), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "notification setting" (NO in step S3012). Step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 performs the notification setting process (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "notification setting" (NO in step S3014), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3014). Step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is in the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 performs the power saving mode processing (step S3017). In this power saving mode processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the power saving mode setting. ..

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not in the "power saving mode" (NO in step S3016), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "maintenance" (step). S3018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S3018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3018). Step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory operation confirmation process (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not "confirmation of accessory operation" (NO in step S3020), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "liquid crystal brightness setting". (Step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 performs the liquid crystal brightness setting process (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. And.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not the "liquid crystal brightness setting" (NO in step S3022), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is the "volume adjustment setting". (Step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 performs the volume adjustment setting process (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. And.

After processing step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025, and the hall menu selected in step S3001 is "volume". If it is determined that the setting is not "adjustment setting" (NO in step S3024), the sub CPU 201 ends the hall menu process and returns the process to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 50).

[1-11. Modes of various devices when changing settings / checking settings, etc.]
The modes of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change / setting confirmation are as described above, but are summarized below for easy understanding. explain.

First, the time of changing the setting will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has been controlled (the setting change state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204 and the characters such as "setting is being changed". Is displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, the set value has not been finalized yet at this stage. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Further, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and characters such as "setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, a voice such as "setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the first embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is only stored in the register until it is confirmed and is not stored in the main RAM 103. However, even if the set value is not confirmed, the updated set value is not stored. May be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the first embodiment, the set value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the set value is updated by operating another operating means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may try to do so.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating an effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 uses the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). In addition to displaying the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by 204, the characters such as "setting has been changed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." From the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the LED. The control circuit 206 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full lighting of the LED 25 in red continue as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. , It ends when the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it was decided that the backup clear process was not displayed, but the sub CPU 201 added the message "RAM has been cleared" in addition to the message "Settings have been changed". You may try to do it.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized.", And the entire red color of the LED 25 By lighting for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen etc. by an unauthorized third party. Become. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the end of the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is an aspect of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting change.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before the power is turned on, the power switch 35 is OFF. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. However, even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the speaker are not turned on unless the power is turned on. 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned ON while the setting key 328 is turned ON (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned ON), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has been controlled (the setting confirmation state has been started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204, and says "setting is being confirmed". Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 outputs a voice such as "setting is being confirmed" from the speaker 24 by the voice control circuit 205, and lights the LED 25 in white by the LED control circuit 206. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal plate 323. The set value set is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state is completed, the game can be executed. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes the game screen return display process (step S316) based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 fully lights the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and ends all the red lighting of the LED 25 when the execution of the game is started. The performance display monitor 334 displays the base value by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state is completed, by performing all the red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), fraud such as viewing the setting change / confirmation history screen or the like is authorized. It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have. Further, since at least the light emitting mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state, it is possible to easily grasp from the appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in the game stopped state when it is determined that no command is received from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the sub CPU 201 was started. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output a display and a voice saying "Please determine the set value", and the LED control circuit 206 outputs the LED 25 (for example, FIG. 1) is all white blinking. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is the mode of various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[1-12. Setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change / confirmation history processing (step S3007) in the hall menu processing (see step S303 in FIG. 50) will be described. In the setting change / confirmation history processing, the history of setting change of setting value, the history of confirmation of setting value, and the browsing history of setting change and confirmation are set in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the setting change / confirmation history information (described later). Displayed as "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). In the following, before explaining the setting change / confirmation history processing, first, the setting change, the setting confirmation, and the browsing will be described.

In the first embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, for example, by pressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased in the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the operation is set to OFF, one of the plurality of set values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change process ends.

In order to make it possible to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes an initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed after executing the setting change processing, and sets value information after the change. It is transmitted to the sub CPU 201.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing is completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed), the setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Then, the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later. do.

Further, in the first embodiment, when confirming the set value, it is necessary for the main CPU 101 to execute the setting confirmation process as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated so as to be OFF, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off and then the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned on again. As you did.

Further, in order to be able to display the setting confirmation history, as described above, the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed after executing the setting confirmation process. do. At this time, although the set value has not been changed, the set value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-mentioned setting determination process (process of step S317 and step S318, see FIG. 56). Is preferable.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC209 That is, the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the “No. 1” column in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later. As shown in the "No. 1" column on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, the setting value information is associated with the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed and the time information. May also be displayed.

The work RAM 203 according to the first embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the first embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53), and the work RAM 203 is used. It means that the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) showing the setting change / confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

In order to be able to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following processing. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S301). Then, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the sub CPU 201 highlights the "setting change / confirmation history" (see FIG. 53). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203, and displays the setting change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 61 described later) on the liquid crystal display. In addition to displaying in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information (information indicating that browsing has been performed) and date and time data currently clocked by RTC209, that is, when browsing (information indicating that browsing has been performed) The date and time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is associated with the date and time data and stored in the work RAM 203. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the above-mentioned history recording process (step S306, step S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress. When the browsing history is stored in the work RAM 203, the sub CPU 201 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change / confirmation history information and stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 61, which will be described later.

Here, the history recording processing of step S306 and step S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The sub CPU 201 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At that time, the sub CPU 201 performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the settings. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 sets the sub CPU 201. Of the setting change history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting change history is performed. Further, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 , Of the setting confirmation history and browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, but only the setting confirmation history is performed. Therefore, in the history recording process of step S306 and step S307, "setting change / confirmation" is performed in the hall menu process (step S303) regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above. When the step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, so that the fraudulent monitoring of the amusement store clerk is also performed. That is, in order to perform the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key that has a notch only in the corresponding part of the setting key 328 and is managed by the game machine management manager) is required, and this dedicated key is used. For example, a general clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but a general clerk or an unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key can browse the backup clear process without changing the settings. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, by making it possible for the sub CPU 201 to record browsing even when the backup clear process that does not involve the setting change process is executed, the security camera corresponding to that time (the security camera normally installed in the store). It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video such as.

In the history recording process in steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the sub CPU 201 selects and determines "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is a power failure recovery command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is initialized. When it is a command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from being unnecessarily increased and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is performed, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the game machine manager, but the setting confirmation history can be used. Regarding the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of the settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it is browsed (at least the setting value information is browsed). I tried to record it. This is because it is considered that the person who commits fraud is mainly browsing after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time zone, if there is no browsing history and only the setting confirmation history, the possibility of fraud is low, but if the number of times of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large, it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud. .. Regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step). YES in S3006), the setting confirmation process is performed when the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by recording both the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. When it is the operation type information indicating that it has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when it is the operation type information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

Further, the history recording process of step S306 and step S307 was browsed a plurality of times from the start of the hall menu display process of step S302 to the execution of the game screen return display process of step S315. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53) (YES in step S3046), the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed. However, if you select and confirm "Back" on this setting change / confirmation history screen, you will return to the hall menu screen again. Then, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on this hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change / confirmation history screen is browsed a plurality of times between steps S302 and S315, the browsing record is only once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S315 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, confirms settings, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase browsing records to increase the number of histories and make it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an act is performed, even if the setting change, setting confirmation, or browsing is performed a plurality of times during the steps S301 to S312, these histories are recorded only once and the power supply is supplied. It is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily by preventing the history from being recorded unless the is turned off and then re-entered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S310) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The game screen return process (step S315) is executed. For example, even after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed by turning off the setting key 328, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall is opened. If the specifications are such that the menu screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the "setting change / confirmation history" is selected and decided on the hall menu screen displayed again, or the ON / OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the user browses the screen. Even if there is, it is preferable to record the browsing once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, a backup clear switch 330, and the like. It has an operating means. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine administrator.

Further, in the first embodiment, the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) in which the set value can be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the set value is not displayed. The change / confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 66 described later) may be stored as a browsing history.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59, 60, and 61 to 65, the liquid crystal display device 16 of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and the setting change / confirmation history process are executed. The explanation will be given in comparison with the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 60 is an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart continuing from FIG. 59. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen when the screen is changed to the setting change / confirmation history screen) of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example when "Clear" is selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu process (see FIG. 57) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 57), the sub CPU 201 performs the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. "Back" is highlighted on the initial screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen.

The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 includes a setting change / confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, and a first selection area 1660a. It has a second selection region 1660b. In FIG. 61, an example is shown in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and "Clear" and "Return" are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 61, the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are associated with each other and displayed in a list in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640. In the date and time column, the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, or the browsing was performed is displayed. In the operation type column, the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed. In the setting value column, when the setting is changed, the changed setting value is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the setting value at that time is displayed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and "confirmation" is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the time information and the operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. NS. Further, when the operation type is a setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the setting is confirmed, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type, respectively.

The sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051), and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3052). This timekeeping process is a process of starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201. Here, the timer is started to be timed after the setting change / confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 61). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after (see, for example) is displayed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3053 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3053), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, it is determined to be "Back". Will be done.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 61) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which "Back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "Back" to "Page" (see FIG. 61). (See FIG. 62).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3056 whether or not it has been determined to be "Page". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Page" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 changes to "Page". It is determined that "Page" has been determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "Page" (YES in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the page update screen of this setting change / confirmation history screen, images imitating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed on the left and right of the notation of "Page". As a result, the operator understands that the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page when the left select button 664c is operated, and the setting change / confirmation history screen is updated to the next page when the lower select button 664d is operated. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, the final page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated while the final page is displayed, one page is displayed. Convenience can be enhanced by cyclically displaying the eyes so that they are displayed.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S3056), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3065 described later, and determines whether or not it is determined to be "Clear" on the setting change / confirmation history screen.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update screen display process (step 3057), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3058). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3055 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed). ), The hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3059 whether or not the page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process proceeds to step S3062 described later.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step S3060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 indicates that the page update process has been performed. The determination is made, and the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change / confirmation history screen when the setting change / confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is omitted.

In the first embodiment, when the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d of the sub CPU 201 are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 63) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up and down select buttons 664a and 664b, one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change / confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated. Moreover, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modified example of the setting change / confirmation history process described later.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process (step 3060), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3061). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and restarted for a predetermined time (after the setting change / confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) after the page update process (step S3060) is executed. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within (for example, 30 seconds).

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3059 and determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3062), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, moving to step S3072 instead of step S3071 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen as in the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen. Because it is not.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 63), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “Clear” (see FIG. 64).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3063) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3064). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is that no processing was performed within the specified time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item was highlighted on the setting change / confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timekeeping process of step S3064, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3065 and determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to " It is determined that "Clear" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3065), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066). This setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see FIG. 65). When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process in step S3065 is executed, the item "Return" is highlighted.

In the above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 are deleted, but not necessarily all the data. It is not limited to erasing the data, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode for erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 64 in FIG. 1-No. A mode in which the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific No. 5 are deleted, a mode in which the setting change / confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, and a plurality of operation types (setting change). , Setting confirmation, browsing), out of the mode of deleting the date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and the time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information. A mode in which only specific information (for example, set value information) is deleted can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the pressing of the main button 662. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed only when the correct password is entered. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent accidentally clearing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data. Further, for example, a person who performs a setting change process or browsing for the purpose of fraud may delete the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data in order to hide his / her fraud. Therefore, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to execute the setting change / confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S3067). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. The timer is cleared and the time is restarted after the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area 1640). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all are erased.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3068 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process proceeds to step S3072 described later. In this case, the reason for moving to step S3071 instead of step S3072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3070). This timekeeping process is a process of clearing the timekeeping of the timer started in step S3067 and starting the timekeeping of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 again. Clearing the timer and restarting the time is to perform any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change / confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) is displayed when the procedure is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3071 whether or not it is determined to "return". When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 is set to " It is determined that "return" has been decided.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change / confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to "return" in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S3072).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3073, ends the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and exits the hall menu. The initial screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the setting change / confirmation history screen is finished and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing after step S3053.

In this way, on the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change / confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. However, it is configured so that the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls the display of the hall menu screen to continue without ending as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed even if there is no operation. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

The process of moving to step S3073 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072) is the hall menu process (that is, the setting is being changed or is being changed) in step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above. It is a process in (setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined time elapses without any operation in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process of step S311 (a predetermined time elapses in step S3072 in the hall menu process of step S311) (step S3072). When it is determined to be YES), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S315 (see FIGS. 50 and 56), ends the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S315). The menu display prohibition process (step S316) is executed. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change / confirmation history screen is viewed again. You will not be able to.

Further, regarding the process of returning to step S3053 when it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S3072), the hall menu process (that is, setting) of step S303 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) described above is also performed. It is a process during the change (during change or setting confirmation), and a different process is executed in the hall menu process (that is, after the setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S311 (see FIGS. 50 and 56) (not shown). Specifically, even if the non-operation period does not reach the predetermined period in the setting change / confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hall menu process in step S311 (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. The game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu display prohibition process (step S316) are executed based on the fact that a predetermined end condition such as when it is determined that the command has been received is satisfied. That is, on the setting change / confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if the non-operation time continues for a predetermined time, the hall menu screen is only returned (the setting change / confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change / confirmation history is displayed again even if the non-operation time does not reach the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, on the setting change / confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period is not continued for a predetermined period, and the above-mentioned predetermined end condition Unless is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator has a grace period for viewing the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation, and the predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change / confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return process (step S315) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S316) are executed. (For example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily browse confidential information such as a setting change history, a setting confirmation history, and a browsing history, and security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, time information, operation type information, and settings are set regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing). A list screen showing all of the value information is displayed. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information when the setting is changed is displayed, and the time information and the set value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information to be displayed (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 61) and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 61) in which the time information and the set value information at the time of browsing are displayed. 2, No. 5) and are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, the pachinko / pachislot machine manager) may want to narrow down the target to display the specific operation type information. Therefore, a screen in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (see, for example, FIG. 61), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information It is preferable that the narrowing screen narrowed down to only specific information among them can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible to know not only fraudulent detection but also information such as how many days the business has been conducted with the set value. Since the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[1-13. Other examples of display screens displayed in setting change / confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 70. However, the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that in FIGS. 59 and 60. Therefore, in another example, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described and the sub. The description of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the CPU 201 will be omitted.

FIG. 66 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 67 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “setting display” is selected. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the set value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 69 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 70 is another example of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66, the setting change / confirmation history screen has a setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

On the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the confirmation setting change / confirmation history display area 1670, but the setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 66 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. In the date and time column where the time information is displayed, the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed is displayed, and in the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed, the operation type (setting change, setting change, Setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed.

Further, on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, in addition to "clear" and "return", "setting display" is also displayed in the second selection area 1690b. In the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history, "Back" is selected and displayed (highlighted). Also in this other example, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select button 664.

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 67). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting display" is selected (highlighted display), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen that is not displayed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (list screen) in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed in a list is displayed (see FIG. 68). ). In this way, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, by selecting and deciding "Setting display", it is associated with the date and time and the operation type. The new set values will be displayed in a list. When the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. Back is highlighted.

On the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 68) in which the time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when the select button 664 is operated and "Page" is selected, "Page" is highlighted. (See FIG. 69). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes the page update process. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 70) on the setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this page update screen, the next page or the previous page can be updated by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

In addition, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 66) of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed. However, the page update process is executed by the sub CPU 201. However, when this page update process is executed, the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the setting value information is not displayed. The page update screen on the setting change / confirmation history screen. Is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

In this other example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, and as shown in FIG. 68, the time information and the operation type information are displayed. And the screen in which the set value information is displayed in a list can be selectively displayed, but the screen in FIG. 66 is one or two of the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information. Any screen may be used as long as only information is displayed.

In addition, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered an appropriate password). This may be done, but this will be described later.

FIG. 71 shows a setting change / confirmation history screen on which the set values can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure up to. As shown in FIG. 71, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a hole when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the operation is not limited to this. It may be an operation performed when executing at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is set to "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). "Setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted, and only the date / time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) are displayed. Setting change / setting change including confirmation history information. Display the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the confirmation history screen (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is in a state in which "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 53) displayed in the second procedure. When the main button 662 is pressed, the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On this setting change / confirmation history screen, date and time data, an operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and a set value are associated with each other.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to third steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the first embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation button group 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a game. A main CPU 101, which is a control unit that performs related control, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Alternatively, the display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling confirmation, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. The set value is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the work RAM 203, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209. Is provided as a setting display function that stores the setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / setting confirmation and the date / time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change / setting confirmation and the date / time data can be stored. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed when the main button 662 is operated in the displayed state.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and stores the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and viewed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the first embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of confirming whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been made.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the first embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation units such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. A main CPU 101, which is a unit, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a setting means for the operation, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the setting display function for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Has a configuration in which date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and corresponds to the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history. It may be attached and stored.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not a game has been played, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[1-14. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the sub CPU 201 and the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed are displayed. I will explain it while comparing it. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 74 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various operating accessories, etc.) such as the effect button switch 621, the upper accessory 1000, and the like are targeted for the maintenance process. It is possible to have the operator confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation status display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the substantially center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74). In this operation status display table, for example, a name string in which the names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1 to 28) attached to the various devices displayed in the name column are displayed. And an operating state sequence indicating the operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operating status column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is input from various devices, the display of the operating status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, if the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from the “OFF” display to the “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above-mentioned "input from each device" is based on the detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201. In addition, each of the effectors has a sensor that detects that it exists at least in the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned off and the sensor that detects the normal position is It is assumed that the display is turned on when it is OFF, that is, when the effecting object moves.

Further, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 52) of the hall menu screen is returned (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 74, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 72), the sub CPU 201 first acquires the sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating state of various devices assigned serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. 74. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the various devices are in an on state with an input or an off state with no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub input state information editing process for reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S3082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a maintenance screen display process for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 73 and 74) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step S3083). ). In this process, the display of the maintenance screen and the update of the display (for example, the change from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display) are performed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated at the same time (YES in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 57), and performs the process. Return to step S304 of the hall menu task (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S3084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines in recent years have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the effect button 62 is provided with a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting and moving upward based on the lottery result of a special symbol. Then, when the "effect button 1" of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance for the operation function of the effect button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" having the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 projects and moves the effect button 62 upward to perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the sub CPU 201 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from "OFF" display to "ON" display). When the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of the "main button 2" is determined to be normal, for example, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 74. When this is done, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time and the maintenance mode ends, the sub CPU 201 controls to return to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). NS.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachislot machines, some pachinko machines and pachislot machines are provided with a plurality of effecting objects having different driving means. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of producing objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. Maintenance may be executed, a plurality of effectors having different driving means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or they may be independently operated to perform maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a production accessory 1 to a production accessory 3 having different driving means, for example, when “directing accessory 1 + 2” having a serial number 14 shown in FIG. Maintenance is performed by simultaneously operating the object 1 and the effect object 2. Further, for example, when the serial number 17 “effect 1 → 2” shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 first activates the effect 1 and then operates the effect 2. Perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “directing accessory 1” having the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 74 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 operates the producing accessory 1 independently to perform maintenance. In addition, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. For example, the "effect 1 + 3" of the serial number 15 in FIG. (The operation of the main button 662 is not enabled). In FIG. 74, the serial number 15 “directing accessory 1 + 3” is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the effect 1 and the effect 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, the effect 1 is first operated and then the effect 1 is operated). If it does not interfere with the effect (when operating the effect 3), for example, it is preferable to enable selection and determination of “effect 1 → 3” of serial number 18 shown in FIG. 74. In this way, it is possible to operate a plurality of production objects in a plurality of manners, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently, and at the same time when they interfere with each other when they are operated at the same time. By making it inoperable, it is possible to improve maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 74, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot settlement button, and the like are enclosed. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables games by circulating the game balls, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game balls is also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as targets for maintenance processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the devices are connected to the main CPU 101. Devices (for example, power switch 35, first start port switch 421, second start port switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, it is simulated between the ball lending machine and the pachinko game machine (in the case of CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot machine) based on the operation of the lending button and the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

[1-15. Mobile terminal cooperation function]
Next, the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77.

The mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of linking the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, detailed information about the game played by the player can be recorded, and the function that does not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be customized by satisfying predetermined conditions. Can be done.

Predetermined conditions include, for example, that the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and that a specific effect is executed. Further, as a function of customizing a function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state may be changed to a special song, or a liquid crystal display device may be used. For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in 16.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, the guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. If, for example, a pressing operation is performed on the main button 662 while the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not variablely displayed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 75, the items of the guide menu include "start uni-memo", "big hit symbol / number of rounds", "model site", and "return to game". In the initial guide image, "Start Unimemo" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of guide menus can be selected by operating the up / down select buttons 664a and 664b. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 75, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted "Start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

When "Start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. When "big hit symbol / number of rounds" is selected, the jackpot symbol / number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). Then, when the "model site" is selected, the model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an image for effect displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 is not operated for a predetermined period, or any of the first start port 420 and the second start port 440 is used. Also, the demo video that is displayed when the prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time elapses without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 still displays a video for directing to be displayed when playing a game and the above demo video. Is displayed.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example when the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the initial image of Unimemo, the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu are displayed. The items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to the game", and "return". In the initial image of Unimemo, "Enter password" is highlighted. Then, the highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. Further, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 76, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 77).

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Enter password" and a password entry menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of password input menu items are displayed. The items of the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "Return to game", and "Return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated, the item is selected. , Determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When "Enter" is selected and determined from the password input menu, a plurality of characters displayed on the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected from the password input menu, the characters are deleted from the password display image one by one from the last input character.

When "Return to game" is selected from the password input menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 may display an image for production when the game is played, or the firing handle 32 may not be operated for a predetermined period of time. A demo image displayed when a prize is not won for a predetermined period is displayed in either the 1 start port 420 or the 2nd start port 440. When "Back" is selected from the password input menu, the uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

[1-16. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing]
Hereinafter, modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described.
[1-16-1. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 1]
First, a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83.

The setting change / confirmation history processing in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, except that it has an authentication function for viewing the setting value. .. In the following, the points different from the setting change / confirmation history processing described above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 1, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in, the description of the timekeeping process will be omitted in the following description.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this setting change / confirmation history process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 52 and 53) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57. It is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change / confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication process will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, for example. Further display the password request screen (step S3101). FIG. 80 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 81 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201.

In this modification 1, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request may be performed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the sub CPU 201 executes the password input process (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is correct, and if the entered password is correct (YES in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the entered password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication NG display process (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 82, for example, is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Here, FIG. 82 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the first modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows.

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process of step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S3110), and then steps. Move to S3120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not appropriate (NO in step S3103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and ends the setting change / confirmation history process.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the entered password is appropriate when, for example, the main button 662 is pressed after the password is entered on the password request screen. If the entered password is inappropriate or the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the authentication NG process in step S3103 described above is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, for example, the setting change / confirmation history screen in which the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed can be displayed. can. This makes it possible to prevent the history information of the set value from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

In step S3120, the sub CPU 201 performs a setting change / confirmation history screen display process. At this time, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) is displayed in which the date and time data, the operation type, and the set value are shown in association with each other.

After the setting change / confirmation history screen display process in step S3120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3130). When it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process proceeds to step S3150.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3150. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 64) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3150), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3160), and proceeds to step S3180. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are deleted (see, for example, FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S3170. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 61) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3170), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3180), and the setting change / confirmation history process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130 and the process of shifting to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 83 shows a setting change / confirmation in which the set value can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the operation procedure until the history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 83, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a hole when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for viewing the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the password (see FIGS. 80 and 81), and determines the suitability of the input password.

As a fourth step, if the password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 68) in which the corresponding operation type) and the set value are associated with each other is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Therefore, the person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (the person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change / confirmation history screen (see FIG. 61) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By looking at the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The person who has the authority is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the store manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authoritative person" may be referred to as an "administrative authority".

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the first embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, an operation button group 66 such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a game. A main CPU 101, which is a control unit that performs related control, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit changes set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). Alternatively, the display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is a setting means for enabling confirmation, a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201, and a reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. The main CPU 101 includes a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. The set value is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 sends the setting change or setting confirmation to the work RAM 203, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209. Is provided as a setting display function that stores the setting change / confirmation history information and displays the setting change / setting confirmation and the date / time data stored in the main RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the setting change / setting confirmation and the date / time data can be stored. It has a configuration in which the set value stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed when the main button 662 is operated in the displayed state.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date and time data from RTC209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, the main button is displayed with the setting change or setting confirmation and date / time data displayed. When the 662 is operated, the set value stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it can be determined whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Will be.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data for which the set value is received from the RTC209, and stores the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. May be good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent activities such as changing the set value.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. May be.

With this configuration, the date and time data for which the set value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the set value is confirmed and set. It is possible to identify the fraud when fraud such as checking the value has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and viewed. The history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above configuration, in the first embodiment, it is possible to save and display the setting change / confirmation history information in which the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value and the date and time data are associated with each other. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of confirming whether or not an illegal setting change or setting confirmation has been made.

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the first embodiment controls the liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, the operation units such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. A main CPU 101, which is a unit, and a sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16, are provided, and the control unit can change or confirm set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332, which is a setting means for the operation, and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is a setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information in the work RAM 203. When the setting display function for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided and the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Has a configuration in which date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and the browsing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC209, and corresponds to the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history. It may be attached and stored.

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the set value was browsed can be specified, and fraud such as changing the set value can be performed. If it has been done, it will be possible to identify the fraud.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data of the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data are displayed in the setting change / confirmation history information, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change / confirmation history" is selected in the hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date / time data display among the setting change / confirmation history information, browsing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the setting change or the browsing history of the setting confirmation has been browsed for an illegal purpose such as a goto act.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, it is possible to save and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation / history information is associated with the date and time data, so that an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can not only determine whether or not a game has been played, but also determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

[1-16-2. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 2]
Next, a modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 88.

The basic configuration of the setting change / confirmation history processing in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “loud”. , "Medium", and "Small" to switch to one of the three volume positions, and to switch to multiple volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is set in advance. When the order is matched, the user is authenticated as a user with administrator privileges. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning the jog dial and the volume may be fixed by pressing the jog dial.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function for performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the second modification, for example, the voice control circuit 205 stores the control program to which the authentication processing function is added, and the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to an authentication process (see FIG. 85) in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The volume switch 108 is arranged in, for example, the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and a slide operation for setting an initial setting value is possible. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, and 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, and 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "large". In addition to the switching operation, the switching operation is sequentially performed to a plurality of volume positions 1, 2, and 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of "large"-> "medium"-> "small"-> "medium". That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrative authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions is performed in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. Operate with a pattern and store the multiple volume positions and operation order in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set value, the volume switch 108 is operated according to a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set value.

The authentication operation pattern includes, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “low”) in FIG. 84, or volume position 2 to volume position 3 (volume). An operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to “Large”) can be stored in advance.

As a result, the sub CPU 201 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and the administrator determines whether or not the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern. It can be determined whether or not.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. In this authentication process, "setting change / confirmation history" is selected from the hall menu (see FIG. 52) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 57 (YES in step S3006), and "setting change / confirmation" is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while the "history" is highlighted (see FIG. 53).

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs a volume password request display process (step S3201) for displaying a screen prompting the input of the volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 on which the hall menu screen is displayed. Run.

FIG. 86 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change / confirmation history process is executed in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example. FIG. 87 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, in the volume password request display process in step S3201 of FIG. 85, the sub CPU 201 enters the password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, by operating the volume switch. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after entering the password." Is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information.

In this modification 2, when the setting change / confirmation history processing is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). And), for example, as shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the setting change / confirmation history is started, only the time information and the operation type information of the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change / confirmation history screen is displayed, or the volume may be displayed without displaying either the hall menu or the setting change / confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts the operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and collates it with the preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S3203). Here, when it is determined that the correct operation has been performed (YES in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processes after step S3120 in FIG. 78.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 that the authentication is NG. (Step S3204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 ends the authentication process and shifts to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 78. In the above authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In FIG. 84, an example in which a volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be any of at least three or more. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and the position information detected by this position detection function (volume position information is acquired, and the acquired order and the work RAM 203 are stored in advance. The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed on condition that the operation sequence is matched with the stored predetermined operation order.

FIG. 88 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the modification 2 of the setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second modification of the setting change / confirmation history processing, a hole is formed when the setting change processing or the setting confirmation process is executed as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of the volume password (see FIGS. 86 and 87), captures the input volume password, and determines the suitability of the captured volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by collating the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both match and authentication is OK, the volume password is considered to be appropriate. to decide.

As a fourth step, if the volume password entered in the third step is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be set value information, more specifically, date and time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). The setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 68) in which the setting value is associated with the corresponding operation type) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 constituting the game machine according to the first embodiment includes a liquid crystal display device 16 for displaying various images, and at least a main button 662 and a select button which are operation units for receiving operations of a player. 664, a non-game operation unit that the player does not operate, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables change or confirmation of set values (for example, settings 1 to 6), and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding the written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time. The data transmitting means transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the set value to the sub CPU 201, and the sub CPU 201 changes the setting or sets the work RAM 203 when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation. It is equipped with a setting display function that stores confirmation, setting values and date and time data from RTC209 as setting change / confirmation history information, and displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and is a non-game operation. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the units are operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Or you will be able to determine whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment stores the displayed date and time data as a browsing history in the work RAM 203 when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 16 The browsing history may be displayed on the screen.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to the authorized person, so that it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. This operation order is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 detects each volume position of the operation switch. Further equipped with a possible position detection function, the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and indicates that the order of the acquired volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. The condition may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the operation order is notified to an authorized person in advance to identify the authorized one. It is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Not only that, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information, only the person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display it. However, when displaying the setting change / confirmation history information as in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing described below, the input unit in the pachinko game machine 1 It may be configured to authenticate using the password entered from.

[1-16-3. Modification example of setting change / confirmation history processing 3]
Next, a modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game system 210 according to the third modification of the setting change / confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. The gaming system 210 includes a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged in the network 230. As will be described later, the gaming system 210 cooperates with the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 to perform an authentication process related to confirmation of setting change / confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change / confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 92). Specifically, the setting change / confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is information content such as displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61, and includes the setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generation means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display operation unit 222 has the functions of the display unit and the operation unit, and is composed of a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a (registered trademark) and the like (see FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display operation unit 222 and the camera unit constitute the operation display unit and the imaging means in the present invention, respectively.

The control unit 221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to, for example, a storage device or a control program stored in the RAM. conduct. In the first embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL, and inputs the password to the operation display unit 222 (described later). Input screen display control unit that displays (see FIG. 95), the input password entered on the password input screen is transmitted to the server device 240 based on the above URL, and the authentication result notified from the server device 240 is acquired. The unit has a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application installed in advance in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 221 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 constituting the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, are in the present invention, respectively. It constitutes an extraction means, an input screen display control means, an authentication result acquisition means, and a history information display control means.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for an authentication service identified by the above URL, receives an input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 that has accessed the above URL, and has a preset password. It is equipped with an authentication service function that determines whether or not the password is correct and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constituting the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3. This setting change / confirmation history processing is performed by "changing settings" from among a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 51) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. -The confirmation history is selected and determined, and the operation is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed while the "setting change / confirmation history" is highlighted (see, for example, FIG. 53) on the hall menu screen.

In the setting change / confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52). It was explained that the timekeeping process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 59) is performed so that is displayed. Also in this modification 3, when the time counting process is performed in the same manner as the setting change / confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the timekeeping process is omitted in the description in the third modification.

When this setting change / confirmation history processing is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change / confirmation history information from the work RAM, and a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site of the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 92) is performed (step S3301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a two-dimensional code display process of displaying the setting change / confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 92, for example. Execute (step S3302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 can accept a data clear request, a cursor movement (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to. The main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Further, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. In FIG. 90, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 59 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, it is necessary to perform these processes between steps S3302 and S3303 in FIG. 90. The processing of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 90, after the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "Clear" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. , The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been determined to be "clear".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting change / confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history data stored in the work RAM 203. When the setting change / confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change / confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is deleted (see FIG. 65). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "clear" (NO in step S3303), the process proceeds to step S3305.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is determined to "return" in step S3305. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Back" is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change / confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 92) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that it is determined to "return".

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change / confirmation history process ends. On the other hand, if it is not determined to "return" (NO in step S3305), the process proceeds to step S3303 and the processing after step S3303 is continued.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the determination is "clear" (YES in step S3303), the setting change / confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 92) is displayed. You may try to clear. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change / confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. This process is started on condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the image data and displays the image data on the display operation unit 222 based on the image data, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. A two-dimensional code reading display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 161a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the two-dimensional code in the RAM, for example, in a predetermined storage area. The two-dimensional code acquisition process for holding the information is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 95), and executes the password input display process for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display process in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 and performs the password authentication process through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors whether or not a password has been entered in the password display field 222c (see FIG. 95) (step S3404), and from the numeric keypad 222b. Performs the process of accepting the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

The server device 240 collates the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or NG depending on whether or not the two match. The server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the above determination result. As described above, in the first embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password received in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is incorrect (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs an authentication NG display process for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 (NO). Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." Is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 is set to display the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in step S3402 on the display operation unit 222. The change / confirmation history display process is performed (step S3406). In this setting change / confirmation history display process, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the setting change / confirmation history information held in step S3402 according to a preset display format for display. A process of creating and displaying the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 based on the display information (see FIG. 96) is performed.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the sub CPU 201 has set change / confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. And the setting change / confirmation history screen including the two-dimensional code 161a are displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change / confirmation history screen 116g contains the setting change / confirmation history information displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. Includes.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 90) in step S3302, the sub CPU 201 reads, for example, "* The two-dimensional code is read by the mobile terminal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A." You may configure it to display a message prompting you to move to the authentication service, such as "Please access the authentication service."

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the first embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 94 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code reading and display processing of S1101.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. In the password input display process (see FIG. 91) in step S3403, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 95 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 95, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys "0" to "9", "*", and "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying the password entered by the numeric keypad 222b. , The message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, a message prompting the password to be entered is displayed, for example, "* Please enter the password. The set value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password input screen shown in FIG. 95, the password converted into the hidden character "*" can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password is input by operating the numeric keypad 222b.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change / confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to the third modification. As shown in FIG. 96, the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change / confirmation history information temporarily held in S1102, for example, equivalent to the setting change / confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 61. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 96, the setting value of the setting change / confirmation history information is displayed corresponding to the setting change / confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the above-mentioned display format, the above-mentioned display format of the setting change / confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 96, the scrolling of the setting change / confirmation history information, and the processing function of batch deletion. Supports. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change / confirmation history display processing in S1107 during the setting change / confirmation history processing in FIG. 91, and then the decision button displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change / confirmation history information. 222e, the state shifts to an acceptable state in which a page update request based on the operation of the select button 664 can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not the page update operation has been performed (step S3407). To determine whether or not the page update operation has been performed, when it is determined that the select button 664 has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page is determined. The update process is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 664 is operated and the page refresh operation is performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button 664 is operated and the last line is reached), scrolling of the page is continued. Page update processing is performed (step S3408).

If the control unit 221 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if the operation of the select button 664 is stopped and the decision button 222e is not pressed, the process proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in step S3409 that "return" is determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 221 executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3410) and ends the setting change / confirmation history process. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 221 returns to step S340.

In the game system 210 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1A side converts the setting change / confirmation history information into a two-dimensional code as the so-called raw data and displays it in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A ( (See step S3301 and step S3302 in FIG. 90), the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine 1A is photographed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 side to generate the setting change / confirmation history information as raw data. (See step S3401 and step S3402 in FIG. 91).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped as standard with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the dedicated application makes it possible to display in the same display format as the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. ..

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, even if the setting change / confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it should be viewed in the same display format as the pachinko machine 1A side. It is difficult to recognize the setting change / confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the first embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only an authorized person can see the setting change / confirmation history information with the set value, which is sufficiently confidential. Sex can be ensured.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, but the above data is obtained in FIG. 96 according to the display format of the dedicated application. Is displayed. Therefore, if you do not have a dedicated application that has the display format, even if you read it with a general-purpose barcode reader, you will not be able to understand what kind of display the character string that reads the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be ensured. The application is distributed at the time of delivery of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and can be obtained only by an authorized person.

In the first embodiment, the password is authenticated by receiving the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and determining whether the password is correct or not depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine that the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether or not the entered password is correct. If you want to further secure the confidentiality, you can use the dedicated application to be installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 by encrypting the setting change / confirmation history information on the pachinko game machine 1A side, then generating and displaying a two-dimensional code. May be configured to add a setting change / confirmation history information decryption function corresponding to the above encryption.

Next, the procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system 210 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 93.

As shown in FIG. 93, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change / confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. Display the hall menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on, and performing both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35. Further, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key switch signal can be turned on by turning the setting key 328 in one direction, and the setting key switch signal can be turned off by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured to be able to.

As a second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is set to "setting change / confirmation history" by selecting and determining "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 53). Is highlighted and only the date and time data and operation type (corresponding operation type of setting change, confirmation, browsing) are displayed. Preview of setting change / confirmation history screen including setting change / confirmation history information. Display the screen (see FIG. 53) (the set value is not displayed).

As a third step, the pachinko game machine 1A is mainly in a state where "setting change / confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 53) of the setting change / confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL held in the work RAM 203 is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change / confirmation history information (see FIG. 92). ).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 94). After shooting the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and the password is entered from the password input screen (see FIG. 95) provided by the dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the game system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the game system 210 or each pachinko gaming machine 1A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 receives the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and collates it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth step, when the authentication is OK in the fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 displays the setting change / confirmation history information extracted in the fourth step on a screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 96). (Refer to), the content including the set value is displayed on the display operation unit 222. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change / confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1A according to the first embodiment controls a liquid crystal display device 16A for displaying various images, a main button 662 and a select button 664 which are operation units for receiving various operations, and controls related to the game. The main CPU 101, which is a control unit, and the sub CPU 201, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A, are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms set values (for example, settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 that enables the setting switch 332 and a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit are provided. A work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for measuring the date and time are provided, and the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change or setting confirmation and a set value to the sub CPU 201 by a data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 When the data received by the data receiving means is setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from RTC209 as the setting change / confirmation history information, and works. It has a setting display function that displays the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A, and the operation unit displays the setting change or setting confirmation and the date / time data by the setting display function. It has a configuration in which setting change / confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when a certain main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the sundial time means as the setting change / confirmation history information, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. , The setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the two-dimensional code is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 and the display is permitted after the password is authenticated, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the first embodiment, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date and time data as the browsing history of the work RAM 203. The browsing history may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change / confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the first embodiment is a portable radio based on information from a predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The communication terminal 220 may be configured to display the setting change / confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the information from the predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 The setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since it is possible to authenticate with a password known only to an authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an input means for identifying the authorized one to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. This password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only those who have authority use it when changing the setting or confirming the setting.

Further, the gaming system 210 according to the first embodiment includes the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 connected to the network 230 and managing a site for authentication. It also has a generation function to generate the setting change / confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and the two-dimensional code of the site URL, and the server device 240 uses the password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 as a preset password. The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service machine that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. The camera unit that captures the two-dimensional code displayed in, the extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change / confirmation history information and URL, and the input that displays the password input screen for entering the password. When the screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that sends the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result are correct. The configuration includes a history information display control unit that displays the setting change / confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, the gaming system according to the first embodiment reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and after authentication by the server device 240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. Setting change / confirmation history information can be displayed on. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to judge whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed, but also to make an illegal operation. You will be able to judge whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the first embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change / confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value has been performed. Not only that, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming system 210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its action and effect. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here, and it goes without saying that the present invention includes various embodiments as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[1-17. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the first embodiment can be applied to pachislot machines. When the invention according to the first embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In pachislot, the setting change process is performed on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is off, and the set value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot has made the above-mentioned setting changes, input a signal generated from the setting switch by operating the setting key, and then operate the start lever. When the indicated signal is received, data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes a data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed and RTC. The date and time data currently timed by, that is, the date and time data for which the initialization command is received is stored in the work RAM 203 as the setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control unit that controls the display of the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, checking the set value means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting confirmation process on the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON in the power ON state, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch constitutes a setting means that enables the change or confirmation of the set value together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the confirmation history of the set value, the main CPU confirms the set value by the above operation, and when the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key, the set value is confirmed. And the setting confirmation command which is the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, the sub CPU has operation type information (information indicating the setting confirmation) indicating that the set value has been confirmed, and The date and time data currently timed by the RTC, that is, the date and time data for receiving the setting confirmation command indicating that the set value has been confirmed, is stored in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The work RAM 203 can store and hold the written information even in the non-energized state.

The sub CPU that receives the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs a hall menu display process for displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device provided in the pachislot machine. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachislot machine replaces the "medal ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 52) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as "total medal information" being displayed, basically, the screen is the same as the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. be.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change / confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. The setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed as, for example, a setting change / confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed in this state.

The pachislot sub CPU executes the same processing as the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as hall menu processing, setting change / confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. be able to. Further, when the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to the pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, the setting change / confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are applied. , A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, etc. is displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursory game. You may.

Further, in pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the precursor game of "SBB" or "BB" is being played. That is, the precursor games of "SBB" and "BB" are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to provide a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the production of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the production of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Further, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART are ended on the condition that the games of the number of staying games are exhausted, respectively, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that the navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", and like "BB", the number of games added to the number of staying games in "SBB" is increased. It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games for producing additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, "2" may be set in the additional addition game number counter. However, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value set in the additional game number counter may be different depending on the type of the additional additional effect (additional additions A, B, C).

Further, in pachislot, the number of staying games in the second ART may be determined to be a fixed number of games such as "50", or instead, a predetermined number of games is set as one set (for example,). , 1 set "50" games), the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set "50" games, that is, a total of "100" games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided in which the stop order is not notified between sets and the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted for each game. In addition, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the end of this predetermined period (when the predetermined number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push is performed. When the stop operation (irregular push) is performed in, the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the next game of the game in which the irregular push is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachislot machine, as an accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a rotating accessory unit 122 having a rotating accessory 123 that is rotated by driving a stepping motor has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-back direction by driving, for example, a stepping motor or a solenoid.

[2. Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment is omitted, but the omitted description is also applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or "In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in particular in the following second embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the second embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced or combined with the configuration shown in the second embodiment. It goes without saying that it is possible. Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions (for example, the center unit 174, etc.). Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the same shape and the same processing as that of the first embodiment, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience (for example, steps S101 and step S101 of the first embodiment). 2 Step S1011 of the embodiment).
[2-1. Configuration of gaming machines]
[2-1-1. Appearance composition]
First, the appearance and the like of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is an example of a front view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 98 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including a first special symbol display unit and a second special symbol display unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The difference between FIG. 98 and FIG. 8 is that the LED unit 70 of FIG. 8 has a hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol and a hold display unit 76 for a second special symbol, whereas the LED unit 70 of FIG. 98 has these. It is a point that does not. The directions shown in the drawings are the directions in the front view.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the front-rear direction is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko machine is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIG. 97, the game board unit 17 includes a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a center unit 174 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 20. A passing gate 49 through which the game ball can pass, a first starting port 420 arranged below the passing gate 49, a second starting port 440 arranged below the first starting port 420, and a game area 20. A distribution member 800 capable of distributing a part of the game balls flowing down to the winning path toward the first starting port 420, and a game ball distributed to the winning path by the distribution member 800 passing through the gate 49 and the first starting port. A delivery member 820 that sends out one by one toward the closed area 836 provided on the upstream side of the 420, a guide member 840 that can guide the game ball sent out to the closed area 836 to the passage gate 49, and a normal electric motor. The object unit 400, the attacker unit 500 for big hits, the small hit winning opening 560, the shutter 562 that can open and close the small hit winning opening 560 by moving forward and backward, and the small hit winning opening that drives the shutter 562. It includes a mouth solenoid 520 (see FIG. 99), a general winning opening 53, and an out opening 57. Further, a back unit (not shown in FIG. 97) is provided on the rear side of the game board unit 17.

The passage gate 49 is located substantially in the center of the game area in the left-right direction and below the center unit 174 (liquid crystal display device 16).

A first starting port 420 is arranged below the passage gate 49, and a second starting port 440 is arranged below the first starting port 420.

The distribution member 800 is a left side region of the center unit 174, and is arranged on the downstream side of the small hit winning opening 560 and on the upstream side of any of the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, and is located in the left side region. All or almost all of the game balls flowing down the game are distributed to a flow path toward the passage gate 49 or a flow path not toward the passage gate 49.

All or substantially all of the game balls that have been distributed by the distribution member 800 to the flow path toward the passage gate 49 and have passed through the passage gate 49 win the first starting port 420.

The game ball distributed by the distribution member 800 to the flow path that does not go to the passing gate 49 hardly passes through the passing gate 49 unless it jumps or behaves erratically, and similarly to the first starting port 420. Almost never wins. However, when the blade member 4622, which will be described later, is opened, it becomes easy for the game ball to win the second start port 440 (that is, the game ball passes through the second start port switch 441), and the distribution member 800 facilitates the passage gate. A game ball distributed to a flow path that does not go to 49 may win a prize at the second starting port 440.

The distribution member 800 includes an upper distribution member 802 and a lower distribution member 804, and the upper distribution member 802 and the lower distribution member 804 are arranged so as to be vertically above each other.

The upper distribution member 802 has a crune-shaped rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and the rolling surface is provided with three holes through which the rolling game ball can pass. One of these three holes is a hole guided to the lower distribution member 804, and the other two are holes returned to the game area 20 (below the distribution member 800). That is, one-third of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the upper distribution member 802 is guided to the lower distribution member 804, and two-thirds is returned to the game area 20.

The lower distribution member 804 also has a crune-shaped rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and the rolling surface is provided with three holes through which the rolling game ball can pass. One of these three holes is a hole guided to the sending member 820 (more specifically, the receiving member 810 described later), and the other two are holes returned to the game area 20 (below the distribution member 800). Is. That is, one-third of the game ball rolling on the lower distribution member 804 is guided to the delivery member 820, and two-thirds is returned to the game area 20.

The game ball launched toward the left side region of the center unit 174 is configured to be accepted by the distribution member 800 with a probability of 100% or substantially 100%.

On the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16, between the lower distribution member 804 and the delivery member 820, a game ball guided from the lower distribution member 804 to the delivery member 820 is received and temporarily made to stand by. A stop member 810 is provided. Since only one game ball can stand by on the receiving member 810, the game ball guided by the sending member 820 while the game ball is waiting on the receiving member 810 falls from the receiving member 810. It is configured to flow down the game area 20.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the ratio of the game balls that can be received by the receiving member 810 among the game balls guided from the lower distribution member 804 to the sending member 820 is approximately 80%. Is designed for. That is, about 20% of the game balls guided from the lower distribution member 804 to the delivery member 820 fall into the game area 20.

The delivery member 820 includes a first rotating member 822 and a second rotating member 828. The first rotating member 822 is made of a member having a circular front view, and a plurality of pockets 824 capable of receiving a game ball are formed on the outer peripheral edge portion at equal intervals along the outer peripheral direction.

The first rotating member 822 is rotated clockwise, for example, at regular intervals in a front view, and the game ball waiting in the receiving member 810 is out of a plurality of pockets 824 formed in the first rotating member 822. When facing either, it is accepted in the facing pocket 824. Since the first rotating member 822 is housed in the transparent storage case 826, the game ball received in the pocket formed in the first rotating member 822 does not fall from the pocket 824.

The second rotating member 828 has the same shape as the first rotating member 822, and a plurality of pockets 830 capable of receiving a game ball are formed on the outer peripheral edge portion at equal intervals along the outer peripheral direction. Further, since it is stored in the storage case 832 like the first rotating member 822, the game ball received in the pocket 830 formed in the second rotating member 828 does not fall from the pocket 830.

Further, the second rotating member 828 is arranged on the right back side of the first rotating member 822 in the front view, and rotates in a direction opposite to that of the first rotating member 822 in the front view at a constant cycle.

Each of the plurality of pockets 824 formed in the first rotating member 822 communicates with one of the plurality of pockets 830 formed in the second rotating member 828 when facing the second rotating member 828. It is designed to do. As a result, the game ball received in the pocket 824 of the first rotating member 822 is received in the pocket 830 of the second rotating member 828.

A closed region 836 in which the game ball can be temporarily confined is formed below the liquid crystal display device 16 and on the upstream side of the passage gate 49 and the first starting port 420, and a pocket of the second rotating member 828 is formed. The game ball received in 830 is guided to the closed area 836.

A guide member 840 capable of guiding the game ball confined in the closed area 836 to the passing gate 49 is provided on the front side of the closed area 836 when viewed from the front.

The guide member 840 is composed of a circular member when viewed from above, and for example, three pockets 842 capable of receiving a game ball are formed along the outer peripheral direction on the outer peripheral edge portion. Further, the guide member 840 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise at a constant cycle when viewed from above.

The three pockets 842 formed in the guide member 840 are configured to guide all or substantially all of the received game balls to the passage gate 49. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming ball confined in the closed region 836 is configured so that it does not flow down from the closed region 836 to the gaming region 20 without passing through the guiding member 840, and thus is closed. The gaming ball confined in the area 836 is guided to the passing gate 49 with a probability of 100% or approximately 100%. Further, as described above, all or substantially all of the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 win the first starting port 420.

Although the closed area 836 confine the game ball sent to the closed area 836, it does not necessarily have to be the closed area 836, and most of the game balls sent out from the second rotating member 828 are guided members 840. It may be an open area as long as it can be accepted by.

Summarizing the above, substantially all of the game balls launched toward the left side region of the center unit 174 are accepted by the distribution member 800. The game ball received by the upper distribution member 802 of the distribution member 800 is guided to the lower distribution member 804 with a probability of one-third. The game ball guided to the lower distribution member 804 is guided to the receiving member 810 with a probability of one-third. The game ball guided by the receiving member 810 is received by the receiving member 810 with a probability of approximately 80%, and as a result, is received by the pocket 824 of the first rotating member 822 with a probability of approximately 80%. All the game balls received in the pocket 824 of the first rotating member 822 are guided to the closed region 836 via the second rotating member 828. The game ball guided to the closed region 836 is guided to the passing gate 49 by the guiding member 840 with a probability of 100% or approximately 100%. All or almost all of the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 win the first starting port 420.

Therefore, when 250 game balls are fired toward the left side region of the center unit 174, approximately 22 of the 250 game balls (1/3 × 1/3 × 0.8 × 250 = 22) The game ball passes through the passing gate 49, that is, the first starting port 420 is stably won. Here, assuming that the number of game balls fired in one minute when the game balls are continuously fired is 100, the number of game balls that win the first starting port 420 in one minute is 8 to 9. .. That is, the game ball stably wins the first starting port 420 at a substantially constant cycle such as approximately every 7 seconds.

In this type of pachinko machine, the fact that the game ball does not win a prize at the starting port continues to be one of the causes of the decline in interest. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the first starting port 420 is stably won, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest caused by the game ball not being won at the starting port. Become.

Further, in the game ball received by the delivery member 820, the first rotating member 822 and the second rotating member 828 prevent the game ball from being unnecessarily congested in the closed region 836. That is, it is difficult for the game balls to continuously pass through the passing gate 49, and thus the game balls are continuously won in the first starting port 420, and after a certain period of time has passed since one game ball has won the first starting port 420. , Other game balls are configured to win the first starting port 420. The above-mentioned fixed time is preferably longer than the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times of the first special symbol that can be determined in the LG state described later.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to make the first starting port 420 win the game ball at a substantially constant cycle while suppressing the continuous winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420. It becomes.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the functions of both the sending member 820 and the guiding member 840 suppress the continuous winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, but the present invention is not limited to this. One of the delivery member 820 and the guide member 840 is provided, and after a certain period of time has passed since one game ball wins the first start port 420, the other game ball wins the first start port 420. You may let it.

The jackpot attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a jackpot 540 and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. In the jackpot attacker unit 500, a game ball flowing down the right area is arranged in a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 so that a prize can be won. The reason why the jackpot attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20 is that in recent years, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the jackpot attacker unit 500 are placed in the game area. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16 in order to arrange it at 20.

The big prize opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A large winning opening switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 541, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, 15) of game balls from the payout device 340. The game ball paid out from the payout device 340 is paid out (discharged) to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout outlet 63) through the payout port 61.

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 by operation, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 99) for driving the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. In the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating a big hit) in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the big hit. It is performed when the game state is entered. The result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

In this second embodiment, the result of the special lottery includes a small hit. That is, unlike the first embodiment, the special lottery includes both a big hit determination and a small hit determination.

The small hit winning opening 560 is opened by operating the shutter 562 when the small hit game is executed in the small hit game state. A small hit winning opening solenoid 520 is arranged on the shutter 562 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 560, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit winning opening switch 521. When a game ball is detected by the small hit winning opening switch 521, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, 15) of game balls from the payout device 340. The game ball paid out from the payout device 340 is paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout outlet 63) through the payout port 61.

In the second embodiment, the same small hit winning opening 560 is opened depending on whether the result of the first special lottery is a "small hit" or the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit". When the result of the first special lottery was "small hit", the main CPU 101 set the opening time of the small hit winning opening 560 to, for example, 500 msec, and the result of the second special lottery was "small hit". In this case, the opening time of the small hit winning opening 560 is set to, for example, 1800 msec.

The opening time of the small hit winning opening 560 when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" and when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" is not limited to the above. However, according to the gist of the present invention, when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit", the small hit winning opening is higher than when the result of the first special lottery is a "small hit". It is preferable to open the small hit winning opening 560 in such a manner that the game ball can easily win a prize, such as by lengthening the opening time of the 560.

Further, in the second embodiment, the small hit winning opening 560 common to the case where the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" and the case where the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" is opened. However, it is not limited to this, and different attackers will be released depending on whether the result of the first special lottery is "small hit" and the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". You may.

The first starting port 420 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the hit determination. Is what gives. A first start port switch 421 is arranged at the first start port 420 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins the first starting port 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, three) of game balls from the payout device 340, and hits the first special symbol. Judgment (big hit judgment, small hit judgment) is performed. The game ball paid out from the payout device 340 is paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout outlet 63) through the payout port 61. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by left-handed.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at the lower part in the substantially center of the game area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and an opportunity for displaying the result of the hit determination on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later. Is what gives. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 99). When a game ball wins in the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 under a predetermined condition, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, one) of game balls from the payout device 340, and also performs a second process. Performs a hit judgment (big hit judgment, small hit judgment) of a special symbol. The game ball paid out from the payout device 340 is paid out to the upper plate 26 (or the lower plate 27 through the payout outlet 63) through the payout port 61. At the second starting port 440, it is always difficult or impossible to win a game ball because the blade member 4622, which will be described later, is closed. However, when the blade member 4622 is opened, the game ball can be easily won. .. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is left-handed.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a pair of left and right blade members 4622 that can rotate in the left-right direction, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 99), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the electric chew solenoid 4630 to the blade members 4622. (Not shown). The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4622 by the electric chew solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4622 while the blade member 4622 is being driven, the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4622) is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71. Will be.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for a normal lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as "normal hit determination") on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passing gate 49 is arranged directly above the first starting port 420, and is configured so that all the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 win the first starting port 420. However, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which all the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 pass through the first starting port 420, and most of the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 pass through the first starting port 420. It may be configured so that a small number of game balls do not win a prize in the first starting port 420.

Further, the passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 491 (see FIG. 99). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 491, the main CPU 101 determines the hit of the normal symbol. The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by left-handed striking.

A plurality of general winning openings 53 are arranged in the lower left and lower right of the game board unit 17, and when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531. NS. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 531, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout device 340, and the upper plate 26 (or the payout port 63) goes down through the payout port 61. It is paid out (discharged) to the plate 27). The general winning opening switch may be provided as a switch common to a plurality of general winning openings, or each general winning opening can detect which of the plurality of general winning openings has won a prize. It may be provided corresponding to.

In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 420 is three, the number of prize balls in the second starting port 440 is one, the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 53 is 15, and a small hit prize is won. The number of prize balls in the mouth 560 is set to 15, and the number of prize balls in the large winning mouth 540 is set to 15. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). When the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting ports or winning openings, the out port 57 is finally flowed in and discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 28 (see FIG. 97). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes the ordinary symbol display unit 71, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, and the first special symbol hold display unit 75 as the various display units. do.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of the determination (ordinary lottery) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to open the state based on the result of the determination (ordinary lottery). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary lottery) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary hit"), the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode (normal hit), it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern. The closed mode in which it is difficult to win a game ball in the second starting port 440 is changed to a mode in which winning is easy.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a displays the variation with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) of turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a big hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the second embodiment, the hit determination includes a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and a hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the round game in which the large winning opening 540 is opened is shifted to the big hit game state in which the game is executed for a predetermined number of rounds, and the result of the hit determination is a small hit. Is shifted to the small hit game state in which the small hit game in which the small hit winning opening 560 is opened is executed.

The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol displays the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol held (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the first special symbol"). The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a, 75b, 75c, and 75d. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol displays the number of hold of the variable display of the first special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b / 75c / 75d.

Although the details will be described later, the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol is not reserved. That is, when the game ball wins the second start opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start opening prize is valid, and if the second start opening prize is not valid, the second start Even if the random value (random value for jackpot judgment or symbol random value) described later is extracted (acquired) based on the winning of the mouth 440, it is discarded and these random values are used for the second special lottery described later. Never. The conditions for determining that the second starting opening winning is valid will be described later.

[2-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The main difference between FIG. 99 and FIG. 9 is that, for example, in FIG. 9, the small hit winning opening solenoid 520 and the small hit winning opening switch 521 are not connected to the main control circuit 100, whereas in FIG. 99, these are the main controls. The point that it is connected to the circuit 100, and in FIG. 9, the hold display unit 72 for the normal symbol and the hold display unit 76 for the second special symbol are connected to the main control circuit 100, whereas in FIG. 99, these are the main controls. The point is that it is not connected to the circuit 100.

As shown in FIG. 99, the pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls the game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / launch control circuit 300. , Power supply circuit 338, and.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and hold the written information even in a non-energized state. In the second embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data of the special symbol game.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off (power is turned off).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, and a blade member of a normal electric accessory 460. An electric chew solenoid 4630 that drives the 4622, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 491, a small hit winning opening switch 521, a large winning opening switch 541, a general winning opening switch 531 and a performance display. A monitor 334 or the like is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected to a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the amusement park. Unlike the first embodiment, the hold display unit for ordinary symbols and the hold display unit for second special symbols do not exist as a configuration, but they are connected to the main control circuit 100 so that various parts can be diverted to different models. Instead, a hold display unit for ordinary symbols and a hold display unit for second special symbols may exist.

[2-1-2-1. Hold area for start information]
Next, with reference to FIG. 100, a buffer area in which the start information of the special symbol is stored until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a configuration of a buffer area for storing start information of the main RAM 103, (A) a diagram showing an example thereof, and (B) a diagram showing another example.

In this specification, the fluctuation start condition of the special symbol, that is, the condition in which the special lottery can be executed is referred to as the fluctuation start condition.

As shown in FIG. 100A, the main RAM 103 has a hold area as a buffer area for storing the start information of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “first start information”) until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. However, it does not have a hold area for storing the start information of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second start information"). It will be described in detail below.

First, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first starting opening winning is valid, and if the first starting opening winning is valid, the first starting information is displayed. Save to hold area. If the first start opening prize is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (three in the second embodiment) as prize balls, but stores the acquired first start information in the holding area. Discard without. However, the first start information may not be acquired when the first start opening winning is not valid.

The hold area is an area for storing the first start information until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold so that a maximum of four can be held. Has an area.

The first start opening winning is determined to be valid if the condition for storing the first start information in one or more of the first hold area to the fourth hold area is satisfied. For example, the first hold area is determined. ~ When the first start information is stored in all of the fourth hold areas and there is no space, it is determined that the first start information is not valid.

When the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 transfers the first start information stored in the first hold area to a fluctuation start area (not shown) different from the hold area of the main RAM 103. The fluctuation start area is an area for storing start information to be used for a special lottery when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Therefore, when the first start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery using the first start information stored in the fluctuation start area, and the first special lottery is performed. Based on the result of, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed.

The fluctuation start condition is a condition that is satisfied when the special lottery and the fluctuation display of the special symbol can be executed. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, at least during the jackpot gaming state ( It does not hold during the small hit game state (including the interval), during the variable display of the special symbol (including the interval).

As described above, there is no area for storing the second start information acquired by winning the game ball to the second start port 440. When the game ball wins the second starting opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning is valid, and if the second starting opening winning is valid, the acquired second starting information is used. , Stored in the fluctuation start area described above. If the second start opening prize is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (one in the second embodiment) as prize balls, but stores the acquired second start information in the fluctuation start area. Discard without doing. However, the second start information may not be acquired when the second start opening winning is not valid.

The second start opening prize is determined to be valid only when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied.

When the second start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery using the second start information stored in the fluctuation start area, and the result of this second special lottery. The variable display of the second special symbol is executed based on.

The main CPU 101 can determine whether the start information stored in the fluctuation start area is the first start information or the second start information.

Next, another example of the buffer area in which the start information of the special symbol is stored until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied will be described with reference to FIG. 100 (B).

As shown in FIG. 100 (B), the main RAM 103 has a hold area for storing the first start information until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, and a temporary storage for temporarily storing the second start information although there is no hold function. Has an area. The processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is the same as in FIG. 100 (A), but the processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 is shown in FIG. 100 (A). Different from A).

When the game ball wins the second starting opening 440, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second starting opening winning is valid (that is, whether or not the fluctuation start condition is satisfied), and the second starting opening winning is won. If is valid, the second start information is saved in the temporary storage area. If the second start opening prize is not valid, the main CPU 101 pays out a predetermined number of game balls (one in the second embodiment) as prize balls, but saves the acquired second start information in the temporary storage area. Discard without doing.

When the second start information is stored in the temporary storage area, the main CPU 101 is stored in the temporary storage area in the same manner as the process of transferring the first start information stored in the first hold area to the variable start area. The process of transferring the second start information to the fluctuation start area is performed.

When the first start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery and the change display of the first special symbol using the first start information, and the first special lottery and the change display of the first special symbol are performed in the change start area. 2 When the start information is stored, the second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed using the second start information. As a result, the process of transferring the second start information stored in the temporary storage area to the fluctuation start area and the process of transferring the first start information stored in the first hold area to the fluctuation start area are standardized. It is possible to reduce the control load.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the hold area in which the first start information is stored and the first start information or the second start information are both buffer areas of the main RAM 103, but the main RAM 103 is not necessarily the main RAM 103. Is not limited to the one having the hold area and the fluctuation start area, for example, the memory built in the main CPU 101 may have the hold area and the fluctuation start area, and one of them may be used as the main RAM 103. The buffer area may be used as the buffer area of the above, and the other may be used as the area of the memory built in the main CPU 101.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the first start opening winning is valid, the first starting information is held in the holding area, and it is determined that the second starting opening winning is valid. If so, it is determined to be valid only when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. That is, the first start information is reserved, but the second start information is not reserved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing by the main CPU 101 when it is determined that the first start opening winning is valid may be the same as when it is determined that the second starting opening winning is valid. That is, it is configured so that neither the first start information nor the second start information is held, and even if the game ball wins the first start port 420, the main CPU 101 is set when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. As long as the first starting opening prize is determined to be valid, it may be determined.

[2-2. Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. The difference between FIG. 101 and FIG. 10 is that, in FIG. 10, the big hit determination is not performed as the hit determination process, but in FIG. 101, the big hit determination and the small hit determination are performed as the hit determination process.

As shown in FIG. 101, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" or "small hit" in a special symbol game, or when it becomes a "normal hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the game ball is paid out. Control processing becomes easier to perform.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various starting information (for example, jackpot determination random value, symbol random value, etc.) are displayed from various counters (for example, jackpot determination counter and symbol determination counter). Random value) is extracted (acquired). When the start information of the first special symbol is extracted, if the first start opening prize is valid, the extracted first start information is saved in the holding area, and if the first start opening prize is not valid, it is extracted. The first start information is discarded. Further, when the start information of the second special symbol is extracted, if the second start opening prize is valid, the extracted second start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, and if the second start opening prize is not valid. The extracted second start information is discarded without being stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 101).

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, for example, whether or not a certain condition such as whether or not a big hit game is in progress, whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and whether or not a variable display of a special symbol is being executed is satisfied. It is determined that the fluctuation start condition is satisfied when these certain conditions are satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the hit determination process (special lottery) of the special symbol is performed. In this special lottery, the random value for big hit judgment extracted from the big hit judgment counter is referred to, and the hit judgment of the special symbol is performed (first, the big hit judgment as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed, and the "big hit" is performed. If it is not, a small hit is determined as to whether or not it is a "small hit"). After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the hit determination of the special symbol described above are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, random numbers for reach determination and effect selection random numbers are extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random numbers, the result of the hit determination of the above-mentioned special symbol, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are used. Refers to and determines the variation pattern (variable display pattern) of the special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbol will be described in detail later, but the variation pattern table number is set with reference to the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107 described later), and the variation pattern corresponding to the set variation pattern table number is set. It is determined with reference to a table (see FIG. 108 described later).

Then, when the variable display control process is completed and the special symbol is displayed in a mode indicating "big hit", the big hit game control process controlled to the big hit game state is executed. Further, when the variation display control process is completed and the mode indicating "small hit" is displayed, the small hit game control process controlled to the small hit game state is executed. In the big hit game state and the small hit game state, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, when neither the mode showing the "big hit" nor the mode showing the "small hit" is displayed, neither the big hit game control process nor the small hit game control process is executed.

When the big hit game control process or the small hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state to the non-specific game state is performed. In the game state after the transition by the game state transition control process, the non-specific gaming state that is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state is managed.

As the non-specific gaming state, for example, in the above-mentioned jackpot determination, a gaming state in which a "big hit" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as a "normal gaming state") or a probability of being determined as a "big hit" is usually used. A gaming state that increases more than the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state"), and a gaming state in which the control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol are changed (hereinafter, "short-time game"). State ") and so on. After that, as the next game, a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, if the game ball starts and wins when the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, for example, during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, it is extracted at the time of the start winning. The first start information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol random value, etc.) is stored until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. In this way, storing the first start information until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied is called "holding".

That is, when the game ball starts and wins the first starting port 420 when the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, the execution of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is suspended and currently executed. After the variable display of the special symbol is completed, the variable display of the first special symbol on hold is started in order. In the following, the first start information about the first special symbol held is also referred to as a "holding ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start port prize and second start port prize) are provided, but when a game ball wins in the first start port 420. Only up to four can be suspended from executing the variable display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol is not suspended.

Although not shown in FIG. 101, the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment determines the winning of the holding ball (whether or not the “big hit” is won) based on the above-mentioned information on the holding ball, and further, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on a determination result, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 101). See the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination is performed as to whether or not the normal hit is set. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined normal hit determination result and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the fluctuation display control process for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed.

When the variation display control process is completed, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is obtained. In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "normal hit", a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of various winnings described above, in particular, the possibility of winning a special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. If it is determined that the "normal hit" is not obtained, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the game ball is paid out depending on the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the second embodiment, as the extraction method of various random number values, a soft random number method that generates a random number value within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random number values may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[2-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 108. FIG. 102 is an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit and a small hit of a pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 103 is an example of a special symbol determination table of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 104 is an example of each gaming state in a non-specific gaming state. FIG. 105 is an example of a big hit symbol judgment table when the judgment result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine is a big hit, and FIG. 106 is a small hit when the judgment result of the special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine is a small hit. FIG. 107 is an example of a symbol determination table, FIG. 107 is an example of a variation pattern table number setting table for a special symbol of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 108 is an example of a variation pattern table (variation time determination table) of a special symbol of a pachinko gaming machine. Tables such as a special symbol determination table, a big hit symbol determination table, a small hit symbol determination table, a variation pattern table number setting table, and a variation pattern table are stored in the main ROM 102, including a hit random number determination table (not shown). The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment are different from those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, and will be described below.

In explaining the probabilities of the big hit and the small hit shown in FIG. 102, first, the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 99 (the same applies hereinafter)) detects the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 97), it extracts a random number from the normal hit determination counter and uses the extracted random number. A normal hit determination is performed, and a variable display (variable display) of the normal symbol is performed based on the result of this normal hit determination. Details will be described later, but in the second embodiment, the probability of becoming a "normal hit" in the normal hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "normal hit probability") is approximately 100%. Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the extracted random numbers are discarded, and the normal hit determination and the execution of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol are not held. However, the normal hit probability is not limited to approximately 100%, and may be, for example, 100% or 95%. Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 during the variation display of the normal symbol, the normal hit determination and the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol may be held. The random number extraction and the normal hit determination are performed regardless of whether the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, in the big hit game state, or in the small hit game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, all the gaming balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 are configured to win a prize in the first starting port 420.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97), that is, the game ball has passed through the first start port switch 421, the jackpot determination counter determines the jackpot of the first special symbol. The first start information such as a random number is extracted, and if the first start opening winning is valid, the extracted first start information is saved in the hold area. Then, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the first start information stored in the first hold area of the hold area is transferred (stored) to the fluctuation start area, and the hit random number of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 103 is stored. With reference to the determination table (not shown), the first special lottery (big hit determination and small hit determination of the first special symbol) using the first start information is performed. On the other hand, if the first start opening winning is not valid, the main CPU 101 discards the extracted first start information. The extraction of the first start information is performed even when the big hit game state or the small hit game state is controlled, but the extracted first start information is held until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. The first special lottery and the variable display of the first special symbol are executed based on the fact that the first start start condition is satisfied.

When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97), that is, the game ball has passed through the second start port switch 441, the jackpot determination counter determines the jackpot of the second special symbol. The second start information such as a random number is extracted. If the second start opening winning is valid, the main CPU 101 stores the extracted second start information in the fluctuation start area without holding it, and stores the second special symbol hit random number determination table (stored in the main RAM 103). The second special lottery (big hit determination and small hit determination of the second special symbol) using the second start information is performed with reference to (not shown). On the other hand, if the second start opening winning is not valid, the main CPU 101 discards the extracted second start information. That is, the extraction of the second start information is performed even when the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the jackpot game state or the small hit game state is controlled. Since the second start opening prize in this case is not valid, the extracted second start information is discarded without being submitted to the second special lottery.

When the first special lottery is held, it is decided to be one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss". Also, when the second special lottery is held, it is determined to be one of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss". The value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "loss", and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data"). , "Small hit judgment value data" and "Loss judgment value data") are defined.

In the second embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 8192 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 8191. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate, and may be generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535, for example.

The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the game state is "high probability game state", the probability change flag is "1" (probability change flag ON), and when the game state is "low probability game state", the probability change flag is "0" (probability change flag OFF). ).

Further, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1" (time saving flag ON), and when it is "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0" (time saving flag OFF). Will be. In the time saving game state, the time saving number of times is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the time saving number of times is subtracted by 1 every time the special symbol changes once.

Although the details will be described later, the main CPU 101 determines the control and special symbol fluctuation time related to the normal electric accessory 460 in the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is ON and the non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is OFF. The controls involved are different. As the control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460, for example, the control of at least one of the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary hit probability can be controlled to the extent that the appearance cannot be grasped. And the non-time saving game state are different. Further, as a control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol, for example, the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is made different between the time-saving gaming state and the non-time-saving gaming state.

However, it is not essential that both the control related to the normal electric accessory 460 and the control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol are different between the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state. For example, in the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state, a) the control related to the normal electric accessory 460 may be the same, and only the control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be different, or b) the normal electric. The control related to the accessory 460 may be different and the control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be the same. C) Control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 (opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460, variation of the ordinary symbol) The control of only a part of (time, normal hit probability, etc.) may be different. In the case of (c) above, the control related to the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be the same or different between the time-saving game state and the non-time-saving game state.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 is in a big hit game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 540 is open-controlled is executed for a predetermined number of rounds, and a small hit game in which the small hit winning opening 560 is open-controlled. It is controlled to a state, or a non-specific gaming state that is neither a big hit gaming state nor a small hit gaming state. In the non-specific game state, there are a normal game state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, a high probability time saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time saving flag is ON, and a low probability time saving game in which the probability change flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON. There are a state and a high-probability non-time-saving game state in which the probability change flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF. Control to one of the time-saving gaming states. Details of each gaming state in the non-specific gaming state will be described later.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97) and extracts the first starting information such as the random number for determining the jackpot of the first special symbol, the first starting opening winning is obtained. Whether or not it is valid is determined, and if the first start opening winning is valid, the extracted first start information is held as the first start information until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the fluctuation start condition is satisfied and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, the first special lottery is performed to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Further, even if the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected and the first starting information is extracted, if the first starting opening winning is not valid, the extracted first starting is performed. Discard the information without holding it (not used in the first special lottery).

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97) and extracts the second starting information such as the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol, the second starting opening winning is obtained. Whether or not it is valid is determined, and if the second starting opening winning is valid, a second special lottery using the extracted second starting information is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In the second embodiment, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be "missing" is extremely small (for example, 1 / 8192). However, instead of this, the result of the second special lottery may not include "loss" (that is, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be "loss" may be 0). Further, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected and the second starting information is extracted, if the second starting opening winning is not valid, the extracted second starting is performed. Discard the information without using it for the second special lottery.

[2-3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 102, in the first special lottery, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the normal gaming state or the low probability short game state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 26/8192 (about 1/315) in setting 1, and setting 2 27/8192 (about 1/303), setting 3 28/8192 (about 1/293), setting 4 29/8192 (about 1/282), setting 5 30/8192 (Approximately 1/273), setting 6 is 31/8192 (approximately 1/264). Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in the high-probability short-time gaming state or the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 130/8192 (about 63 minutes) in setting 1. 1), setting 2 is 135/8192 (about 1/61), setting 3 is 140/8192 (about 1/59), setting 4 is 145/8192 (about 1/56), setting 5 Is 150/8192 (about 1/55), and setting 6 is 155/8192 (about 1/53). The small hit probability is common regardless of whether or not the probability variation flag is ON and the set value, and is 25/8192 (about 1/328) and the jackpot probability when the probability variation flag is OFF. The probabilities are almost the same. However, the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

Also, in the second special lottery, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value set. Specifically, when the jackpot probability is relatively low in the normal gaming state or the low probability short game state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 26/8192 (about 315 minutes) in setting 1. 1), setting 2 is 27/8192 (about 1/203), setting 3 is 28/8192 (about 1/293), setting 4 is 29/8192 (about 1/282), setting 5 Is 30/8192 (about 1/273), and setting 6 is 31/8192 (about 1/264). Further, when the jackpot probability is relatively high in the high-probability short-time gaming state or the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 130/8192 (about 63 minutes) in setting 1. 1), setting 2 is 135/8192 (about 1/61), setting 3 is 140/8192 (about 1/59), setting 4 is 145/8192 (about 1/56), setting 5 Is 150/8192 (about 1/55), and setting 6 is 155/8192 (about 1/53). The small hit probability is common regardless of whether or not the probability variation flag is ON and the set value, and is 8036/8192 (about 1 / 1.02). However, as shown in FIG. 102, the small hit probability of the second special lottery is significantly different from the small hit probability of the first special lottery.

The jackpot probability determined according to the setting is the same in the first special lottery and the second special lottery. That is, if the set values are the same, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are the same. For example, in the case of setting 3, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery is 28/8192 when the probability variation flag is OFF (140/8192 when the probability variation flag is ON), and this jackpot probability is the second special. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the lottery (28/8192 when the probability variation flag is OFF, 140/8192 when the probability variation flag is ON). However, the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

Further, also in the second embodiment, the set value has 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but it is not always necessary to be 6 stages, and any plurality of stages can be set arbitrarily.

[2-3-1. Special symbol judgment table]
As described above, FIG. 103 is an example of a special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The special symbol judgment table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 and the above-mentioned judgment value data. Based on this, it is referred to to determine the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol determined according to the hit type when it is a big hit or a small hit, and the "symbol specification command" is displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command to specify a symbol to be used. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

In the special symbol determination table (first special symbol) of the second embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "19", the main CPU 101 , The hit selection symbol command is determined to be "z0" (selection probability of "z0": 20/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA1". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "20" to "39", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z1" ("z1"). Selection probability of "z1": 20/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "51", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z2" ("z2"). Selection probability of "z2": 12/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "52" to "58", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z3" ("z3"). Selection probability of "z3": 7/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "59" to "64", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z4" ("z4"). Selection probability of "z4": 6/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "65" to "79", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z5" ("z5"). Selection probability of "z5": 15/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "80" to "89", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z6" ("z6"). Selection probability of "z6": 10/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "90" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z7" ("z7"). Selection probability of "z7": 10/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3".

Further, in the special symbol determination table (first special symbol), when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "3", the main CPU 101 hits. The time selection symbol command is determined to be "z8" (selection probability of "z8": 4/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "4" to "7", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z9" ( Selection probability of "z9": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "8" to "11", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z10" ( Selection probability of "z10": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "12" to "15", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z11" ( Selection probability of "z11": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "16" to "19", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z12" ( Selection probability of "z12": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "20" to "23", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z13" ( Selection probability of "z13": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "24" to "27", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z14" ( Selection probability of "z14": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "28" to "31", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z15" ( Selection probability of "z15": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "32" to "35", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z16" ( Selection probability of "z16": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA4". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "36" to "39", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z17" ( Selection probability of "z17": 4/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA5". Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z18" ( Selection probability of "z18": 60/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA6".

When the loss determination value data is obtained in the special symbol determination table (first special symbol), the main CPU 101 does not determine any of the hit selection symbol commands, and determines the symbol designation command as "zA7". do.

Further, in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "54", the main CPU 101 is hit. The selected symbol command is determined to be "z19" (selection probability of "z19": 55/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "55" to "59", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z20" ("z20"). Selection probability of "z20": 5/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "60" to "62", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z21" ("z21"). Selection probability of "z21": 3/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "63" to "64", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z22" ("z22"). Selection probability of "z22": 2/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA2". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "65" to "79", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z23" ("z23"). Selection probability of "z23": 15/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "80" to "89", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z24" ("z24"). Selection probability of "z24": 10/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3". Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "90" to "99", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command to "z25" ("z25"). Selection probability of "z25": 10/100), the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA3".

Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), the main CPU 101 wins even if the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99". The time selection symbol command is determined to be "z26" (selection probability of "z26": 100/100), and the symbol designation command is determined to be "zA8".

When the loss determination value data is obtained in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol), the main CPU 101 does not determine any of the hit selection symbol commands, and sets the symbol designation command to "zA9". To decide.

[2-3-2. Each game state in the non-specific game state]
Here, each gaming state in the non-specific gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. 104. As described above, FIG. 104 is a table for explaining an example of each gaming state in the non-specific gaming state. The specific gaming states shown in FIG. 104 include a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. These four gaming states are hereinafter referred to as gaming states (major classification).

As shown in FIG. 104, when the probability variation flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major classification) to the normal gaming state. Further, when the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is ON, the main CPU 101 controls the game state (major classification) to the high probability time reduction game state. Further, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the main CPU 101 controls the game state (major classification) to the low probability time reduction game state. Further, when the probability change flag is ON and the time reduction flag is OFF, the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state (major classification) to the high probability non-time saving gaming state.

In the above-mentioned normal game state, as a game state (middle classification), the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is the lowest in the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as "LG state"). ), And a high game state (hereinafter referred to as "HG state") in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is higher than that of LG. However, even in the HG state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is smaller than 1.

Further, in the above HG state, as a game state (sub-category), a big high game state (hereinafter, "BHG state") in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is the highest in the normal game state. The expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is lower than the BHG state but higher than the LG state (hereinafter referred to as "MHG state"), and the firing per unit time. There is a small high game state (hereinafter referred to as "SHG state") in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls is lower than that of MHG but higher than that of LG state. It should be noted that which of the BHG state, the MHG state, and the SHG state is controlled as the game state (subclassification) is determined by the game mode described later. For example, when the hit selection symbol command shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) wins a small hit of "z8", the main CPU 101 sets the game mode to 8 after the small hit game state ends. It is set and controlled to the SHG state from the end of the small hit game state to the execution of 100 games (variation display of special symbols). Further, when the hit selection symbol command shown in the small hit symbol determination table wins the small hit of "z13", the main CPU 101 sets the game mode after the small hit game state ends to 13 and sets the small hit. From the end of the game state, it is controlled to the SHG state until 10 games are executed, then it is controlled to the MHG state until 10 games are executed, and then BHG until 10 games are executed. Control to state.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 has an expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the BHG state of about 90%, and an expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the MHG state. It is controlled so that the expected value of the number of prize balls is approximately 70% and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time in the SHG state is approximately 50%. Although the details will be described later, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is realized by changing the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state. Needless to say, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the award for the number of launched balls per unit time is set as a normal gaming state (major classification) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1. By providing a plurality of gaming states (LG state, HG state (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state)) in which the expected value of the number of balls is different, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest in the normal gaming state which tends to be monotonous. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is set as a normal gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is less than 1. In addition to the smallest LG state, there are three HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is different, but the number of HG states is It does not necessarily have to be three, but may be one or only two, or four or more. Even in such a case, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the normal game state, which tends to be monotonous.

The high-probability short-time game state and the low-probability short-time game state are not classified into the middle-class or small-class game states. In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the high-accuracy time-short game state and the low-accuracy time-short game state to 30% to 50%, which is higher than that in the LG state. To control. However, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state or the low-accuracy time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the number of prize balls is not increased by changing the frequency of control to the small-hit game state, for example, the second starting port 440. By increasing the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls are won, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time in the high-probability time-short game state and the low-probability time-short game state is approximately 100% (for example, 95). ~ 100%) may be set.

When the time saving game is digested in the low probability time saving game state (when the time saving counter becomes 0), the probability change flag is turned off and the time saving flag is turned off, so that the main CPU 101 controls to the HG state or the LG state according to the game mode. ..

Further, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the main CPU 101 increases the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state higher than that in the HG state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1. It is controlled to the game state (hereinafter referred to as "RG state").

In the second embodiment, as shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), the HG counter is set to 100,000 when the probability variation flag is set to ON. The RG state will continue unless the game mode is set again by winning the "big hit". That is, in the second embodiment, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state and the RG state are synonymous. In this way, once controlled to the RG state, the RG state continues until the "big hit" is won, so the RG state is paid out during one RG state from the control to the RG state to the end of the RG state. There is a possibility that the number of prize balls to be won will be larger than the number of prize balls paid out during one big hit game state from the control of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. Moreover, if a jackpot with the probability change flag turned ON is won in the game state after the jackpot game state ends, the RG state is further controlled immediately after the jackpot game state ends or after the time-saving game is digested. The RG state is a gaming state that may be more advantageous to the player than the jackpot gaming state.

When the time saving game is digested in the high probability time saving game state (when the time saving counter becomes 0), the probability change flag is turned on and the time saving flag is turned off. As shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), the HG counter is set to 100000 when the jackpot is won, in which the probability change flag is set to ON after the jackpot game state ends (hole). When the time-saving game is digested in the high-accuracy time-saving game state (because the HG counter does not become 0 during the business hours of Become.

[2-3-3. Big hit symbol judgment table]
As described above, FIG. 105 is an example of a jackpot symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit symbol determination table, and according to the hit selection symbol command, the number of rounds and the big hit game are completed and the game shifts to the non-specific game state. Whether or not to turn on the probability change flag and the time reduction flag in the game state, the number of time reductions, the game mode, and the HG counter are set. The column of "game progress pattern" in FIG. 105 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. Further, the column of "selection rate" in FIG. 105 shows the selection rate of each hit selection symbol command determined with reference to FIG. 103.

The game mode is used when determining the variation pattern table number of the variation pattern table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, as shown in the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107) described later. As shown in the big hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 105) and the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) described later, the mode is determined according to the hit selection symbol command.

Further, the HG counter is a counter that manages the number of games from the HG state or the RG state to the LG state (the HG state, the RG state and the LG state will be described later), and is a game (variation display of a special symbol). Is subtracted each time is executed. However, the HG counter and the time saving counter described later are not subtracted at the same time, and even if the game is executed, when the time saving flag is ON, the time saving counter is subtracted without subtracting the HG counter, and the time saving flag is set. Only when it is OFF, the HG counter is subtracted when the game is executed.

In the jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol) of the second embodiment, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 101 has 10 rounds, the probability variation flag is ON, and the time reduction flag is OFF (time reduction number 0). , Game mode 1, HG counter 100000 is set (this jackpot is hereinafter referred to as "MAX jackpot"). In this case, after the jackpot game state of 10R is completed, the game immediately shifts to the RG state without performing the time saving game. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag OFF (time reduction number 0), the game mode 1, and the HG counter 100000. RUSH jackpot "). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the game immediately shifts to the RG state without performing the time saving game. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, game mode 2, and the HG counter 100000 (this jackpot is referred to as "time reduction" below. 4 times RUSH jackpot "). In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 24, the game mode 3, and the HG counter 100000. 24 times RUSH jackpot "). In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed 24 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 54, the game mode 4, and the HG counter 100000. 54 times RUSH jackpot "). In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed 54 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 5, and the HG counter 0. It is called "4 times normal jackpot"). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the LG state is entered.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 6, and the HG counter 100. 4 times SHG jackpot "). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the SHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, this SHG state ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 7, and the HG counter 100. 4 times BHG jackpot "). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the BHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, this BHG state ends.

Further, in the jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol), when the hit selection symbol command is "z19", the main CPU 101 has 4, the number of rounds, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag OFF (time reduction number 0), and the game mode. 1. Set the HG counter 100000 (RUSH jackpot). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the game immediately shifts to the RG state without performing the time saving game. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z20", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, game mode 2, and the HG counter 100000 (time reduction 4 times RUSH jackpot). .. In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z21", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 24, the game mode 3, and the HG counter 100000 (time reduction 24 times RUSH jackpot). .. In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed 24 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z22", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 54, the game mode 4, and the HG counter 100000 (time reduction 54 times RUSH jackpot). .. In this case, after the jackpot game state of 4R is completed, the time saving game is executed 54 times, and then the state shifts to the RG state. The RG state continues until a big hit is won, and even if a small hit is won, it does not end.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z23", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 5, and the HG counter (time reduction 4 times normal jackpot). In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the LG state is entered.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z24", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 6, and the HG counter 100 (time reduction 4 times SHG jackpot). .. In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the SHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, this SHG state ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z25", the main CPU 101 sets the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, the time reduction number 4, the game mode 7, and the HG counter 100 (time reduction 4 times BHG jackpot). .. In this case, after the 4R jackpot game state is completed, the time-saving game is executed four times, and then the state shifts to the BHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, this BHG state ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the gaming state controlled after the jackpot game state ends differs depending on the jackpot symbol (hit symbol command), but the jackpot symbol (hit time selection symbol) is different. The command) is not limited to the number shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (FIG. 105). For example, in place of or in addition to the jackpot symbol (hit time selection symbol command) of the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (FIG. 105), the specified number of times (hereinafter, "ceiling game number"" After the game (variation display of the special symbol) is executed, for example, a jackpot symbol having a so-called ceiling function controlled to the HG state (100 times) may be provided.

As a jackpot symbol having a ceiling function, for example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the jackpot symbol A (number of rounds 4) is controlled to "510 ceiling games in the LG state → 100 games in the HG state". , Probability change flag OFF, Time reduction flag OFF, Time reduction number 0, HG counter 610), After the big hit game state is completed, "Game in low probability time reduction game state is 4 times → Ceiling game in LG state is 510 times → HG The jackpot symbol B (number of rounds 4, probability variation flag OFF, time reduction flag ON, time reduction number 4, HG counter 614), in which the game in the state is controlled to "100 times", after the jackpot game state is completed, "low probability time reduction game" The jackpot symbol C (4 rounds, probabilistic flag OFF, time reduction flag ON, time reduction number 100) is controlled to "100 games in the state → 510 ceiling games in the LG state → 100 games in the HG state" , HG counter 710) may be provided. When a big hit having a ceiling function is won in this way, it is possible to reduce the mental burden on the player even if the big hit does not occur for a long time.

[2-3-4. Small hit symbol judgment table]
As described above, FIG. 106 is an example of a small hit symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. When the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 refers to the small hit symbol determination table, and sets the opening pattern, the game mode, and the HG counter of the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the hit selection symbol command. set. The column of "game progress pattern" in FIG. 106 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. Further, the column of "selection rate" in FIG. 106 shows the selection rate of each hit selection symbol command determined with reference to FIG. 103.

In the small hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) of the second embodiment, when the hit selection symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 8, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the SHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the SHG state, the SHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the SHG state ends, this SHG state ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 9, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the MHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the MHG state, the MHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the MHG state ends, this MHG state ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 10, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the state shifts to the BHG state (up to 100 times). When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the BHG state, the BHG state ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set before the BHG state ends, this BHG state ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 101 sets the opening pattern 1, the game mode 11, and the HG counter 110. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game progresses in a predetermined game progress pattern of "LG state 10 times → SHG state (maximum 100 times)". When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the SHG state among the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z12", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 12, and the HG counter 130. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game proceeds in a predetermined game progress pattern of "LG state 30 times → MHG state (maximum 100 times)". When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 100 times in the MHG state among the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z13", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 13, and the HG counter 30. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game progresses in a predetermined game progress pattern of "SHG state 10 times → MHG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times". When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 10 times in the last BHG state of the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the LG state is entered. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z14", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 14, and the HG counter 20. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game progresses in a predetermined game progress pattern of "SHG state 10 times → MHG state 10 times". When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 10 times in the BHG state among the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z15", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 15, and the HG counter 100. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game progresses in the game progress pattern of “LG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times → LG state 10 times → BHG state 70 times”. When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 70 times in the BHG state among the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z16", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 16, and the HG counter 20. In this case, after the small hit game state is completed, the game progresses in a predetermined game progress pattern of “LG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times”. When the game (variation display of the special symbol) is performed 10 times in the BHG state among the above game progress patterns, the game in the above game progress pattern ends and the state shifts to the LG state. If a big hit or a small hit is won and the HG counter is set during the game in the above game progress pattern, the game in this game progress pattern ends.

The game progress pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z15" and the game progress pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z16" are halfway (LG state). 10 times → After 10 times of BHG state, until transition to LG state) is the same pattern.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z17", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 17, and the HG counter 100,000. In this case, after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 101 controls to the BHG state. This BHG state can be continued until the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes a "big hit" and is controlled to the big hit game state. However, if the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes a "small hit" and is controlled to the small hit game state before the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes a "big hit". , This BHG state ends. When the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z17", in the BHG state after the small hit game state ends, the first special lottery is performed. Even if the result is a "small hit", the main CPU 101 may execute a control to continue the BHG state without newly setting the HG counter. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", in principle, the HG counter is reset based on the hit selection symbol command. For example, the hit selection symbol command is "z17". When a specific condition such as being controlled to the BHG state is satisfied by winning the winning, the main CPU 101 may perform control to carry over the BHG state without resetting the HG counter.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 1, the game mode 0, and the HG counter 0. In this case, after the small hit game state ends, it immediately shifts to the LG state without shifting to the RG state and the HG state.

In this way, by making the game progress pattern different according to the small hit symbol (hit selection symbol command), it is possible to give variation to the game progress pattern in the normal game state, and the normal game tends to be monotonous. It is possible to enhance the game entertainment in the state.

In this specification, a small hit in which the BHG state continues until a big hit or a small hit is won, such as the hit selection symbol command "z17", is referred to as a super small hit, and the hit selection symbol command is "z8". , "Z9", "z10", "z13" and "z14", the small hit that shifts to the HG state where the number of times is determined immediately after the small hit game state ends is called the first small hit. The selected symbol command does not shift to the HG state immediately after the small hit game state ends like "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16", but HG after playing the game in the LG state. The small hit that shifts to the state is called the second small hit. Further, a small hit in which the hit selection symbol command does not shift to the HG state such as "z18" is referred to as a non-HG small hit.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, the main CPU 101 determines the game state after the small hit game state ends until the big hit or the small hit is won. Although it is controlled to the state, it is not always necessary to control it to the BHG state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is higher than the LG state like the MHG state and the SHG state. It may be controlled to the state.

Further, for example, after the small hit game state is completed, the first super small hit controlled to the BHG state, the second super small hit controlled to the MHG state, and the third super small hit controlled to the SHG state. A plurality of super small hits having different degrees of profit for the player may be prepared, and the main CPU 101 may be configured to control one of the super small hits according to the small hit symbol.

Further, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", that is, when the small hit determination value data is obtained in the special symbol determination table (second special symbol) of FIG. 103 (the hit selection symbol command is "26". ”), The main CPU 101 sets the open pattern 2 and the game mode 0, and does not set the HG counter.

[2-3-5. Fluctuation pattern table number setting table]
As described above, FIG. 107 is an example of the variation pattern table number setting table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables (see FIG. 108 described later) for determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol are prepared, and the fluctuation pattern table number setting table has the above-mentioned plurality of fluctuations. This is a table for determining the table number to be referred to when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol among the pattern tables.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the details will be described later, but the main CPU 101 sets the result of the first special lottery (loss, small hit, big hit), whether or not the probability change flag is ON, and the time saving flag. Whether or not it is ON, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored (whether or not the first special symbol is held), the game mode, and the HG counter (the remaining number of times (hereinafter, the notation of "remaining number of times" is omitted) The variation pattern table number is determined based on all or part of the information of)), the reach determination random number, and the hit selection symbol command.

When the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern table number to 13 when the result of the second special lottery is lost, and when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Determines the variable pattern table number to 14, and when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, determines the variable pattern table number to "15".

As shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106) and the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107), when the game mode is 0, the game mode is 11 and the HG counter is 100. When the game mode is 12 and the HG counter is 100 to 129, the game mode is 15, and the HG counters are 70 to 79 and 90 to 99, the game mode is 16. When the HG counter is 10 to 19, the main CPU 101 controls the LG state. That is, in the LG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "3" based on the reach determination random number.

Further, when the game mode is 10 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, when the game mode is 7 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 13 and the HG counter is 0 to 9. When the game mode is 14 and the HG counter is 0 to 9, the game mode is 15 and the HG counters are 0 to 69 and 80 to 89, the game mode is 16 and HG. When the counter is 0 to 9 and the game mode is 17, the main CPU 101 controls to the BHG state. That is, in the BHG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "6" based on the reach determination random number.

Further, when the game mode is 9 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, when the game mode is 12 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 13 and the HG counter is 10 to 19. At this time, the main CPU 101 controls to the MHG state. That is, in the MHG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "5" based on the reach determination random number.

Further, when the game mode is 6 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, when the game mode is 8 and the HG counter is 0 to 99, the game mode is 11 and the HG counter is 0 to 99. At this time, when the game mode is 13 and the HG counters are 20 to 29, and when the game mode is 14 and the HG counters are 10 to 19, the main CPU 101 controls the SMG state. That is, in the SMG state, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "2" or "4" based on the reach determination random number.

In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", the mode of the small hit gaming state in which the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in the opening pattern 1 is the mode in which the result of the first special lottery is. It is the same regardless of the small hit symbol (hit time selection symbol command) when it becomes "small hit". However, regarding the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol in the game state after the small hit game state is completed, it depends on the small hit symbol when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit". By making the variation pattern number of the first special symbol different, the expected value of the length of the period in which the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid can be made different. In this way, when the result of the first special lottery becomes "small hit", in the game state after the small hit game state ends, when the result of the first special lottery becomes "small hit". Depending on the small hit symbol, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state can be changed based on the result of the second special lottery being "small hit". That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", in the game state after the small hit game state is finished, the small hit symbol when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit". By making the variation pattern table of the first special symbol different according to the above, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time can be made different.

Further, in the high-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time-saving flag is ON, and in the low-probability time-saving game state in which the probability variation flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is ON, the variation pattern table number is "11. Is decided.

Further, in the high-probability non-time-saving game state (RG state) in which the probability variation flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, the variation pattern table number is determined to be "12". In this case, since the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is as short as 600 msec, when the jackpot game state ends and immediately shifts to the RG state, even if the start information of the first special symbol is held in the hold area, the relevant The first special lottery using the start information related to the hold is immediately digested. Therefore, even if the jackpot game state ends and immediately shifts to the RG state, it is difficult to determine that the second start opening winning is not valid because the first start information is reserved.

If the jackpot symbols (hit time selection symbol command) of the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol include the above-mentioned jackpot symbols A to C as jackpot symbols having a ceiling function, they vary. It is necessary to be able to determine the variable pattern table number even when the pattern table number setting table is any of the jackpot symbols A to C. For example, in the case of the jackpot symbol A, depending on whether the HG counter is "0 to 99" (HG state 100 times) or "100 to 609" (ceiling game 510 times in the LG state), Set the fluctuation pattern table number. In the case of the jackpot symbol B, the HG counter is "0 to 99" (HG state 100 times), "100 to 609" (ceiling game 510 times in the LG state), and "610 to 613". "(4 times until the time saving number of times is exhausted), and the fluctuation pattern table number is set. In the case of the jackpot symbol C, the HG counter is "0 to 99" (HG state 100 times), "100 to 609" (ceiling game 510 times in the LG state), and "610 to 709". "(100 times until the time saving number of times is exhausted), and the variation pattern table number is set.

[2-3-6. Fluctuation pattern table]
As described above, FIG. 108 is an example of a variation pattern table (variation time determination table of the special symbol) of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table of the determined variation pattern table number, and determines the variation pattern based on the effect selection random number according to the set value. When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation pattern specification command and the fluctuation time are also determined at the same time. The column of "effect content" in FIG. 108 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and is an effect image (for example, a decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. (Variation mode) and the content of the voice (for example, the fluctuation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 by the sub CPU 201 are shown.

The effect selection random number range shown in FIG. 108 is a random number used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each set value. When a game ball wins a prize in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see, for example, FIG. 97), the main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter, and selects the extracted effect. Random numbers are stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table corresponding to the variation pattern table number determined with reference to FIG. 107, and determines the variation pattern and the variation pattern designation command based on the effect selection random number. However, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 97) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201).

In addition, the reach effect A shown in FIG. 108 is a reach effect indicating that the result of the first special lottery may be a big hit, and the reach effect B is a possibility that the result of the first special lottery is a small hit other than the super small hit. Reach production indicating that there is a possibility, reach production C indicates that the result of the first special lottery may be a super small hit, and reach production D is a possibility that the result of the first special lottery is a MAX jackpot. It is a reach production that shows that there is.

Further, in the second embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and is common to setting 5 and setting 6. However, it is not limited to this, and all the setting values may be different.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is "05H", the fluctuation pattern designation command of "83H05H" is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, the symbol designation command determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[2-4. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.
[2-4-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes the start opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting port winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 110.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit winning opening passage detection process (step S64). In the small hit winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the small hit winning opening 560 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S65). In the ball passing detector passing detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (not shown) is based on the fact that the passing detection of the game ball to the passing gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 97) is detected by the ball passing detector (not shown). Random value) is extracted. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[2-4-2. Start opening prize detection process]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (see FIG. 99) (step S731). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (YES in step S731), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S732. When the game ball is not detected by the second start port switch 441 (NO in step S731), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S738.

In step S732, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S733, the main CPU 101 extracts the second start information (various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol and the symbol random number), and sets the payout information according to the second start opening winning. conduct. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, one prize ball is paid out based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second start opening winning is valid (step S734). The conditions for determining that the second starting opening winning is valid are as described above. Then, if the second start opening winning is valid (YES in step S734), the main CPU 101 stores the extracted second start information in the fluctuation start area (step S735), and moves to step S736. On the other hand, if the second start opening winning is not valid (NO in step S734), the main CPU 101 discards the extracted second start information without executing the processes of steps S735 and S736, and proceeds to step S738.

In step S736, the main CPU 101 sets the second special symbol variation start flag to ON. The reason why the second special symbol change start flag is set to ON when the second start opening winning is valid is to ensure that the second special lottery and the change display of the second special symbol are always executed. ..

In step S738, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (step S738). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S738), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S739. When the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 421 (NO in step S738), the main CPU 101 ends the start port winning detection process.

In step S739, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as in step S732.

In step S740, the main CPU 101 extracts the first start information (various random numbers such as the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol and the symbol random number), and sets the payout information according to the first start opening prize. conduct. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls in the first starting port 420 is three.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first start opening winning is valid (step S741). As described above, the condition for determining that the first starting opening winning is valid is that the number of holdings of the first starting opening winning (the number of holdings of the first special symbol) is less than 4, and 4 is used. If there is, it is determined that the first starting opening prize is not valid. When the first start opening winning is valid (YES in step S741), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S742. When the number of reserved balls is 4 (NO in step S741), the main CPU 101 discards the first start information extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420, and ends the starting opening winning detection process. do.

In step S742, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the first start information extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420 in the hold area until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied (step S743). As a result, the variation display of the first special symbol for the extracted first start information is suspended until the variation start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening winning (step S744). The hold number increase command of the first start opening winning is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

When the game ball winning in the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check process in step S732 or the setting check process in step S739 is performed. You may try to do only one of them.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 421 (YES in step S738), the number of reserved first start port prizes is four (NO in step S741). Even so, the main CPU 101 discards the first start information extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 without transmitting the hold number overflow command of the first starting port winning to the sub control circuit 200. Then, the start opening prize detection process is completed. This is because the setting value suggestion effect described later can be effectively performed when the time saving flag is OFF in the gaming state.

When the setting check process (see FIG. 32) described in the first embodiment is performed in the second embodiment in which the acquired second start information is not held, regardless of whether or not the second start opening winning is valid. , The second start opening 440 may be performed based on the winning of the game ball, or may be performed only when the second starting opening winning is valid.

[2-4-3. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process of FIG. 111 is different from the special symbol control process of FIG. 34 on the premise that the second start information can be held in FIG. 30, whereas the second start information is not held in FIG. 111. (In particular, the special symbol change start area check process in step S1012) and the process related to the small hit game state are not performed in FIG. 40, whereas the process related to the small hit game state is performed in FIG. 111. It is a point.

The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “11”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S1011). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S1012 to S1023 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S1012 to S1023 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S1012 to S1023. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol change start area check process (step S1012). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol variation start area check process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the second start information is stored in the variation start area. , When the second start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, the result of the second special lottery obtained by the second start opening winning detection process, the result of determining the stop symbol of the second special symbol, the second special Acquire the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. When the second start information is not stored in the fluctuation start area, the number of reserved fluctuation displays of the first special symbol is checked, and the result of the first special lottery obtained in the first start opening winning detection process is as a result. The determination result of the stop symbol of the first special symbol, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (step S1013) described later, and corresponds to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the fluctuation time of the special symbol to be set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variation time management process described later is executed after the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the second start information is not stored in the fluctuation start area and the number of the first start information held in the hold area of the first special symbol is "0" (when there is no hold ball). , The main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol change start area check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 112.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S1013). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol described later on the control status flag. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S1014) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S1013 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S1014). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S1013 has elapsed, the special lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the result is a "big hit", and when it is determined that the result is not a "big hit", it is determined whether or not it is a "small hit". Then, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S1015) described later, and sets the small hit. The time corresponding to the start interval is set in the waiting time timer, and the opening pattern (opening pattern of the small hit winning opening 560) according to the type of the special symbol is set. For example, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106), it is relatively difficult for the main CPU 101 to win, for example, a game ball when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit". When the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in the opening pattern 1 (for example, the opening time of a maximum of 500 msec) and the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", it is relatively easy to win a game ball, for example. The small hit winning opening 560 is opened in a clear opening pattern 2 (for example, an opening time of a maximum of 1800 msec).

When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("06") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S1018) described later, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. In this way, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval or the big hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 has elapsed, the small hit start interval management process or the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("11") indicating the special symbol game end process (step S1023) described later. set. That is, in this case, neither the small hit start interval management process (step S1015) nor the big hit start interval management process (step S1018) is executed, and the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. .. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

When the control state flag is set to a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S1015), the main CPU 101 performs the small hit start interval management process (step S1015). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 has elapsed. In order to open the small hit winning opening 560, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the small hit attacker (step S1016), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the small hit winning opening 560 (“04)”. For example, 1.8 seconds) is set in the small hit attacker opening time timer. That is, by this process, the small hit attacker opening process (step S1016) described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit attacker opening process (step S1016). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process of opening the small hit attacker, the main CPU 101 says that the number of small hit attacker winning counters is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time has elapsed (the small hit attacker opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the small hit winning opening 560. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit end interval (small hit end interval time) in the waiting time timer. .. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the small hit end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 performs the small hit end interval process (step S1017). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed. ("11") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S1017.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S1018), the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot start interval management process (step S1018). In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a big prize when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S1014 elapses. In order to open the mouth 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“07)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S1019), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S1019). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S1020) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S1020 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S1020). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“08”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“09”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process (step S1021) in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1020 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S1021). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“09”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S1019) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S1022). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“10”). 11 ”) is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S1022.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, the small hit game state ends, or the result of the special lottery is "missing" (step S1023). ..

When the above-mentioned special symbol game end process is the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 clears the fluctuation start area, subtracts "1" from the data indicating the number of pending numbers, and ends the second special symbol game. If it is a process, the fluctuation start area is cleared. Further, when the special symbol game end process is the first special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 updates the hold area of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol change start area check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S1023, the above-mentioned special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is "miss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", and " Set in the order of "02" and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), special symbol display time management process (step S1014), and special symbol game end process (step S1014). S1023) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

Further, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", and "02". , Set in the order of "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), special symbol display time management process (step S1014), and small hit start interval management process (step S1014). Step S1015) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04" and "05" when the transition control to the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned small hit attacker opening processing (step S1016), and executes the small hit game state.

If the end condition of the small hit game state is satisfied during the small hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit attacker opening process (step S1016) and the small hit end interval process (step S1017) in this order at predetermined timings, and ends the small hit game state.

Further, when the game state is neither the big hit game state nor the small hit game state and the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", "02", Set in the order of "06". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol variation start area check process (step S1012), special symbol variation time management process (step S1013), special symbol display time management process (step S1014), and jackpot start interval management process (step S1014). S1018) is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", and "09" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S1019), monitoring processing of residual balls in the large winning opening (step S1020), and waiting time management processing before reopening of the large winning opening (step S1021) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", "10", and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S1019), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S1020), big hit end interval processing (step S1022), and special symbol game end processing (step S1023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

[2-4-4. Special symbol change start area check process]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation start area check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol change start area check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S1211).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol variation start area check process (step S1212). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S1212), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol change start area check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S1212), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1213.

In step S1213, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol variation start flag is ON. When the main CPU 101 determines that the second special symbol change start flag is ON (YES in step S1213), the second start information is already stored in the change start area, so the process proceeds to step S1214, and the second step is performed. 2 The special symbol change start flag is cleared, that is, set to OFF (step S1214). On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol change start flag is not ON (NO in step S1213), the process proceeds to step S1215.

In step S1215, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of stored start information) of the first start opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is larger than "0". That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the hold area (first hold area to fourth hold area) of the first special symbol provided in the main RAM 103. In the first hold area to the fourth hold area, the first start information for four times held is stored. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holdings of the first starting opening prize is larger than "0" (YES in step S1215), the process proceeds to step S1216, and the number of holdings of the first starting opening winning is larger than "0". If it is determined that there is no (that is, the number of reserved first start prizes is "0") (NO in step S1215), the process proceeds to step S1224.

In step S1216, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of reserved first start opening prizes.

Next, in step S1217, the main CPU 101 performs a transfer process of the first start information. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data related to the first start information stored in the first hold area to the fluctuation start area, and at the same time, the first start stored in the second hold area to the fourth hold area. The data related to the information is shifted to the first reserved area to the third reserved area, respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1218.

In step S1218, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag.

In step S1219, the main CPU 101 performs a hit determination process (special lottery) for a special symbol using the start information stored in the fluctuation start area. In this process, when the second start information is stored in the fluctuation start area, the main CPU 101 performs a second special lottery using the second start information, and stores the first start information in the fluctuation start area. If so, the first special lottery will be conducted using this first start information. In this hit determination process, the main CPU 101 uses a hit determination table (FIG.) corresponding to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the jackpot determination random value stored in the fluctuation start area. Refer to (not shown) to acquire the judgment value data. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a "big hit" (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data, and if it is not a "big hit", it determines whether or not it is a "small hit". Judgment (small hit judgment) is made, and if it is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", it is judged as "missing".

In this way, when the second special symbol change start flag is ON, the second special lottery and the change display of the second special symbol are always executed.

Next, in step S1220, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) corresponding to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and makes a hit selection symbol command and a symbol designation command. To get. Then, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a small hit, the contents of the big hit (number of rounds, probability change) corresponding to the acquired hit selection symbol command are referred to by referring to the big hit symbol determination table or the small hit symbol determination table. Set the flag, time saving flag, time saving number of times, game mode, HG counter) or the content of the small hit (opening pattern of the small hit winning opening 560, game mode, HG counter). The main CPU 101 transmits the acquired symbol designation command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, in step S1221, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern table number with reference to the variation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107), and the variation pattern table corresponding to the determined variation pattern table number (see FIG. 108). To determine the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to. The details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later.

Next, in step S1222, the main CPU 101 sets in the waiting time timer the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of step S1221. After that, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol effect start command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 (step S1223), and ends the special symbol variation start area check process.

Further, in step S1224, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start area check process.

[2-4-5. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation start area check process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S1311, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination process (the type of the special symbol for which the hit determination process was performed in step S1219 is the first special symbol). When the hit determination process is the hit determination process of the first special symbol (YES in step S1311), the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312), and performs the line in step S1219. When the hit determination process is the hit determination process of the second special symbol (NO in step S1311), the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315). When the variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312) or the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315) is completed, the process proceeds to step S1316, the process of step S1316 is performed, and then the special symbol variation pattern setting process is performed. The details of the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1312) and the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process (step S1315) will be described later.

In step S1316, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) of the variation pattern table number set in step S1312 or step S1315, and refers to the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both, for example, FIG. (See 97), the variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command, and the variation time are determined based on the effect selection random number extracted from the effect selection counter when the game ball wins a prize. For example, when the variation pattern table number is set to "5", the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol as normal variation A if the random number for effect selection is "40 (settings 1 and 2)". If the random number for effect selection is "60 (settings 1 and 2)", the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined to be normal variation B, and if the random number for effect selection is "80 (settings 1 and 2)", the special symbol The fluctuation pattern is usually determined to be fluctuation C. Since the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the fluctuation time correspond to each other, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the fluctuation time are determined at the same time. The main CPU 101 transmits the determined fluctuation pattern designation command to the sub control circuit 200.

[2-4-6. 1st special symbol fluctuation pattern table number setting process]
FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. The first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S13121, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is a “big hit”. Here, if it is determined to be a "big hit" (YES in step S13121), the process proceeds to step S13122, and if it is determined not to be a "big hit" (NO in step S13121), the process proceeds to step S13125.

In step S13122, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit-time selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112) is "z0", and determines whether or not the hit-time selection symbol command is "z0". When is "z0" (YES in step S13122), the variation pattern table number is set to "9" (step S13123), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is terminated. If the hit selection symbol command is other than "z0" (NO in step S13122), the variation pattern table number is set to "10" (step S13124), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is performed. To finish. Therefore, the reach effect D functions as a reach effect for confirming that the player has won the jackpot with the highest degree of profit (the jackpot with the hit selection symbol command of "z0").

In step S13125, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is a “small hit”. Here, if it is determined to be "small hit" (YES in step S13125), the process proceeds to step S13126, and if it is determined that it is not "small hit", that is, "missing" (NO in step S13125), the first special symbol loss in step S13130 is lost. The time variation pattern table number setting process is performed, and the special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is terminated. The first special symbol loss change pattern table number setting process will be described later.

In step S13126, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, and if both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF (YES in step S13126), the process proceeds to step S13127. If either one of the probability change flag and the time saving flag is ON (NO in step S13126), the process proceeds to step S13129.

In step S13127, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit-time selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112) is "z17", and determines whether or not the hit-time selection symbol command is "z17". When is "z17" (YES in step S13127), the variation pattern table number is set to "7" (step S13128), and the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is terminated. If the hit selection symbol command is other than "z17" (NO in step S13127), the process proceeds to step S13129.

In step S13129, the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "8" and ends the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

[2-4-7. 1st special symbol change pattern table number setting process when lost]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. In the first special symbol variation pattern table number setting process at the time of loss, during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern table number setting process described above, the result of the first special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit". This is the process that is called as a subroutine when. The variation pattern table number set in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table number setting process is shown in the variation pattern table number setting table (FIG. 107).

As shown in FIG. 115, in step S13131, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON. Here, if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in step S13131), the process proceeds to step S13132, and if it is determined that the probability change flag is OFF (NO in step S13131), the process proceeds to step S13135.

In step S13132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is ON, that is, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON (YES in step S13132), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "11" (step S13133), and the first special symbol is lost. The time variation pattern table number setting process is terminated. When the time saving flag is not ON, that is, the probability variation flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S13132), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "12" (step S13134), and the first The variable pattern table number setting process when the special symbol is lost is terminated.

In step S13135, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is ON, that is, the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S13135), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "11" (step S13136), and the first special symbol is lost. The time variation pattern table number setting process is terminated.

Further, when the time saving flag is not ON, that is, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF (NO in step S13135), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a hold of the first special symbol, that is, the first start information. It is determined whether or not the data is stored in the hold area (step S13137).

When there is a hold of the first special symbol (YES in step S13137), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "1" (step S13138), and proceeds to step S13139. In this way, when the first special symbol is held, the fluctuation pattern table number is set to "1" so that the shortened fluctuation A can be determined so that the holding of the first start information is not accumulated as much as possible. It becomes possible. However, even if the first special symbol is put on hold, the shortened fluctuation A may not be determined, and the shortest fluctuation time may be set to, for example, 6000 msec.

In step S13140, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game mode is larger than "5", that is, not "0", and if the game mode is larger than "5", that is, not "0" (step S13140). In YES), the variation pattern table number is set based on the game mode, the HG counter, and the reach determination random number according to the set value (step S13141). For example, if the game mode is "6", the HG counter is "50", and the reach determination random number is "10 (settings 1 and 2)", the variation pattern table number is set to "4" (see FIG. 107). ). In this case, the variable pattern table number to be set is common regardless of whether the HG counter is 0 to 99. Even if the game mode is "6", the variation pattern table number is set to "4" when the time saving flag is ON. When the process of step S13141 is performed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S13142.

Further, the main CPU 101 also determines whether or not the game mode is larger than "5" in step S13139, and if the game mode is larger than "5" (YES in step S13139), the process proceeds to step S13142 and the game mode is changed to "5". If it is 5 ”or less (NO in step S13139), the first special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting process is terminated.

In step S13142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the HG counter, and proceeds to step S13143. The HG counter is not subtracted when the time saving flag is ON, even if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed, and is subtracted only when the time saving flag is OFF.

In the second embodiment, the HG counter is subtracted by determining whether or not the game mode is larger than "5", but the subtraction of the HG counter does not necessarily have to be performed by determining the game mode. For example, the HG counter is subtracted by discriminating between the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (whether the symbol is controlled by the RG state or the HG state) and the setting of the time saving flag when the big hit or the small hit is won. You can do it.

In step S13143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the HG counter is 0, and if the HG counter is 0 (YES in step S13143), the game mode is set to "0" (step S13144). 1 Ends the variable pattern table number setting process when the special symbol is lost. If the HG counter is not 0 (NO in step S13143), the main CPU 101 ends the first special symbol loss time variation pattern table number setting process without changing the game mode.

When it is determined in step S13140 that the game mode is "5" or less, that is, "0" (NO in step S13140), the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern table number based on the reach determination random number according to the set value. It is set to "2" or "3" (step S13145), and the first special symbol loss fluctuation pattern table number setting process is completed. For example, if the reach judgment random number is "8 (settings 1 and 2)", the fluctuation pattern table number is set to "2", and if the reach judgment random number is "10 (settings 1 and 2)", the fluctuation pattern is set. The table number is set to "3" (see FIG. 107).

[2-4-8. 2nd special symbol fluctuation pattern table number setting process]
FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process by the main CPU 101. The second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process described above. As shown in the figure, in step S13151, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is a “big hit”. If it is determined to be a "big hit" (YES in step S13151), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "15" (step S13152), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

When it is determined that the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is not a "big hit" (NO in step S13151), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the above hit determination is a "small hit". Is determined (step S13153). If it is determined to be a "small hit" (YES in step S13153), the main CPU 101 sets the variation pattern table number to "14" (step S13154), and ends the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process.

Further, when it is determined that the result of the hit determination performed in step S1219 (see FIG. 112) is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", that is, "loss" (NO in step S13153), the main CPU 101 determines. The variation pattern table number is set to "13" (step S13155), and the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is completed. When the second special symbol variation pattern table number setting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S1316, and then the special symbol variation pattern setting process is terminated.

[2-4-9. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S1041). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S1041), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S1041), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1042.

In step S1042, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S1042), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S1042), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1043.

In step S1043, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination (see step S1219 in FIG. 112) is a “big hit”. When it is determined that the result of the hit determination is "big hit" (YES in step S1043), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1044. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S1043), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1050.

In step S1044, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1045.

In step S1045, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving counter, the HG counter, the time saving flag, and the probability change flag, that is, setting them to OFF. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1046.

In step S1046, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S1047).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the type of the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S1048). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), and turns on / off the number of rounds (upper limit value of the number of rounds) corresponding to the hit selection symbol command, the probability variation flag, and the time reduction flag, and the time reduction number ( The time reduction counter), the HG counter, and the game mode are set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S1049). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S1050, the main CPU 101 performs a time reduction counter subtraction process. The time saving counter subtraction process is as described above with reference to FIG. 37.

In step S1051, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the hit determination (see step S1219 in FIG. 112) is a “small hit”. When it is determined that the result of the hit determination is "small hit" (YES in step S1051), the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S1052). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S105) described later (step S1053), and sets the time corresponding to the small hit start interval as a waiting time timer. The process of setting to is performed (step S1054).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit start command corresponding to the type of the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S1055), and ends the special symbol display time management process. By performing the process of step S1055, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

When it is determined in step S1051 that the result of the above-mentioned hit determination is not "small hit", that is, "loss" (NO in step S1051), the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value indicating the special symbol game end process (NO in step S1051). A process of setting "11") is performed (Tep S1056). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[2-4-10. Small hit end interval processing]
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The small hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing (step S1611). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing (NO in step S1611), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process (YES in step S1611), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1612.

In step S1612, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S1612), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S1612), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1613.

In step S1613, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S1613), and proceeds to step S1614.

In step S1614, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the small hit flag, that is, a process of setting the small hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 to OFF, and proceeds to step S1615.

In step S1615, the main CPU 101 sets the game mode according to the hit selection symbol command acquired by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process (see step S1120 in FIG. 112). do. The game mode corresponding to the hit selection symbol command is as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets "10" in the game mode as shown in the small hit symbol determination table. Although not shown in FIG. 118, when the probability change flag is ON, the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1614 without setting the game mode (without executing the process of step S1615). , Ends the small hit interval processing (the HG counter is not set either).

Next, in step S1616, the main CPU 101 determines which of "8" to "16" the game mode set in step S1615 is. Then, when the game mode set in step S1615 is any of "8" to "16" (YES in step S1616), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1617. When the game mode set in step S1615 is neither of "8" to "16" (NO in step S1616), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1618.

In step S1617, the main CPU 101 is an HG counter corresponding to the hit selection symbol command acquired by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112). Is set (step S1615), and the small hit end interval processing is ended. The HG counter corresponding to the hit selection symbol command set in step S1615 is as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 101 sets "100" in the HG counter as shown in the small hit symbol determination table.

In step S1618, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game mode set in step S1615 is "17". Then, when the game mode set in step S1615 is "17" (YES in step S1618), the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to "100,000" as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106). Is set (step S1619), and then the small hit end interval processing is terminated. The game mode to be set is "17". On the other hand, when the game mode set in step S1615 is not "17" (NO in step S1618), that is, when the game mode set in step S1615 is neither "8" to "17" (game mode is When "0" (when the hit selection symbol command is "z18"), the main CPU 101 moves to step S1620.

In step S1620, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to "0" and ends the small hit end interval process.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the HG counter is set according to the set game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, depending on the small hit symbol when the small hit is won. The HG counter may be set.

Further, the above-mentioned HG counter "100,000" is set as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) that cannot be executed during the business hours of the hall. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z17", the game mode to be set is "17". Therefore, in the game state after the small hit game state ends, the variation pattern is shown in FIG. 107. The BHG state is set so that the table number is set to 2 or 6. Therefore, when the hit selection symbol command wins a small hit of "z17", the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes a "big hit" and the HG counter is newly set or the first. The main CPU 101 continuously controls the BHG state until the result of the special lottery becomes a "small hit" and the HG counter is newly set.

Further, in all HG states, not limited to the BHG state, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery becomes a "big hit" or a "small hit", the game mode and the HG counter are newly set. When the HG counter is newly set, the current HG state ends, and after the end of the small hit game state, it is controlled to the newly set HG state, but the non-HG small hit (hit selection command "z18") If the small hit) is won, the HG counter is set to 0, so that the LG state is controlled after the small hit game state ends.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 0 when the above non-HG small hit (the hit selection symbol command is "z18") is won. For example, the HG counter may not be set. In this case, even if the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the small hit symbol is a non-HG small hit in a state where the HG counter is larger than 0, the main CPU 101 simply uses the small hit winning opening 560. By simply performing the process of opening and closing, the variation pattern table used up to that point is maintained as it is without changing the variation pattern table used when determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Therefore, for example, when the hit selection symbol command wins a small hit of "z17", the main CPU 101 even if the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the small hit is a non-HG small hit. , It will be continuously controlled to the BHG state. When the hit selection symbol command wins any of "z8" to "z16" in the BHG state, the main CPU 101 resets the HG counter according to the type of the small hit symbol (hit selection symbol command). Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, it is preferable for the player to have a non-HG small hit. Therefore, when the hit selection symbol command is controlled to the BHG state based on the winning of the small hit of "z17", if the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", the sub CPU 201 is the small hit. If you perform an effect that does not specify the type of symbol, you can enhance the interest. Here, the above-mentioned "state in which the HG counter is larger than 0" is not limited to the HG state, but is the case where the hit selection symbol command is controlled to the LG state before shifting to the HG state, for example, "z15". Is intended to include the LG state.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in addition to the process of opening and closing the small hit winning opening 560 when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "z18". The process of setting the HG counter to 0 may be performed, or the process of simply opening and closing the small hit winning opening 560 without setting the HG counter may be performed. However, it is not essential to provide a small hit with the hit selection symbol command of "z18" in the first place.

The HG counter set in step S1619 is not limited to "100,000" as long as the number of games cannot be executed during the business hours of the hall.

By the way, the HG counter is set in the small hit end interval processing when the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", and as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 106), the HG counter is set. 2 When the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the HG counter is not set. Therefore, even if the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" when the HG counter is larger than 0, the current HG counter is not set newly based on this "small hit". Will continue. That is, the main CPU 101 controls so that the current HG state continues.

[2-4-11. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S1811). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1812.

In step S1812, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S1812), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S1813.

In step S1813, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S1814). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S1815).

Next, in step S1816, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S1817.

In step S1817, the main CPU 101 is in a game mode corresponding to the hit selection symbol command acquired by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 103) in the special symbol determination process performed in step S1220 (see FIG. 112). Is set (step S1817). The game mode corresponding to the hit selection symbol command is as shown in the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105). For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 sets "3" in the game mode as shown in the jackpot symbol determination table.

Next, in step S1818, the main CPU 101 determines which of "1" to "4" the game mode set in step S1817 is. Then, when the game mode set in step S1817 is any one of "1" to "4" (YES in step S1818), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1819. When the game mode set in step S1817 is neither of "1" to "4" (NO in step S1818), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1820.

In step S1819, the main CPU 101 sets “1” as the probability change flag (that is, turns on the probability change flag), and proceeds to step S1821.

On the other hand, in step S1820, the main CPU 101 sets "0" as the probability change flag (that is, turns off the probability change flag), and proceeds to step S1821.

In step S1821, the main CPU 101 determines which of "2" to "7" the game mode set in step S1817 is. Then, when the game mode set in step S1817 is any of "2" to "7" (YES in step S1821), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1822. When the game mode set in step S1817 is neither of "2" to "7" (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 shifts to step S1823.

In step S1822, the main CPU 101 sets "1" as the time saving flag (that is, turns on the time saving flag), and proceeds to step S1824.

In step S1824, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions in the time reduction counter. In the second embodiment, referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), when the hit selection symbol command is "z0", "z1", or "z19", the time reduction counter is set to 0 times. When the hit selection symbol command is "z2", "z5" to "z7" or "z20", the time reduction counter is set to 4 times, and when the hit selection symbol command is "z3" or "z21". Sets 24 times in the time saving counter, and sets 54 times in the time saving counter when the hit time selection symbol command is "z4" or "z22". After completing the process of step S1824, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1825.

On the other hand, in step S1823, the main CPU 101 sets "0" as the time saving flag (that is, turns off the time saving flag), and proceeds to step S1825.

In step S1825, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the HG counter. In the second embodiment, referring to the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 105), when the hit selection symbol commands are "z0" to "z4" and "z19" to "z22", the HG counter is displayed 100,000 times. When the hit selection symbol command is "z6", "z7", "z24" or "z25", set 100 times in the HG counter, and the hit selection symbol command is "z5" or "z23". , The HG counter is set to 0. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

The above-mentioned HG counter "100,000" is set as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) that cannot be executed during the business hours of the hall. Therefore, when the hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0" to "z4" and "z19" to "z22", the main CPU 101 is controlled to the next big hit game state (to "big hit"). Unless the HG counter is set again by winning, the RG state is controlled. That is, if the "big hit" is not won, the RG state will continue. The HG counter set in step S1825 is not limited to "100,000" as long as the number of games cannot be executed during the business hours of the hall.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the HG counter are set according to the set game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a big hit is won. A probability variation flag, a time saving flag, and an HG counter may be set according to the jackpot symbol.

Further, when the jackpot symbol (the hit selection symbol command) of the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol includes the jackpot symbol having a ceiling function (the jackpot symbols A to C described above), the main CPU 101 Process as follows.

That is, when the jackpot of the jackpot symbol A is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (= ceiling game 510 times + HG state 100 times), clears the probability change flag and the time saving flag, that is, sets the time saving flag to OFF, and also sets the time saving. Set the counter to 0. Since the main CPU 101 controls the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be one of "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls the LG state when the HG counter is "100 to 609", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be "3" except when the reach effect is determined. That is, when the ceiling game is digested (when the HG counter reaches 99), the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation pattern table number of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol from "3" to "4". Change to any of "6" and control to the HG state (100 times).

Further, when the jackpot of the jackpot symbol B is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (= ceiling game 510 times + HG state 100 times), and sets the probability change flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, and the time reduction counter 4 times. set. When the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 does not subtract the HG counter even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, and only when the time saving flag is OFF, the HG counter is subtracted. Therefore, when the jackpot symbol B is won, only the time reduction counter among the time reduction counter and the HG counter is subtracted until the four games are executed after the jackpot game state ends. Then, when the time reduction counter becomes 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts the HG counter each time the game is executed. Since the main CPU 101 controls the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be one of "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls the LG state when the HG counter is "100 to 609", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be "3" except when the reach effect is determined. That is, when the time saving counter is digested and then the ceiling game is digested (when the HG counter reaches 99), the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table number of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Is changed from "3" to any of "4" to "6" and controlled to the HG state (100 times).

Further, when the jackpot of the jackpot symbol C is won, the main CPU 101 sets the HG counter to 610 times (= ceiling game 510 times + HG state 100 times), and sets the probability change flag OFF, the time reduction flag ON, and the time reduction counter 100 times. set. When the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 does not subtract the HG counter even if the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed, and only when the time saving flag is OFF, the HG counter is subtracted. Therefore, when the jackpot symbol C is won, only the time reduction counter among the time reduction counter and the HG counter is subtracted until the game is executed 100 times after the jackpot game state ends. Then, when the time reduction counter becomes 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts the HG counter each time the game is executed. Since the main CPU 101 controls the HG state when the HG counter is "0 to 99", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be one of "4" to "6" except when the reach effect is determined. .. Further, since the main CPU 101 controls the LG state when the HG counter is "100 to 609", the fluctuation pattern table number is determined to be "3" except when the reach effect is determined. That is, when the time saving counter is digested and then the ceiling game is digested (when the HG counter reaches 99), the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table number of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Is changed from "3" to any of "4" to "6" and controlled to the HG state (100 times).

When a plurality of HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) are prepared as HG states as in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, one of them is specified after the ceiling game is digested. The HG state may be controlled according to the jackpot symbol, or the HG state controlled may be different depending on the jackpot symbol.

In addition, a jackpot symbol in which the HG counter is set (that is, controlled to the HG state after the ceiling game is digested) and a jackpot symbol in which the HG counter is not set are prepared, and the result of the special lottery is a jackpot. At that time, it is preferable that it is difficult to visually grasp whether the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 is a jackpot symbol in which the HG counter is set or a jackpot symbol in which the HG counter is not set. Furthermore, when a plurality of HG states having different profit degrees for the player are prepared, there is a possibility that the HG state (for example, BHG state) having a higher profit degree for the player may be controlled. The effect that the player expects may be performed.

By the way, each value of the time saving counter and the HG counter is stored in the main RAM 103. That is, the main RAM 103 has a buffer area for storing the probability change flag, the time saving flag setting, the time saving counter value, the HG counter value, and the like, in addition to the above-mentioned holding area and fluctuation start area. Specifically, the clear area at the time of clearing the backup of the main RAM 103 in the second embodiment is F0000 to F1BD. The probability change flag, the time reduction flag, the time reduction counter, the game mode, and the HG counter are also stored in this area and are deleted when the backup is cleared. Specifically, the probability variation flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving counter value are stored in F1A0 to F1AF in the above area, and the game mode and the HG counter value are stored in F1B0 to F1BD. As described above, when the backup clear process is performed, all of them are erased. However, in the second embodiment, in the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process, the clear area is set to F0000 to F1AF. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change is performed, the game mode and the HG counter value are retained without being erased.

The backup clearing process will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of backup clear processing by the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

The setting change process shown in FIG. 120 differs from the setting change process shown in FIG. 23 in the process when the main CPU 101 determines that the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410). In the setting change process shown in FIG. 23, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the backup clear process (step S2420) is performed. On the other hand, in the setting change process shown in FIG. 120, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 sets the setting change flag to ON (step S2415), and then steps. The backup clear process of S2420A is performed.

Next, the backup clearing process shown in FIG. 121 will be described below. First, in step S2421A, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421A), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421A), step S2422A Move to.

In step S2422A, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change flag is ON. When the setting change flag is ON (YES in step S2422A), the main CPU 101 executes a process of clearing the areas F0000 to F1AF of the main RAM 103 (step S2423A), and proceeds to step S2424A.

In step S2424A, the main CPU 101 sets the clear notification of F0000 to F1AF, then sets the setting change flag to OFF (step S2425A), and proceeds to step S2428A.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in step S2422A), the main CPU 101 executes a process of clearing the areas F0000 to F1BD of the main RAM 103 (step S2426A), and proceeds to step S2427A.

In step S2427A, the main CPU 101 sets the clear notification of F0000 to F1BD, and then proceeds to step S2428A.

In step S2428A, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF and ends the backup clear process.

Therefore, for example, if the pachinko / pachislot machine manager of the hall performs the setting change process before the opening of the hall, the HG counter value will not be cleared unless the backup clear process is further performed without the setting change process, and the previous day. The HG counter at the end of the hall business will be taken over. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko / pachislot machine administrator in the hall wants to clear both the setting change and the HG counter value, he / she may perform the backup clear processing without the setting change processing after the setting change processing, and the probability change flag. If you want to turn off the or time saving flag but want to keep the HG counter, you may perform the setting change processing without performing the backup clear processing that does not involve the setting change processing. In this way, the hall can be operated in a manner desired by the pachinko / pachislot machine manager of the hall.

In the second embodiment, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set and the HG counter is subtracted according to the set game mode. Therefore, the game mode is set to the same main RAM 103 as the HG counter value. It is stored in the area (F1B0 to F1BD). However, it goes without saying that when the game mode is not used for setting the probability change flag and the time reduction flag or subtracting the HG counter, it is not necessary to store the game mode in the same main RAM 103 area (F1B0 to F1BD) as the HG counter value. stomach.

Further, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and / and the second special symbol (the hit selection symbol command) is the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol C described above (that is, the jackpot symbol in which the ceiling game is started after the time saving game is digested). ), When the setting change process is performed before the time saving game is digested (before the time saving counter value becomes 0), the main CPU 101 clears the time saving flag and the time saving counter value, so that the time saving flag is cleared. And, regardless of the number of time reductions that have been digested before the time reduction counter value is cleared, the LG state will be started from the ceiling game (remaining number of times) 510 times. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is performed without the setting change process, the main CPU 101 also clears the HG counter value, so that the game is started in a state where the number of ceiling games is not set. When the setting change process is performed in the LG state, the main CPU 101 inherits the HG counter value before the setting change process is performed.

Further, when the jackpot symbols having a ceiling function (the jackpot symbols A to C described above) are included, the result of the special lottery is any of the jackpot symbols A to C (the jackpot symbol in which the number of ceiling games is set). If there is, the main CPU 101 controls the game state after the number of ceiling games is exhausted and the HG state (100 times) is completed to the LG state. In this case, the result of the special lottery is again the jackpot symbol A ~. The number of ceiling games is not set unless it becomes one of C.

If the result of the special lottery is a small hit other than a big hit or a non-specific small hit (first small hit, second small hit, super small hit) during the execution of the ceiling game, the HG counter value is new. Since it is set to, the ceiling counter value up to that point is not inherited.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the special lottery includes a jackpot symbol having a ceiling function, it is possible to enhance the game interest in the normal gaming state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

[2-4-12. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The difference between the normal symbol control process of FIG. 122 and the normal symbol control process of FIG. 40 is that the start information of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal start information”) can be reserved in FIG. 40, whereas the normal symbol control process of FIG. 122 is normal. The point is that the processing is performed on the premise that the start information is not reserved (particularly, the normal symbol fluctuation start area check processing in step S1912).

The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 122 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 122, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S1911). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S1912 to S1916, which will be described later, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any processing of steps S1912 to S1916 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S1912 to S1916. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol change start area check process (step S1912). In FIG. 40, it was referred to as a normal symbol memory check process, but in FIG. 40, the normal start information is held, whereas in FIG. 122, the normal start information is not held, so it is referred to as a normal symbol change start area check process. In this normal symbol change start area check process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol change start area to the normal symbol change start area when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol change start area check process. Is stored, and if the normal start information is stored in the fluctuation start area of the normal symbol, processing such as normal hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set to the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S1913). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set by the main CPU 101 elapses, the normal symbol A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S1914) described later is set in the control state flag, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of step S1913 is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol so that it is difficult to visually grasp the change in the fluctuation time of the normal symbol between when the time reduction flag is OFF and when it is ON. When the flag is OFF, it is set to 510 msec, for example, and when the time saving flag is ON, it is set to 500 msec, for example. Since intervals are set before and after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the total time of the fluctuation time and the interval time of the normal symbol is, for example, 1000 msec when the time reduction flag is OFF, and when the time reduction flag is ON. Is, for example, 990 msec. However, it goes without saying that the fluctuation time and interval time of ordinary symbols are not limited to the above.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S1914). In this process, in the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S1913 elapses, it is normal. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is "normal hit". Then, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "ordinary hit", the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S1915) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag. ("03") is set. That is, this process is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. Further, when the result of the normal lottery is not "normal hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S1916) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

In the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 sets the normal hit probability and the time saving flag is OFF so that it is difficult to visually grasp the change in the normal hit probability between when the time saving flag is OFF and when it is ON. When there is, for example, it is set to 32767/32768, and when the time saving flag is ON, it is set to 32768/32768, for example. However, it goes without saying that the normal hit probability is not limited to the above.

Further, even in the above-mentioned ordinary electric accessory opening setting process, the main CPU 101 is set so that it is difficult to visually grasp the change in the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory depending on whether the time saving flag is OFF or ON. When the time saving flag is OFF, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory is set to, for example, 3000 msec, and when the time saving flag is ON, the opening time is set to, for example, 3100 msec. However, it goes without saying that the opening time of an ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the above.

Next, when the result of the ordinary lottery is determined to be "ordinary hit" in step S1914, the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S1915). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4622 (see, for example, FIG. 97) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S1916) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S1915). It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment does not hold the variable display of the normal symbol. That is, only when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed and the interval required for the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not performed, the normal lottery related to the start information of the extracted normal symbol is applied. And, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 when the variation display of the normal symbol is performed and the variation display of the normal symbol is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol based on the extracted start information of the normal symbol is suspended. Instead, the extracted normal symbol start information is discarded. When the process of step S1915 is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

In the second embodiment, when the time saving flag is ON, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the normal hit probability is increased, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, as compared with the case where the time saving flag is OFF. We are extending the time. However, as described above, depending on whether the time reduction flag is ON or OFF, one of the reduction of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the increase of the normal hit probability, and the extension of the opening time of the normal electric accessory 460. You may change only one or two, or without changing the control related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 (shortening the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, increasing the probability of normal hit, extending the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460). , You may change the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

[2-4-13. Relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (when the result of the first special lottery is lost) will be described. FIG. 123 is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The fluctuation time (1000 msec) of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 123 is an approximate time including the interval time, and the opening time (3000 msec) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is also an approximate time. In addition, the period during which the main CPU 101 determines that the second start opening winning is valid is shaded.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the passing gate 49 is arranged directly above the first starting port 420, so that all the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 win the first starting port 420. It is configured. Therefore, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is always performed if the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Further, since the normal hit probability is approximately 100% as described above, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened with a probability of approximately 100%.

FIG. 123 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the LG state and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In the LG state, if the result of the first special lottery is lost, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) of the variation pattern table number 2 or 3.

Therefore, in the LG state, as shown in FIG. 123 (a), regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be normal fluctuation A or normal fluctuation B, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened. The first special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner during the entire period. Therefore, even if the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open, it cannot be expected that the second starting opening winning will be determined to be valid. .. As shown in the table showing the probabilities of big hits and small hits (see FIG. 102), the probability of winning a "small hit" in the first special lottery is relatively small, and the result of the first special lottery is When it is a "small hit", the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in a manner in which it is more difficult for the game ball to win than when the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit". Therefore, in the LG state, the payout of the prize ball by being controlled to the small hit game state cannot be expected as much as the left.

FIG. 123 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the HG state and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In the HG state, if the result of the first special lottery is lost, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) of any of the variation pattern table numbers 2 or 4 to 6.

Therefore, in the HG state, as shown in FIG. 123 (b), when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be normal fluctuation A or normal fluctuation B, the period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open. The first special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner during the entire period. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the normal fluctuation C, there is a period during which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not performed during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. Therefore, if the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the variation display of the first special symbol is not performed, it is determined that the second starting opening winning is valid. , The second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed based on the extracted second start information. Here, as shown in the table showing the probabilities of big hits and small hits (see FIG. 102), when the second special lottery is performed, if it is not a "big hit", the "small hit" is always won. Therefore, in the HG state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is increased as compared with the LG state.

In the BHG state, the MHG state, and the SHG state, the probability of being controlled to the small hit game state is changed by making the probability of being determined to the normal fluctuation C different, and the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. The expected value of is different. Specifically, the probability that the fluctuation pattern table numbers 4 and 5 and 6 are determined to be the normal fluctuation C is different, and in the BHG state, the first special symbol is based on the fluctuation pattern table of the fluctuation pattern table number 2 or 6. In the MHG state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the fluctuation pattern table of the fluctuation pattern table number 2 or 5, and in the SHG state, the fluctuation pattern table of the fluctuation pattern table number 2 or 4 is displayed. Based on this, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

FIG. 123 (c) is a time chart showing an example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the RG state and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. In the RG state, if the result of the first special lottery is lost, the variation display of the first special symbol is determined based on the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) of the variation pattern table number 12, so that the first special symbol The fluctuation pattern is always determined to be shortened fluctuation A.

Therefore, in the RG state, as shown in FIG. 123 (c), when the result of the first special lottery is lost, the period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol Does not overlap with. Therefore, if the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, it is determined that the second starting opening winning is always valid, and the second starting information is extracted based on the extracted second starting information. A special lottery and a variable display of the second special symbol will be performed. In addition, when the second special lottery is performed, if it is not a "big hit", the "small hit" is always won. Therefore, in the RG state, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state is higher than that in the HG state (BHG state). The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the small hit game state is controlled only by changing the expected value of the length of the period determined by the main CPU 101 that the second starting opening winning is effective. It is possible to easily change the frequency of the winning balls, that is, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time.

Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, although the game progresses by hitting right in the jackpot game state, the game progresses by hitting left not only in the LG state but also in the HG state and the RG state, so that the firing strength of the game ball It is possible to realize a game in a plurality of gaming states in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is different without changing. In particular, with conventional pachinko machines, for example, in many cases, the game progresses by hitting right in the jackpot game state and hitting left in the normal game state, so there is a deep-rooted awareness that left-handed is a disadvantageous game state for the player. When hitting left, the game tended to be monotonous. In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above, the game proceeds by left-handed in the RG state where there is a possibility that the number of balls to be ejected during the period is larger than that in the jackpot game state. It is possible to realize a new playability that breaks the concept.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to shift from the LG state to the HG state without going through the jackpot gaming state. In some conventional pachinko gaming machines, apart from the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to be more favorable to the player than the normal gaming state, but since it is controlled when the jackpot is won, the jackpot is controlled. The normal game state until the winner was tended to be monotonous. Therefore, by shifting from the LG state to the HG state without going through the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game in the normal gaming state, which tends to be monotonous until the jackpot is won.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the number of prize balls paid out when the second starting port 440 is won is one, it is expected that the second starting opening winning is determined to be valid. In the LG state in which the player cannot hold the ball, the ordinary electric accessory 460 has a function of securing a base such that one prize ball is paid out for one prize in the second starting port 440. On the other hand, in the gaming state (HG state, high-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state, RG state) in which the second starting port winning may be determined to be valid, the second starting opening 440 was awarded. In addition to the number of prize balls (1) that are sometimes paid out, 15 prize balls are paid out for each prize in the small hit winning opening 560, so the base-up function is a normal electric accessory. It can be given to the 460. In this way, it is possible to realize a new game property that has never been seen before, such as being able to change the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 according to the game state.

By the way, in a general conventional pachinko gaming machine, the large number of start information stored in the holding area is a relief for the player because the special lottery and the variable display of the special symbol are continuously performed. .. However, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when the storage (holding) of the first start information in the hold area is promoted and the change display of the first special symbol is continuously performed, the change of the first special symbol is performed. Even if the pattern is the normal variation C shown in FIG. 123 (b), the period during which the second start opening winning is determined to be valid is shortened, and there is a risk that the interest will be lowered.

In this regard, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 97, the delivery member 820 (the first rotating member 822 and the second rotating member 828 (both refer to FIG. 97)) makes one. It is configured so that another game ball wins the first starting port 420 after a certain period of time has elapsed after the game ball wins the first starting port 420. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first start information in the hold area and to prevent the period in which the second start opening winning is determined to be valid from being shortened. In particular, it is preferable that the above-mentioned fixed time is longer than the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times of the first special symbol that can be determined in the LG state. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern table number 2 or 3 is determined in the LG state, the shortest fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 6000 msec. Therefore, the delivery member 820 is configured such that at least 6000 msec has elapsed after one game ball wins the first start port 420, and then another game ball wins the first start port 420. Is preferable.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the variation pattern table number is set to "1" when the first special symbol is held, so that the variation pattern table (see FIG. 108) shows. The fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be shortened fluctuation A with a relatively high probability of 80% (in the case of settings 1 and 2). As a result, even if the hold of the first start information is temporarily accumulated, the temporarily accumulated first start information can be digested in a short time, and it is determined that the second start opening winning is valid. It is possible to secure the period as much as possible.

In the RG state, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is always determined to be the shortened fluctuation A in which the period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol do not overlap. However, the variation pattern is not limited to this, and in addition to the shortened variation A, the variation pattern (for example, normal variation A) in which the first special symbol is variablely displayed during the entire period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open. It may be decided. Even in this case, by adjusting the probability determined by the shortened fluctuation A and the probability determined by the normal fluctuation A, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time exceeds 1. It is possible to.

In the second embodiment, if the result of the second special lottery is not a "big hit", a "small hit" is won with a probability close to 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this. The probability of "small hit" can be set as appropriate within a range that does not deviate.

Further, in the second embodiment, regardless of which fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation A and the normal fluctuation B is determined in the LG state, the first special symbol is used for the entire period during which the normal electric accessory 460 is open. Is displayed in a variable manner, but it is not limited to this. For example, a probability that a fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation C) is provided in which a period in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not performed occurs during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open, and the fluctuation pattern is determined. May be lower than in the HG state.

When the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", as shown in the fluctuation pattern table number setting table (see FIG. 107) and the fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 108), the normal fluctuation A And, it is determined to be one of the reach effects A to D having a longer fluctuation time than any of the normal fluctuation B. That is, the period in which the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol overlap. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", even if the game ball wins the second start opening 440 when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, the extracted second start The information is discarded and the second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol are not performed.

[2-4-14. Relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (other example)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (when the result of the first special lottery is lost) will be described. FIG. 124 is a time chart showing another example of the relationship between the opening timing of the ordinary electric accessory and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in each gaming state. The fluctuation time (1000 msec) of the ordinary symbol shown in FIG. 124 is an approximate time including the interval time, and the opening time (3000 msec) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is also an approximate time. In addition, the period during which the second special lottery and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 124, in another example, when the result of the first special lottery is lost, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol as follows. That is, in the RG state, the fluctuation pattern is determined so that the period during which the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol do not overlap. Further, in the BHG state, the fluctuation pattern in which the overlap period between the period in which the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the execution period of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is relatively small is determined. Further, in the MHG state, the period during which the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the first special are within the range in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not performed during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. A fluctuation pattern in which the overlap period with the execution period of the fluctuation display of the symbol is larger than that in the MHG state is determined. Further, in the SHG state, the period during which the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open and the first special are within the range in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is not performed during the period when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. Determine a fluctuation pattern in which the overlap period with the execution period of the fluctuation display of the symbol is relatively large.

In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol for each game state, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the second special lottery and the variation display of the second special symbol, that is, the frequency of being controlled to the small hit game state. It is possible to make the expected value of the number of prize balls different from the number of shot balls per unit time for each game state.

The fluctuation time of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 124 may be the average fluctuation time. That is, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in each game state, and the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol may be determined so that the average of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shown in FIG. 124. ..

Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, when the game ball is won in the second start opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 97), the setting suggestion effect is not performed, but for example, the second start opening prize is given. The setting suggestion effect may be performed on the condition that the number of times determined to be ineffective exceeds the specified number of times.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the blade member 4622 is based on the fact that almost all the game balls that have passed through the passing gate 49 win the first starting port 420 and that the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit. Is open and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 440, and almost all the results of the second special lottery executed based on the winning in the second starting port 440 are small hits. The result of the first special lottery is a small hit under the condition that the second special lottery is executed only when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner. By changing the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, the period during which the second starting port winning is valid (the period during which the blade member 4622 is open and the first special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner). By changing the expected value of the length of), it is possible to realize multiple states such as LG state, BHG state, MHG state and SHG state in the normal game state, but the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time The method of realizing a plurality of states in which the expected values of the number of balls are different is not limited to this. For example, it has a first starting port where a game ball can win when hitting left and a second starting port where a game ball can win when hitting right. In the first state, a first table (for example, a first table) is provided. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined using the fluctuation time of the special symbol of 10000 msec and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is 600,000 msec), and the small hit probability in the first special lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting port is determined. For example, the probability of a small hit in the second special lottery performed based on winning a prize at 1/300 or the second starting port is set to, for example, 1/10, and the result of the first special lottery is a small hit. The second table (for example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol of 10000 msec and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol of 1000 msec) may be used to shift to the second state in which the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. As a result, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time can be increased, and a plurality of states having different expected values can be realized. It will be possible. Further, the expected values of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time in a plurality of states that can be realized in this way are, for example, 50%, 70%, 90% and 1 or less (100% or less), respectively. For example, as a normal game state, it is possible to realize a plurality of states in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is different. In the above, the first special lottery result is a small hit, and the change time of the second special symbol is shortened so that the first state is changed to the second state. Instead, taking the opportunity that the result of the first special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is lengthened and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so that the first state to the second state It may be changed to. Further, the opportunity to change the fluctuation time may be that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine provided with a jackpot symbol having a ceiling function, if the result of the special lottery is a jackpot and the type of the jackpot is the jackpot symbol A described above, as described above, the jackpot game After the state is completed, it is not controlled to the low-probability time-short game state, and when the game is played 510 times in the LG state, the state shifts to the HG state. Further, in the case of the jackpot symbol B, after the jackpot game state is completed, the game in the low probability time short game state is executed four times, then the game shifts to the LG state, and 510 games are played in the LG state. When it is done, it shifts to the HG state. Further, in the case of the jackpot symbol C, after the jackpot game state is completed, the game in the low probability time short game state is executed 100 times, then the game shifts to the LG state, and 510 games are played in the LG state. When it is done, it shifts to the HG state. That is, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the number of times that the low probability time and short game state is controlled differs depending on the type of the big hit symbols A to C.

Here, as can be seen by referring to, for example, the variation pattern table number setting table (FIG. 107) and the variation pattern table (FIG. 108), in the low probability time-saving game state in which the probability variation flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the variation pattern of the special symbol is displayed. Is rarely determined to be shortened variation A (with a 1% probability in settings 1 and 2), but most are determined to be normal variation A or normal variation B (see variation pattern table number "11"). .. Therefore, the probability that the second start opening winning is determined to be effective in the low probability short game state is almost as low as the probability that the second starting opening winning is determined to be effective in the LG state. Further, the main CPU 101 does not control the HG state until after both the set time reduction number and the ceiling game number (510 times) have been digested. That is, regardless of the number of time reductions set, the HG state is not controlled unless 510 games are executed in the LG state. Therefore, when a plurality of types of jackpot symbols having ceiling functions with different set time reduction times are provided, such as jackpot symbols A to B, it is preferable for the player to set a small number of time reductions. Therefore, it is possible to provide an interesting game by providing a plurality of types of jackpot symbols having a ceiling function with different number of time reductions set in this way.

Further, when the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol C is won, the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 (display effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 or from the speaker 24) is performed in at least four games controlled to the low accuracy time-shortening game state. It is preferable that it is difficult to grasp whether the jackpot symbol B or the jackpot symbol C has been won. In this case, when the jackpot symbol A is won, it is preferable that the effect is such that the player has expectations.

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the variation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is almost the same between the LG state and the low-accuracy time-shortening gaming state. Therefore, even when the jackpot symbol A is won, the sub CPU 201 determines which of the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol C is won in at least four games controlled to the low probability time-short game state. You may try to perform a production that is difficult to grasp.

Furthermore, by utilizing the fact that the fluctuation display pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is almost the same between the LG state and the low-probability time-saving game state, the sub CPU 201 creates an effect that makes it difficult to visually grasp the timing at which the time-saving game ends. You may try to do it. For example, even though the jackpot symbol B (4 times of time reduction) is won, the effect indicating that the game is in the low probability time reduction game state until 100 games are executed in the game state after the jackpot game state ends. May be executed. In this case, 414 times, which is obtained by subtracting 96 times (= 100 times-4 times) from 510 times, where the HG state is not normally controlled unless the number of ceiling games (for example, 510 times) is executed in the LG state. When the game of is executed, the state shifts to the HG state, which gives the player a sense of surprise.

Also, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of games required to be executed before being controlled to the HG state is 510 times (in the case of the jackpot symbol A) or 514 times (in the case of the jackpot symbol B). , 610 times (in the case of the jackpot symbol C) may be executed by the sub CPU 201 to produce an effect that is difficult to grasp from the appearance.

[2-5. Game flow]
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as an effect executed by the sub CPU 201 with the transition of the gaming state. (A) to (N) in FIG. 125 are (a) an image example in the LG state, (b) an image example showing that the "big hit" was won, and (c) an image example showing the type of the "big hit", ( 2) An example of an image showing that the RG state is started, (e) A chance stage in which the jackpot game state ends and there is a possibility of shifting to the RG state or the HG state (in FIG. 125, it is referred to as "RG / HG acquisition chance". Image example in (shown), image example in (f) RG ceiling standby zone (shown as "RUSH GAME ceiling standby ZONE" in FIG. 125) indicating that the transition to the RG state is being prepared, (g) RG state or LG. An example of an image in a specific stage showing that there is a possibility of shifting to a state, (h) an example of an image showing that the HG state is started, and (i) showing that a "small hit" was won in the first special lottery. An image example, (N) is an image example in the HG ceiling standby zone (shown as “HG ceiling standby ZONE” in FIG. 125) indicating that the transition to the HG state is being prepared. The effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204.

The chance stage, the RG ceiling standby zone, the specific stage, and the HG ceiling standby zone are all display stages or zones controlled by the sub CPU 201.

First, when the game is being executed in the LG state shown in (a), the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "big hit", as shown in (b), for example, three decorative symbols. Is displayed as a stop with doublet. As a result, the player can know that he has won the big hit.

After the image example showing that the "big hit" shown in (b) has been won is displayed, the image example showing the type of "big hit" is displayed as shown in (c). At this time, although the type of jackpot is internally determined when the special lottery is executed, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image as if the type of jackpot was determined by the re-lottery. .. In the second embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is "MAX jackpot", a production image (an image example of a in (c) in FIG. 125) that can be grasped as "MAX jackpot" is displayed and special. When the result of the lottery is "RUSH jackpot", a production image (an image example of b in (c) in FIG. 125) that can be grasped as "RUSH jackpot" is displayed, and the result of the special lottery is "MAX jackpot". When it is neither "RUSH jackpot" nor "RUSH jackpot", an effect image (an image example of c in (c) in FIG. 125) that can be grasped as not being "MAX jackpot" or "RUSH jackpot" is displayed.

When the image example of (a) or (b) of (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed, the image example of (2) is displayed and the RG state is started after the jackpot game state is completed. The RG state continues until the "big hit" is won, and when the "big hit" is won, although not shown in FIG. 125, via the image example of (b), depending on the type of "big hit" (c). One of (a) to (c) is displayed.

When the image example of (c) of (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed, after the jackpot game state ends, the stage shifts to the chance stage of (e), and the player shifts to the low-probability short-time game state or the high-probability short-time game state. Be controlled. The image example of (c) in (c) in FIG. 125 is displayed because the result of the special lottery is "4 times RUSH big hit", "24 times RUSH big hit", "54 times RUSH big hit". , "Time saving 4 times normal jackpot", "Time saving 4 times SHG jackpot" or "Time saving 4 times BHG jackpot". That is, the chance stage is a stage in which there is a possibility of shifting to any of the RG state, the HG state, and the LG state after the predetermined number of time-saving games have been digested.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "4 time reduction RUSH jackpot", when the time reduction game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (2) is displayed and the RG state is started. NS.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "24 times RUSH big hit" or "54 times RUSH big hit" and the ceiling waiting zone transition condition is satisfied, the time saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e). Then, the image example of (to) is displayed, and the process shifts to the RG ceiling standby zone. The RG ceiling standby zone is a zone in which it is confirmed that the state will shift to the RG state unless a big hit is won. Then, if the result of the special lottery is "24 times RUSH jackpot", the game is played 20 times in the ceiling waiting zone, and if the result of the special lottery is "54 times RUSH jackpot", the ceiling waiting zone is used. After the game of (2) is played 50 times, the image example of (2) is displayed, and the state shifts to the RG state.

The above-mentioned ceiling standby zone transition condition is a condition for transitioning to the RG ceiling standby zone, and whether or not the ceiling standby zone transition condition is satisfied is determined by the sub CPU 201. If the ceiling standby zone transition condition is not satisfied, the stage shifts to the specific stage in (g). The specific stage is a stage indicating that the state may be changed to the RG state or the LG state may be changed.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "4 times of time saving SHG jackpot", when the time saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (chi) is displayed and the SHG state is started. NS.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "4 times of time saving BHG jackpot", when the time saving game is executed 4 times in the chance stage of (e), the image example of (chi) is displayed and the BHG state is started. NS.

Note that FIG. 125 (H) is an image example showing that the HG state is started, and is not an image that clearly indicates which of the SHG state, the MHG state, and the BHG state is started, but instead of this. The image may be used to clearly indicate which of the SHG state, the MHG state, and the BHG state is started.

In addition, when the result of the special lottery is "4 times shortened normal jackpot", or "24 times shortened RUSH jackpot" or "54 times shortened RUSH jackpot" and the ceiling waiting zone transition condition is not satisfied. , (G) Move to a specific stage.

When the result of the special lottery is "24 times RUSH jackpot in a short time" and the player moves to the specific stage of (g), after 20 games are executed (4 times are executed in the chance stage of (e)). , (2) image example is displayed and the RG state is started.

When the result of the special lottery is "54 times shortened RUSH jackpot" and the player moves to the specific stage of (g), after 50 games are executed (4 times are executed in the chance stage of (e)). , (2) image example is displayed and the RG state is started.

When the result of the special lottery is "4 times shorter time normal jackpot" and the player shifts to the specific stage of (g), the game shifts to the LG state of (a) after 20 or 50 games are executed.

In addition, when the game is being executed in the LG state shown in (a) and the result of the first special lottery is "small hit", it indicates that the "small hit" has been won as shown in (i). An example image is displayed. As a result, the player can know that the small hit has been won.

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is the first small hit or the super small hit among the small hits, the image example of (i) is displayed and then the image example of (chi) is displayed and HG. The state is started. On the other hand, when the result of the first special lottery is the second small hit among the small hits, the image example of (i) is displayed and then the image example of (nu) is displayed in the HG ceiling waiting zone. After the transition and the game in the HG ceiling standby zone are executed a predetermined number of times, the image example of (H) is displayed and the HG state is started. The HG ceiling standby zone is a zone in which it is confirmed that the HG state will be entered unless a big hit or a small hit (super small hit, first small hit, second small hit) is won.

It should be noted that, as in the case where the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z11" to "z16", the LG state and a plurality of HG states (BHG state, MHG state, SHG state) are set in advance between two or more states. When a game progress pattern that shifts in a predetermined pattern is set, an image example in the HG ceiling standby zone of (nu) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the LG state constituting the game progress pattern, and in the HG state ( The image example of (h) is displayed and the game is executed in the HG state. In particular, when the hit selection symbol commands are "z11", "z12", "z15", and "z16", the sub CPU 201 is the HG of (nu) in the LG state before being controlled to the HG state. Control is performed to display an image example (an image example indicating that the transition to the HG state is being prepared) in the ceiling standby zone on the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, in the normal gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is smaller than 1, the game is played in a different game progress pattern according to the small hit symbol. Can be executed, and it becomes possible to enhance the game interest in the normal game state, which tends to be a monotonous game.

Further, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (FIG. 106), when the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z11", the game in the HG ceiling standby zone (LG state) is executed 10 times. Later, it shifts to the SHG state. Further, when the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z12", the game shifts to the MHG state after the game in the HG ceiling standby zone (LG state) is executed 30 times. That is, the number of times the game is executed to stay in the HG ceiling standby zone differs depending on the small hit symbol. As a result, even in the normal gaming state, the player's emotions can be given ups and downs, and the gaming interest can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in the small hit symbol determination table (FIG. 106), in the LG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the main CPU 101 is HG. The counter is set to "0" and the HG state is not controlled based on this small hit. However, in this case, the sub CPU 201 executes the same effect as the image example in the HG ceiling standby zone (nu) (including an effect similar to the extent that the appearance cannot be distinguished). That is, in the LG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the hit selection symbol command is not controlled to the HG state based on this small hit. Functions as a small hit for the small hits of "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16", and can give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the HG state.

Further, in the HG state, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the HG counter is set to 0 based on this small hit, so that the sub CPU 201 determines. When the image example in the HG ceiling standby zone of (N) is displayed, is the hit selection symbol command a small hit of any of "z11", "z12", "z15" and "z16"? Since it is not specified whether the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z18", it is possible to enhance the interest.

Even if the HG counter is not reset when the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "" in the LG state. When it is "z18", the sub CPU 201 executes the same effect as the image example in the HG ceiling standby zone (nu) (including an effect that is indistinguishable in appearance). In this case as well, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the HG state. Further, in the HG state, even when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit and the hit selection symbol command is "z18", the sub CPU 201 executes an image example in the HG ceiling standby zone of (nu). do. In this case, since the HG counter is not reset based on the small hit of the hit selection symbol command "z18", the HG state is downgraded (reset to the HG state which is less advantageous to the player than the current HG state). Rather, it is desired that the hit selection symbol command "z18" keeps the current HG state as a small hit, which makes it possible to enhance the interest.

Further, as described above, the game progress pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z15" and the game progress pattern executed when the hit selection symbol command is "z16" are in the middle. The pattern is the same up to (from 10 times in the LG state to 10 times in the BHG state until the transition to the LG state). Therefore, the LG state after "LG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times" executed when the hit selection symbol command is a small hit of "z15" and the small hit of the hit selection symbol command is "z16". In the LG state after "LG state 10 times → BHG state 10 times" executed in the case of, the effect mode executed by the sub CPU 201 is made the same to the extent that it is difficult to grasp the appearance of the LG. Since it is possible to give the player the expectation of shifting to the BHG state in the state, it is possible to enhance the game interest in this LG state.

When the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, instead of the image example (i) displayed when the result of the first special lottery is the first small hit or the second small hit. It is even better to display a special production image showing that a greater benefit is given to the player.

Further, when the result of the first special lottery is a non-HG small hit, the sub CPU 201 makes a small hit as in the case where the result of the first special lottery is a super small hit, a first small hit, or a second small hit. Rather than making the player know that he has won, it is difficult for the player to know that he has won a small hit (for example, a small image is displayed in one corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a special lottery is held. It is preferable to perform the production in the same manner as when the result is lost). In the second embodiment, the small hit in the first special lottery is provided for the purpose of shifting to the HG state, and the main purpose is not to win the small hit winning opening 560 (hence, the first special). When the result of the lottery is a small hit, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened in a manner in which it is difficult to win a prize as compared with the case where the result of the second special lottery is a small hit). Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a non-HG small hit, even if it is difficult for the player to grasp that the small hit has been won, the disadvantage given to the player is small. It is considered that the merit of not discouraging the player by preventing the player from knowing that he / she will not shift to HG even though he / she has won is greater.

If the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the HG state will not be entered, but from the viewpoint of winning the small hit winning opening 560, an effect image indicating that the small hit has been won is displayed. Will be done.

[3. Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the number of launched balls is set as a normal gaming state in which the probability change flag is OFF and the function related to the ordinary electric accessory 460 described later (hereinafter referred to as "general electric function") is not promoted. There are two states, one is a state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls is relatively small, and the other is a state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls is relatively large with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time. It is the same as the second embodiment in that a plurality of states in which the expected value of the number of prize balls is different from the number of launched balls are provided in the above-mentioned normal game state. However, in explaining the third embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to the configuration of the first embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted below. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following third embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the third embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is also described in the third embodiment unless otherwise specified in the following third embodiment. It can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the purpose. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment or the second embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the third embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment or the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. .. Further, even if the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

[3-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127, the appearance configuration and the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment will be mainly described as being different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. FIG. 126 is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 127 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The LED unit including the first special symbol display unit and the second special symbol display unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (for example, FIG. 8). Therefore, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment (see, for example, FIG. 98), the hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols and the hold display unit 76 for second special symbols are also included.

As shown in FIG. 126, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A passing gate 49 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, and a special electric motor is further downstream of the passing gate 49. The accessory 600 is provided.

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 127), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. (Not shown). A special electric accessory 600 is provided above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is a big hit when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (see FIG. 8). It is performed when the game state is entered.

On the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 540, two flow paths 250 and 260 are formed vertically as the flow path of the game ball. The game ball that has been hit to the right and has flowed further downstream without winning the grand prize opening 540 is distributed to the upper flow path 250 or the lower flow path 260 at the branch point 255 shown in FIG. 126, for example. ..

The second starting port 440A is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the upper flow path 250 can win a prize, and the second starting port 440B is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 260 can win a prize. An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided above the second starting port 440B.

Further, the small hit winning opening 560 is arranged so that a game ball that has flowed down the lower flow path 260 but has not won the second starting opening 440B can win a prize.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a shutter 442 that can open and close the second starting port 440B by moving it forward and backward, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 127) that drives the shutter 442, and the electric chew solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the solenoid to the shutter 442 is provided.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 is in an open state in which the shutter 442 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 4630 to enable (or easily) win a prize in the second starting port 440B, and to the second starting port 440B. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) from the closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win the game ball. The ordinary electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442, changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71. Will be migrated.

When the normal electric function is promoted, the frequency of the open state is increased, and substantially all of the game balls that have flowed down the lower flow path 260 win the second starting port 440B. Therefore, even if the small hit winning opening 560 is open, the operation of the shutter 442 hinders the winning of the game ball into the small hit winning opening 560. On the other hand, if the general electric function is not promoted, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to win the second starting port 440B. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the lower flow path 260 is the second starting port. The frequency of winning the 440B is lower than that when the general electric function is promoted.

Unlike the second starting port 440B, the second starting port 440A is configured in a pocket shape in which the ease of winning a game ball is not variable and the ease of winning a game ball is unchanged. Further, the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 440A for the right-handed game ball is configured to be easier than in the case where the left-handed game ball wins the first starting port 420. .. The second start port switch 441A detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440A by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440A is, for example, one. The game ball that has rolled the upper flow path 250 but has not won the second starting port 440A is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57. However, an out port for discharging the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the branch point 255 among the right-handed game balls to the outside of the machine may be provided separately from the out port 57.

In FIG. 126, the second starting opening 440A is arranged above the small hit winning opening 560, but the game ball that did not win the second starting opening 440A is configured so as not to win the small hit winning opening 560. There is.

As described above, the second starting port 440B is provided with an ordinary electric accessory 460 above, and is shifted (driven) between the open state and the closed state by driving the shutter 442. The second start port switch 441B detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440B by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440B is, for example, one. The shutter 442 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 127).

In this way, regardless of which of the second starting port 440A and the second starting port 440B the game ball wins, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery. The number of prize balls to be paid out is one at the time of winning the second starting port 440A and at the time of winning the second starting port 440B, but the prize paid out at the time of winning the second starting port 440B. The number of balls may be, for example, four.

The small hit winning opening 560 includes a shutter 562 that can open and close the small hit winning opening 560 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. The shutter 562 is driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid 520 (see, for example, FIG. 127). If the game ball wins when the small hit winning opening 560 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small hit winning opening switch 521. When a game ball is detected by the small hit winning opening switch 521, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out a preset number (for example, 10) of game balls from the payout device 340.

The game ball that rolls on the lower flow path 260 wins the second starting port 440B if the second starting port 440B is open, and the second starting port 440B if the second starting port 440B is not opened. It flows further downstream without winning a prize. The game ball that did not win the second starting opening 440B wins the small hit winning opening 560 if the small hit winning opening 560 is open, and the small hit winning opening 560 if the small hit winning opening 560 is not open. It is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out port 57 without winning a prize.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol random value or normal symbol random value). In addition, the main CPU 101 holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value and symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and of course, the second Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, up to four start information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the second special symbol is retained. These are the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (different from the second embodiment). The probability that the result of the ordinary lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49 will be "ordinary hit" is, for example, about one-third. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 100 msec. Further, the main CPU 101 is a normal lottery and a normal lottery regardless of whether or not the special symbol is changing, whether or not it is controlled in the big hit gaming state, and whether or not it is controlled in the small hit gaming state. The variable display of the symbol is executed (the same applies to the pachinko gaming machines of other embodiments).

[3-2. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 131. Each table shown in FIGS. 128 to 131 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[3-2-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 128 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 128, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". If the second special lottery is held, it will be decided as one of "big hit", "small hit" and "miss". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "miss judgment" The relationship with "value data") is specified. Further, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)". ) ”) For each, the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”, and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit” The relationship with "judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") is defined.

In the third embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 128.

Although not shown in FIG. 128, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[3-2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 129 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting ports 440A and 440B. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z7", The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA6". The "hit time selection symbol command" is a command for designating a hit symbol, and the hit type is determined according to this "hit time selection symbol command". The "symbol designation command" is a command for designating a symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99.

[3-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 130 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 130, the jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag, number of special figure shortening, number of electric support) based on the above-mentioned hit selection symbol command. It is a table to be done. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "12", the probability variation flag is OFF, the number of special symbol shortening is "100", the number of electric support is "0", and the variation mode is "1". Will be decided.

The number of times the special symbol is shortened is the number of times that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed by the high-speed fluctuation A, the high-speed fluctuation B, or the super-fast fluctuation shown in the fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 131) described later. be. The high-speed fluctuation A, the high-speed fluctuation B, and the super-fast fluctuation all have shorter fluctuation times than the long fluctuations A to C. In particular, the ultrafast fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time of about 1000 msec.

As described above, in the super-fast fluctuation, the expected value of the number of executions of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol per unit time, including the pachinko gaming machine of the other embodiment described later, is the other fluctuation pattern (in the third embodiment). If there is, it is higher than reach effects A to C, reach effects A to F during probabilistic change, normal fluctuations A and B, shortened fluctuations A and B, long fluctuations A to C, and high-speed fluctuations A and B). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the expected value of the number of executions of the variation display of the second special symbol per unit time becomes high, and the special symbol game is promoted.

The number of times of electric support is the number of fluctuations of a special symbol in which the general electric function is promoted and activated. The general electric function promotes and operates the ordinary electric accessory 460 (more specifically, the shutter 442) to win a prize of the game ball to a predetermined winning opening (the second starting opening 440B in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment). It is a function that enables (or facilitates), for example, it operates when the electric support flag described later is ON. When the normal electric function is promoted, the main CPU 101 is, for example, at least one of the opening time of a predetermined winning opening by the ordinary electric accessory 460, the number of times of opening by the ordinary electric accessory 460, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary hit probability. Change one or more so that it is possible (or easy) to win a prize in a predetermined winning opening.

The variation mode will be described in detail later, but is referred to when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss. When the fluctuation mode is any of "1" to "3", the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than that in the normal game state. If the variable mode is neither "1" to "3" (for example, "0"), it is a normal gaming state.

[3-2-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 131 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 440A and 440B. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 131, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and when the game ball wins the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number extracted in.

When the result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the status of the probability variation flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the random number for effect selection. When the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability variation flag, the reach determination random number, the above-mentioned variation mode, and the effect selection random number. It is decided based on. For example, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss, the probability variation flag is ON, and the reach determination random number is any of "11" to "29", the fluctuation mode is "1" to "3". If neither is the case, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time (for example, approximately 600,000 msec), and if the variation mode is any of "1" to "3", compared with the case where the variation mode is "0". The variation display of the second special symbol is performed in a short time. Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is different depending on whether the fluctuation mode is "1", "2", or "3".

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 126) by the sub 200 (sub CPU201).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 131 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and shows the content of the effect executed by the sub CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 131, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

[3-3. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the same processes as those of the first embodiment will be described as much as possible. Omit.

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 provides a second start port switch 441A and a second start port switch 441B to the second start port 440A and the second start port 440B, respectively, to play a game on the second start port 440A. It is possible to distinguish between the winning detection of the ball and the winning detection of the game ball to the second starting port 440B.

[3-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment.

The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process. The numerical values (“00” to “11”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 132, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S4011). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S4012 to S4023 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S4012 to S4023 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S4012 to S4023. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described in the first embodiment is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S4012). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), various information is acquired from the random number extracted by the start opening winning detection process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (step S4013) described later in the control state flag, and the variation of the special symbol acquired in this process. Set the waiting time timer to the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the pattern. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S4013). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol described later on the control status flag. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S4014) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S4013 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S4014). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S4013 has elapsed, the special lottery is performed. Determine the result. Then, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S4015) described later, and sets the small hit. Set the time corresponding to the start interval in the waiting time timer.

When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("06") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S4018) described later, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. In this way, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval or the big hit start interval set in the process of step S4014 has elapsed, the small hit start interval management process or the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("11") indicating the special symbol game end process (step S4023) described later. set. That is, in this case, neither the small hit start interval management process (step S4015) nor the big hit start interval management process (step S4018) is executed, and the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. .. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 134.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S4015), the main CPU 101 performs the small hit start interval management process (step S4015). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S4014 has elapsed. In order to open the small hit winning opening 560, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the small hit attacker (step S4016), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the small hit winning opening 560 (“04)”. For example, 1800 msec) is set in the small hit attacker opening time timer (not shown). That is, by this process, the small hit attacker opening process (step S4016) described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit attacker opening process (step S4016). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process of opening the small hit attacker, the opening time has elapsed (the small hit attacker opening time timer is “0”). It is determined whether or not the condition (there is) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the small hit winning opening 560. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit end interval (small hit end interval time) in the waiting time timer. .. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the small hit end interval process (step S4017) described later is set to be executed.

Next, when it is determined that the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 performs the small hit end interval process (step S4017). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed. ("11") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S4017.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S4018), the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot start interval management process (step S4018). In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a big prize when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S4014 elapses. In order to open the mouth 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“07)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S4019), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30000 msec) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S4019), which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S4019). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S4020) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S4019 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S4020). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“08”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“09”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4020 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S4021). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“09”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30,000 msec) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S4019) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S4022). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“10”). 11 ”) is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S4022.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, when the small hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S4023). .. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S4023, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S4012) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S4012), special symbol variation time management process (step S4013), special symbol display time management process (step S4014), and special symbol game end process (step S4023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S4012), special symbol variation time management process (step S4013), special symbol display time management process (step S4014), and small hit start interval management process (step S4015). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04" and "05" when the transition control to the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned small hit attacker opening processing (step S4016), and executes the small hit game state.

If the end condition of the small hit game state is satisfied during the small hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit attacker opening process (step S4016) and the small hit end interval process (step S4017) in this order at predetermined timings, and ends the small hit game state.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "06". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S4012), special symbol variation time management process (step S4013), special symbol display time management process (step S4014), and jackpot start interval management process (step S4018). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", and "09" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S4019), monitoring processing of residual balls in the large winning opening (step S4020), and waiting time management processing before reopening of the large winning opening (step S4021) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", "10", and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S4019), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S4020), big hit end interval processing (step S4022), and special symbol game end processing (step S4023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

[3-3-2. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag read in the special symbol control process (see step S4011) is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S40122). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S40122), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S40122), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40123.

In step S40123, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of second starting information) of the second starting opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second start opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S40123), the process proceeds to step S40124, and the number of reserved number of second start opening prizes is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S40123), the process proceeds to step S40128.

In step S40124, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of first starting information) of the first starting opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S40124), it proceeds to the process of step S40125 and determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S40124), the process proceeds to step S40127.

In step S40125, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of first start information). In the third embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved fluctuation display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, an effect selection random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. included.

Next, in step S40126, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40130.

In step S40130, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S40131, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S40132, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the hit-time selection symbol command based on the determination value data (see FIG. 128) acquired in step S40131.

Next, in step S40133, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 131), and determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the hit selection symbol command determined in step S40131.

Next, in step S40134, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol effect start command. As a result, a special symbol effect start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, in step S40135, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of step S40133 in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

In step S40127, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S40128, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of reserved second start opening prizes (the number of second start information). In the third embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each second special symbol start storage area indicates, for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for effect selection, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the second start ports 440A and 440B. Contains data.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S40129). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40130, executes the processes of steps S40131 to S40135, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[3-3-3. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S40141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S40141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S40141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40142.

In step S40142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S40142), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S40142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40143.

In step S40143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S40143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S40143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40150.

In step S40144, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of each flag and each counter value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the electric support counter, the value of the special figure shortening counter, the electric support flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40145.

In step S40145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40146.

In step S40146, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S40147).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S40148). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 130), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S40149). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S40150, the main CPU 101 performs the electric support counter subtraction process. This electric support counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 135.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special figure shortening counter subtraction process (step S40151). This special figure shortening counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 136.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (step S40152). When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S40152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S40152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40157.

In step S40153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40154.

In step S40154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S40155).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S40156). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S40157, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[3-3-4. Electric support counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the electric support counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The electric support counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the value of the electric support counter is greater than 0 (step S401501). The electric support counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set electric support counter becomes 0. The electric support counter is set at the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times it is set is, for example, 0, 50, or 100 as shown in the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 130). ..

When the value of the electric support counter is larger than 0 (YES in step S401501), the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the electric support counter (step S401502), and proceeds to the process of step S401503. On the other hand, when the value of the electric support counter is not larger than 0, that is, 0 (NO in step S401501), the main CPU 101 ends the electric support counter subtraction process.

In step S401503, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric support counter is 0. If the electric support counter is not 0 (NO in step S401503), the main CPU 101 ends the electric support counter subtraction process. On the other hand, if the electric support counter is 0 (YES in step S401503), the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the electric support flag to OFF, that is, setting “0” (step S401504). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the electric support counter subtraction process.

[3-3-5. Special figure shortening counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of a special figure shortening counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The special figure shortening counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the special figure shortening counter is greater than 0 (step S401511). The special figure shortening counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set special figure shortening counter becomes 0. The special figure shortening counter is set at the end of the big hit game state, and the number of times the special figure shortening counter is set is, for example, 0 times, 100 times, or 100,000 times as shown in the big hit type determination table (FIG. 130). be. The reason for setting it to 100,000 is to set the number of games that cannot be digested during the business hours of the hall (the number of changes in the special symbol). The special figure shortening counter is set to 100,000 times when the result of the special lottery is a big hit in which the probability change flag is set to ON after the big hit game state ends.

When the value of the special figure shortening counter is larger than 0 (YES in step S401511), the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the special figure shortening counter (step S401512), and proceeds to the process of step S401513. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure shortening counter is 0 (NO in step S401511), the main CPU 101 ends the special figure shortening counter subtraction process.

In step S401513, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special figure shortening counter is 0. If the special figure shortening counter is not 0 (NO in step S401513), the main CPU 101 ends the special figure shortening counter subtraction process. On the other hand, if the special figure shortening counter is 0 (YES in step S401513), the process proceeds to step S40514.

In step S40514, the main CPU 101 sets the variable mode to "0". When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special figure shortening counter subtraction process.

In the case of the so-called "probability change jackpot" in which the probability change flag is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of special figure shortening is set to 100000 (see FIG. 130), so that the special figure shortening counter is "0". It is practically impossible to be determined. Therefore, in step S401513, the special figure shortening counter is determined to be "0" (YES in step S401503) because the jackpot game state ends and the probability change flag is not set to ON (for example, the hit time selection symbol command "z3"). ).

[3-3-6. Small hit end interval processing]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of small hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The small hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing (step S40171). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing (NO in step S40171), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process (YES in step S40171), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40172.

In step S40172, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S40172), the main CPU 101 ends the small hit end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S40172), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40173.

In step S40173, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag, and proceeds to step S40174.

In step S40174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the small hit flag, that is, a process of setting the small hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 to OFF, and ends the small hit end interval process.

[3-3-7. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S40221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S40221), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S40221), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40222.

In step S40222, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S40222), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S40222), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S40223.

In step S40223, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S40224). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S40225).

Next, in step S40226, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S40227.

In step S40227, the main CPU 101 sets a variation mode according to the hit selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination process (step S40132) (step S40227). The variation mode according to the hit selection symbol command is as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 130). For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 101 sets "3" as the variable mode.

Next, in step S40228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved, that is, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned ON in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended. If it is a probability change jackpot (YES in step S40228), the probability change flag is set to ON (step S40229), and the process proceeds to step S40230. On the other hand, if it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S40228), the process proceeds to step S40230.

In step S40230, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of electric support corresponding to the hit selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination process (step S40132) is greater than 0 (step S40230). Here, if the number of electric support is greater than 0 (YES in step S40230), the process proceeds to step S40231. On the other hand, if the number of electric support is 0 (NO in step S40230), the jackpot end interval process is terminated.

In step S40231, the main CPU 101 sets the electric support flag to ON. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times of electric support (step S40232), and ends the jackpot end interval process.

[3-4. Variable mode]
Next, the variable mode will be described. When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the variable mode is set to any of "1" to "3".

The fluctuation mode is referred to when determining the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, and among the fluctuation modes "1" to "3", the fluctuation time in the fluctuation mode "1" is the longest, and the fluctuation mode The fluctuation time in the case of "3" is the shortest. In the second special lottery, a small hit is won with a probability of about one-third, so if the prize in the small hit winning opening 560 is not hindered (if the general electric function is not promoted), the second special symbol will be won. The shorter the fluctuation time, the higher the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. That is, among the fluctuation modes "1" to "3", the fluctuation mode "3" has the highest expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time, and the prize for the number of shot balls per unit time. The variable mode "1" has the smallest expected value of the number of balls.

Further, as a normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF and the general electric function is not promoted, a normal game state in which the fluctuation mode is "0" and a normal game state in which the fluctuation mode is "1" (hereinafter, "first advantageous game"). It is called "state").

The variable mode is controlled to "0" only in the normal game state, and when the backup clear process is performed, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is the low probability of the variable mode "1". This is the case when the special figure shortening counter is exhausted in the base state (normal game state) and in the normal game state.

Further, the variable mode is controlled to "1", which will be described in detail later, but is limited to the normal gaming state.

As shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol in FIG. 131, in the normal gaming state where the variation mode is "0", if the result of the second special lottery is not "big hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol is , The fluctuation mode is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C, which has an extremely long fluctuation time as compared with the case of the normal gaming state of "1". The long fluctuations A to C have an extremely long fluctuation time as compared with the fluctuation time of the first special symbol performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420. Therefore, in the normal gaming state in which the variable mode is "0", a general player plays the game by left-handed. In this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is, for example, about 30 to 50%.

On the other hand, in the case of the normal game state in which the fluctuation mode is "1", if the result of the second special lottery is not "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is in the case of the normal game state in which the fluctuation mode is "0". It is determined to be a high-speed fluctuation A whose fluctuation time is extremely short as compared with the above. Further, when the second special lottery is performed, the small hit game state is controlled with a probability of about one-third, whereas when the first special lottery is performed, the small hit game state is controlled. Since there is no such thing (see FIG. 128), in the normal gaming state where the variable mode is "1", a general player plays the game by hitting right. In this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is, for example, approximately 80 to 95%.

In the third embodiment, the small hit is not included in the lottery target in the first special lottery, but if the probability is lower than the small hit probability in the second special lottery (for example, 1/300), Small hits may be included in the lottery target in the first special lottery.

Further, in the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 131, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state where the variation mode is "1" and when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 are performed. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same as the fluctuation time, but this does not have to be the same.

[3-5. Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game will be described.

First, in the normal gaming state of the variable mode "0", as described above, since a general player plays a game by left-handed, the gaming ball launched toward the gaming area 20 has a second starting port 440A, It is possible to win the first starting port 420 instead of the 440B.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 420 in the normal game state of the variable mode "0", the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 128).

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 129). After that, the main CPU refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 130), and based on the determined hit selection symbol command, the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag, number of special figure shortening, number of electric support, fluctuation). Mode) is determined and controlled to the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 126, since the big winning opening 540 is arranged in the right side region, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed will be described.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 130), the hit selection symbol commands are "z1", "z2", "z7", "z8", "z10", "z11", "z16" and "z16". When it is any of "z17", the main CPU 101 controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-accuracy high-base state in which the probability change flag is ON and the general electric function is promoted. In such a high accuracy and high base state, even if the game ball flows down the lower flow path 260, almost all of the game balls win the second starting port 440B, and the small hit winning opening 560 is won. Is hindered. In this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is, for example, 90 to 100% regardless of the fluctuation mode. Then, when the set number of electric support times is exhausted, the main CPU 101 shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state in which the probability change flag is ON and the general electric function is not promoted. In the high-accuracy low-base state after the transition from the high-accuracy high-base state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time differs depending on the fluctuation mode, which will be described later.

When the hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0", "z6", "z9", and "z15", the main CPU 101 sets the probability change flag ON after the jackpot game state ends. Moreover, it is controlled to a high-accuracy and low-base state in which the general electric function does not promote and operate. In such a high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 440B is opened is lower than that with the high-accuracy high-base state, and the frequency of winning the small hit winning opening 560 is increased. In this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time differs depending on the fluctuation mode. In this third embodiment, the variation mode in the high-accuracy low-base state is "2" or "3" (see FIG. 130), and the high-accuracy low-base in the variation mode "2" (hereinafter, "second advantageous gaming state"). ”), For example, about 100 to 110%, and in the high-accuracy low base of the variable mode“ 3 ”(hereinafter referred to as“ third advantageous gaming state ”), for example, it is about 110 to 120%.

The second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state continue until the next jackpot gaming state is controlled, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times is fixed, for example, a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine. When the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the probability variation flag may be set to OFF so that the first advantageous gaming state or the normal gaming state of the variation mode "0" may be controlled.

When the hit selection symbol command is "z3" or "z12", the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the big hit game state ends in the low probability low base state (normal game state) of the variable mode "1". It is controlled to a certain first advantageous gaming state. In this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is, for example, approximately 80 to 95% as described above, and is fired per unit time as compared with the normal gaming state of the variable mode "0". The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls is large. Then, when the set special figure shortening counter is exhausted, the main CPU 101 sets the variable mode to "0". For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of times the special figure is shortened is set to 100, so that it changes when the game in the variation mode "1" is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. The mode is set to "0". That is, when the game in the first advantageous game state is performed 100 times, the game shifts to the normal game state of the variable mode "0".

When the hit selection symbol command is any one of "z4", "z5", "z13", and "z14", the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the jackpot game state ends in the variable mode "1". Control to low accuracy and high base state. In such a low accuracy and high base state, as in the high accuracy and high base state, winning the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered. Therefore, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is, for example, 90. ~ 100%. Then, when the set number of electric support times is exhausted, the main CPU 101 shifts from the low probability high base state to the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF and the general electric function is not promoted. Further, when the set number of times of shortening the special figure is exhausted, the main CPU 101 sets the variable mode to "0". For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z4" (the number of times of electric support is 50 times, the number of times of special figure shortening is 100 times), after the end of the big hit game state, the game in the low accuracy and high base state of the variable mode "1". When is performed 50 times, the game shifts to the first advantageous game state, which is the normal game state of the variable mode "1", and the game in the first advantageous game state is performed 50 times (combined with the game in the low accuracy and high base state). When it is performed 100 times), it shifts to the normal game state of the variable mode "0". Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z5" (the number of times of electric support is 100 times, the number of times of special figure shortening is 100 times), after the end of the big hit game state, the game in the low accuracy and high base state of the variable mode "1". When is performed 100 times, the game shifts to the normal gaming state of the variable mode "0" without being controlled by the first advantageous gaming state.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, even when a so-called normal jackpot (a jackpot controlled to a normal gaming state in which the probability change flag is not set after the jackpot gaming state ends) is won. , It is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of launched balls per unit time is larger than that in the normal gaming state of the variable mode "0". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of winning a normal jackpot.

Moreover, even if it is a normal big hit, it is set because the number of times of electric support to be set differs depending on the type of big hit (hit time selection symbol command) (for example, 0 times, 50 times, or 100 times). The transition timing from the low-accuracy high-base state to the first advantageous gaming state can be changed according to the number of times of electric support, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the set number of electric support games is digested, the state shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the first advantageous game state, but the low accuracy high base state. The conditions for transitioning from the first advantageous gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state are not limited to this. For example, when a condition that can be different each time is satisfied, such as when a small hit is derived, the state may shift from the low probability high base state to the first advantageous gaming state.

Further, a display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204, a sound effect output from the speaker 24 by the sub CPU 201 via the voice control circuit 205, and a sub via the LED control circuit 206. At least one or more of the light emitting effect of the LED 25 executed by the CPU 201 and the operation effect of the accessory group 1000 executed by the sub CPU 201 via the accessory control circuit 207 are the first advantageous gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state. When the same effect is performed in the 2 advantageous gaming state and / and the 3rd advantageous gaming state, the game in the 1st advantageous gaming state is the same as the game in the 2nd advantageous gaming state and / and the 3rd advantageous gaming state. It can be made to look like a game, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In addition, there are a first advantageous gaming state, a second advantageous gaming state, and a third advantageous gaming state as a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state of the variable mode "0", and these are fired per unit time. The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls is different from each other. In this way, by providing a plurality of gaming states that are advantageous to players having different expected values of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time, the player can simply change the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. It is possible to increase the variation of advantageous states that are advantageous to the user, and to enhance the interest.

Further, after the end of the jackpot game state, the number of electric support is controlled to one of a plurality of low-accuracy high-base states, and when the set number of electric support is exhausted, the first advantageous game state is controlled. Since there is a possibility, it is possible to execute a game in a low accuracy and high base state while giving the player a sense of expectation, and it is possible to enhance the interest. In particular, the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 can be visually grasped by the set number of times of electric support (that is, whether or not to shift to the first advantageous gaming state, and if shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, the transition timing). The above-mentioned effects are more prominently produced by making the effects that cannot be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the control by the main CPU 101 is also controlled so that the information such as the set number of times of electric support cannot be grasped by appearance.

[4. Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to realize an advantageous gaming state in various ball output increase patterns as an advantageous gaming state different from the jackpot gaming state. In explaining the fourth embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to the configuration of the first embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted below. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following fourth embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the fourth embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machines of the second embodiment and the third embodiment is particularly described in the following fourth embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to third embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the fourth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to third embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machines of the first to third embodiments have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

[4-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 139 is an example of a front view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The block diagram showing the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 127, and thus the illustration is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A passing gate 49 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, and a special electric motor is further downstream of the passing gate 49. The accessory 600 is provided. All or almost all of the right-handed game balls are configured to pass through the passage gate 49.

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 127), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. (Not shown). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is a big hit when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (see FIG. 8). It is performed when the game state is entered.

An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 540. The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a shutter 442 that can open and close the second starting port 440B by moving it forward and backward, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 127) that drives the shutter 442, and the electric chew solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the solenoid to the shutter 442 is provided.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 is in an open state in which the shutter 442 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 4630 to enable (or easily) win a prize in the second starting port 440B, and to the second starting port 440B. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) from the closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win the game ball. The ordinary electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442 is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (a stop mode indicating a normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

As described above, the second starting port 440B is shifted (driven) between the open state and the closed state by driving the shutter 442. The second start port switch 441B detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440B by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440B is, for example, one. The shutter 442 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 127).

A small hit winning opening 560 is arranged on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the second starting opening 440B. The small hit winning opening 560 is provided with a shutter 562 capable of opening and closing the small hit winning opening 560 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, and the number of prize balls paid out by winning is, for example, 10. The shutter 562 is driven by a small hit winning opening solenoid 520 (see, for example, FIG. 127).

The second starting port 440A is arranged on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the small hit winning opening 560. Unlike the second starting port 440B, the second starting port 440A is configured in a pocket shape in which the ease of winning a game ball is not variable and the ease of winning a game ball is unchanged.

Further, when comparing the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 440A for a right-handed game ball and the ease of winning a prize in the first starting port 420 for a left-handed game ball, the former is better. It is configured to be easy. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, most of the game balls that are hit right and flow down to the vicinity of the second starting port 440A are configured to win a prize in the second starting port 440A.

The second start port switch 441A detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440A by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440A is, for example, one.

Regardless of which of the second starting port 440A and the second starting port 440B is won by the game ball, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery.

Although it is hit right, there are very rare game balls that do not win any of the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 440B, the small hit winning opening 560, and the second starting opening 440A, and such a game ball is an out opening. It is discharged from the machine from 57. However, for example, on the right side of the ordinary electric accessory 460, an out port for discharging the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the outside of the machine may be provided separately from the out port 57.

Next, the behavior of the game ball launched toward the right side region will be described. If the opening drive of the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) enables (or easily) a prize for the game ball to the large prize opening 540, almost all the game balls flowing down the right area will win the large prize. Win a prize in mouth 540. If it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to win the big prize opening 540, the game ball flowing down the right area does not win the big prize opening 540 and is further downstream as a normal electric player. It flows down toward the object 460 and thus the second starting port 440B.

If it is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540 and it is in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the second starting port 440B, the right area Almost all of the game balls that flow down the game win the second starting port 440B. When both the large winning opening 540 and the second starting opening 440B are closed, the game ball flowing down the right side region wins the small hit winning opening 560 if the small hit winning opening 560 is in the open state. If all of the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 440B, and the small hit winning opening 560 are closed, most (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area win the second starting opening 440A. It is configured to do.

The game balls that have not won any of the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 440B, the small hit winning opening 560, and the second starting opening 440A are discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 450.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol random value or normal symbol random value). In addition, the main CPU 101 holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value and symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and of course, the second Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, up to four start information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the second special symbol is retained. These are the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (different from the second embodiment).

[4-2. Basic specifications of pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 to 146. Each table shown in FIGS. 140 to 146 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[4-2-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 140 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 140, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". If the second special lottery is held, it will be decided as a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "miss judgment" The relationship with "value data") is specified. Further, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)". ) ”) For each, the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”, and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit” The relationship with "judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") is defined.

Although the result of the second special lottery does not include "loss", the result of the second special lottery may be determined as "loss" with a low probability (for example, 1/100). Further, although the result of the first special lottery does not include the "small hit", the result of the first special lottery may be determined as the "small hit" with a low probability (for example, 1/300). ..

In the fourth embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 140.

Although not shown in FIG. 140, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[4-2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 141 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 141, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting ports 440A and 440B. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z2", The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA3".

[4-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 142 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 142, the jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag, electric support flag, number of electric support) based on the above-mentioned hit selection symbol command. It's a table. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "15", the probability variation flag is ON, and the number of electric support is determined to be "100000".

The number of times of electric support is the number of fluctuations of a special symbol in which the general electric function is promoted and activated. The normal electric function is a function that enables (or facilitates) a prize for a game ball to the second starting port 440B. For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (the second starting by driving the shutter 442). The time during which the game ball can be won (or easily) opened to the mouth 440B), the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and at least one of the ordinary hit probabilities, the second It is a control that changes so that the starting port 440B can be won (or easily). Therefore, when the general electric function is promoted, the frequency with which the game ball can be won (or easily) to the upper second starting port 440B is increased. If the electric support flag is ON (if the number of electric support is greater than 0), the general electric function is promoted, and if the electric support flag is OFF (if the number of electric support is 0), the general electric function is activated. Does not promote.

[4-2-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 143 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 440A and 440B. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. If the result of the first special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag, the reach determination random number extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, and the effect. Determined based on the random number for selection.

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability variation flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the status of the electric support flag (ON) regardless of whether the result of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. Is or OFF), and is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the game ball wins the second starting ports 440A and 440B. In particular, when the result of the second special symbol is a small hit, in the normal gaming state where both the probability variation flag and the electric support flag are OFF, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed over a long period of time such as approximately 600,000 msec. It is determined to be one of long fluctuations A to C. Further, when the probability change flag is ON, and when the electric support flag is ON even if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec. Determined by fluctuations.

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 139) by the sub 200 (sub CPU201).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 143 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and is an effect image (for example, a decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. (Variation mode) and the content of the voice (for example, the fluctuation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 by the sub CPU 201 are shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 143, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

[4-2-5. Ordinary hit random number judgment table]
FIG. 144 is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 144, when the ordinary lottery is performed, it is determined to be "ordinary hit" or "loss". In the normal hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, normal hit or loss is determined as data used for the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“normal hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined.

In the fourth embodiment, the total random number of the normal hit determination random number is 256. That is, the above-mentioned normal hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 255. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal hit probability is determined by the number of normal hit judgment value data with respect to the range of random numbers for normal hit judgment. The range (width) of the random number for normal hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The normal hit probability is shown as a selectivity in FIG. 144.

[4-2-6. Ordinary symbol judgment table]
FIG. 145 is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 145, the ordinary symbol determination table is based on the state of the normal electric function, the above-mentioned determination value data, and the ordinary symbol random value acquired when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49. , It is a table referred to for determining the "normal hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol. The high base state is when the general power function is promoted (when the electric support flag is ON), and the low base state is when the general power function is not promoted (when the electric support flag is OFF). be. For example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 in the low base state, the judgment value data is "normal hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "777", the hit selection symbol command is " It is determined to be "fz2". The "normal hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a normal hit symbol, and the normal hit type is determined according to this "normal hit selection symbol command". The normal symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 1023. In the high base state, the hit selection symbol command is always determined to be "fz1", and there is no room for it to be determined to be "fz2" or "fz3".

[4-2-7. Normal hit type determination table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a normal hit type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 146, the ordinary hit type determination table determines the type of ordinary hit (ordinary electric accessory opening pattern, ordinary electric accessory opening pattern command) based on the above-mentioned ordinary hit time selection symbol command. The table referenced for. The column of "remarks" in FIG. 146 is shown for convenience for the sake of clarity, and shows an aspect of the opening pattern of the opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the shutter 442 executed by the main CPU 101. For example, when the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 first opens the second starting port 440B for 100 msec, then closes 300,000 msec, then opens 100 msec, and 100 msec elapses. Then, the shutter 442 closes.

[4-3. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 provides a second start port switch 441A and a second start port switch 441B to the second start port 440A and the second start port 440B, respectively, to play a game on the second start port 440A. It is possible to distinguish between the winning detection of the ball and the winning detection of the game ball to the second starting port 440B.

[4-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
Since the special symbol control process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is the same process as the special symbol control process shown in FIG. 132, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[4-3-2. Special symbol memory check processing]
Since the special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is the same process as the special symbol memory check process shown in FIG. 133, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[4-3-3. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Since this special symbol display time management process is different from the special symbol display time management process shown in FIG. 134, it will be described below including duplicate descriptions. The special symbol display time management process is a process called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process.

As shown in FIG. 147, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S50141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S50141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S50141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50142.

In step S50142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S50142), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S50142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50143.

In step S50143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S50143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S50143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50150.

In step S50144, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of each flag and each counter value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the electric support counter and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50145.

In step S50145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50146.

In step S50146, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S50147).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S50148). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 142), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S50149). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S50150, the main CPU 101 performs the electric support counter subtraction process.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (step S50152). When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S50152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S50152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50157.

In step S50153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50154.

In step S50154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S50155).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S50156). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S50157, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[4-3-4. Electric support counter subtraction processing]
Since the electric support counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is the same process as the electric support counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 133, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[4-3-5. Small hit end interval processing]
Since the small hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is the same processing as the small hit end interval processing shown in FIG. 137, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

[4-3-6. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Since this jackpot end interval processing is different from the jackpot end interval processing shown in FIG. 138, it will be described below including overlapping descriptions. The jackpot end interval process is a process called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process.

As shown in FIG. 148, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S50221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S50221), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S50221), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50222.

In step S50222, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S50222), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S50222), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S50223.

In step S50223, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S50224). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S50225).

Next, in step S50226, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S50228.

In step S50228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved, that is, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned ON in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended. If it is a probabilistic jackpot (YES in step S50228), the probabilistic flag is set to ON (step S50229), and the process proceeds to step S50230. On the other hand, if it is not a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S50228), the process proceeds to step S50230.

In step S50230, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of electric support corresponding to the hit selection symbol command acquired in the special symbol determination process (step S50132) is greater than 0 (step S50230). Here, if the number of electric support is greater than 0 (YES in step S50230), the process proceeds to step S50231. On the other hand, if the number of electric support is 0 (NO in step S50230), the jackpot end interval process is terminated.

In step S50231, the main CPU 101 sets the electric support flag to ON. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times of electric support (step S50232), and ends the jackpot end interval process.

[4-3-7. Normal symbol control processing]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process. The numerical values (“00” to “05”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 149, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S5111). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S5112 to S5117 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S5112 to S5117 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S5112 to S5117. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described in the first embodiment is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S5112). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of reserved symbols in the variable display, and the number of pending symbols is “0”. If not (when there is a reserved ball), the information (normal hit determination random value, etc.) obtained by the ball passage detector passage detection process (see FIG. 30) is acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management process (step S5113) described later, and the normal symbol acquired in this process. The fluctuation display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined by the ball passage detector passage detection has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol fluctuation time management process (step S5113). In this process, the normal symbol control status flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 adds the normal symbol control status flag to the normal symbol control status flag, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (step S5114) of the above is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S5113 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time management process (step S5114). In this process, in the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S5113 has elapsed, it is normal. Determine the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "ordinary hit", the main CPU 101 sets the ordinary symbol control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5115) described later. The time corresponding to the normal electric accessory release process is set in the waiting time timer. Then, after the time corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory opening process set in the process of step S5114 has elapsed, the ordinary electric accessory opening process is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("05") indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S5117) described later. That is, in this case, the normal electric accessory opening process (step S5115) is not executed, and the normal symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This normal symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 151.

Next, when the value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process (step S5115) is set in the normal symbol control state flag, the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release process (step S5115). conduct. This ordinary electric accessory opening process is a process of opening the ordinary electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 based on the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern set in step S51130 described later. The main CPU 101 executes the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the above-mentioned ordinary electric accessory opening pattern. Then, a value (“04”) indicating the normal electric accessory release end interval processing is set in the normal symbol control state flag, and the time corresponding to the normal electric accessory release end interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, when the normal electric accessory opening processing is completed, the normal electric accessory opening end interval processing described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the normal symbol control state flag is set to a value (“04”) indicating the normal electric accessory release end interval processing, the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release end interval processing (step S5116). ). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the normal hit flag set in step S51144 described later, and sets a value (“05”) indicating the normal symbol game end process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed after the process of step S5116.

Next, in the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the normal symbol game end processing (when the result of the normal lottery is “miss”, the result of the normal lottery is “normal hit”. (When the normal electric accessory opening process is completed), the normal symbol game end process is performed (step S5117). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variation display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S5117, the above-mentioned normal symbol memory check process (step S5112) is set to be executed. When the normal symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[4-3-8. Normal symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The normal symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the normal symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag read in the normal symbol control process (see step S5112) is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process (step S51122). When it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S51122), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is "00" (YES in step S51122), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51123.

In step S51123, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols whose execution of the variable display is suspended is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved symbols is "0" (NO in step S51123), the main CPU 101 ends the ordinary symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (YES in step S51123), the process proceeds to step S51124.

In step S51124, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of normal start information corresponding to the number of reserved symbols. In the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (0) to the normal symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and is displaying fluctuations. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is start information of the normal symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the pending normal symbol. In the normal symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the normal symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the data (information) of the normal symbol game corresponding to the four times of reserved normal symbol variation display (holding ball) is stored. It is stored as start information. The start information of the normal symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random value for normal hit determination and a random value for normal effect selection extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49.

Next, in step S51125, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol start information transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the normal symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the normal symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51126.

In step S51126, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management process in the normal symbol control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a normal symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S51127, the main CPU 101 performs a normal hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, and is based on the normal hit determination random value value set earlier in the normal symbol start storage area (0), and is based on the normal hit determination table. With reference to (not shown), the normal hit judgment value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "normal hit" or a "loss" (normal hit determination) based on the acquired normal hit determination value data.

Next, in step S51128, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 145) and determines the normal hit selection symbol command based on the normal hit determination value data acquired in step S51127.

Next, in step S51129, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation pattern determination process (ordinary symbol variation time determination process). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol as, for example, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 100 msec.

Next, in step S51130, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal hit type determination table (see FIG. 146), and opens the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 based on the normal hit selection symbol command determined in the process of step S51128. Determine the pattern.

The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 msec, but the normal electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442 is almost fully open so that the winning of the game ball to the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered in the high base state. Is preferable.

Next, in step S51131, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process of step S51129 in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol memory check process.

[4-3-9. Normal symbol display time management process]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The normal symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the normal symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (step S51141). When it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (NO in step S51141), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (YES in step S51141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51142.

In step S51142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol set in the waiting time timer is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S51142), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S51142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51143.

In step S51143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". When it is determined that the normal symbol game is a "normal hit" (YES in step S51143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol game is not a "normal hit" (NO in step S51143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51149.

In step S51144, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a normal hit flag indicating a normal hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S51145.

In step S51145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process in the normal symbol control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the normal hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S51146).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal hit type determination table (see FIG. 146), and performs a process of setting the normal electric accessory release pattern in the main RAM 103 (step S51147).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the normal electric accessory release pattern command in the main RAM 103 (step S51148). As a result, a normal hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S51149, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process in the normal symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process.

[4-4. Game flow]
Next, as a flow of the game when each of the above control processes is executed using each of the above tables, a subsequent game is started in a normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF and the general electric function is not promoted. The flow of the game will be described. In the normal game state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 143), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win the first start port 420 instead of the second start ports 440A and 440B.

When the game ball wins the first start port 420 in the normal game state, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 140).

Even when the player hits the right side in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 and a normal hit result is obtained. Then, there is a possibility that the game ball wins in the second starting port 440B, but only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball in the second starting port 440B. Further, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 440A without opening the ordinary electric accessory 460, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 440A. Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 440A and 440B, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened because the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time. Very infrequently. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 141). After that, the main CPU refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 142), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag, number of electric support) based on the determined hit selection symbol command, and the jackpot game. Control to state.

As shown in FIG. 139, since the big winning opening 540 is arranged in the right side region, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed will be described.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 142), when the hit selection symbol command is "z1" or "z4", the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the jackpot game state ends as a probability change flag. Is turned on and the general power function is promoted to control the high accuracy and high base state. In this high-accuracy high-based state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec (). See FIG. 143). Therefore, the player plays the game by hitting right.

Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z0" or "z3", the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the big hit game state ends, with the probability change flag ON and the general electric function not promoted. Control to base state. In this high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See FIG. 143), the game is played by hitting right.

Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z2" or "z5", the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the big hit game state ends, with the probability change flag turned off and the general electric function promoted. It is controlled to the base state, and when 100 times of electric support is digested, it is controlled to the normal game state. In the low accuracy and high base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec (. (See FIG. 143), the game is played by hitting right. In addition, since the game shifts to the normal game state when 100 times of electric support is digested, the game is performed by left-handed after the shift to the normal game state.

As shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 145) and the normal hit type determination table (FIG. 146), in the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state), the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit. At this time, since the normal hit selection symbol command is always determined to be "fz1", the normal electric accessory 460 is released for 6000 msec. In addition, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls pass through the passing gate 49, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is extremely short, for example, 100 msec. Therefore, in the high base state, the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are almost full. It becomes an open state. Therefore, in the high base state, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting opening 440B, and the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the second starting port 440B is one. Therefore, in the high base state, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

On the other hand, in the low base state (high probability low base state, low probability low base state (normal game state)), when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit, the probability is about 1/3 to 1/4. The normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz2" or "fz3". As described above, since there is no actual benefit for the player to hit the right in the normal gaming state, the flow of the game when the player hits the right on a high-accuracy and low-base will be described below.

In the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit and the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz1", the normal electric accessory 460 is released for 6000 msec, so that the ordinary electric accessory is released. While the 460 is open, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting opening 440B, and the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered.

However, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit and the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz2", the normal electric accessory 460 first opens 1000 msec and then closes 2000 msec. Then, 1000 msec is opened, and when this 1000 msec elapses, the opening control of the ordinary electric accessory 460 ends. Since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started until the opening control of the normal electric accessory 460 is completed, the right-handed game ball is placed in the second starting port 440B during 2000 msec when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. Do not win. As described above, when the second special lottery is performed, if it is not a big hit, it will be a small hit, so that the right-handed game ball will almost win the small hit winning opening 560.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit and the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz3", the normal electric accessory 460 is first opened for 100 msec and then closed for 300,000 msec. Then, 100 msec is opened, and when 1000 msec elapses, the opening control of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is completed. As described above, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not started unless the opening control of the normal electric accessory 460 is completed, if the small hit winning opening 560 is opened, the normal hit selection symbol command is set to "fz2". For a longer time (300,000 msec) than when it was decided, most of the right-handed game balls will be in a state where they can win the small hit winning opening 560. That is, the ball ejection increase speed when the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz3" is larger than the ball ejection increase speed when the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz2".

Since the number of prize balls paid out when winning the small hit winning opening 560 is 10 as described above, in the high accuracy and low base state where the normal hit selection symbol command can be determined to be "fz2" or "fz3". The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

Moreover, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next big hit game state is controlled, the normal hit selection symbol command is either "fz2" or "fz3" during one high-accuracy low-base state. A pattern that is not determined even, a pattern that is not determined by the normal hit selection symbol command "fz3" but is determined only once by "fz2", or a pattern in which the normal hit selection symbol command "fz3" is determined multiple times. Various patterns can occur.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the general electric function is promoted, the second starting port 440B is opened and the game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the second starting port 440B. However, when the second starting opening 440B is opened, even if the small hit winning opening 560 is opened, it becomes impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the small hit winning opening 560. In addition, if the second starting port 440B is closed without the general electric function being promoted, and the small hit winning opening 560 is open, a game ball can be won in the small hit winning opening 560 ( Or easy). As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 560 is larger than the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 440B (for example, one). The number (for example, 10) is larger. Therefore, a player who is different from the big hit game state has a simple configuration in which a plurality of open patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 460 are provided and the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened in a pattern corresponding to the normal hit selection symbol command. As a highly accurate and low base state that is advantageous for , Can enhance the interest.

[4-5. First modification of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, various patterns of increasing ball output can be realized in a high-accuracy and low-base state by providing a plurality of opening patterns of the ordinary electric accessory 460. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example, by providing a plurality of fluctuation patterns of ordinary symbols having different fluctuation times, it is possible to realize various ball output increase patterns in a high-accuracy and low-base state.

In explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to those of the fourth embodiment, the configuration and control common to the fourth embodiment will be described below. The description is omitted. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

Among the drawings used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, a front view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine (FIG. 139), a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine (FIG. 127), and a pachinko gaming machine. The hit random number determination table (FIG. 140), the flowchart showing the special symbol control process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 132), the flowchart showing the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 133), and the small hit end interval process by the main CPU 101. The flowchart shown (FIG. 137) and the flowchart showing the normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 149) are also used in the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

Further, FIGS. 152 to 160 below, which are used for explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, are views obtained by modifying the drawings used for explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, or the fourth. Although it is a new figure not used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment, the details will be described later.

Among the drawings used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the normal symbol determination table (FIG. 145), the normal hit type determination table (FIG. 146), and the flowchart showing the electric support counter subtraction process (FIG. 135). Is not used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

[4-5-1. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 152 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 141, and is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 152, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting ports 440A and 440B. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z1". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA2".

[4-5-2. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 153 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 142, and is an example of a jackpot type determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 153, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the number of rounds as the jackpot type based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is determined to be "4".

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the probability change flag is set to ON from the so-called first hit until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), and the jackpot gaming state is set. This is a pachinko gaming machine with a so-called limiter, in which the probability change flag is set to OFF when the pachinko machine is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). Therefore, regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is "z0" to "z3", if the jackpot game state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), after the jackpot game state ends, after the jackpot game state ends. The probability change flag is set to ON. However, after the first big hit game state is over, the game is played by right-handed, so the second special lottery is held, but in this second special lottery, when the big hit is won, there is a 20% probability of 15 rounds. Is decided, and there is an 80% chance that it will be decided in 4 rounds. Further, regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is any of "z0" to "z3", the general electric function does not accelerate (the number of electric support is 0). That is, the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the general electric function is not promoted, but is not limited to this.

[4-5-3. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 154 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 143, and is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. The main CPU 101 refers to the variation pattern table of the special symbol of FIG. 153, determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and plays games in the second start ports 440A and 440B. When the ball wins, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. If the result of the first special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag, the reach determination random number extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, and the effect. Determined based on the random number for selection.

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be described below according to the result of the second special symbol.

When the result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and when the game ball wins the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the extracted random numbers for effect selection. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec. It is decided to be one of the productions D to F.

Even if the result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the fluctuation time is determined. It is determined to be an ultra-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special symbol is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and when the game ball wins the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number extracted in. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change is in progress. Although it may be determined to be a reach effect, in most cases, it is determined to be an ultra-fast variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 152) by the sub 200 (sub CPU201).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 154 is shown for convenience for convenience, and is a production image (for example, a decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. (Variation mode) and the content of the voice (for example, the fluctuation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 by the sub CPU 201 are shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 154, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

[4-5-4. Ordinary hit random number judgment table]
FIG. 155 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 144, and is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 155, when the ordinary lottery is performed, it is determined to be "ordinary hit" or "loss". In the normal hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, normal hit or loss is determined as data used for the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“normal hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined.

In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the total random number of the normal hit determination random number is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned normal hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal hit probability is determined by the number of normal hit judgment value data with respect to the range of random numbers for normal hit judgment. The range (width) of the random number for normal hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The normal hit probability is shown as a selectivity in FIG. 155. That is, in the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of approximately once every 43 times. It goes without saying that the selection rate shown in FIG. 155 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about 30 to 50 times.

[4-5-5. Fluctuation pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 156 is a new diagram, which is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a first modification of the fourth embodiment.

Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol using, for example, the fluctuation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 156, when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (01H) with a fluctuation time of 100 msec.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing", the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol has a different variation time based on the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49. It is determined to be one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns (02H to 05H). In particular, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" and the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98,99), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec. Determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 156, the random number range for determining the normal symbol variation pattern is changed for each set value, and the high setting has a higher probability of being determined to the above specific pattern than the low setting. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined for each set value may be different.

[4-5-6. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 157 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 147, and is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S52141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S52141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S52141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52142.

In step S52142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S52142), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S52142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52143.

In step S52143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S52143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S52143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52152.

In step S52144, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52145.

In step S52145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52146.

In step S52146, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot counter is "0". The jackpot counter indicates the number of times the jackpot game state is controlled without the probability change flag being set to OFF after the so-called first hit. When the jackpot counter is "0", it indicates that it is a so-called first hit.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot counter is "0", the main CPU 101 sets "5" in the jackpot counter (step S52147), and moves to step S52148.

In step S52148, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S52149).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S52150). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 153), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S52151). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S52152, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S52152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S52152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52157.

In step S52153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52154.

In step S52154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S52155).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S52156). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S52157, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[4-5-7. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 158 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 148, and is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end interval process executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S52221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S52221), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S52221), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52222.

In step S52222, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S52222), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S52222), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52223.

In step S52223, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S52224). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S52225), and proceeds to step S52226.

Next, in step S52226, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S52227.

In step S52227, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the jackpot counter, and proceeds to the process of step S52228.

In step S52228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot counter is greater than "0". If the value of the jackpot counter is larger than "0" (YES in step S52228), the process proceeds to step S52229. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot counter is smaller than "0" (NO in step S52228), the process of step S52229 is skipped and the jackpot end interval process is terminated.

In step S52229, the main CPU 101 sets the probability change flag to ON and ends the jackpot end interval process.

[4-5-8. Normal symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 159 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 150, and is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The normal symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the normal symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag read in the normal symbol control process (see step S5111) is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol memory check process (step S52122). When it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S52122), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is "00" (YES in step S52122), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52123.

In step S52123, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols whose execution of the variable display is suspended is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved symbols is "0" (NO in step S52123), the main CPU 101 ends the ordinary symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (YES in step S52123), the process proceeds to step S52124.

In step S52124, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of normal start information corresponding to the number of reserved symbols. In the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the normal symbol start storage area (0) to the normal symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Therefore, it is determined whether or not there is start information of the normal symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol being displayed or pending. In the normal symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the normal symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the normal symbol start storage area (1) to the normal symbol start storage area (4), the data (information) of the normal symbol game corresponding to the four times of reserved normal symbol variation display (holding ball) is stored. It is stored as start information. The start information of the normal symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random value for normal hit determination and a random value for normal effect selection extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49.

Next, in step S52125, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol start information transfer process. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the normal symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the normal symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52126.

In step S52126, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time management process in the normal symbol control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a normal symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S52127, the main CPU 101 performs a normal hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, and is based on the normal hit determination random value value set earlier in the normal symbol start storage area (0), and is based on the normal hit determination table. With reference to (not shown), the normal hit judgment value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "normal hit" or a "loss" (normal hit determination) based on the acquired normal hit determination value data.

Next, in step S52128, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 152) and determines the normal hit selection symbol command based on the normal hit determination value data acquired in step S52127.

Next, in step S52129, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation pattern determination process (ordinary symbol variation time determination process). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table of the normal symbol (FIG. 156), and according to the random value for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern extracted based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 refers to the fluctuation pattern table (FIG. 156). The normal symbol fluctuation pattern is determined.

Next, in step S52130, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation time according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined in step S52129. As a result, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed over the set fluctuation time.

Next, in step S52131, the main CPU 101 sets a normal symbol variation pattern command. As a result, a normal symbol variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol memory check process.

[4-5-9. Normal symbol display time management process]
FIG. 160 is a diagram used in place of FIG. 151, and is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The normal symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the normal symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (step S52141). When it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (NO in step S52141), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time management process (YES in step S52141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52142.

In step S52142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol set in the waiting time timer is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S52142), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S52142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52143.

In step S52143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol game is a "normal hit". When it is determined that the normal symbol game is a "normal hit" (YES in step S52143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol game is not a "normal hit" (NO in step S52143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52149.

In step S52144, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a normal hit flag indicating a normal hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52145.

In step S52145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process in the normal symbol control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the normal hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S52146).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the opening time and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (for example, one opening of 1800 msec) in the main RAM 103 as the ordinary electric accessory opening pattern (step S52147). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S52148, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a normal loss command indicating that the result of the normal symbol determination (the result of the normal lottery) is a loss (hereinafter referred to as "normal loss"). As a result, a loss command is normally transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, in step S51149, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process in the normal symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol display time management process.

[4-5-10. Game flow]
The flow of the subsequent game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF will be described. In the normal game state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 154), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win the first start port 420 instead of the second start ports 440A and 440B.

When the game ball wins the first start port 420 in the normal game state, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 140).

Even when the player hits the right side in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 and a normal hit result is obtained. Then, there is a possibility that the game ball wins in the second starting port 440B, but only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball in the second starting port 440B. Further, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 440A without opening the ordinary electric accessory 460, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 440A. Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 440A and 440B, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened because the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time. Very infrequently. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 152). After that, the main CPU refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 153), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit time selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 139, since the big winning opening 540 is arranged in the right side region, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the big hit game state based on the so-called first hit is completed will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the normal electric function does not promote and the probability change flag is set to ON whenever the big hit game state based on the so-called first hit ends, so that the first hit After the jackpot gaming state based on the above is completed, the main CPU 101 controls the high accuracy and low base state. In this high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See FIG. 154), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy low-base state after the big hit game state based on the first hit is completed, if the result of the second special lottery is not a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be super-fast fluctuation and the small hit is derived. Therefore, the small hit winning opening 560 is repeatedly opened at an extremely high frequency as compared with the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 100 msec. Further, since most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passing gate 49 and continuously hit the normal electric ball, the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are in a substantially fully open state. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is a normal hit, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting opening 440B, so even if the small hit winning opening 560 is high. Even if it is opened frequently, the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the second starting port 440B is one.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600,000 msec. Since the main CPU 101 stops the variable display of the normal symbol and opens the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 based on the derivation of the mode indicating the normal hit, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Or, even if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, if the normal hit is not derived, the normal electric accessory 460 is not released. Therefore, while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is not hindered, and most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit winning opening 560. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 560 is 10. Therefore, in a high-accuracy low-base state in which the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the ball output increase speed increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol increases.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, the result of the normal lottery is usually lost and more until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is a game-like nature such as whether it is possible to draw a fluctuation pattern of a normal symbol with a long fluctuation time.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment as described above, the high-accuracy low-base state continues until the next jackpot gaming state is controlled, so that during one high-accuracy low-base state, A pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never lost, or even if the result of the normal lottery is only once, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10000 msec, or the result of the normal lottery is 2 Various patterns can occur, such as when the normal symbol is lost and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times.

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, a simple configuration is provided such that a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times of the normal symbols are provided. As a high-accuracy low-base state that is advantageous to players different from the jackpot gaming state, it has made it possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) with various ball output increase patterns. It is possible to provide a game-like character, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is the ordinary loss, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 that has received the ordinary symbol variation pattern command executes the effect based on the variation time of the ordinary symbol. That is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, and when it is 30,000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained differs depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Then, an effect that can grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) may be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10000 msec, an effect such as "per round!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 20000 msec, the effect such as "per 2 rounds!" Is executed. When the fluctuation time of the pattern is 30,000 msec, an effect such as "per 3 rounds!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, an effect such as "super hit" is executed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1 is executed, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 201 include a display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, a sound effect output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205, and an LED control circuit 206. At least one or more of the light emitting effect of the LED 25 executed via the above and the operation effect of the accessory group 1000 executed via the accessory control circuit 207 corresponds to the effect.

By the way, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, before the fluctuation of the normal symbol is completed, for example, in the second special lottery. It is possible that the result will be a "big hit" and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. Furthermore, since the time controlled to the jackpot gaming state is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot gaming state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. Can occur. As described above, since the ordinary electric accessory 460 is not opened while the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 does not hinder the winning of the small hit winning opening 560, and the game is hit right. Most of the balls will win the small hit winning opening 560. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even if the jackpot game state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbol ends, it is normal when the jackpot game state ends. If the fluctuation display of the symbol continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become "normal loss" in the game state after the jackpot game state ends, the advantageous game state immediately after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to enhance the game interest while being controlled to the jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot gaming state of, for example, 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a small hit prize. You can win as many prizes as you like in the mouth 560, and you will be able to enhance your interest.

In addition, although the pachinko gaming machine of the first modification of the fourth embodiment does not promote the normal power function, the pachinko game machine in which the normal power function is promoted and operates in the game state after the jackpot game state ends. Also, the present invention can be applied. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the normal electric function is promoted and operated in the game state after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to cause that most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit winning opening 560.

[4-6. Second variant of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment is mostly common to the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, but the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit. The opening pattern of is different. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment, if one game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440B while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is being opened, the main CPU 101 is normally used. The opening process of the electric accessory 460 is completed.

In explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to the configuration of the fourth embodiment, the configuration and control common to the fourth embodiment are described below. The description about is omitted. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment.

Among the drawings used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, a front view of the game board unit (FIG. 139), a block diagram showing a control circuit (FIG. 127), a hit random number determination table (FIG. 140), and a special symbol Judgment table (FIG. 141), jackpot type determination table (FIG. 142), special symbol variation pattern table (FIG. 143), ordinary hit random number determination table (FIG. 144), ordinary symbol determination table (FIG. 145), special by main CPU 101 A flowchart showing the symbol control process (FIG. 132), a flowchart showing the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 133), a flowchart showing the small hit end interval process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 137), and a special symbol display time by the main CPU 101. A flowchart showing the management process (FIG. 147), a flowchart showing the electric support counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 135), a flowchart showing the small hit end interval process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 137), and a big hit end interval process by the main CPU 101. The flowchart shown (FIG. 148), the flowchart showing the normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 149), the flowchart showing the ordinary symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101 (FIG. 150), and the ordinary symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 are shown. The flowchart (FIG. 151) is also used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 161 is used instead of FIG. 146 for the normal hit type determination table.

[4-6-1. Normal hit type determination table]
FIG. 161 is an example of a normal hit type determination table for a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 161, the normal hit type determination table is used to determine the normal hit type (normal electric accessory opening pattern, ordinary electric accessory opening pattern command) based on the normal hit selection symbol command. This is the referenced table. The “Remarks” column in FIG. 161 is shown for convenience for the sake of clarity, and shows an aspect of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 460 and the shutter 442 executed by the main CPU 101.

Specifically, when the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz1", the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are opened for 6000 msec. Further, when the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are executed in a series of operations such as first opening 500 msec, then closing 2000 msec, and then opening 1000 msec. Further, when the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz3", the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are first opened for 5000 msec, then closed for 60,000 msec, and then opened for 1000 msec. However, regardless of whether the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz1" to "fz3", if the game ball wins the second starting port 440B when the shutter 442 is open, the figure is shown at that time. The opening pattern (a series of operations) shown in the remarks column of 161 ends halfway. For example, when the normal hit selection symbol command is "fz3", if the game ball wins the second starting port 440B at the time of the first opening of the shutter 442 (when the shutter 442 is opened at 5000 msec), the shutter 442 closes at that time. A series of operations of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is completed, and the subsequent closing of 60,000 msec and opening of 1000 msec are not performed. Then, if the start information of the normal symbol is reserved, the main CPU 101 starts a new variation display of the normal symbol.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment as described above, in a high-probability low-base state in which the probability change flag is ON and the general electric function is not promoted and activated, there is a approximately 30% probability of reaching the small hit winning opening 560. The chances of winning a prize for a pachinko ball are lost.

Specifically, when a right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 in a high-accuracy and low-base state, it becomes a normal hit with a probability of 255/256, for example, and a normal hit selection with a probability of 28.2%. The symbol command is determined to be "fz2". In this case, if the game ball wins the second starting port 440B at the time of the first opening (when the opening time is 500 msec), a new fluctuation display of the normal symbol (for example, the fluctuation time of 100 msec) is started and the normal electric accessory 460. Since there is a high possibility that the opening process of is executed, the chance of winning the game ball in the small hit winning opening 560 may be lost. However, if the game ball does not win in the second starting port 440B at the time of the first opening (when opened at 500 msec), the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed for 2000 msec, and if the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and 440B, 1 Since a small hit is won with an extremely high probability of 1/01, it is possible to win a game ball in the small hit winning opening 560 while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed for 2000 msec.

In addition, when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 in the high-accuracy and low-base state and becomes a normal hit, and the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz3", the first opening (5000 msec). If a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440B (at the time of opening), the fluctuation display of the next normal symbol will be started without closing 60,000 msec and opening the second opening (1000 msec opening). The chance of winning a game ball in the small hit winning opening 560 may be lost. However, if the game ball does not win in the second starting port 440B at the time of the first opening (when opened at 5000 msec), the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed for 60,000 msec, and during this period, the game ball can be won in the small hit winning opening 560. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of balls launched per unit time exceeds 1. In particular, if a game ball is won in the second starting port 440B at the time of the first opening (when the game is opened at 5000 msec), the above-mentioned advantageous game state is not controlled, but the player who continuously shoots the game ball makes a judgment. If the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440B can be avoided at the time of the first opening (at the time of opening 5000 msec), it will be controlled to the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. It is possible to provide new game characteristics and enhance the interest.

When the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 in the high-accuracy and low-base state and becomes a normal hit, and the normal hit selection symbol command is determined to be "fz3", the sub CPU 201 first determines the game ball. The effect of urging the launch of the game ball to be stopped may be executed so that the game ball does not win a prize in the second starting port 440B at the time of opening (when the game ball is opened at 5000 msec). The effects executed by the sub CPU 201 include a display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, a sound effect output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205, and an LED control circuit 206. At least one of the light emitting effect of the LED 25 and the operation effect of the accessory group 1000 executed via the accessory control circuit 207 corresponds to the effect.

[5. Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be described. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a manner indicating "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is not immediately controlled to the big hit gaming state, but prepares for the big hit start, which will be described later. The processing was performed, and the prize ball could be obtained during this jackpot start preparation processing. In explaining the fifth embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to the configuration of the first embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted below. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following fifth embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the fifth embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to fourth embodiments, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machines of the second to fourth embodiments is also particularly described in the following fifth embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the fifth embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to fourth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the fifth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

[5-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163, the appearance configuration and the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described as being different from the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 162 is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 163 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops in a mode indicating "big hit", the condition device and the combination of the conditions for controlling the big hit gaming state. Of the object continuous operation devices, only the condition device operates. Then, on the premise that the condition device has been activated, the accessory continuous operating device is activated based on the passage of the game ball through the combination operating gate provided in the game area 20, which will be described later, and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. It is configured to.

As shown in FIG. 162, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A combination operation gate 80 is arranged in the right side area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the operation amount of the launch handle 32 is large.

Above the combination operating gate 80, an opening 81 for guiding the game ball is formed in the combination operation gate 80, and a guide piece 82 for closing the opening 81 is provided. The guide piece 82 is driven by the guide piece solenoid 811 (see FIG. 163) so that the right-handed game ball can fall from the opening 81 and pass through the combined operation gate 80, and the right-handed game ball can be hit right-handed. It is configured to be operable with a closing mode in which the game ball is not dropped through the opening 81 (it is impossible to pass through the solenoid operating gate 80). When the guide piece 82 is in the open mode, the right-handed game ball is configured so that, or most of it, passes through the winning combination actuating gate 80.

When the game ball passes through the combination operating gate 80, the combination operation gate switch 801 detects the passage of the game ball through the combination operation gate 80. However, the main CPU 101 determines that the first passage detection of the combined operation gate 80 by the combined operation gate switch is effective on the premise that the condition device described later is operating. Although not shown, in the switch input detection process of FIG. 30 executed by the main CPU 101, the passage detection process of the game ball by the combined operation gate switch 801 is also executed.

A passage gate 49 is arranged below the combined operation gate 80. The passage gate 49 cannot allow the game ball to pass when the guide piece 82 is in the closed mode, and the game ball which has passed through the combined operation gate 80 when the guide piece 82 is in the open mode is always or almost always. Is configured to pass through.

An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided further downstream of the combination operating gate 80 and the guide piece 82. The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a shutter 442 that can open and close the winning opening 446 by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 163) that drives the shutter 442, and the power of the electric chew solenoid 4630. Is provided with a power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the solenoid to the shutter 442.

The winning opening winning switch 447 detects the winning of the game ball into the winning opening 446. The winning opening 446 is a winning opening different from the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, the large winning opening 540, the small hit winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 53, and the game ball wins in the winning opening 446. Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process of paying out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 300. Even if the game ball wins in the winning opening 446, the special lottery is not executed.

Further, if the result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the main CPU 101 is normally electric until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the winning opening 446 or the upper limit time (for example, 5800 msec) elapses. The opening process of the accessory 460 is executed, but in the ordinary electric accessory 460, not only the game ball that has passed through the combination operation gate 80 but also all the game balls that are hit to the right can win a prize in the winning opening 446. It has become.

A special electric accessory 600 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the prize opening 446. The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 163), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. (Not shown). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is a big hit when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (see FIG. 8). It is performed when the game state is entered.

The second starting port 440 is arranged on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the large winning opening 540. Unlike the winning opening 446, the second starting port 440 is configured in a pocket shape in which the ease of winning a game ball is not variable and the ease of winning a game ball is constant. Unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, there is only one second starting port 440.

Further, when comparing the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 440 for a right-handed game ball and the ease of winning a prize in the first starting port 420 for a left-handed game ball, the former is better. It is configured to be easy.

The second start port switch 441 detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440 is, for example, one. Of the right-handed game balls, most of the game balls that have not won either the winning opening 446 or the large winning opening 540 are configured to win the second starting opening 440.

A small hit winning opening 560 is arranged below the second starting opening 440. In the small hit winning opening 560, the power of the small hit winning opening solenoid 520 (see FIG. 163) is transmitted to the shutter 562, the shutter 562 moves forward and backward, and the small hit winning opening 560 can be opened and closed. There is. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the small hit winning opening 560 is, for example, 10. However, among the right-handed game balls, most of the game balls that did not win in either the winning opening 446 or the large winning opening 540 win the second starting opening 440, so the small hit winning opening 560 is used as the game ball. Rarely wins. The small hit winning opening 560 is not an indispensable configuration for realizing the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

A game ball that has been hit right but has not won any of the second starting opening 440, the large winning opening 540, and the small hit winning opening 560 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57. However, for example, on the right side of the second starting port 440 or the like, an out port for discharging the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the second starting port 440 to the outside of the machine may be provided separately from the out port 57.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol random value or normal symbol random value). In addition, the main CPU 101 holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value and symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and of course, the second Even when the game ball wins in the starting port 440, up to four starting information (random value for jackpot determination and symbol random value) of the second special symbol is reserved. These are the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (different from the second embodiment). The probability that the result of the ordinary lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49 will be "ordinary hit" is, for example, about one-third. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 100 msec.

[5-2. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 165. FIG. 164 is an example of a special symbol determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 165 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. These tables are stored in the main ROM 102. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the hit random number determination table is the same as in FIG. 128, and the variation pattern table of the special symbol is the same as in FIG. 154.

[5-2-1. Special symbol judgment table]
As shown in FIG. 164, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol random value acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" for determining the stop symbol based on the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z1". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA2".

[5-2-2. Big hit type determination table]
As shown in FIG. 165, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag) based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the probability variation flag is determined to be ON. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the probability change flag is ON, the game is played by right-handed, but if either the winning opening 446 or the large winning opening 540 is not open, the game is right-handed. Since most of the game balls win the second starting port 440, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption of the game balls. However, as described above, the game ball wins the second starting port 440. Since the number of prize balls at this time is one, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1 in the highly probable gaming state in which the probability variation flag is ON.

[5-2-3. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start port 440. do. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, since the variation pattern table of the special symbol is the same as that of FIG. 154, the illustration and description of the variation pattern table of the special symbol will be omitted.

[5-3. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[5-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The difference between the special symbol control process of FIG. 166 and the special symbol control process shown in FIG. 132 is that, as shown in FIG. 166, the jackpot start preparation process (step) is performed before the jackpot start interval management process (step S6019). This is the point where the processing of S6018) is performed. The special symbol control process shown in FIG. 166 will be described below, including overlapping descriptions.

The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process. The numerical values (“00” to “12”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 166, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S6011). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S6012 to S6024, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S6012 to S6024 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S6012 to S6024. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described in the first embodiment is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S6012). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), various information is acquired from the random number extracted by the start opening winning detection process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (step S6013) described later in the control state flag, and the variation of the special symbol acquired in this process. Set the waiting time timer to the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the pattern. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process is the same process as in FIG. 133.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S6013). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol described later on the control status flag. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S6014) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S6013 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S6014). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S6013 has elapsed, the special lottery is performed. Determine the result. Then, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S6015) described later in the control state flag, and sets the small hit. Set the time corresponding to the start interval in the waiting time timer. In this way, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S6014 has elapsed, the small hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed.

When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("06") indicating the big hit start preparation process (step S6018) in the control state flag.

On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("12") indicating the special symbol game end process (step S6024) described later. set. That is, in this case, neither the small hit start interval management process (step S6015) nor the big hit start preparation process (step S6018) is executed, and the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 167.

When the control state flag is set to a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process (step S6015), the main CPU 101 performs the small hit start interval management process (step S6015). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S6014 has elapsed. In order to open the small hit winning opening 560, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the small hit attacker (step S6016), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the small hit winning opening 560 (“04)”. For example, 1800 msec) is set in the small hit attacker opening time timer (not shown). That is, by this process, the small hit attacker opening process (step S6016) described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit attacker opening process (step S6016). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process of opening the small hit attacker, the opening time has elapsed (the small hit attacker opening time timer is “0”). It is determined whether or not the condition (there is) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the small hit winning opening 560. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval processing, and sets the time corresponding to the small hit end interval (small hit end interval time) in the waiting time timer. .. That is, after the time corresponding to the small hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, the small hit end interval process described later is set to be executed. The small hit end interval process is the same process as in FIG. 137.

Next, when it is determined that the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed, the main CPU 101 performs the small hit end interval process (step S6017). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the small hit end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the small hit end interval has elapsed. ("12") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S6017.

Since it is not essential to control the small hit gaming state in order to realize the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the processes of steps S6015 to S6017 are not essential.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start preparation process (step S6018), the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot start preparation process (step S6018). This jackpot start preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S6019), the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot start interval management process (step S6019). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the jackpot 540 when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the jackpot start preparation process described later elapses, based on the data read from the main ROM 102. , Update the variables located in the main RAM 103. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“08)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S6020), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30000 msec) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S6020), which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S6020). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the process during the opening of the large winning opening (that is, the processing during the round game), the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not one of the condition that there is and the condition that the opening upper limit time has passed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“09”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S6021) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S6020 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S6021). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“09”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“10”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6021 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“11”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S4021). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“09”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30,000 msec) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S4019) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S4022). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“11”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process (“11”) when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses. 12 ”) is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S4022.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, when the small hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S6024). .. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“12”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S6024, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S6012) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "12". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S6012), special symbol variation time management process (step S6013), special symbol display time management process (step S6014), and special symbol game end process (step S6024). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S6012), special symbol variation time management process (step S6013), special symbol display time management process (step S6014), and small hit start interval management process (step S6015). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04" and "05" when the transition control to the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned small hit attacker opening processing (step S6016), and executes the small hit game state.

If the end condition of the small hit game state is satisfied during the small hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "12". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit attacker opening process (step S6016) and the small hit end interval process (step S6017) in this order at predetermined timings, and ends the small hit game state.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "06". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S6012), special symbol variation time management process (step S6013), special symbol display time management process (step S6014), and jackpot start preparation process (step S6018). It is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the control for preparing to shift to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", and "09" when all the conditions for starting the big hit are satisfied during the big hit start preparation process. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned jackpot start interval management process (step S6019), the jackpot opening process (step S6020), the jackpot residual ball monitoring process (step S6021), and the waiting time before the jackpot reopening. The management process (step S6022) is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "08", "09", "11", and "12". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S6020), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S6021), big hit end interval processing (step S6023), and special symbol game end processing (step S6024). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

[5-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S60141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S60141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S40131), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60142.

In step S60142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S60132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S60142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60143.

In step S60143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S60143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S60143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60148.

In step S60144, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot first condition establishment process. The jackpot first condition establishment process is a process of satisfying the jackpot first condition, which is one of the conditions for controlling the jackpot gaming state. Performs processing such as enabling ball passage detection. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60145.

In step S60145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60146.

In step S60146, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start preparation process in the control state flag, and proceeds to step S60147.

In step S60147, the main CPU 101 sets a jackpot start preparation command. As a result, a jackpot start preparation command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S60148, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S60148), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60149. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S60148), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60153.

In step S60149, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60150.

In step S60150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S60151).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S60152). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S60153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“12”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[5-3-3. Big hit start preparation process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot start preparation process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The jackpot start preparation process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start preparation process (step S60181). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“06”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S60181), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot start preparation process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start preparation process (YES in step S60181), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60182.

In step S60182, the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot second condition establishment process, and proceeds to step S60183. The jackpot second condition establishment process is a process of satisfying the jackpot second condition, which is one of the conditions for controlling the jackpot gaming state. Perform processing to make it. The jackpot second condition fulfillment process is a process that is not executed unless the jackpot first condition is met (unless "06" is set in the control state flag as shown in step S60146).

When the main CPU 101 opens the guide piece 82, considering that 100 game balls are fired per minute, the time for the game balls to pass through the passing gate 49 is, for example, 3000 msec. Only the guide piece 82 is opened. Further, in the process of operating the accessory continuous operation device, the main CPU 101 establishes the accessory continuous operation device when the passage of the game ball through the combination operation gate 80 is effective. It should be noted that the passage of the game ball through the combined operation gate 80 is effective when the game ball first passes through on the premise that the condition device is operating, as described above.

In step S60183, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second big hit condition is satisfied. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines, for example, whether or not the accessory continuous operation device has been established.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second big hit condition is not satisfied (NO in step S60183), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit start preparation process without newly setting the control state flag. Since the control state flag remains at a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start preparation process, the main CPU 101 does not move to the jackpot start interval management process unless the accessory continuous operation device is activated.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the second jackpot condition is satisfied (YES in step S60183), the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag (step S60184). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S60185). In this fifth embodiment, it is preferable that a time of at least 30,000 msec or more is set in the waiting time timer, and the reason will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60186.

In step S60186, a process of setting the jackpot start command in the main RAM 103 is performed (step S60186). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the round number upper limit value (large winning opening opening number upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103, and sets the round number display LED pattern flag (step). S60187). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot start preparation process.

[5-3-4. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“11”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S60231). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“11”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S60231), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“11”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S60231), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60232.

In step S60232, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S60232), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S60232), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60233.

In step S60233, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S60234). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“12”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S60235).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot condition clearing process in step S60236. The jackpot condition clearing process is a process for clearing the operation of the condition device, the operation of the accessory continuous device, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S60237.

Next, in step S60237, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved, that is, whether or not the probability variation flag is turned ON in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended. If it is a probabilistic jackpot (NO in step S60237), the jackpot end interval process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not a probabilistic jackpot (YES in step S60237), a process of setting the probabilistic flag to ON (step S60238) is performed, and the jackpot end interval process is terminated.

[5-4. Game flow]
Next, as a flow of the game when each of the above control processes is executed using each of the above tables, the flow of the subsequent game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF will be described. ..

In the normal game state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 154), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win the first start port 420 instead of the second start port 440.

When the game ball wins the first start port 420 in the normal game state, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 127).

Even if the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal game state, the guide piece 82 is not opened unless the first big hit condition is satisfied, so that the game ball does not pass through the passing gate 49 and is normally electric. The opening process of the accessory 460 is not performed. Therefore, the prize ball is not paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446. Further, since the big winning opening 540 is not opened unless it is controlled to the big hit game state, the winning ball is not paid out even based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 540. Further, although the right-handed game ball can win the second starting port 440, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 440. Further, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 164). After that, the main CPU refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 165), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag) based on the determined hit selection symbol command, and performs the jackpot first condition establishment process. As a result, the operation of the condition device, the activation of the detection of the passage of the game ball to the combined operation gate 80, and the like are executed, and the game is played by right-handed striking.

When the condition device is activated and the detection of the passage of the game ball to the combined operation gate 80 is enabled, the opening process of opening the guide piece 82 by 3000 msec is performed as the process of satisfying the second big hit condition. When the guide piece 82 is opened and the right-handed game ball passes through the winning combination operation gate 80 and is effectively detected, the jackpot start interval management process is executed.

If the passage of the game ball to the combined operation gate 80 is not effectively detected even though the guide piece 82 has been opened, the jackpot start interval management process does not proceed and the main CPU 101 does not proceed. , The opening process of opening the guide piece 82 again by 3000 msec is executed. This process is executed until the passage of the game ball through the combined operation gate 80 is effectively detected.

By the way, when the guide piece 82 is opened, about five game balls can pass through the passing gate 49. As mentioned above, up to four start information of ordinary symbols can be reserved, and the probability that the result of the ordinary lottery will be "ordinary hit" is about one-third as described above. Including the start information, the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is executed up to 5 times.

Further, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is, for example, 100 msec, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460, which is released when the normal symbol hits, is, for example, 5800 msec at the maximum. Then, when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened once, a maximum of 10 game balls can be won in the winning openings 446. For example, when the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened at one time, 10 game balls win the prize opening 446, and if it is performed 5 times, a maximum of about 750 prize balls are paid out. It becomes.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 540, the opening process (winning opening) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is performed. Since the prize balls are also paid out by winning the game ball to 446), it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, since the main CPU 101 executes the variable display of the normal symbol regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the big hit game state, the opening process of the normal electric accessory 460 is performed even if the above-mentioned big hit start interval management process is started. It is possible to make a favorable state for the player, such as being able to receive the payout of the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446. That is, the player can enjoy the benefits of both the payout of the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446 and the payout of the winning ball based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 540. It will be possible to provide new game features that have never been seen before.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, for example, approximately five game balls pass through the passing gate 49 as an opening process of the guide piece 82, which is one of the processes for establishing the second jackpot condition. The guide piece 82 is opened for, for example, 3000 msec. However, the opening process of the guide piece 82 is not limited to the process of closing the guide piece 82 after a lapse of a predetermined time. The guide pieces 82 may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls have passed), or a switch for detecting that the game balls have passed through the guide pieces 82 may be provided so that a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls can be used. It may be opened until it passes through the guide piece 82 (that is, the guide piece 82 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have passed).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the combination operating gate 80 and the passing gate 49 are separately provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the function of the combination operating gate 80 and the function of the passing gate 49 It is also possible to provide one dual-purpose gate that also serves as. In this case, when the first jackpot condition is satisfied, a preset number (for example, five) of game balls can enter the dual-purpose gate, which is the condition for satisfying the second jackpot condition. It is possible to receive the payout of the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446 after confirming that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, it is preferable that the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 460, which is performed up to 5 times, is performed by the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval elapses. If the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval elapses while the opening process of the above-mentioned ordinary electric accessory 460 is being performed, most of the right-handed game balls will win the prize opening 446, which is a big hit. This is because there is a risk that the winning of the winning opening 540 will be hindered and the prize balls will not be paid out accordingly. Therefore, when the main CPU 101 performs the process of setting the jackpot start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S60185), even if the above-mentioned opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is performed five times, the large winning opening 540 is entered. It is preferable to set the waiting time timer to a time during which the winning of the game ball is not hindered (at least 30,000 msec or more in this fifth embodiment).

Further, for example, in the case of the conventional small hit RUSH, when the small hit RUSH is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the small hit RUSH ends halfway, so it was luck at that time how much the benefit of the small hit RUSH could be enjoyed. However, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment, the advantageous state in which the winning ball can be paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446 is set to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It becomes possible to manage in such a time, and unlike the conventional small hit RUSH, it does not end in the middle, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[5-5. Deformation example of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 170 is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the fifth embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs only a time (for example, 3000 msec) for the game balls to pass through the passing gate 49, for example, as the opening process of the guide piece 82 in the jackpot second condition satisfying process. The process of opening the guide piece 82 is performed, but in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the fifth embodiment, for example, 20 or more gaming balls can pass through the passage gate 49.

In realizing the modified example of the fifth embodiment, the difference from the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is that, as shown in FIG. 170, the retention device 83 capable of retaining the game ball is the guide piece 82. The point that it is provided between the combination operating gate 80 and the point that the guide piece 82 is in the open mode is longer than that of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, and the jackpot start set in the waiting time timer. The interval time is longer than that of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, and other configurations and controls are common. The time during which the guide piece 82 is opened is such that, for example, 20 or more game balls can pass through the passing gate 49 (for example, 12000 msec to 15000 msec). The jackpot start interval time set in the waiting time timer is, for example, 120 seconds.

The retention device 83 is composed of, for example, a crune, and is configured so that the guide piece 82 is opened to receive all or almost all of the game balls that have fallen from the opening 81. It is preferable that the retention device 83 has a configuration in which the game balls fall one by one with a time lag. Further, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, 100 msec and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 460 is, for example, a maximum of 5800 msec, a time of, for example, 5900 msec has elapsed after one game ball has fallen from the retention device 83. It is preferable that the next game ball later falls from the retention device 83, but this is not essential.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the fifth embodiment, as the opening process of the guide piece 82, which is one of the processes for satisfying the second jackpot condition, for example, the gaming ball generally passes through the passing gate 49. The guide piece 82 is opened for, for example, 12000 msec to 15000 msec as the time for passing 20 pieces. However, the opening process of the guide piece 82 is not limited to the process of closing the guide piece 82 after a lapse of a predetermined time. The guide pieces 82 may be closed when a predetermined number of game balls have passed), or a switch for detecting that the game balls have passed through the guide pieces 82 may be provided so that a predetermined number (for example, 20) of game balls can be used. It may be opened until it passes through the guide piece 82 (that is, the guide piece 82 is closed when a predetermined number of game balls have passed).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the fifth embodiment is provided with the combined operation gate 80 and the passing gate 49 separately, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. , A single combined gate that also has the function of the combined operation gate 80 and the function of the passing gate 49 may be provided. In this case, when the first jackpot condition is satisfied, a preset number (for example, 20) of game balls can enter the combined gate, which is the condition for satisfying the second jackpot condition. Therefore, this number of game balls can be entered. It is possible to receive the payout of the prize ball based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening 446 after confirming that it is controlled to the big hit game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

As described above, the maximum number of start information of the normal symbol that can be held is 4, but by arranging the retention device 83 between the guide piece 82 and the combined operation gate 80, the normal symbol that is held is held. After the start information of the above is digested, the game ball that has fallen from the retention device 83 can pass through the combined operation gate 80 and the passage gate 49. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 540, the opening process (winning opening) of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is performed. The prize balls that are also paid out by the winning of the game balls to 446) can be paid out even more than the pachinko game machines of the fifth embodiment, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

[6. 6th Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is in a high-probability gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "ST state" in the sixth embodiment) after the jackpot gaming state is completed and until the variation display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times. This is a so-called ST machine, which is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined number of variable displays of special symbols are performed without the result of the special lottery becoming a “big hit”. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to control a pseudo ST state (hereinafter referred to as "GST state") similar to the ST state even though it is a low-probability gaming state. It is possible to realize a third advantageous gaming state, which is different from the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as the gaming state and the time-saving gaming state. In explaining the sixth embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following sixth embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the sixth embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to fifth embodiments, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machines of the second to fifth embodiments is also particularly described in the following sixth embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the sixth embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to fifth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the sixth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to fifth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machines of the first to fifth embodiments have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

[6-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172, the appearance configuration and the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be mainly described as being different from the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 171 is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 172 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 171, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A passing gate 49 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, and a special electric motor is further downstream of the passing gate 49. The accessory 600 is provided.

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 172), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. (Not shown). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is a big hit when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (see FIG. 8). It is performed when the game state is entered. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the large prize opening 540 is, for example, 15.

An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 540. The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a shutter 442 that can open and close the first starting port 420B by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 172) that drives the shutter 442, and the electric chew solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the solenoid to the shutter 442 is provided.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 is in an open state in which the shutter 442 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 4630 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the first starting port 420B, and to the first starting port 420B. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) from the closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win the game ball. The ordinary electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442, changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (stop mode indicating normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71. Will be migrated.

Although the first starting port is also arranged below the liquid crystal display device 16 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, in order to distinguish between the two, in this specification, the liquid crystal display device 16 is used. The first starting port arranged below is referred to as the first starting port 420A, and is referred to as the first starting port 420B at which the game ball can win a prize when the shutter 442 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is activated. However, regardless of which of the first starting port 420A and the first starting port 420B the game ball wins, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery.

As described above, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is provided with two first starting ports 420. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, only one first starting port 420, which can win a prize when hitting left, is provided below the liquid crystal display device 16, whereas the sixth embodiment In pachinko machines, a first starting port 420A that can win a prize when hitting left is provided below the liquid crystal display device 16, and a prize can be won if the shutter 442 is open when hitting right ( Or easy) is provided with a first starting port 420B.

Further, the first start port switch 421A detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420A by passing the game ball. Further, the first start port switch 421B detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420B by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 420A is, for example, four, but the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 420B is, for example, one.

A small hit winning opening 560 is arranged on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the first starting opening 420B. In the small hit winning opening 560, the power of the small hit winning opening solenoid 520 (see FIG. 172) is transmitted to the shutter 562, the shutter 562 moves forward and backward, and the small hit winning opening 560 can be opened and closed. There is.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, and when the symbol mode in which the result of the normal lottery is "normal hit" is displayed, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened to hit right. The game ball is won in the first starting port 420B, and the winning of the game ball in the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered. The time during which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, 100 msec, and the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be "normal hit" is approximately one-third, but is not limited to this.

If the right-handed game ball does not win in either the large winning opening 540 or the first starting opening 420B, the game ball may win in the small hit winning opening 560. However, since the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the small hit winning opening 560 is, for example, one, so-called increase in the number of balls to be paid out by winning the game ball to the small hit winning opening 560 cannot be expected. The small hit winning opening 560 is not an essential configuration for realizing the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

A second starting port 440 is arranged on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the small hit winning opening 560. Unlike the first starting port 420B, the second starting port 440 is configured in a pocket shape in which the ease of winning a game ball is not variable and the ease of winning a game ball is unchanged.

Further, when comparing the ease of winning a prize in the second starting port 440 for a right-handed game ball and the ease of winning a prize in the first starting port 420A for a left-handed game ball, the former is better. It is configured to be easy.

The second start port switch 441 detects the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 by passing the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the second starting port 440 is, for example, one. A game ball that has been hit right but has not won any of the large winning opening 540, the first starting opening 420B, the small hit winning opening 560, and the second starting opening 440 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57. .. However, most of the game balls that are hit right and reach the second starting port 440 are configured to win a prize at the second starting port 440. Further, for example, on the right side of the ordinary electric accessory 460 or the like, an out port for discharging the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the outside of the machine may be provided separately from the out port 57.

[6-2. Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. Each table shown in FIGS. 173 to 176 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[6-2-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 173 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 173, when either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit", a "small hit" or a "miss". However, while the small hit probability when the first special lottery is performed is extremely low at about 1/819, the small hit probability when the second special lottery is performed is about 1/5. In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the value of the ST flag ("0") is used as the data used for the first special lottery executed based on the winning of the first starting port 420A or the first starting port 420B. (= Off) ”or“ 1 (= on) ”), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”, and the corresponding judgment value data. The relationship with (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined. In addition, as data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440, for each value of the ST flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), The range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit", "small hit" or "miss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", " The relationship with the loss judgment value data ”) is stipulated.

In the sixth embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 173.

Although not shown in FIG. 173, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[6--2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 174 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 174, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420A, 420B or the second starting port 440. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420B, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z4", The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA1".

[6-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 175 is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 175, the jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, ST flag, GST flag, number of times of electric support) based on the above-mentioned hit selection symbol command. It's a table. The number of electric support differs depending on the control state when the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". For example, if the control state when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" is the ST state (with electric support) and the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of electric support is determined to be 70 times. Will be done. In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the electric support flag is turned on only in the ST state, and the electric support flag is not turned on in the GST state.

In the description of the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment, the type of big hit when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" and the case where the hit selection symbol command is "z0" are "special 1: 3R normal". , "Special 1: 3R probability change" when the hit selection symbol command is "z1" to "z4", "Special 1: 10R probability change" when the hit selection symbol command is "z5", hit time When the selected symbol command is "z7", it is referred to as "special 2:10R normal", and when the hit selection symbol command is "z8", it is referred to as "special 2:10R probability variation".

The number of times of electric support is the number of fluctuations of a special symbol in which the general electric function is promoted and activated. The normal electric function is a function that enables (or easily) a prize for a game ball to the first starting port 420B. For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (the first starting by driving the shutter 442). The time during which the game ball can be opened (or easily) to win the mouth 420B), the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and at least one of the ordinary hit probabilities are set as the first. It is a control that changes so that the starting port 420B can be won (or easily). Therefore, when the general electric function is activated, the frequency with which the game ball can be won (or easily) to the first starting port 420B is increased. If the electric support flag is ON (if the number of electric support is greater than 0), the general electric function is promoted, and if the electric support flag is OFF (if the number of electric support is 0), the general function is promoted. It doesn't work.

[6-2-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 176 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first starting ports 420A and 420B, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 176, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the ST flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 420A. , 420B is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. Further, when the result of the first special lottery is a small hit or a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the ST flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port. It is determined based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number extracted when the game ball wins in 420.

When the result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the ST flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the status of the GST flag (whether it is ON or OFF). It is determined based on the effect selection random number extracted when the game ball wins the second starting port 440. When the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the ST flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the status of the GST flag (ON). (Whether it is OFF or OFF), it is determined based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number extracted when the game ball wins the second starting port 440. For example, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss, and both the ST flag and the GST flag are OFF, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol over a long period of time, such as approximately 600,000 msec. Is done. Further, for example, when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit or a loss, the ST flag is ON, or even if the ST flag is OFF, the GST flag is ON (random number for reach determination). In the case of 5 to 99), it is determined to be an ultra-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

When the GST flag is ON in this way, even if the ST flag is OFF (not during ST), the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol can be determined to be ultra-fast fluctuation. Since the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined according to the status of the ST flag or the GST flag, it is changed when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" (more specifically, the end of the big hit game state). Will be done.

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 97) by the sub 200 (sub CPU201).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 176 is shown for convenience for convenience, and is a production image (for example, a decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. (Variation mode) and the content of the voice (for example, the fluctuation sound of the decorative pattern) output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 by the sub CPU 201 are shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 176, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

[6-3. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

The special symbol control process is the same as in FIG. 132, the special symbol memory check process is the same as in FIG. 133, the electric support counter subtraction process is the same as in FIG. 135, and the small hit end interval process is the same as in FIG. 137. Since it is the process of, the description is omitted here.

[6-3-1. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S70141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S70141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S70141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70142.

In step S70142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S70142), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S70142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70143.

In step S70143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S70143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S70143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70150.

In step S70144, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of each flag and each counter value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the electric support counter, the ST flag, and the GST flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70145.

In step S70145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70146.

In step S70146, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S70147).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S70148). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 175), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S70149). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S70150, the main CPU 101 performs ST flag / GST flag processing, and proceeds to step S70151. The ST flag / GST flag processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In step S70151, the main CPU 101 performs the electric support counter subtraction process. Since this electric support counter subtraction process is the same process as in FIG. 135 as described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (step S70152). When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S70152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S70152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70157.

In step S70153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70154.

In step S70154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the small hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S70155).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S70156). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S70157, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[6--3-2. ST flag / GST flag processing]
FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of ST / GST flag processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. In the ST / GST flag processing, the game counter set in the jackpot end interval processing described later is subtracted each time the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and when the value of the game counter becomes 0, the ST flag or the ST flag or This is a process of setting the GST flag to OFF. This ST / GST flag process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process.

The game counter is the number of times the game counter is controlled to the ST state or the GST state after the jackpot game state ends (the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner).

In step S701501, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the game counter is greater than 0. The game counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set game counter becomes 0. The game counter is set when the jackpot game state ends, and the number of times the game counter is set is, for example, 300 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

If the value of the game counter is greater than 0 (YES in step S701501), the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the game counter (step S701502), and proceeds to the process of step S701503. On the other hand, when the value of the game counter is 0 (NO in step S701501), the main CPU 101 ends the ST flag / GST flag processing.

In step S701503, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game counter is 0. If the game counter is 0 (YES in step S701503), the main CPU 101 moves to step S701504. On the other hand, if the game counter is not 0 (NO in step S701503), the main CPU 101 ends the ST flag / GST flag processing.

In step S701504, the main CPU 101 clears the ST flag and the GST flag. However, since neither the ST flag nor the GST flag is turned ON, instead of clearing both the ST flag and the GST flag, only the flag set to ON among the ST flag and the GST flag is cleared. You may try to do it. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the ST flag / GST flag process.

[6-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S70221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S70221), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S70221), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70222.

In step S70222, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S70222), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S70222), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70223.

In step S70223, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S70224). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S70225).

Next, in step S70226, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S70227.

In step S70227, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it was an ST jackpot (hit time selection symbol commands "z1" to "z5" and "z8") in which the ST flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the ST jackpot has been achieved (YES in step S70227), the main CPU 101 moves to step S70228. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ST jackpot has not been achieved (NO in step S70227), the main CPU 101 moves to step S70229.

In step S70228, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the ST flag to ON. When the ST flag is set to ON, the probability of a "big hit" when a special lottery is performed is increased as compared with the case when the ST flag is OFF. In this sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 173, the probability of "big hit" when the ST flag is OFF is approximately 1/218, whereas the probability of "big hit" when the ST flag is ON is approximately 1/218. The probability is about 1/145. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S70231. When the ST flag is set to ON, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be an ultrafast fluctuation with an extremely short fluctuation time of, for example, 1000 msec (see FIG. 176).

In step S70229, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second special symbol is a big hit (the result of the second special lottery is a big hit). If it is a big hit in the second special symbol (YES in step S70229), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S70230. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is not a big hit, that is, if the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

In step S70230, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the GST flag to ON. When the GST flag is set to ON, the probability of "big hit" when a special lottery is performed is not increased as when the ST flag is set to ON (the probability of "big hit" is almost the same. 1/218) If the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is not within the range of 0 to 4 for the reach determination random number, the fluctuation time is, for example, 1000 msec, as in the case where the ST flag is set to ON. It is determined to be an extremely short ultrafast fluctuation (see FIG. 176). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S70231.

In step S70231, the main CPU 101 performs a game counter set process. The value of the game counter set by this process is, for example, 300 times as described above. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S70232. In this process, the value of the game counter to be set is the same when the ST flag is set to ON and when the GST flag is set to ON. That is, the number of times controlled in the ST state and the number of times controlled in the GST state are the same.

In step S70232, the main CPU 101 performs the electric support number setting process. The number of times of electric support set here is the number of times determined by referring to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[6-4. Game flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the flow of the game when each of the above control processes is executed using each of the above tables will be described. FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining the flow of games in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The normal state, the first state, the second state, and the third state shown in FIG. 180 are defined as states that can be grasped by appearance for convenience in order to explain the flow of the game.

Internally, the normal state is a normal gaming state in which the normal power function is not promoted and both the ST flag and the GST flag are OFF as the control by the main CPU 101. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub CPU 201 to a normal effect state in which a normal effect that can be grasped as a normal game state is performed in the normal state.

In the first state, in the normal state, the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", and the hit selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z1" to "z4" (the type of big hit is "3R"). This is the state after the jackpot game state at the time (determined to be "probability change") is completed. In the first state, the ST flag is ON and the general electric function is promoted, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

The second state is a state from the time when the set number of electric support times is exhausted until the ST flag is turned off in the first state. The second state is the same as the first state in that the ST flag is ON, but the first state is that the normal electric function does not promote and the game progresses mainly due to the super-fast fluctuation of the second special symbol. It is a more favorable condition for the player.

The third state is a state after the big hit game state is completed when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" in the second state. The third state is the same as the second state in that the game progresses mainly due to the super-speed fluctuation of the second special symbol, although the ST flag may be ON or OFF. However, the third state is advantageous over the second state, which shifts after the number of electric support times has been digested in the first state, in that it stays for a maximum of 300 games.

In the normal gaming state in which both the ST flag and the GST flag are OFF and the normal electric function is not promoted, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time ( (See FIG. 176). On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B, etc., whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of long fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win a prize in the first start port 420A instead of the first start port 420B or the second start port 440.

When the player strikes right in the normal gaming state, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened because the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C where the variation time is extremely long. Not only is it rarely played, but even if a right-handed game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 420B or the second starting port 440, only one prize ball is paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420A, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the first starting port 420B and the second starting port 440. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420A is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

In the normal game state, the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "big hit" is approximately 1/218. If the game is left-handed and the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", for example, there is a 50% chance of determining a "special 1: 3R normal" big hit, and a 49% chance of "special 1". : It is decided to be a big hit of "3R probability change", and it is decided to be a big hit of "Special 1:10 R probability change" with a probability of 1%.

When the jackpot of "Special 1: 3R normal" is determined in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 101 controls to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, the game is performed with the expectation that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" again. In the normal game state, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub CPU 201 to a normal effect state in which a normal effect that can be grasped as being in the normal game state is performed.

If the jackpot of "Special 1: 3R Probability Change" is determined in the normal game state, the jackpot shifts to the first state after the jackpot game state ends, and the jackpot of "Special 1: 10R Probability Change" is set in the normal game state. If it is determined, it shifts to the third state after the jackpot game state ends.

When the state shifts to the first state, the main CPU 101 controls the ST state and promotes the normal electric function. That is, the first state is a state in which the jackpot probability is 1/145 with electric support. The number of times of electric support set in the first state is as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 175). Further, when the state shifts to the first state, the sub CPU 201 controls the chance zone effect state. This chance zone effect state is an effect state indicating that the current gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.

In the first state, the general electric function is promoted, and it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the first starting port 420B as compared with the normal game state, so that the game is played by right-handed. In this first state, most of the right-handed game balls win the first starting port 420B, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is hindered. Therefore, in the first state, the game proceeds mainly by the normal fluctuations A and B of the first special symbol.

Since the ST flag is ON in the first state, the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "big hit" is approximately 1/145.

Further, in the first state, if the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", for example, a "special 1: 3R normal" big hit is determined with a 50% probability, and a "special 1: 3R normal" jackpot is determined with a 49% probability. It is decided to be a big hit of "3R probability change", and it is decided to be a big hit of "Special 1:10 R probability change" with a probability of 1%.

When the jackpot of "Special 1: 3R normal" is determined in the first state, the main CPU 101 controls to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, the game is played left-handed in the hope that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" again.

Further, when the big hit of "Special 1: 3R probability change" is determined in the first state, the first state is reached even after the big hit game state is completed. That is, the main CPU 101 controls the ST state and promotes the normal electric function, and the sub CPU 201 controls the chance zone effect state. If the jackpot of "Special 1:10 R Probability Change" is determined in the first state, the game shifts to the third state after the jackpot game state ends.

In the first state, when the set number of times of electric support (30 times, 50 times, 70 times or 100 times) is digested and the promotion operation of the general electric function is completed, the state shifts to the second state. In this first state, the probability that the set number of electric support is digested differs depending on the number of set electric support, but the synthetic probability is approximately 56%.

When the state shifts to the second state, the main CPU 101 sets the electric support flag to OFF and ends the promotion operation of the general electric function. The ST flag remains ON. That is, the second state is the ST state (without electric support) in which the jackpot probability is approximately 1/145. In this second state, the sub CPU 201 controls the specific zone effect state. This specific zone effect state is an effect state indicating that the current gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the first state.

In the second state, since the normal electric function is not promoted, most of the right-handed game balls win the second starting port 440, and the second special symbol mainly has an extremely short fluctuation time of, for example, 1000 msec. Super fast fluctuation is performed.

In the second state, when the set game counter is exhausted without the result of the special lottery becoming a "big hit", the second state is terminated, the main CPU 101 is controlled to the normal game state, and the sub CPU 201 is normally Control to the production state.

Further, in the second state, if the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", for example, a big hit of "special 2:10R normal" is determined with a 50% probability, and a "special 2: 10R normal" jackpot is determined with a 50% probability. It is decided to be a big hit of "10R probability change".

If the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" in the second state, the big hit game state will be changed regardless of whether the type of big hit is "special 2:10R normal" or "special 2:10R probability change". After the end, it shifts to the third state.

When shifting to the third state, the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot probability to be approximately 1/218 in the GST state (without electric support) when the type of jackpot won in the second state is "special 2:10R normal". However, when the type of jackpot won in the second state is "special 2:10 R probability variation", the jackpot probability is controlled to the ST state (without electric support) of approximately 1/145. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the special zone effect state regardless of whether the type of the jackpot is "special 2:10R normal" or "special 2:10R probability variation". This special zone effect state is an effect state indicating that the current gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the first state.

In the third state, the normal electric function does not promote and operate in either the ST state (without electric support) or the GST state (without electric support), so most of the right-handed game balls win the second starting port 440. However, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed with an extremely short fluctuation time of, for example, 1000 msec.

In the third state, when the set game counter is exhausted without the result of the special lottery becoming a "big hit", the third state is terminated, the main CPU 101 is controlled to the normal game state, and the sub CPU 201 is normally Control to the production state.

Further, in the third state, if the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", for example, a big hit of "special 2:10R normal" is determined with a 50% probability, and a "special 2: 10R normal" jackpot is determined with a 50% probability. It is decided to be a big hit of "10R probability change".

If the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" in the third state, the big hit game state will be changed regardless of whether the type of big hit is "special 2:10R normal" or "special 2:10R probability change". After the end, the third state is reached again. However, when the above jackpot type was "Special 2:10R normal", the main CPU 101 was controlled to the GST state (without electric support), and the above jackpot type was "Special 2:10R probability variation". Occasionally, the main CPU 101 is controlled to the ST state (without electric support).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the probability that the third state will continue in the third state controlled by the main CPU 101 to the ST state (without electric support) (set game counter (for example, 300 games)). The probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a "big hit" before is digested) is approximately 87%. Further, in the third state controlled by the main CPU 101 to the GST state (without electric support), the probability that the third state will continue (for example, 300 games) will be selected before the set game counter (for example, 300 games) is exhausted. The probability that the result will be a "big hit") is approximately 75%.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, by making it possible to control the GST state similar to the ST state, the third state can be changed to the conventionally known high-probability gaming state or time-saving gaming state. It can be positioned as a third advantageous gaming state different from the gaming state advantageous to the player.

Further, regardless of whether the control by the main CPU 101 is in the ST state or the GST state, the sub CPU 201 controls the control to a common effect state (special zone effect state), so that the GST state is also advantageous to the player. It becomes possible to make the player aware. Further, when the result of the second special lottery in the third state is "big hit", even if the probability of being determined as "special 2:10R probability variation" is not so high (50% in this sixth embodiment), the third In the state, it is possible to provide a new game property that has never been seen before, such as the probability that the third state will continue with the probability (for example, 100% probability) added to the probability determined as "Special 2:10R normal". Can be increased.

The above-mentioned "controlled by the sub CPU 201 to a common effect state (special zone effect state)" means that the effect performed by the sub CPU 201 in the ST state and the effect performed by the sub CPU 201 in the GST state are completely different. The purpose is not limited to being the same, but also includes productions that are similar to the extent that they cannot be grasped from the outside. Further, for example, by preparing a specific effect that is not performed when controlled in the GST state but is performed when controlled in the ST state, the sub CPU 201 described above when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ST state. By executing a specific effect, it may be suggested that the state is in the ST state.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, although most of the game balls hit right to reach the second starting port 440 are configured to win the second starting port 440, the small hit winning opening 560 Even if the pachinko ball wins a prize, only one prize ball is paid out. Therefore, regardless of whether the game ball is in the second state or the third state, the so-called payout ball is produced by winning the game ball in the small hit winning opening 560. It is configured so that it cannot be expected to increase.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment described above, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is changed when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" (more specifically, when the big hit game state ends). I tried to do it, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the main CPU 101 has, for example, a counting means for counting the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends, and the second special symbol is based on the number of games counted by the counting means. The variation pattern may be determined. For example, based on the fact that the number of games after the jackpot game state ends is mainly determined to be long fluctuations A and B until the number of games reaches the specified number of times (for example, 1000 times), and the number of games reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times. It may be decided mainly to super-fast fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing a normal state, which may be less interesting for the player, for a long period of time. In particular, the conventionally known high-probability gaming state and time-saving gaming state were not controlled until after the jackpot gaming state was completed, but the GST state was not after the jackpot gaming state was completed. It is also possible to control.

Further, the main CPU 101 may determine the variation pattern of the second special symbol as follows based on the number of games counted by the counting means. For example, when the number of games after the jackpot game state ends is "0 to 99", it is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation, and when the number of games is "100 to 299", it is mainly determined to be long fluctuations A and B, and the number of games is determined. In "300 to 399", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol may be changed according to the number of games after the jackpot game state ends, such as mainly determining the super-fast fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player in the game range in which the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be ultra-fast fluctuation.

Further, for example, in a state where the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is mainly determined as the long variation A and B (for example, the normal game state), the variation of the second special symbol is based on the result of the special lottery being a small hit. The pattern may be mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation, or the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is mainly super-fast fluctuation based on the fact that a plurality of types of small hits are provided and the result of the special lottery is a specific small hit. It may be decided to. As a result, in the normal state, even if the symbol combination indicating that it is a "big hit" is not necessarily derived, it can be controlled to the second advantageous state, so that it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the specification is such that the so-called increase in the number of balls to be output cannot be expected due to the winning of the game ball in the small hit winning opening 560, but the winning of the game ball in the small hit winning opening 560. The method for preventing the increase in the number of balls to be output based on the above is not limited to the above. For example, even if the small hit winning opening 560 is open, it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the small hit winning opening 560. ), And various other methods can be adopted. With this configuration, even if the game ball is configured in a pocket shape such as the second start port 440 in which the ease of winning the game ball is invariant, the game ball is paid out based on the game ball to the second start port 440. It is possible to have one prize ball.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in the second state and the third state in which the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation, the ball is paid out by winning the game ball into the small hit winning opening 560. It is a specification that can not be expected to increase, but this is not essential. For example, in a state where the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation by, for example, 10 prize balls being paid out based on the winning of the game ball to the small hit winning opening 560, for example, the unit time. It may be configured to increase the number of balls to be ejected, such as making the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per hit exceed 1. Further, in this case, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is set to exceed 1 in the ST state, and is higher than the normal gaming state in the GST state but does not exceed 1. Even in the advantageous state (second state, third state), the degree of advantage can be set to be superior or inferior, and it is possible to provide sharp playability.

[6-5. Modification example of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment uses a method different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, and is in a pseudo ST state similar to the ST state (hereinafter referred to as “GST state”) even though it is a low-probability gaming state. By making it controllable, it is possible to realize a third advantageous gaming state, which is different from the conventionally known gaming states such as a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, which are advantageous to the player.

In explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, since there are many points in common or similar to those of the sixth embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the sixth embodiment will be described below. Omit. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

Of the drawings used in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, FIGS. 176 to 179 are also used in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment. However, since there are some parts of FIGS. 177 and 179 whose processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, this will be described later.

Further, since the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment does not include the "small hit" in the result of the special lottery, the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 101 is the same as that in FIG. 34. Therefore, the control state flag set in each process is matched with the control state flag shown in FIG. 34 (for example, the control state flag set in step S70146 is "03" instead of "06").

The following FIGS. 181 to 186 used for explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment are views which modified the drawings used for explaining the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described.

[6-5-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIGS. 181 and 182, the appearance configuration and the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be mainly described as being different from the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 181 is an example of a front view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 182 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modified example of the sixth embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, a probability change attacker is provided inside the large winning opening 540. This probabilistic attacker will be described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, if the first starting port 420A that can win a prize when hitting left and the shutter 442 are open when hitting right, winning is possible (or easy). Although the starting port 420B is provided, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, only one first starting port 420 that can win a prize when hitting left is provided below the liquid crystal display device 16. ing.

As shown in FIG. 181, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A passing gate 49 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, and a special electric motor is further downstream of the passing gate 49. The accessory 600 is provided.

The special electric accessory 600 has the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment, and the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed by the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (both). (See FIG. 8), this is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode and is shifted to the jackpot game state. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the large prize opening 540 is, for example, 15.

Although not shown, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, a probability change attacker is provided inside the large winning opening 540. This probabilistic attacker is configured so that the game ball cannot always enter and can enter at a specific timing (for example, a specific round game (for example, 1R)) when controlled to the jackpot game state. Has been done. The probabilistic attacker switch 551 (see FIG. 182) detects the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker. When the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected while the jackpot game state is controlled, the main CPU 101 sets the game state after the jackpot game state ends to the high probability game state (ST flag ON state). ), And when the big hit game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker, the game state after the big hit game state ends is changed to the low probability game state (ST flag OFF state). Control.

An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 540. This ordinary electric accessory 460 has the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment, but in the sixth embodiment, it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball to the first starting port 420B when it is in the open state. On the other hand, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the second starting port 440 when it is in the open state.

When the shutter 442 is driven by the electric chew solenoid 4630, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is in an open state that enables (or easily) wins a game ball in the second start port 440 and a second start. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) from a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the mouth 440. The ordinary electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442 is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (a stop mode indicating a normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

A game ball that has been hit to the right but has not won a prize in either the large winning opening 540 or the second starting opening 440 is discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57. However, for example, on the right side of the special electric accessory 600 or the like, an out port for discharging the game ball that has flowed down to the vicinity of the special electric accessory 600 to the outside of the machine may be provided separately from the out port 57.

In FIG. 181, the small hit winning opening 560 is not shown because it is not necessary to provide the small hit winning opening 560.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed, and when the symbol mode in which the result of the normal lottery is "normal hit" is displayed, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened to hit right. The game ball that has been played wins a prize at the second starting port 440. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 440 is, for example, one. The time during which the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, 100 msec, and the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be "normal hit" is approximately one-third, but is not limited to this.

[6-5-2. Basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 185. Each table shown in FIGS. 183 to 185 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[6-5-2-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 183, when either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "miss". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the value of the ST flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "miss judgment" The relationship with "value data") is specified. In addition, as data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440, for each value of the ST flag (“0 (= off)” or “1 (= on)”), The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment determined as "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "loss judgment value data") is defined. There is.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, the total random number for the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the range (width) of the hit determination random number. May be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 183.

Although not shown in FIG. 183, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[6-5-2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 184 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 184, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol random value acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" for determining the stop symbol based on the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z5". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA5".

[6-5-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 185 is an example of a jackpot type determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 185, the jackpot type determination table is based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command, and determines whether the jackpot type (number of rounds, whether it is difficult or easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker). It is a table referred to for determining (GST flag, number of times of electric support). For example, if the control state when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" is the GST state (electric support 100 times) and the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "3" and the probability changes. It is determined that it is difficult to enter the attacker, the GST flag is ON, and the number of electric support is "0".

When it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probabilistic attacker (when the hit selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z0", "z2", and "z3"), the game to the probabilistic attacker. When the ball is easy to enter (when the hit selection symbol command is determined to be one of "z1", "z4", and "z5"), the probability changes when the jackpot game state is controlled. The opening mode of a specific round game (for example, 1R) that allows the game ball to enter the attacker is different. For example, the time during which a game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540 is set to, for example, 1800 msec at the maximum in the former case and 30,000 msec at the maximum in the latter case. The difficulty (easiness) of entry can be changed. Therefore, even in the former case, the ST flag is set to ON when the game ball enters the probabilistic attacker, and even in the latter case, the ST flag is not set to ON unless the game ball enters the probabilistic attacker. The above method for changing the difficulty (easiness) of the game ball entering the probabilistic attacker is an example, and is not limited to this.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the electric support flag is turned on in the ST state or the GST state, and the electric support flag is not turned off in the ST state or the GST state. However, in the modification of the sixth embodiment, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the electric support flag is ON is, for example, 6000 msec, and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the electric support flag is OFF, for example. It is 5900 msec, and there is no point that the operating frequency of the general electric function changes substantially between when the electric support flag is ON and when it is OFF.

In the description of the modified pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment, the type of big hit when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" and the case where the hit selection symbol command is "z0" are referred to as "special 1:". "3R normal", when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", "special 1:10 probability change", when the hit selection symbol command is "z2", "special 2:10R normal", hit selection symbol When the command is "z3", it is "special 2: 5R normal", when the hit selection symbol command is "z4", it is "special 2: 10R probability change", and when the hit selection symbol command is "z5". Is referred to as "special 2: 5R probability variation".

Similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the number of electric support differs depending on the control state when the result of the special lottery becomes a "big hit". The "GST state (100 times of electric support)" shown as a control state in the column of the number of electric support of the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 185) is the 100 times of electric support set when the big hit game state ends. It indicates that it is in the GST state during digestion, and "GST state (electric support 300 times)" indicates that the 300 times electric support set at the end of the jackpot game state is in the GST state during digestion. ing. In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the electric support is set to, for example, 300 times when the ST state is controlled.

In the description of the pachinko machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the type of the big hit when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", and the case where the hit selection symbol command is "z0" is "special 1". : 3R normal ", when the hit selection symbol command is" z1 "," special 1: 10R probability variation ", when the hit selection symbol command is" z2 "," special 2: 5R normal ", hit selection When the symbol command is "z3", it is "special 2: 10R normal", when the hit selection symbol command is "z4", it is "special 2: 5R probability variation", and when the hit selection symbol command is "z5". The time is referred to as "special 2:10R probability change".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, both the ST flag and the GST flag are set to OFF in the variation pattern of the second special symbol. When it is, it is determined to be long fluctuations A to C, but when the ST flag is set to ON and when the GST flag is set to ON, it is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation (see FIG. 176).

[6-5-3. others]
As described above, the special symbol display time management process (see FIG. 177) and the jackpot end interval process (see FIG. 179) executed by the main CPU 101 are different from those of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment. do. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned different processes will be described.

First, with reference to the special symbol display time management process (see FIG. 177), the differences in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, as described above, the result of the special lottery does not include "small hit" (see FIG. 183). Therefore, the processes of steps S70152 to S70156 of FIG. 177 are not executed by the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, and when the process of step S70151 is completed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S70157. The set control state flag needs to be matched (for example, the control state flag set in step S70157 is "08" instead of "11" as a value indicating the special symbol game end process (for example, FIG. 34) is set).

Next, with reference to the jackpot end interval processing (see FIG. 179), two different points will be described in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

The first point is that in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines in step S7022 whether or not it was an ST jackpot with the ST flag set to ON. In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example, instead of this, it is determined whether or not the entry of the gaming ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected in the jackpot gaming state (the step number of this process is referred to as step S702271). Then, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker is detected (YES in step S702271), the main CPU 101 moves to step S70228. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry of the game ball into the probabilistic attacker is not detected (NO in step S702271), the main CPU 101 moves to step S70229.

The second point is that in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, in step S70231, the game counter is set both when the ST flag is set to ON and when the GST flag is set to ON. The value is the same, for example, 300 times. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" and the big hit is "special 1: 3R normal", and "special 1:10R probability change". , "Special 2: 10R normal", "Special 2: 5R normal", "Special 2: 10R probability variation" or "Special 2: 5R probability variation". In the former case, the value of the game counter to be set is, for example, 100 times, and in the latter case, the value of the game counter to be set is, for example, 300 times.

[6-5-4. Game flow]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the flow of the game when each of the above control processes is executed using each of the above tables will be described. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game in pachinko according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment. The normal state, the first state, and the second state shown in FIG. 186 are defined as states that can be grasped by appearance for convenience in order to explain the flow of the game.

Internally, the normal state is a normal gaming state in which the normal power function is not promoted and both the ST flag and the GST flag are OFF as the control by the main CPU 101. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub CPU 201 to a normal effect state in which a normal effect that can be grasped as a normal game state is performed in the normal state.

The first state is a state after the big hit game state when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" and the type of the big hit is determined to be "special 1: 3R normal" in the normal state. be. In the first state, since the GST flag is ON, the second special symbol is in a state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state in that the fluctuation time is mainly an extremely short ultra-fast fluctuation of 1000 msec, for example. be.

The second state is when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" in the normal state and the type of the big hit is determined to be "special 1:10 probability change", and in the first state, the second special lottery When the result is "big hit" (regardless of the type of big hit), it is the state after the big hit game state is completed. In the second state, the ST flag can be set to ON (in the first state, the GST flag is set to ON and the ST flag is not set to ON), and the special symbol is changed and displayed 300 times. It is a state more advantageous to the player than the first state in that the function can be promoted (in the first state, the general electric function is promoted only until the special symbol is changed and displayed 100 times).

In the normal gaming state in which both the ST flag and the GST flag are OFF and the normal electric function is not promoted, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C having an extremely long fluctuation time ( (See FIG. 176). On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B, etc., whose fluctuation time is shorter than that of long fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win a prize in the first start port 420 instead of the second start port 440.

In addition, when the player makes a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state, even if the control applied to the normal electric accessory 460 is not activated, as described above, when the control is activated and the ordinary electric accessory 460 Although the opening mode of the above does not change, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

In the normal game state, the probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "big hit" is approximately 1/238. If the game is left-handed and the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", for example, a 99% probability of a "special 1: 3R normal" big hit is determined, and a 1% probability of a "special 1". : 10R Probability Change ”is decided as a big hit.

When the jackpot of "Special 1: 3R normal" is determined in the normal game state, the jackpot shifts to the first state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the jackpot of "Special 1: 10R probability change" is determined in the normal gaming state. In that case, after the jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to the second state.

When the game shifts to the first state, the main CPU 101 controls the GST state and sets the value of the game counter to 100 times. Accelerate up to. That is, the first state is the GST state with electric support (100 times) having a jackpot probability of 1/238. Further, when the state shifts to the first state, the sub CPU 201 controls the specific zone effect state. This specific zone effect state is an effect state indicating that the current gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state.

In the first state, when the set number of times (for example, 100 times) of electric support is digested without the result of the special lottery becoming a "big hit", the first state ends and the state shifts to the normal state.

on the other hand. In the first state, if the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the types of big hits are "special 2: 10R normal", "special 2: 5R normal", "special 2: 10R probability change" and "special". Regardless of which of the "2: 5 probability changes" is determined, the process shifts to the second state.

When shifting to the second state, the main CPU 101 has a GST with a jackpot probability of approximately 1/238 when the type of jackpot won in the first state is "special 2: 10R normal" or "special 2: 5R normal". When the type of jackpot won in the second state is "Special 2: 10R probability variation" or "Special 2: 5R probability variation", the jackpot probability is approximately 1/126 ST. Control to the state (electric support 300 times). Further, the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the special zone effect state regardless of whether it is controlled by the main CPU 101 in the ST state or the GST state. This special zone effect state is an effect state indicating that the current gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state and the first state.

In the second state, when the set number of times (for example, 400 times) of electric support is digested without the result of the special lottery becoming a "big hit", the second state ends and the state shifts to the normal state.

Further, in the second state, if the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", for example, it is determined as "special 2: 10R normal" with a probability of 15%, and "special 2: 5R normal" with a probability of 15%. Is determined, with a 35% probability of being determined as "Special 2: 10R probability variation", and with a 35% probability of being determined as "Special 2: 5R probability variation".

If the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" in the second state, the second state is reached again after the big hit game state is completed regardless of the type of big hit. However, when the above-mentioned jackpot type is "Special 2: 10R normal" or "Special 2: 5R normal", the main CPU 101 is controlled to the GST state (electric support 300 times), and the above-mentioned jackpot type is " When it is "special 2: 10R probability change" or "special 2: 5R probability change", the main CPU 101 controls to the ST state (electric support 300 times).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the probability that the second state will continue in the second state controlled by the main CPU 101 to the ST state (electric support 300 times) (set game counter (set game counter). For example, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a "big hit" before 300 games) is consumed) is approximately 91%. In addition, in the second state controlled by the main CPU 101 to the GST state (electric support 300 times), the probability that the second state will continue (the second special lottery before the set game counter (for example, 300 games) is exhausted). The probability that the result will be a "big hit") is approximately 72%.

As described above, even in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, by making it possible to control the GST state similar to the ST state, the second state can be changed to the conventionally known high-probability gaming state and time saving. It can be positioned as a third advantageous gaming state that is different from the gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as the gaming state. Moreover, when the result of the second special lottery in the second state is "big hit", there is a 30% probability that "special 2: 10R normal" or "special 2: 5R normal" is determined, but the second In the two states, for example, the second state can be continued with a probability of 100%, which makes it possible to provide a new game property that has never been seen before, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment described above, the second special symbol changes when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" (more specifically, when the big hit game state ends). I tried to change the pattern, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the main CPU 101 mainly determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol as long fluctuations A and B until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specified number of times (for example, 1000 times) starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state. , The number of fluctuations of the special symbol may be determined mainly as super-fast fluctuation based on the above-mentioned specified number of movements.

Further, the main CPU 101 mainly determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol as super-fast fluctuation when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is "0 to 99", and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is ". In "100 to 299", the long fluctuations A and B are mainly determined, and in "300 to 399", the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern of may be changed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the result of the special lottery does not include the "small hit", but the result of the special lottery includes the "small hit", for example, the result of the special lottery. Taking the opportunity of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol may be determined mainly as super-fast fluctuation. Further, a plurality of types of small hits may be provided so that the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is mainly determined to be super-fast fluctuation based on the result of the special lottery being a specific small hit.

[7. Seventh Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, it is controlled to the big hit game state, and the game ball that has entered the small hit attacker opened by the small hit wins a V prize in the small hit attacker. It is a so-called type 1 / type 2 mixer, which is a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a big hit game state even when a prize is won in the mouth. In the invention described in the seventh embodiment, a V shutter that always operates constantly so as to open and close the V winning opening in the small hit attacker is provided, and a game ball that has entered the small hit attacker is placed on the upstream side of the V winning opening. It is premised that the game is held (locked) once, and when the lock is released and the game ball wins the V winning opening, the game is controlled to the big hit game state. Although the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not a so-called type 1 / type 2 mixer, there are some common points or similarities between the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. Therefore, in explaining the seventh embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following seventh embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the purpose of the 7th embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to sixth embodiments, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machines of the second to sixth embodiments is also particularly described in the following seventh embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the 7th embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the 7th embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to sixth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

[7-1. Appearance configuration and electrical configuration of gaming machines]
First, with reference to FIGS. 187 and 188, the appearance configuration and the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment will be mainly described as being different from the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 187 is an example of a front view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 188 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 187, the game board unit 17 has a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. A passage gate 49 through which the game ball can pass is arranged in the right side area of the game area 20 in which the game ball flows down when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is a so-called type 1 or 2 mixer, but the point that the first starting port 420 is arranged below the liquid crystal display device 16 is from the first embodiment to This is the same as the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the V winning device 422 is arranged on the downstream side of the passing gate 49. The V winning device 422 includes an opening / closing winning opening 4221 opened so that a game ball can enter the inside of the V winning device 422, a small hit attacker 4222 capable of opening / closing the opening / closing winning opening 4221, and an opening / closing winning opening 4221. The V winning opening 4223 in which the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 422 can be won, and the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 422 from the opening / closing winning opening 4221 that has not entered the V winning opening 4223. A loser 4224 that can accept balls, a V shutter 4225 that opens and closes the V winning opening 4223, and a clerk that can lock (hold) only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 422. A stop member 4226 is provided.

The small hit attacker 4222 is composed of members along an arc shape, and always closes the opening / closing winning opening 4221. Then, when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped and the symbol combination indicating that it is a "small hit" is confirmed (derived), almost at the same time when the fluctuation display of the special symbol is stopped, the attacker solenoid 4227 (see FIG. 188). ) Drives the small hit attacker 4222, for example, once. When the small hit attacker 4222 operates once, the opening / closing winning opening 4221 opens, for example, 1000 msec. Then, while the opening / closing winning opening 4221 is opened by the operation of the small hit attacker 4222, the maximum number of game balls that can be controlledly entered into the V winning device 422 is 10 per opening.

The attacker switch 4228 (see FIG. 188) is a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 422. When the attacker switch 4228 detects the entry of the game ball into the V winning device 422, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout / launch control circuit 300. In addition, the value of the attacker winning counter is added. When the attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the small hit attacker 4222 is driven by the attacker solenoid 4227 even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) that can open the opening / closing winning opening 4221 has not elapsed, and the opening / closing winning opening 4221 Is closed.

The V shutter 4225 that opens and closes the V winning opening 4223 has a closing mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the V winning opening 4223 by driving the solenoid for V shutter 4229, and a game to the V winning opening 4223. A constant operation is always performed between the opening mode in which the ball can be won (or easily). In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, for example, a constant operation is always performed in a cycle (cycle) of 5000 msec in which the operation of "4000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 4000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 4226 is provided above the V winning opening 4223 so that only one of the game balls that has entered the inside of the V winning device 422 can be held by opening the opening / closing winning opening 4221. It is configured. When a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 422, only one ball is held by the locking member 4226, and the other game balls are discharged to the outside of the machine from the loss opening 4224. Further, the locking member 4226 releases the locking of the game ball by driving the locking solenoid 4230 after a certain period of time (for example, 3000 msec) has elapsed after the small hit attacker 4222 is released. The game ball whose lock is released in the locking member 4226 falls toward the V winning opening 4223, and if the V winning opening 4223 is opened at this timing, the V winning opening 4223 is won, and V at this timing. If the winning opening 4223 is closed, it will be accepted by the losing opening 4224.

The locking solenoid 4230 operates the locking member 4226 so as to be able to hold the game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 422 when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, so that the locking member 4226 can be held. The locking member 4226 may be operated so that the holding of the game ball is released after a certain period of time has elapsed, or the game ball can be held inside the V winning device 422 when the first game ball enters. The locking member 4226 may be operated so as to be such that the locking member 4226 may be operated so that the holding of the game ball is released after a certain period of time has passed since the holding is possible.

The V winning opening switch 4231 detects the winning of the game ball into the V winning opening 4223 by passing the game ball. When the main CPU 101 detects that the game ball has won the V winning opening 4223 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the small hit attacker 4222 is opened, the main CPU 101 controls the game to the big hit game state.

A special electric accessory 600 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that has not entered the inside of the V winning device 422. The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, a large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610 (see FIG. 127), and a power transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the large winning opening solenoid 620 to the shutter 610. (Not shown). The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special electric accessory 600 is in an open state. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is a big hit when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 (see FIG. 8). It is performed when the game state is entered.

An ordinary electric accessory 460 is provided on the downstream side as the flow direction of the game ball that did not win the grand prize opening 540. The ordinary electric accessory 460 has a shutter 442 that can open and close the second starting port 440 by moving it forward and backward, an electric chew solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 188) that drives the shutter 442, and the electric chew solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the power of the solenoid to the shutter 442 is provided.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 is in an open state in which a game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the second starting port 440 by driving the shutter 442 by the electric chew solenoid 4630, and to the second starting port 440. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The ordinary electric accessory 460, that is, the shutter 442 is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the ordinary symbol is in a specific stop display mode (a stop mode indicating a normal hit) in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

When the time saving function is activated, the frequency of the open state in which the game ball can easily win the second starting port 440A is increased, and if the small hit attacker 4222 and the large winning opening 540 are not opened, the second starting port 440 is reached. It is possible (or easy) to win a prize in the game ball. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to the second starting port 440 is, for example, one.

In addition, the time saving function is generally a function in which both or at least one of the promotion operation of the general electric function and the shortening of the fluctuation time of the special symbol is performed, but the pachinko game of the seventh embodiment is performed. In the machine, it is a function that both promotes the function of the pachinko machine and shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol. However, this is not essential, and the time saving function and the promotion operation of the general electric function may be interpreted as synonymous.

Among the right-handed game balls, the game balls that have not won any of the V winning device 422, the large winning opening 540, and the second starting opening 440 are discharged to the outside of the machine from the out opening 57.

When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 holds up to four normal symbol start information (normal symbol random value or normal symbol random value), and performs a normal lottery in the order in which they are held. .. The probability that the result of the ordinary lottery will be "ordinary hit" is, for example, 99/100, and the probability of being "ordinary hit" is extremely high.

[7-2. Basic specifications of pachinko machine according to the seventh embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 192. Each table shown in FIGS. 189 to 192 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[7-2-1. Random number judgment table]
FIG. 189 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be one of "big hit", "small hit" and "loss". In addition, when the second special lottery is held, it is determined as a "big hit" or a "small hit", and is not determined as a "loss". However, it is not essential that the second special lottery is not decided as "missing". For example, although it may be decided as "missing", it is more "small hit" than "missing". The probability of being determined may be high (for example, a probability of 240/300 is determined as a "small hit", a probability of 1/300 is determined as a "big hit", and 59/300. It may be determined as "missing" with a probability), or it may be determined as "missing" with an extremely low probability of, for example, 1/300. Furthermore, the probability of being determined as "missing" may be higher than the probability of being determined as "small hit" (for example, the probability of being determined as "small hit" is 100/300, and it is 300 minutes. It may be decided as a "big hit" with a probability of 1 in, and it may be decided as a "miss" with a probability of 199/300).

In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the data used for the first special lottery executed based on the winning of the first starting port 420 is set to "big hit", "small hit" or "miss". The relationship between the range (width) of the random numbers for big hit judgment to be determined and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", "loss judgment value data") is defined. There is. In addition, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440, the range (width) of the random number for big hit determination determined as "big hit" or "small hit", and the range (width) of the random number for big hit determination. The relationship with the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit judgment value data”) is defined.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the time saving flag may be set to ON, but the probability variation flag is not set to ON.

In the seventh embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 189.

Although not shown in FIG. 189, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting. In addition to the big hit probability and the small hit probability, for example, the opening time of the small hit attacker 4222 can be changed for each setting to change the winning rate to the V winning device 422, or the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 4223 can be changed. By adopting one or more of these, such as changing the winning rate to the V winning opening 4223 for each setting, changing the number of time reduction continuations for each set value, etc., it becomes a big hit game state. The expected value to be controlled may be configured to be higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[7-2-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 190 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 190, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol random value acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" for determining the stop symbol based on the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z2", The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA1".

[7-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 191 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 191, the jackpot type determination table is based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command, and the jackpot type (number of rounds, number of time reductions, fixed fluctuation flag during time reduction game, fixed fluctuation flag during hold game). ) Is a table referenced to determine. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "15", the number of time reductions is "4", the fixed fluctuation flag ON during the time reduction game, and the fixed fluctuation flag OFF during the hold game are determined. .. It should be noted that the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the time saving game and the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game are separate flags, but the details will be described later. Further, the column of "Remarks" in FIG. 191 is shown for convenience for easy understanding. Further, in the seventh embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", neither the fixed fluctuation flag at the time saving game nor the fixed fluctuation flag at the holding game is set to ON. Not limited.

The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in which the general electric function is promoted and activated. The normal electric function is a function that enables (or facilitates) a prize for a game ball to the second starting port 440. Therefore, when the general electric function is promoted, the frequency with which the game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the second starting port 440 is increased. For example, when the time saving flag is OFF, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for a relatively long time (for example, 600,000 msec), and the normal electric accessory 460 is displayed for a relatively short time (for example, 600 msec). Control to open. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is ON, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol for a relatively short time (for example, 1000 msec), and also executes the normal electric accessory 460 for a relatively long time (for example, 3000 msec). Control to open. Therefore, even if the right-handed game ball is hit to the right when the time-saving flag is OFF, the game ball hit to the right rarely wins the second starting port 440, whereas when the time-saving flag is ON, it is about 1000 msec. Since the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, the right-handed game ball can easily win the second starting port 440.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time reduction number is set, the set time reduction number is "4 times", so that the winning chance of the game ball to the V winning device 422 is given at least four times. However, the time saving flag is ON until the last (for example, the fourth time) variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving game state is completed (until the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and the result of the special lottery is derived). Since it is set, the game ball wins the second starting port 440 and holds up to four variable displays (second starting information) of the second special symbol before the time saving flag is set to OFF. Can be done. Therefore, the winning chance of the game ball to the V winning opening 4223 is set to 4 times of the variable display of the second special symbol (referred to as "time saving game" in the 7th embodiment) in the time saving game state, and the time saving flag is set to OFF. There is a possibility that a total of 8 times will be given, including 4 times of the variable display of the 2nd special symbol (referred to as "holding game" in the 7th embodiment) held until the time is played.

Further, the fixed variation flag at the time of the time saving game is a flag indicating whether or not the variation display is performed in the variation pattern determined in advance for four times of the time saving game. That is, if the fixed fluctuation flag during the time-saving game is ON, the four times of the time-saving game are displayed in a variable pattern determined in advance. On the other hand, if the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is OFF, the fluctuation pattern is randomly determined each time in the four time saving games.

Further, the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is a flag indicating whether or not the reserved game (up to 4 times) is displayed in a variable pattern in a predetermined fluctuation pattern. That is, if the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON, the reserved game (up to 4 times) is displayed in a variable pattern determined in advance. On the other hand, if the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is OFF, the fluctuation pattern is randomly determined each time in the maximum of four reserved games.

Therefore, for example, if the hit-time selection symbol command is "z5", the variation display is performed in a predetermined variation pattern four times in the time-saving game, and the hold game (maximum four times) is a randomly determined variation pattern. The variable display is performed with.

[7-2-4. Fluctuation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 192 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 440A and 440B. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 192, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit", the variation pattern of the first special symbol is extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the random number for selecting the effect.

In addition, when the result of the first special lottery is "missing", the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the situation of the time saving flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number extracted at the time of. It should be noted that, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is rarely won in the first starting port 420 because it is usually hit to the right, but if the game ball is won in the first starting port 420 in the time-saving game state. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined based on the reach determination random number and the effect selection random number extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 420.

When the result of the second special symbol is "big hit", the variation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins the second starting port 440. NS.

When the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the time saving flag (whether it is ON or OFF), the fixed fluctuation flag of the time saving game or the reserved game. It is determined based on the situation (whether it is ON or OFF) and a random number for selecting an effect. For example, if the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" and the time saving flag is ON and the fixed fluctuation flag of the time saving game is ON, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is, for example, a specific shortening of the fluctuation time of 1000 msec. It is always decided to direct C. Further, if the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", and the time saving flag is ON and the fixed fluctuation flag of the time saving game is OFF, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol depends on the random value for effect selection. The fluctuation time is determined each time to be one of the specific shortening effects C to F that are different from each other.

Further, if the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the time saving flag is OFF and the fixed variation flag of the reserved game is ON, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is, for example, a specific normal with a variation time of 6000 msec. It is always decided to direct C. If the result of the second special lottery is "small hit" and both the time saving flag and the fixed fluctuation flag of the reserved game are OFF, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol corresponds to the random value for effect selection. Therefore, the fluctuation time is determined each time to be one of the specific shortening effects C to F different from each other.

When the second special lottery is performed, the variation display of the second special symbol when the time reduction flag is ON is the time reduction game, and the variation display of the second special symbol when the time reduction flag is OFF is suspended. It is a game. However, when the time saving flag is OFF, even if the right-handed game ball is hit right, the right-handed game ball rarely wins the second start opening 440, but suddenly wins the second start opening 440. In some cases. In this case, since the time saving flag is OFF and the fixed fluctuation flag of the reserved game is OFF, the game is played at the second starting port 440 regardless of whether the result of the second special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit". The fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the ball wins a prize.

Further, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 187) by the sub 200 (sub CPU201).

In addition, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 192 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and shows the content of the effect executed by the sub CPU 201.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 192, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

[7-3. Processing by the main control circuit]
Next, among the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the processes different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process. The numerical values (“00” to “11”) shown in parentheses on the right side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 193, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S8011). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each of the processes of steps S8012 to S8023, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S8012 to S8023 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S8012 to S8023. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 29) described in the first embodiment is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory check process (step S8012). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending special symbol variation displays when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process, and when the number of pending items is not “0”. (If there is a reserved ball), various information is acquired from the random number extracted by the start opening winning detection process. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process (step S8013) described later in the control state flag, and the variation of the special symbol acquired in this process. Set the waiting time timer to the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the pattern. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process (step S8013). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process, and when the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol described later on the control status flag. A value (“02”) indicating the time management process (step S8014) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S8013 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S8014). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S8013 has elapsed, the special lottery is performed. Determine the result. Then, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("03") indicating the V winning device opening interval management process (step S8015) described later, and is small. Set the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer.

When the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("06") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S8018) described later, and sets the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the wait time timer. In this way, after the time corresponding to the small hit start interval or the big hit start interval set in the process of step S8014 has elapsed, the V winning device opening interval management process or the big hit start interval management process described later is executed. Set. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is neither "big hit" nor "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value ("11") indicating the special symbol game end process (step S8023) described later. set. That is, in this case, neither the V winning device opening interval management process (step S8015) nor the jackpot start interval management process (step S8018) is executed, and the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed. NS. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 197.

When the control state flag is set to a value (“03”) indicating the V winning device opening interval management process (step S8015), the main CPU 101 performs the V winning device opening interval management process (step S8015). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the V winning device open interval management process and the time corresponding to the small hit start interval set in the process of step S8014 has elapsed. In order to activate the small hit attacker 4222 to open the opening / closing winning opening 4221 and enable the winning of the game ball to the V winning device 422, it is positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Update the given variable. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the V winning device (step S8016), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the small hit attacker 4222 (for example). 1800 msec) is set in the attacker open time timer (not shown). That is, by this process, the process during opening of the V winning device (step S8016), which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process while the V winning device is open (step S8016). Details will be described later, but in this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process while the V winning device is open, the main CPU 101 has a predetermined number of attacker winning counters (for example, 5). Whether one of the above conditions and the condition that the opening upper limit time (for example, 1800 msec) has passed (the small hit attacker opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). Determine if not. When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to drive the small hit attacker 4222 by the attacker solenoid 4227 to close the opening / closing winning opening 4221. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball has been detected in the V winning opening 4223 by the V winning opening switch 4231, and if there is no detection of the winning of the game ball in the V winning opening 4223, the control state. A value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval processing is set in the flag, and the time corresponding to the V winning device opening end interval (V winning device opening end interval time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the V-winning device opening end interval time set in this process has elapsed, the V-winning device opening end interval process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the V winning opening 4223, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S4020) described later. Is set, and the V winning device opening end interval time is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the V winning device opening end interval time set in this process elapses, the remaining ball monitoring time in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. In the waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening (step S8021), which will be described later, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter increases by "1". It will be the round game of the round. Further, although not shown, if it is determined that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the V winning opening 4223, the main CPU 101 also executes a process of setting a jackpot flag.

When the control state flag is set to a value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval processing, the main CPU 101 performs the V winning device opening end interval processing (step S8017). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag when the V winning device opening end interval time elapses. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S8017.

Next, when the control state flag is set to a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S8018), the main CPU 101 performs the jackpot start interval management process (step S8018). In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a big prize when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the big hit start interval management process and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S8014 elapses. In order to open the mouth 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“07)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S8019), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30000 msec) is set in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S8019), which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S8019). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“08”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S8020) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the large winning opening set in step S8019 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the process during opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S8020). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“08”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time elapses, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“09”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8020 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S8021). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“09”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30,000 msec) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S8019) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S8022). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval elapses, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“10”). 11 ”) is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game end process described later is set to be executed after the process of step S8022.

If it is determined that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the V winning opening 4223 in the process of opening the V winning device (step S8016), the sub CPU 201 performs the second and subsequent rounds in this jackpot game state. The game is executed by driving the shutter 610 to enable the winning of the game ball to the large winning opening 540. However, the processing of the round game from the second round onward is not limited to this, and for example, a process of driving the small hit attacker 4222 to enable the winning of the game ball to the V winning device 422 is executed as the round game. May be good.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process when the big hit game state ends, when the small hit game state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "miss" (step S8023). .. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of held items (starting storage information) so as to decrease by “1”. do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the fluctuation of the special symbol next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S8023, the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S8012) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S8012), special symbol variation time management process (step S8013), special symbol display time management process (step S8014), and special symbol game end process (step S8023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S8012), special symbol variation time management process (step S8013), special symbol display time management process (step S8014), and V winning device opening interval management process (step S8014). S8015) is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the small hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "04" when the transition control to the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned V winning device opening process (step S8016), that is, the small hit game state.

Then, in the process of opening the V winning device (step S8016), when the winning of the game ball is detected in the V winning opening 4223, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "08" and "09". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S8020) and the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process (step S8021) in this order, and executes the big hit game state.

On the other hand, if the winning of the game ball is not detected in the V winning opening 4223 in the V winning device opening process (step S8016), the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "05". As a result, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described V winning device opening end interval process (step S8017), and ends the small hit game state.

Further, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "00", "01", "02", and "06". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol memory check process (step S8012), special symbol variation time management process (step S8013), special symbol display time management process (step S8014), and jackpot start interval management process (step S8018). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", and "09" when the transition control to the big hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S8019), monitoring processing of residual balls in the large winning opening (step S8020), and waiting time management processing before reopening of the large winning opening (step S8021) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "07", "08", "10", and "11". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S8019), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S8020), big hit end interval processing (step S4022), and special symbol game end processing (step S8023). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

[7-3-2. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol memory check process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag read in the special symbol control process (see step S8011) is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol memory check process (step S80122). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S80122), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S80122), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80123.

In step S80123, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of second starting information) of the second starting opening winning (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the reserved number of the second start opening prize is "0" (YES in step S80123), the process proceeds to the process of step S80124, and the reserved number of the second starting port winning is not "0". If it is determined (NO in step S80123), the process proceeds to step S80128.

In step S80124, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (the number of first starting information) of the first starting opening winning (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S80124), it proceeds to the process of step S80125 and determines that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0". If it is determined (YES in step S80124), the process proceeds to step S80127.

In step S80125, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of first start information corresponding to the number of reserved first start opening prizes. In the seventh embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed or is on hold. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved fluctuation display (holding ball) of the first special symbol. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random value, an effect selection random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. extracted at the time of winning the first start port 420. included.

Next, in step S80126, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the first start opening winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80130.

In step S80130, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S80131, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, when the big hit determination random number value is set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), the main CPU 101 determines the big hit corresponding to the second winning start port based on the big hit determination random number. The judgment value data is acquired by referring to the table (not shown). If the jackpot determination random value is not set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), the first special symbol start storage area (0) is set based on the jackpot determination random value. 1 The judgment value data is acquired by referring to the jackpot judgment table (not shown) corresponding to the winning start port. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "loss" based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S80132., The main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command based on the determination value data acquired in step S80131 (see FIG. 190).

Next, in step S80133, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. This special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 195 and 196.

Next, in step S80134, the main CPU 101 sets a special symbol effect start command. As a result, a special symbol effect start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, in step S80135, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process of step S80133 in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

In step S80127, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol memory check process.

Further, in step S80128, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the number of second start information corresponding to the number of reserved second start opening prizes. In the seventh embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. , It is determined whether or not there is start information of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed or is pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as start information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four times of reserved variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol is held. Data (information) is stored as start information. The start information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, a random value for jackpot determination extracted at the time of winning the second start port 440, a random value for determining a fluctuation schedule, and a random value for effect selection. Data showing fluctuation patterns and the like are included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S80129). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80130, executes the processes of steps S8013-1 to S80135, and then ends the special symbol memory check process.

[7-3-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The special symbol variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol memory check process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the type of hit determination is the second special symbol and the result of the hit determination is "small hit" (step S80141).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the type of hit determination is the second special symbol and the result of the hit determination is "small hit" (YES in step S80141), the process proceeds to step S80142, and the type of hit determination is changed. If it is the second special symbol and it is determined that the result of the hit determination is not "small hit" (NO in step S80141), the process proceeds to step S80143.

In step S80142, the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol small hit time fluctuation pattern determination process, and proceeds to step S80143. The details of the second special symbol small hit variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 196.

In step S80143, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 192). When this process is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

[7-3-4. 2nd special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of a second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The second special symbol small hit variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol variation pattern determination process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S80151).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S80151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S80152. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON, that is, OFF (NO in step S80151), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80155.

In step S80152, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is ON.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is ON (YES in step S80152), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S80153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is not ON, that is, OFF (NO in step S80152), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80154.

In step S80153, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the specific shortening effect C (see FIG. 192). When this process is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process.

In step S80154, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as one of the specific shortened effects C to F (see FIG. 192) based on the random number for selecting the effect. When this process is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process.

In step S80155, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON (YES in step S80155), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S80156. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is not ON, that is, OFF (NO in step S80155), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80157.

In step S80156, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol to the specific normal effect C (see FIG. 192). When this process is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process.

In step S80157, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol as one of the specific normal effects C to F (see FIG. 192) based on the random number for effect selection. When this process is performed, the main CPU 101 ends the second special symbol small hit fluctuation pattern determination process.

[7-3-5. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S83141). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S83141), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S83141), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83142.

In step S83142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S83142), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S83142), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83143.

In step S83143, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "big hit". When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "big hit" (YES in step S83143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83144. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not a "big hit" (NO in step S83143), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83150.

In step S83144, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of each flag and each counter value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing (setting to OFF) the time saving counter and the time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83145.

In step S83145, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83146.

In step S83146, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“06”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S83147).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S83148). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 191), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (winning selection symbol command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S83149). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the remaining number of rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S83150, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving counter subtraction process. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S83151. The time saving counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 198.

In step S83151, the main CPU 101 performs a fluctuation counter subtraction process. The fluctuation counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of reserved games that can be executed up to four times after the four time-saving games are completed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S83152. The fluctuation counter subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (step S83152). When it is determined that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" (YES in step S83152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83153. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the special lottery is not "small hit" (NO in step S83152), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83157.

In step S83153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S83154.

In step S83154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the V winning device opening interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start interval time in the waiting time timer (step S83155).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the small hit start command in the main RAM 103 (step S83156). As a result, a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

Further, in step S83157, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-6. Time saving counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of a time saving counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The time reduction counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S831501).

When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S831501), the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter (step S831502), and proceeds to the process of step S831503. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is not ON, that is, OFF (NO in step S831501), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving counter subtraction process. The time saving counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set time saving counter becomes 0, and is set when the jackpot game state ends. The number of times to be set is, for example, 0 times or 4 times as shown in the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 191).

In step S831503, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter is 0. If the time reduction counter is not 0 (NO in step S831503), the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction counter subtraction process. On the other hand, if the time reduction counter is 0 (YES in step S831503), the main CPU 101 moves to step S831504.

In step S831504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag, that is, setting it to OFF. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S831505.

In step S831505, the main CPU 101 clears the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S831506. In addition, although the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the time saving game may be OFF, in step S831505, the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the time saving game is always turned OFF. However, instead of this, it is determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is ON or OFF, and only when the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is ON, the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is cleared. You may try to do it.

In step S831506, the main CPU 101 sets the hold number of the second special symbol in the fluctuation counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction counter subtraction process.

[7-3-7. Fluctuation counter subtraction processing]
FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation counter subtraction process by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The fluctuation counter subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the fluctuation counter is greater than 0 (step S831511). When the fluctuation counter is not greater than 0, that is, 0, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation counter subtraction process. On the other hand, if the fluctuation counter is larger than 0 (YES in step S831511), the main CPU 101 moves to step S831512. Since the fluctuation counter is set at the end of the time saving game state (after the time saving flag is cleared), when the time saving flag is ON, it is determined as NO in step S831511.

In step S831512, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation counter, and proceeds to the process of step S831513. The fluctuation counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the value of the set fluctuation counter becomes 0, and is set at the end of the time-saving gaming state as described above. Since a maximum of four second special symbols can be reserved, the maximum number of numbers set in the fluctuation counter in the process of step S831506 (see FIG. 198) is 4.

In step S831513, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the fluctuation counter is 0. If the fluctuation counter is not 0 (NO in step S831513), the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation counter subtraction process. On the other hand, if the fluctuation counter is 0 (YES in step S831513), the main CPU 101 moves to step S831514.

In step S831514, the main CPU 101 clears the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation counter subtraction process. In addition, although the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game may be OFF, in step S831514, the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is always turned OFF. However, instead of this, it is determined whether the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON or OFF, and only when the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON, the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game is set. You may try to clear it.

[7-3-8. V prize device open processing]
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of the V winning device by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The processing while the V winning device is open is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control processing. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the V winning device (step S80161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“04”) indicating the V winning device opening process (NO in step S80161), the main CPU 101 ends the V winning device opening process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the V winning device (YES in step S80161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80162.

In step S80162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the attacker winning counter indicating the number of winnings of the game ball to the V winning device 422 has reached the upper limit of five. When it is determined that the value of the attacker winning counter is 5 or more (YES in step S80162), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80163. On the other hand, if the value of the attacker winning counter does not reach five (NO in step S80162), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80164.

In step S80163, the main CPU 101 clears the waiting time timer. When the process of step S80163 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S80165.

On the other hand, in step S80164, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". If the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S80164), the main CPU 101 ends the processing during the opening of the V winning device. On the other hand, if the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S80164), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80165.

In step S80165, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball has been detected in the V winning opening 4223 by the V winning opening switch 4231. If there is a winning detection of the game ball in the V winning opening 4223 by the V winning opening switch 4231 (YES in step S80165), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80166. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection of the game ball in the V winning opening 4223 by the V winning opening switch 4231 (NO in step S80165), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80170.

In step S80166, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“08”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S8020), and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, it is set so that the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S80167.

In step S80167, the main CPU 101 sets the V jackpot start interval time in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S80168.

In step S80168, the main CPU 101 sets the V jackpot start command. As a result, the V jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the process while the V winning device is open.

In step S80170, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag with a value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval processing, and ends the V winning device opening processing.
[7-3-9. V winning device opening end interval processing]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of V winning device opening end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The V winning device open end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. This process is executed when the V winning device switch 4231 does not detect the winning of the game ball in the V winning opening 4223 in the V winning device opening process (step S8016). As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval processing (step S80171). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval processing (NO in step S80171), the main CPU 101 ends the V winning device opening end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“05”) indicating the V winning device opening end interval process (YES in step S80171), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80172.

In step S80172, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the V winning device opening end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S80172), the main CPU 101 ends the V winning device opening end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S80172), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80173.

In step S80173, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag, and proceeds to step S80174.

In step S80174, the main CPU 101 sets the V winning device release end command. As a result, the V winning device release end command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S80175.

In step S80175, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the small hit flag, that is, a process of setting the small hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 to OFF, and ends the V winning device opening end interval process. do.

[7-3-10. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S80221). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (NO in step S80221), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“10”) indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S80221), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80222.

In step S80222, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S80222), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S80222), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S80223.

In step S80223, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S80224). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Is the flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“11”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S80225).

Next, in step S80226, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the jackpot flag, that is, a process of setting the jackpot flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF, and proceeds to step S80227.

In step S80227, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set to ON.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the time saving jackpot is not a normal jackpot in which the time saving flag is not set to ON (NO in step S80227), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving jackpot has been achieved (YES in step S80227), the main CPU 101 moves to step S80228.

Although not shown in FIG. 202, when the big hit game state is controlled via the small hit, that is, the small hit attacker 4222 operates based on the result of the special lottery being "small hit", and V When a game ball wins a prize in the winning opening 4223 and is controlled to a big hit game state, the time saving flag is always set to ON. However, this is not essential, for example, when the result of the special lottery is a "small hit", for example, a random number for effect selection extracted at the time of winning a game ball to the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 is used. Depending on the hit time selection symbol command determined using the command, whether or not to set the time reduction flag to ON and the number of time reductions may be determined.

In step S80228, the main CPU 101 sets the time saving flag to ON, and when this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S80229.

In step S80229, the main CPU 101 sets the time reduction counter to. In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, as shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 191), the number of time reductions set is "4". When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S80230.

In step S80230, the main CPU 101 performs fixed fluctuation flag processing according to the type of jackpot. In this processing, the flag processing of the fixed fluctuation flag at the time-shortening game and the fixed fluctuation flag at the holding game is performed according to the type of the jackpot shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 191). For example, if the hit selection symbol command is "z4", both the fixed fluctuation flag during the time-saving game and the fixed fluctuation flag during the hold game are set to ON. Further, for example, if the hit time selection symbol command is "z5", only the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game is set to ON among the fixed fluctuation flag during the time saving game and the fixed fluctuation flag during the holding game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[7-4. Game flow]
Next, the flow of the game when each of the above control processes is executed using each of the above tables will be described.

First, in the normal game state in which the time reduction flag is OFF, even if the player hits right, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is as long as 600,000 msec, so there is no actual benefit for the player to hit right. Therefore, a general player plays a game by left-handed in a normal game state.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 190). After that, the main CPU refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 191), and based on the determined hit time selection symbol command, the jackpot type (number of rounds, number of time reductions, fixed fluctuation flag at the time reduction game, reserved game). The fixed fluctuation flag of time) is determined and controlled to the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 187, since the big winning opening 540 is arranged in the right side region, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed will be described.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 191), when the hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0", "z1", and "z4" to "z7", the main CPU 101 determines. The game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the time-saving game state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON. In such a time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened to, for example, 1000 msec, and the result of the normal lottery is "normal hit" with an extremely high probability, so that the opening frequency of the normal electric accessory 460 is increased. As a result, the frequency of winning the game ball to the second starting port 440 is increased. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the game is performed by right-handed.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs the second special lottery. In this second special lottery, as shown in FIG. 189, a small hit is won with an extremely high probability. When the small hit is won, the main CPU 101 operates the small hit attacker 4222 to enable the winning of the game ball from the opening / closing winning opening 4221 to the V winning device 422.

As described above, since the number of time reductions set is "4 times", the chances of winning the game ball in the V winning device 422 are given at least 4 times. In addition, up to four variable displays of the second special symbol can be reserved. Therefore, there is a possibility that the winning chance of the game ball to the V winning opening 4223 is given a total of eight times, including four times of the short-time game and four times (maximum) of the reserved game.

When a game ball wins in the V winning device 422, only one game ball is locked by the locking member 4226 even if the number of game balls won in the V winning device 422 is plurality. A game ball that has won a prize in the V winning device 422 but has not been locked by the locking member 4226 is directly received in the loss opening 4224.

The locking member 4226 is arranged above the V winning opening 4223, and when the locking member 4226 releases the locking of the game ball at the timing when the V winning opening 4223 is opened by the operation of the small hit attacker 4222, the locking member 4226 is arranged. The game ball released from the locking member 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223. On the other hand, when the lock of the game ball by the locking member 4226 is released at the timing when the V winning opening 4223 is closed, the game ball released by the locking member 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223. It is accepted by the loss mouth 4224 without.

When the game ball wins the V winning opening 4223, the V winning jackpot is obtained, and the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, as described above, in determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, in the time-saving game, when the fixed variation flag during the time-saving game is ON, four times. The fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed with a fluctuation time of 1000 msec for all of the time-saving games, and when the fixed fluctuation flag during the time-saving game is OFF, the fluctuation time (random fluctuation) that can be different for all four time-saving games each time. Time), the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the reserved game, when the fixed variation flag at the time of the reserved game is ON, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for all of the maximum four reserved games with a variation time of 1000 msec, and the fixed variation at the time of the reserved game. When the flag is OFF, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed with a fluctuation time (random fluctuation time) that can be different each time for all of the maximum four reserved games.

Hereinafter, the flow of the game when the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving game and the variable display of the second special symbol in the reserved game are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. Note that FIG. 203 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment and the winning timing of the game ball to the V winning opening 4223. (A) Time saving game 1000 msec after the V shutter 4225 is closed When the first special symbol game (variation display of the second special symbol) is started, (B) Time saving game is performed 3000 msec after the V shutter 4225 is closed. When the first game (variation display of the second special symbol) is started, (C) When the first game of the time saving game (variation display of the second special symbol) is started immediately after the V shutter 4225 is closed, Shows the time chart. Further, FIG. 204 is a diagram for explaining an execution mode of the variation display of the second special symbol in the time saving game and the reserved game in the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the time saving game is performed four times, but FIG. 203 shows a case where the time saving game is performed five times or more for convenience of explanation.

First, with reference to FIG. 203, the relationship between the fluctuation time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol and the winning timing of the game ball to the V winning opening 4223 will be described.

The time chart shown in FIG. 203 is premised on the following.
-The opening time of the small hit attacker 4222 is fixed at, for example, 1000 msec.
-The opening time of the small hit attacker 4222 is fixed at, for example, 1000 msec.
-The discharge time of the game ball that won the V winning device 422 by opening the small hit attacker 4222 (the interval time from the closing of the small hit attacker 4222 to the start of the next fluctuation) is fixed at 2000 msec.
-The locking member 4226 operates at the same time as the small hit attacker 4222, and the holding of the game ball is released 2000 msec after the small hit attacker 4222 is released.
The game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 is guided to the V winning opening 4223 when the V shutter 4225 is opened, and is guided to the losing opening 4224 when the V shutter 4225 is closed.
-The V-shutter 4225 always operates constantly in a cycle of 5000 msec of "4000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open".
-The variable display of the 2nd special symbol (holding of the 2nd special symbol) should not be interrupted.
-Although the maximum number of game balls that can be controlledly entered into the V winning device 422 is 10 per opening, the configuration of the game board is such that only a maximum of 9 can be entered.

Note that a to g shown in FIG. 203 are timings at which the holding of the game ball by the locking member 4226 is released, where a is the release timing in the first time-saving game and b is the release timing in the second time-saving game. , C is the release timing in the third time-saving game, d is the release timing in the fourth time-saving game, e is the release timing in the fifth time-saving game, f is the release timing in the sixth time-saving game, and g is the seventh time. Indicates the release timing in the time-saving game.

Below, the relationship between the timing at which the holding of the game ball by the locking member 4226 is released and the opening timing of the V shutter 4225, that is, the game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223. Whether or not it will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 (A) to 203 (C).

First, with reference to FIG. 203 (A), a case where the first game of the time-saving game is started (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is started) will be described 1000 msec after the V-shutter 4225 is closed.

In the following description of the seventh embodiment, for example, in the "time saving game first game", the discharge time of the game ball that has won the V winning device 422 after starting from the variable display of the second special symbol Until the lapse of time, "the first game of the time-saving game starts" and "the start of the variable display of the second special symbol" are synonymous. The same applies to the second to seventh time-saving games.

In the first game of the time saving game, since the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 and the opening timing of the V shutter 4225 match (see a in FIG. 203 (A)), the locking member The game ball released from the holding by the 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223, and the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. Originally, when the game ball wins the V winning opening 4223 and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the next fluctuation does not start until the jackpot gaming state ends, but in FIG. 203 (A), for convenience of explanation, for convenience of explanation. The figure which the next fluctuation starts is shown.

In the second game of the time saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 and the opening timing of the V shutter 4225 are different (see b in FIG. 203 (A)), so that the locking member The game ball released from holding by 4226 is guided to the loss opening 4224 and is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

Similarly, in the third to fifth and seventh games of the time saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 and the opening timing of the V shutter 4225 are different from each other (FIG. 203 (A). ), The game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 is guided to the loss opening 4224 and is not controlled in the jackpot game state.

On the other hand, in the sixth game of the time-saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 coincides with the opening timing of the V-shutter 4225 (see f in FIG. 203 (A)). The game ball released from being held by the stop member 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223, and the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state.

Next, a case where the first time-saving game is started 3000 msec after the V-shutter 4225 is closed will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (B).

In this case, in the first, second, and fourth to seventh games of the time saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 and the opening timing of the V shutter 4225 are different (FIG. 203). (See a in (B)), the game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 is guided to the loss opening 4224 and is not controlled in the jackpot game state.

On the other hand, in the third time-saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 coincides with the opening timing of the V-shutter 4225 (see c in FIG. 203 (B)). The game ball released from being held by the stop member 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223, and the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. In this case as well, the next variation is not normally started until the jackpot game state ends, but FIG. 203 (B) shows a diagram in which the next variation is started for convenience of explanation.

Next, a case where the first time-saving game is started immediately after the V-shutter 4225 is closed will be described with reference to FIG. 203 (C).

In this case, in the first to fourth and sixth time-saving games, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 and the opening timing of the V-shutter 4225 are different (a in FIG. 203 (C)). (See d and f), the game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 is guided to the loss opening 4224 and is not controlled in the jackpot game state.

On the other hand, in the fifth time-saving game, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 coincides with the opening timing of the V-shutter 4225 (see e in FIG. 203 (C)). The game ball released from the holding by the 4226 wins the V winning opening 4223, and the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state. In this case as well, the next variation is not normally started until the jackpot game state ends, but FIG. 203 (C) shows a diagram in which the next variation is started for convenience of explanation.

In this way, the V-winning chance of the game ball to the V-winning opening 4223 periodically goes down once every 5000 msec, and one V-winning chance is 1000 msec. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the game period per time-saving game (for example, 4000 msec) and the arrival cycle of the V winning chance (for example, 5000 msec) are shifted, and the second of a plurality of times (for example, 4 times) is performed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is set in advance. Therefore, if the time-saving game is executed a plurality of times, the timing at which the game ball is unlocked by the locking member 4226 and the V-shutter are compared with the case where the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is randomly determined each time. The 4225 makes it possible to increase the probability of matching the timing at which the V winning opening 4223 is opened (hereinafter referred to as "V winning probability").

In the above description, the case of the time-saving game has been described as an example, but the same applies to the reserved game.

However, when the four time-saving games are completed (when the time-saving flag is cleared), if the first game of the reserved game is started immediately after the end of the fourth time-saving game, a V prize is won in the four time-saving games. Even if you don't, you will definitely get a V prize in the reserved game. Therefore, when the four time-saving games are completed, it is preferable that the reserved game is started after a predetermined interval time indicating the end of the time-saving game state has elapsed.

Further, even if a predetermined interval time indicating the end of the time-saving game state is provided, if the interval time and the arrival cycle of the V winning chance are the same, the reserved game (maximum 4 times) is 4 times of the time-saving game. The result is the same. In other words, if the V prize is not won in the four time-saving games, the V prize will not be won even in the reserved game. Therefore, it is preferable that the above interval time is different from the arrival cycle of the V winning chance. However, for example, the above interval time does not have to be a fixed time, and may be different each time by, for example, a lottery. In this case, as a result, the interval time and the arrival cycle of the V winning chance may be the same.

Further, in the above, the stop of the second special symbol and the release of the small hit attacker 4222 are almost simultaneous, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit attacker 4222 is released after a certain period of time has passed since the second special symbol was stopped. It may be done. That is, between the start of the game and the end of the game, the time from the opening of the small hit attacker 4222 to the end of the game or the time from the stop of the fluctuation of the second special symbol to the end of the game. It may be constant.

Further, in the above, it is premised that the second special symbol is variablely displayed in all the games during the period of both the four time-saving games and the maximum four times of the reserved games. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the time-saving game period or the reserved game period, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the third time-saving game, the locking member 4226 As a result, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released changes. Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, when there is a hold of the first special symbol and a hold of the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 preferentially executes the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, in the above, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol are determined with reference to different variation pattern tables (see FIG. 192), but this is a four-time time saving game. This is because it is premised that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in all the games during the period in all of the reserved games up to four times. However, if the variation display of the first special symbol is performed in the middle of the time saving game or the holding game (for example, the third time saving game), the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 changes, and V It becomes difficult to increase the winning probability. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol with reference to the same variation pattern table, the variation display of the first special symbol can be displayed during the time-saving game period or the reserved game period. Even if this is done, the timing at which the holding of the game ball is released by the locking member 4226 may not change.

Further, in the above, the case where four time-saving games are performed has been described, but the number of time-saving games is not limited to this, and for example, 100 times of time-saving games may be performed, or "small hit". When the number of times determined in the above reaches a predetermined number of times, the time saving game may be ended. In this case, it is preferable to allow it to be determined as "missing". In addition, if it is possible to be decided as "missing", even if the V winning chance of the game ball to the V winning opening 4223 does not arrive four times in a row, it will be decided as "missing". For example, the chance of winning a V prize may arrive at the 5th time, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 204, the flow of the game when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed based on the hit-time selection symbol command (see FIG. 191) in the time-saving game and the hold game will be described.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first to fourth time-saving games is all determined in advance to 1000 msec, and the first to fourth times. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the reserved game is determined in advance to 6000 msec. In this case, the V winning probability in the time-saving game (4 times) is approximately 80%. In addition, the V winning probability in the reserved game (4 times) is also about 80%. Therefore, the probability of winning a V prize in any of a total of eight times of the time-saving game and the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 96%.

Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first to fourth time-saving games is all determined in advance to 1000 msec, and the second in the first to fourth reserved games. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined each time, it will be random. In this case, the V winning probability in the time-saving game (4 times) is approximately 80%. In addition, the probability of winning a V in the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 59%. Therefore, the probability of winning a V prize in any of a total of eight times of the time-saving game and the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 92%.

Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z6", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first to fourth time-saving games is determined each time, so that it becomes random, and in the first to fourth reserved games. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is predetermined to be 6000 msec. In this case, the V winning probability in the time-saving game (4 times) is approximately 59%. In addition, the probability of winning a V in the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 80%. Therefore, the probability of winning a V prize in any of a total of eight times of the time-saving game and the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 92%.

Further, when the hit selection symbol command is "z7", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first to fourth time-saving games is determined each time, so that it becomes random, and in the first to fourth reserved games. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is also randomly determined each time. In this case, the V winning probability in the time-saving game (4 times) is approximately 59%. In addition, the probability of winning a V in the reserved game (4 times) is also approximately 59%. Therefore, the probability of winning a V prize in any of a total of eight times of the time-saving game and the reserved game (4 times) is approximately 83%.

In this way, the game ball released from being held by the locking member 4226 by predetermining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol for the number of time-saving games (4 times) and the number of reserved games (maximum 4 times). It is possible to increase the probability of winning the V winning opening 4223. In addition, since the game period per time-saving game (or reserved game) and the arrival cycle of the V winning chance are not the same time but are different, the holding by the locking member 4226 is held in the variable display of the second special symbol this time. Even if the released game ball does not pass through the V winning opening switch 4231, the probability that the game ball will pass through the V winning opening switch 4231 is increased every time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the next time onward. It will be done, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In addition, by making the method of determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol different between the time-saving game and the reserved game, not only the V winning probability is simply increased, but also the method of determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (for four times). It is possible to provide a plurality of V winning probabilities simply by changing (whether the fluctuation time is determined in advance or each time).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, an interval period is provided between the time-saving game and the reserved game to determine the method for determining the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a method of determining a fluctuation time of a second special symbol by providing a normal time-saving game state and a specific time-saving game state and providing an interval period between the time-saving game and the reserved game in the normal time-saving game state. In a specific time-saving game state, the fluctuation time for a total of five times, for example, four time-saving games and one reserved game, is determined in advance without providing an interval period between the time-saving games and the reserved games. You may try to do it. In this case, in a specific time-saving game state, the V winning probability can be made higher than in the normal time-saving game state. Further, in this case, it is preferable that it is not possible to visually grasp whether the game is controlled in the normal time-saving game state or in the specific time-saving game state by, for example, an effect executed by the sub CPU 201.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 201 include a display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, a sound effect output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205, and an LED control circuit 206. At least one of the light emitting effect of the LED 25 and the operation effect of the accessory group 1000 executed via the accessory control circuit 207 corresponds to the effect.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state after the end of the so-called first-hit jackpot game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is randomly determined each time in both the time-saving game and the reserved game, and the time-saving game or hold is performed. When a V prize is won in a game (so-called consecutive villas), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the time-saving game and / and the reserved game is determined in advance, but the first special lottery is not limited to this. Even when the result of is a big hit, the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the time saving game and / and the fixed fluctuation flag at the time of the reserved game may be set to ON.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, when the time reduction number of times is set, it is, for example, "4 times". That is, for example, each of the four variable display times of the second special symbol is determined as the specific shortened effect C. However, not limited to this, a premium jackpot is provided in which the number of time reductions is set to, for example, "5 times", and each of the fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, for example, is determined as the specific shortening effect C. You may do so. When the premium jackpot is won and the main CPU 101 controls the premium time-saving game state, the V winning probability in the time-saving game becomes almost 100%. In this case, for example, it is preferable that the effect executed by the sub CPU 201 is also a premium effect that can be understood to be more advantageous to the player than a jackpot other than the premium jackpot (normal jackpot or time-saving jackpot).

Further, when the above-mentioned premium jackpot is won and controlled to the premium time-saving game state, the game state after the jackpot game state based on the V prize in this premium time-saving game state is completed is determined by the number of time reductions. The probability of being controlled to the premium time-saving game state may be increased again as compared with the case where the V prize is won in the normal time-saving game state set to "4 times".

Even if the sub CPU 201 wins the premium jackpot, the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the normal time saving game state in which the time saving number is set to "4 times" without performing the premium effect, or is controlled to the premium time saving game state. You may perform an effect that you cannot grasp from the outside.

Further, when the main CPU 7101 is controlled to the so-called big hit game state by the first hit (for example, when the "big hit" is derived as a result of the first special lottery and is controlled to the big hit game state), the big hit game state is set. After the end, when the number of time reductions is controlled to the normal time reduction game state of, for example, "4 times", and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 4223 in the time reduction game state and the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state, this jackpot game After the state is completed, it may be controlled to a special time-saving game state in which a larger number of times (for example, "5 times") is set as the time-saving number of times than when the big hit game state by the first hit is controlled. That is, when the jackpot game state is controlled by the so-called first hit, after the end of the jackpot game state, for example, each of the four variable display times of the second special symbol is determined as the specific shortened effect C, and the time-saving game state is set. In, when the game ball is controlled to the jackpot game state by winning the V winning opening 4223, for example, after the end of the jackpot game state, each of the five variation display times of the second special symbol is specified shortened effect C. It may be decided to. When controlled to a special time-saving game state, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 performs a special effect capable of grasping that it is more advantageous to the player than the normal big hit or the time-saving big hit. Furthermore, when the arrival cycle of the V winning chance is larger than 5000 msec (for example, 8000 msec), the number of times the jackpot game state is continued due to the winning of the game ball in the V winning opening 4223 in the time-saving game state (so-called consecutive villa). As the number of times) increases, the number of time reductions set may increase.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to increase the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state simply by changing the number of time reductions set without changing the operation mode of the V-shutter 4225.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined in advance in the four time-saving games, it is determined to be 1000 msec in advance, and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined in advance in the reserved game. When deciding, all are set to 6000 msec, but they are not necessarily all limited to the same time, and the number is determined according to the symbol (winning selection symbol command) when the result of the special lottery is "big hit". 2 The fluctuation time of the special symbol may be determined. For example, as the first time saving game (or holding game) 1000msec, the second time saving game (or holding game) 2000mec, the third time saving game (or holding game) 1000msec, and the fourth time saving game (or holding game) 2000msec. It may be good, the first time saving game (or holding game) 1000msec, the second time saving game (or holding game) 2000mec, the third time saving game (or holding game) 3000msec, the fourth time saving game (or holding game). It may be 4000 msec. That is, it is sufficient that the game period per time-saving game (or reserved game) and the arrival cycle of the V winning chance are different. However, if the time difference between the game period per time-saving game (or reserved game) and the arrival cycle of the V-winning chance is the common divisor of the arrival cycle of the V-winning chance, the number of time-saving games (or reserved games) will increase. As the number increases, it is preferable that the timing at which the game ball is unlocked by the locking member 4226 and the timing at which the V winning opening 4223 is opened by the V shutter 4225 approach each other.

[8. 8th Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is a gaming machine of a method (simultaneous variation type) capable of simultaneously varying a plurality of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In explaining the eighth embodiment, the description of the configuration and control common to the first embodiment will be omitted. However, the omitted description also applies to the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment.

Further, in the description of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ...", "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...", "in the first embodiment, ..." Or, even if the description is limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...", it will be particularly described in the following eighth embodiment. As long as there is no such thing, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the eighth embodiment. Similarly, in the description of the pachinko gaming machines of the second to seventh embodiments, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machines of the second to seventh embodiments is also particularly described in the following eighth embodiment. Unless otherwise specified, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the eighth embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to seventh embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eighth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machines of the first to seventh embodiments have the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Simultaneous fluctuation function of special symbols>
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed at the same time. Then, when the simultaneous fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the following various processes are performed.

If one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is already changing to become a big hit at the start of the change, the change display of one special symbol is a loss or a small hit. It is controlled so that it becomes a variable display. That is, if the other special symbol is already undergoing a big hit at the start of the change of one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol will not be a big hit, and internally, one of them will be a big hit. For the variable display of the special symbol, a lottery of the variable display (missing symbol or small hit symbol) is performed so that the symbol determination process of the loss or the small hit is forcibly performed.

Further, when the symbol of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is confirmed (stop display), one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the other special symbol is changing. In this case, the symbol determination process is performed so that the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly changed to the variable display of loss (missing symbol).

Further, in the case of shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, a process is performed to prevent the other special symbol from starting to fluctuate. Specifically, when shifting to the jackpot operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag provided for the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. Then, after the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol is completed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state.

Further, in the case of shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol (second special symbol in the present embodiment) is determined, the processing for interrupting the variable display of the other special symbol is performed. Specifically, when shifting to the small hit operation when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the on state to interrupt the variable display of the other special symbol, and one of them. After the end of the small hit game performed by confirming the small hit of the special symbol of, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. In addition, when the variation display of the special symbol is interrupted, the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol is interrupted, and the special symbol is kept changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the fluctuation display time of one special symbol (waiting time for a special symbol described later) has elapsed and the confirmed symbol of one special symbol is a jackpot symbol (at the time of finalizing the jackpot symbol). When the other special symbol shifts from the demo waiting state to the start of fluctuation (the other special symbol wins a prize), that is, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode). When the other special symbol starts to change (at the time of winning), the following processing is performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 205A, an example of processing in a case where the variation display of one special symbol ends at the jackpot symbol and the variation start of the other special symbol overlaps will be described. FIG. 205A shows the processing contents for each special symbol when the variation display of one special symbol ends in the jackpot symbol (specific mode) and the variation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps. It is a time chart for explaining.

In this case, first, when the symbol of one special symbol is confirmed (when the jackpot is confirmed: t1 in FIG. 205A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the ON state, and the other special symbol starts to fluctuate. Try not to. Next, after the end of the jackpot game performed by confirming the jackpot of one special symbol (t2 in FIG. 205A), the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set (cleared) to the off state. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is started. In addition, in the case of providing the game property that the electric support is attached in the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state after the end of the game period of the electric support, and the other special symbol is set. Fluctuation display of is started. If the electric support is not attached after the jackpot game ends, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol is set to the off state at the end of the jackpot game, and the variation display of the other special symbol is started.

However, in this case, the other special symbol is not forcibly displayed as a variable display in which the stopped symbol is lost or a small hit, and the lottery result of the other special symbol (result of the big hit lottery, etc.) is maintained. , On the other hand, the variable display of the special symbol is not started. Therefore, by performing such a process, it is possible to prevent wastefully digesting one reserved ball of the other special symbol. Further, in this case, when the lottery result of the other special symbol is a big hit, the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped by the lost symbol immediately after the big hit game of one special symbol is completed, so that the other special symbol is not forcibly stopped to change at the same time. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game with respect to the variable function.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation start of the other special symbol (at the time of winning) overlaps, the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not only when the variation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol and when the variation of the other special symbol starts (at the time of winning), but also as shown in FIG. 205B, the other special symbol The timing of the fluctuation start may be the timing during the period from when the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends with the jackpot symbol (t1 in FIG. 205B) to a predetermined time before (Δt = t1-t0 in FIG. 205B). For example, the special symbol pause flag of the other special symbol may be set to the on state internally so that the other special symbol does not start to fluctuate. In this case as well, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained. The period (Δt = t1-t0) from when the variation display of one of the special symbols ends with the jackpot symbol to a predetermined time before can be appropriately set.

<Structure of special symbol work area table and special symbol related definition data table>
Next, the configuration of each special symbol work area table and each special symbol related definition data table provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209. Note that FIG. 206 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol work area table, and FIG. 207 is a configuration diagram of the first special symbol-related definition data table. Further, FIG. 208 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol work area table, and FIG. 209 is a configuration diagram of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

[1st special symbol work area table]
The first special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the first special symbol.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 206, in the first special symbol work area table, as a storage area, a first special symbol control state number area, a first special symbol per flag area, and a first special symbol hold number area , 1st special symbol game state number area, 1st special symbol number area, 1st special symbol demo display state flag area, 1st special symbol game state transition offset area, 1st special symbol waiting time management timer area, 1st special A symbol pause flag area, a first special symbol game state designation parameter area, a first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the first special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address (“W_T1_YY00”) side of the area table. In the first special symbol work area table, as shown in FIG. 206, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol work area table.

In the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area.

In addition, in the 1st special symbol hit flag area in the 1st special symbol work area table, information indicating the result (big hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (the lottery of the 1st special symbol) performed at the time of winning the first start opening is stored. It is stored. Further, in the first special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the first special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, in the first special symbol waiting time management timer area, one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the upper side (starting address side) on the address, and one timer is configured in the 2-byte area on the lower side. In the present specification, the former is referred to as a high-order 2-byte timer, and the latter is referred to as a low-order 2-byte timer. Each 2-byte timer is managed separately, and the count value of the timer is stored in each 2-byte area.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) is divided into the variation display time of the first half and the variation display time of the second half, and each variation. The display time is managed separately by a 2-byte timer. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the first half of the special symbol is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) in the latter half of the special symbol is managed by the lower 2 It is managed by a byte timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display time of the first half of the special symbol may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer, and the variable display time of the latter half of the special symbol may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the first special symbol, various monitoring times other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol are set in the upper 2-byte timer of the first special symbol. NS. For example, as will be described later, the interval time until the big hit game starts (the special symbol hit start display time described later), the interval time until the big hit game ends (the special symbol hit end display time described later), the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, The display time between rounds is set in the upper 2-byte timer. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be configured in which these monitoring times other than the variable display time (special symbol waiting time) are set in the lower 2-byte timer.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which two timers (upper 2-byte timer and lower 2-byte timer) are both configured by 2 bytes has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, production specifications and games. The configuration of the two timers can be arbitrarily set according to the nature and the like. For example, each timer may be configured with a number of bytes other than 2 bytes, or the number of bytes of the two timers may be different from each other.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the variable display time of the special symbol is divided into the variable display time of the first half and the latter half and each time is managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer has been described. Not limited to. The period managed by each of the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer may be different from each other. For example, the period from the start of the variable display time of the special symbol to the time that can be counted by the 2-byte timer is managed by the upper 2-byte timer, and after the counting of the upper 2-byte timer is completed, the remaining period is the lower 2-byte timer. You may manage it with.

Further, in the present embodiment, even for a predetermined monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time of the special symbol, if the time is long (a period that cannot be counted by the 2-byte timer), the monitoring time is concerned. May be divided into two, and the divided monitoring time may be managed by the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively.

By providing the timer having the above-described configuration, for example, the following effects can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the system cycle time (processing cycle related to game control) is 6 msec, so the period that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer is 65536 × 6 msec, and 4 when monitoring a longer time. A byte timer is required. For example, when the entire variation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the special symbol is a long time of about 10 minutes, a 4-byte timer is required. However, if the time that can be monitored by the 2-byte timer, such as the short-time fluctuation display time of the entire special symbol or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, is monitored by the 4-byte timer, it is equivalent to 4 bytes. Of the timer areas of, the timer area for the upper 2 bytes is unused, which is not efficient.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are set separately (independently). ) When the configuration is managed by a 2-byte timer, both of the two 2-byte timers are used even if the entire fluctuation display time of the special symbol is short, so there are no unused timers. .. Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, a short time such as an interval time until the start of the big hit game is monitored by using one of the 2-byte timers. Therefore, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various monitoring times can be efficiently managed by using the timer area. That is, in the timer configuration of the present embodiment, various processes performed by the main control circuit 100 can be efficiently executed, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

Further, for example, when two 2-byte timers are provided and one of the 2-byte timers is used to monitor the fluctuation display time of a special symbol for a short time or the interval time until the start of the big hit game, a long time is used. When monitoring the fluctuation display time of a special symbol, a method of monitoring by adding up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer can be considered. However, as in the present embodiment, the 4-byte timer is composed of two separate 2-byte timers, and the fluctuation display time of the first half and the fluctuation display time of the second half of the special symbol are separately (independently) 2 bytes. In the case of the configuration managed by the timer of, it is not necessary to add up the count value of the upper 2-byte timer and the count value of the lower 2-byte timer. In this case, since the total processing of the count values of the timers can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced. In the present embodiment, an example in which various times are managed by two timers has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which various times are managed by one timer may be used.

[1st special symbol related definition data table]
In the first special symbol-related definition data table (index table), various information (storage area, storage area,) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the first special symbol from the main RAM 103 is performed. Data area, address of constant definition value) is stored. Therefore, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 103 by referring to various addresses defined in the first special symbol-related definition data table. .. The index table referred to here may be a storage body of information in which reference information is stored, or may be a set of structures or variables.

As shown in FIG. 207, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the first special symbol selection value (“0” in the present embodiment) and a second special symbol in the second special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in the second special symbol work area table, start address of the first special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the first special symbol hold storage write pointer area, first special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table, second special symbol work area Storage area of the start address of the table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area of the start address of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, storage area of the first special symbol confirmation setting data table 2 A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the first. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T1_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. Further, in the first special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 207, the address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table. There is.

In the first special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the first special symbol selection value (0) and the address (lower address) of the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table are stored. Area, storage area for the start address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage area, storage area for the address (lower address) of the first special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and first special symbol hold storage write The storage area of the address (lower address) of the pointer area is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variable display of the first special symbol is collectively stored in the first special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the first special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 207, the addresses of the first special symbol waiting time management timer area and the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol, the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the room can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 103.

That is, by providing the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 207, the first special symbol-related definition data table includes the start address of the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol per flag area in the second special symbol work area table, and the second. The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag in the second special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Without using the first special symbol related definition data table, it is possible to directly read the information of the second special symbol hit flag and the second special symbol pause flag from the second special symbol work area table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variable display of the first special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the first special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (final address and the address immediately before it) of the first special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as will be described later, the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 209 described later). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

[2nd special symbol work area table]
The second special symbol work area table stores various information used in various control processes (various modules) for variable display of the second special symbol.

Specifically, in the second special symbol work area table, as shown in FIG. 208, the second special symbol control state number area, the second special symbol per flag area, and the second special symbol hold number area are stored as storage areas. , 2nd special symbol game state number area, 2nd special symbol number area, 2nd special symbol demo display state flag area, 2nd special symbol game state transition offset area, 2nd special symbol waiting time management timer area, 2nd special A symbol pause flag area, a second special symbol game state designation parameter area, a second special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and a second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area are provided, and these storage areas are used for the second special symbol work. They are arranged in this order from the start address (“W_T2_YY00”) side of the area table. In FIG. 208, for convenience of explanation, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol work area table is omitted, but each storage in the second special symbol work area table is omitted. The address of the area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol work area table.

Further, in the second special symbol work area table, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area is composed of a 4-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 1-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol work area table.

In addition, in the second special symbol hit flag area in the second special symbol work area table, the result (big hit, small hit or loss) of the big hit lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) performed at the time of winning the second start opening is displayed. The information to be shown is stored. Further, in the second special symbol pause flag area, the value (on value / off value) of the special symbol pause flag of the second special symbol used in the processing control at the time of simultaneous fluctuation is stored.

Further, the second special symbol waiting time management timer area (4-byte area) is composed of an upper 2-byte timer and a lower 2-byte timer, similarly to the first special symbol management timer area.

Then, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time of the first half of the second special symbol is managed by the upper two-byte timer, and the fluctuation display time of the latter half of the second special symbol is managed by the lower two-byte timer. Further, in the present embodiment, in the control process of the second special symbol, the monitoring time other than the fluctuation display time (special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol (for example, the interval time until the start of the big hit game and the end of the big hit game). The interval time, the fixed waiting time of the specific symbol, the display time between rounds, etc.) are managed by the upper 2-byte timer of the second special symbol, but these monitoring times may be managed by the lower 2-byte timer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timer configuration and the monitoring time management method of the second special symbol are the same as those of the first special symbol. Therefore, by adopting the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the second special symbol, the same effects as the above-mentioned various effects obtained by the timer configuration and monitoring time management method of the first special symbol can be obtained. Be done.

[2nd special symbol related definition data table]
In the second special symbol-related definition data table, various information (storage area, data area, constant) required when reading information used in various control processes (various modules) of the variation display of the second special symbol from the main RAM 103 is performed. Defined value address) is stored. Therefore, in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, desired information can be read directly from the main RAM 103 by referring to various addresses defined in the second special symbol related definition data table. ..

As shown in FIG. 209, the second special symbol-related definition data table includes a storage area for the second special symbol selection value (“1” in the present embodiment) and a first special symbol in the first special symbol work area table. Storage area for the address of the hit flag area (lower address), storage area for the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in the first special symbol work area table, start address of the second special symbol hold storage area (lower address) ) Storage area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, storage area for the address (lower side address) of the second special symbol hold storage write pointer area, second special symbol work Storage area for the start address of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in the area table, storage area for the address of the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table, first special symbol work area Storage area for the start address of the table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol fluctuation start setting data table, storage area for the start address of the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 1, and storage area for the second special symbol confirmation setting data table 2. A storage area for the start address, a storage area for the start address of the second special symbol game end setting data table, and a storage area for the start address of the first special symbol-related definition data table are provided, and these storage areas are the second. The data are arranged in this order from the start address ("D_T2_XX00") side of the special symbol-related definition data table. In FIG. 209, for convenience of explanation, the offset value from the start address of each storage area in the second special symbol-related definition data table is omitted, but in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the offset value is omitted. The address of each storage area is defined by an offset value (relative value) from the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table.

Further, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, the storage area of the second special symbol selection value, the storage area of the address (lower address) of the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first 2 Storage area for the start address (lower address) of the special symbol hold storage area, storage area for the address (lower address) of the second special symbol hold storage read pointer area, and second special symbol hold storage write pointer area. Each storage area of the address (lower address) is composed of a 1-byte area, and each other storage area is composed of a 2-byte area. That is, the configuration of the second special symbol-related definition data table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) is the same as that of the first special symbol-related definition data table.

As described above, the address information of various information required for the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol is collectively stored in the second special symbol-related definition data table. For example, in the second special symbol-related definition data table, as shown in FIG. 209, the addresses of the second special symbol waiting time management timer area and the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. Is stored. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register or the like in advance, so that the second special symbol-related definition data table is set. The information stored in each storage area in the room can be directly called from the work area of the main RAM 103.

That is, by providing the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration, when reading necessary information from the work area of the main RAM 103, the reference processing of the address data of the information stored in the work area is omitted. be able to. In this case, in various control processes for variable display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for referring to the address data of the necessary information is not required when reading the necessary information. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 209, the second special symbol-related definition data table includes the start address of the first special symbol work area table, the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table, and the first. The address of the special symbol pause flag area is stored. When such a configuration is provided, information on the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag in the first special symbol work area table is required in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol. In this case, the special symbol-related definition data table switching process (the process of switching the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table preset in the IX register or the like to the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table) is performed. Without using the second special symbol related definition data table, it is possible to directly read the information of the first special symbol hit flag and the first special symbol pause flag from the first special symbol work area table.

In this case, in various control processes of the variation display of the second special symbol, an instruction code for executing the switching process of the special symbol-related definition data table becomes unnecessary. Therefore, when the second special symbol-related definition data table having the above configuration is provided, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

Further, in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (final address and the address immediately before it) of the second special symbol-related definition data table, the head of the first special symbol-related definition data table is set. The address is stored. Further, as described above, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is stored in the storage area for the last two bytes of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 207). When such a configuration is provided, mutual access is possible between the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

[Various deformation examples of the special symbol work area table] (1) Modification example 1
As described above, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table (type of stored information, storage order, size of each storage area) and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are mutually exclusive. Although the same example has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table may be different from each other.

When the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the configuration of the second special symbol work area table are the same as in the present embodiment, the start address of the first special symbol work area table is used. The offset value of the address to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item is the same as the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the storage area of the information of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from each special symbol work table can be shared, and the capacity of the process program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

However, for example, when the number of information items (types) stored in each special symbol work area table is different from each other, the address from the start address of the first special symbol work area table to the information storage area of a predetermined item. There is a possibility that the offset value of is different from the offset value of the address from the start address of the second special symbol work area table to the information storage area of the predetermined item. In this case, the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the first special symbol work area table and the offset value setting process when reading the information of the predetermined item from the second special symbol work area table. Need to be provided separately, which may increase the capacity of the processing program.

FIG. 210 shows a modified example of the special symbol work area table for solving such a problem. FIG. 210 is a diagram showing the configuration of the first special symbol work area table in the first modification.

The items (types), arrangement order, and sizes of the storage areas provided in the first special symbol work area table in this example are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 206. Further, although not shown, in this example, the configuration after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area (final address side) in the first special symbol work area table and the second special in the second special symbol work area table. The configuration after the symbol game state specification parameter area is the same, and the configuration on the start address side of the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table is the first in the second special symbol work area table. 2 The configuration on the start address side of the special symbol game state specification parameter area shall be different.

In this example, in the first special symbol work area table, the start address (“W_T1_YY0A”) of the first special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address A), and the first special symbol game The address (“W_T1_YY0B”) immediately before (upper side) of the state specification parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address B). Then, as shown in FIG. 210, the respective addresses are set to the start address for the first special symbol game state designation parameter area, the first special symbol effect effect variation table parameter area, and the first special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area. It is specified by two types, an offset value from A and an offset value from the start address B.

Further, although not shown, in this example, the start address (“W_T2_YY0C”) of the second special symbol work area table is defined as the first start address (start address C) also in the second special symbol work area table. In both cases, the address (“W_T2_YY0D”) immediately before (upper side) of the second special symbol game state specification parameter area is defined as the second start address (start address D). Then, for the second special symbol game state designation parameter area, the second special symbol effect effect fluctuation table parameter area, and the second special symbol stop symbol management number parameter area, the respective addresses are set to the offset value from the start address C and the start. It is specified by two types of offset values from the address D.

When the configuration of this example is adopted as the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, each item after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area in the first special symbol work area table The offset value from the start address B of the storage area is the same as the offset value from the start address D of the storage area of each item after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area in the second special symbol work area table. In this case, by using the start address B and the start address D as the reference of the offset value, the offset value setting process when reading the information after the first special symbol game state specification parameter area from the first special symbol work area table is performed. , The offset value setting process when reading the information after the second special symbol game state specification parameter area from the second special symbol work area table can be shared. Further, in this case, the information read processing after the first special symbol game state designation parameter area and the information read process after the second special symbol game state designation parameter area can be shared. Therefore, when the above configurations of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table in this example are adopted, a processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 even if both table configurations are different from each other. Capacity can be reduced.

(2) Modification example 2
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least a part of the information about the other special symbol is specified in one special symbol work area table, and the storage position of the information about the other special symbol stored in one special symbol work area table is set to one of the same items. The position (next storage address) may be one lower than the storage position (storage address) of the information related to the special symbol.

For example, a second special symbol per flag area is provided at an address next to (one lower side) the first special symbol per flag area in the first special symbol work area table shown in FIG. 206, and the second special is shown in FIG. 208. The first special symbol hit flag area may be provided at the address next to (one lower side) the second special symbol hit flag area in the symbol work area table.

In this case, in the control process of the variation display of the first special symbol, when the first special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the first special symbol work area table is displayed without correcting the address. When the 1 special symbol per flag is read and the 2nd special symbol per flag (other party's information) is referred to, the address is corrected by 1 addition (+1), and the 2nd special is added from the 1st special symbol work area table. Read the symbol hit flag. On the other hand, in the control process of the variation display of the second special symbol, when the second special symbol hit flag (own information) is referred to, the second special symbol work area table is displayed as the second from the second special symbol work area table without correcting the address. When the special symbol hit flag is read and the first special symbol hit flag (other party's information) is referred to, the address is corrected by adding 1 (+1), and the first special symbol is added from the second special symbol work area table. Read the hit flag.

That is, in this example, in the control process of the variable display of the first special symbol, the information about the first special symbol (own information) or the information about the second special symbol (other party's information) is obtained from the first special symbol work area table. Information about the second special symbol (own information) or information about the first special symbol from the second special symbol work area table in the process of reading (address set process) and the control process of the variable display of the second special symbol. Since the process (address set process) when reading (other party's information) is the same, both processes can be shared. Therefore, when the configuration of the special symbol work area table of this example is adopted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

(3) Modification 3
In the present embodiment, the configuration has been described in which only the information related to the first special symbol is specified in the first special symbol work area table, and only the information related to the second special symbol is specified in the second special symbol work area table. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, like the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 207) and the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 209) of the present embodiment, the last two bytes of the first special symbol work area table. The start address of the second special symbol work area table is stored in the storage area (last storage area) of (the last address and the address immediately before it), and the last two bytes of the second special symbol work area table are stored. The start address of the first special symbol work area table may be stored in the storage area. When such a configuration is provided, mutual entry is possible between the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table, and processing at the time of simultaneous fluctuation can be executed more efficiently. , The processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

In the present invention, for example, the configuration of the first special symbol work area table and the second special symbol work area table may be a combination of the above-mentioned modification 2 and the above-mentioned modification 3. In this case as well, the same effect as that obtained in the above-mentioned modified examples 2 and 3 can be obtained.

[Modification example of special symbol related definition data table]
As described above, in the present embodiment, an example in which the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are separately provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table may be configured by one special symbol-related definition data table (index table). Even in such a configuration, the address of each storage area can be specified by the offset value (relative value) from the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table in the special symbol-related definition data table.

In this case, the data for mutual entry (counterpart side) stored in the storage area (last storage area) of the last 2 bytes (last address and the address immediately before it) of each special symbol-related definition data table. The start address of the special symbol-related definition data table) is no longer required, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

Further, as described later, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, when the process for the first special symbol is performed, the start address of the first special symbol related definition data table is set in the IX register and the second special symbol is set. When processing the symbol, the start address of the second special symbol-related definition data table is set in the IX register. That is, in the control process of the variable display of the special symbol, the set process of the start address of the special symbol-related definition data table is switched to the IX register according to the type of the special symbol to be processed. However, when the first special symbol-related definition data table and the second special symbol-related definition data table are configured as one special symbol-related definition data table, the special symbol-related definition data is used in the control processing of the variable display of the special symbol. It is not necessary to switch the set processing of the start address of the table to the IX register, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 211 to 244.

[External masqueradable interrupt processing]
First, the external masqueradable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 211. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, when a power is cut off. Note that FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external masqueradable interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the protection register (S11001). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads out the state of the input port 2 (S11002).

The main control circuit 100 is provided with three types of input ports: input port 0, input port 1, and input port 2. At input port 0, on / off states such as each start port winning ball switch, setting key 328, and out ball count switch (not shown) are set. In the input port 1, the on / off state of the large winning port switch 541, the general winning port switch 531, the discharge port switch, the passing gate switch 491, and the like is set. Further, in the input port 2, an on / off state of a power failure signal, a backup clear switch 330, a sensor abnormality detection signal, a frame radio wave sensor, an open signal, a magnetic sensor, a vibration sensor, a solenoid monitoring sensor and the like is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is being detected (S11003).

In S11003, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption signal is not being detected (NO in S11003), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11005 described later. On the other hand, in S11003, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption signal is being detected (YES in S11003), the main CPU 101 sets the XINT detection flag to the ON state (ON value) (S11004). .. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating whether or not the power is cut off, and its value is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 103.

After the processing of S11004 or when the determination of S11003 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S11001 (S11005). Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11006) and ends the external masqueradable interrupt processing.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 212, a system timer interrupt process executed in a cycle of 2 msec (interrupt cycle) under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the procedure of system timer interrupt processing.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the protection register (S11011). The protection registers to be saved in this process are accumulators A and A', flag registers F and F', pair registers BC and B'C', pair registers DE and D'E', and pair registers HL and H. 'L', IX register and IY register.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S11012).

In S11012, when the main CPU 101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (at the time of power failure detection) (when the determination in S11012 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11026 described later. On the other hand, in S11012, when the main CPU 101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S11012), the main CPU 101 performs an interrupt enable process (S11013).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of reading the state of the input port (S11014).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is permitted (S11015). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the value of the activation control flag (activation state).

The start control flag is a flag for determining the type of start state such as power recovery, setting change, setting confirmation, and RAM clear, and is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 103. The value of the start control flag is the state information (on value (Low) or off value (High): operation information) of the backup clear switch 330 at the time of turning on the power, and the state information (on value (High)) of the setting key 328. Off value (Low): Operation information). Then, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) is determined by the combination of both state information (value of the start control flag).

Specifically, when the backup clear switch 330 has an off value (High) and the setting key 328 has an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "10B"), the power is cut off. It is determined that it is time to return. When the backup clear switch 330 is the ON value (Low) and the setting key 328 is the ON value (High) (for example, the value of the activation control flag = "01B"), it is determined that the setting is being changed. When the backup clear switch 330 is an off value (High) and the setting key 328 is an ON value (High) (for example, the value of the activation control flag = "11B"), it is determined that the setting is being confirmed. .. When the backup clear switch 330 has an on value (Low) and the setting key 328 has an off value (Low) (for example, the value of the start control flag = "00B"), it is determined that the RAM has been cleared. Will be done. Then, in the determination process of S11015, if the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating other than setting change and setting confirmation, a YES determination (game permission state) is obtained. In the present embodiment, an example in which the on value of the backup clear switch 330 is set to the Low level and the off value is set to the High level has been described, but the on value of the backup clear switch 330 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the on value of the setting key 328 is set to the High level and the off value is set to the Low level has been described, but the on value of the setting key 328 may be set to the Low level and the off value may be set to the High level. ..

In S11015, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not in the game permission state (NO in S11015), the main CPU 101 performs the setting control process (S11016). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process or a setting confirmation process. That is, in the present embodiment, the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing are performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed in the cycle of 2 msec, and are performed in the case where the game is not permitted. The details of the setting control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 213 described later. Then, after the processing of S11016, the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S11026 described later.

On the other hand, in S11015, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is permitted (YES in S11015), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the interrupt counter (S11017). The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225 described later), which will be described later, and the counting value of the interrupt counter is the work of the main RAM 103. It is stored in the interrupt counter area in the area.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the interrupt cycle timer (S11018). The interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates various random value values (S11019). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a switch input detection process (S11020). The details of the switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 218 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning information command setting process (S11021). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the effect control command (winning information command).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an effect control command transmission process (S11022). In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a command reserved for transmission from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S11023). The registers to be saved in this process are the accumulators A and A'and the flag registers F and F'.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing of the performance display monitor 334 (S11024). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 334, and the like. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the register saved in S11023 (S11025).

After the processing of S11025 or S11016, or when the determination of S11012 is YES, the main CPU 101 performs the restoration processing of the protection register saved in S11011 (S11026), and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

As described above, in the system timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, when the current activation state is the game disallowed state (when S11015 is NO determination), the setting control processing (setting change processing or setting confirmation processing) is performed. It does not perform various processes (for example, interrupt cycle timer update process (S11018), random number value update process (S11019), performance display monitor 334 control process (S11024), etc.) that are executed when the game is permitted. In this case, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed when the game is not permitted, and the processing can be simplified. Therefore, by performing the above-described processing in the system timer interrupt processing, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the type of the current start state is used by using the start control flag composed of the combination of the state information of the backup clear switch 330 at the time of power-on and the state information of the setting key 328. (Recovery from power failure / Change setting / Confirm setting / Clear RAM) can be determined. That is, the type of startup state (recovery from power failure / change of setting / confirmation of setting / clear RAM) can be determined by using a common flag (there is no need to set a discrimination flag for each type of startup state). In the embodiment, the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

[Setting control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 213, the setting control process performed in S11016 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 212) will be described. Note that FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the start control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S11031).

In S11031, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the start control flag is a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S11031 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change process (S11032). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 214 described later.

On the other hand, in S11031, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the start control flag is not a value indicating the setting change (when the determination in S11031 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the setting confirmation process (S11033). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215 described later.

After the processing of S11032 or S11033, the main CPU 101 performs the setting operation display processing (S11034). In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an effect control command transmission process (S11035). In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a command (initialization command or power failure recovery command) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S11032) or the setting confirmation process (S11033) to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs WDT (watchdog timer) output processing (S11036). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the WDT clear register address reading process, the built-in WDT clear process, and the built-in WDT restart process in this order. Then, after the processing of S11036, the main CPU 101 ends the setting control processing and returns the processing to the processing of S11026 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 212).

[Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 214, the setting change process performed in S11032 during the setting control process (see FIG. 213) will be described. Note that FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed (S11041). This determination process is performed based on the information on the on / off state of the backup clear switch 330 included in the information of the various input ports read.

In S11041, when the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear switch 330 is not pressed (NO in S11041), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11043 described later. On the other hand, in S11041, when the main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear switch 330 is pressed (YES in S11041), the main CPU 101 performs the update process within the set value range (S11042).

After the processing of S11042, or when the determination in S11041 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key 328 has been turned off (S11043). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the on / off information of the setting key 328 included in the input port information read in the system timer interrupt process this time and the input port information read in the previous system timer interrupt process. The on / off information of the included setting key 328 is compared (masked by exclusive OR operation), and based on the comparison result, whether or not the state of the setting key 328 has changed from the on state to the off state, that is, , It is determined whether or not the off-edge of the setting key 328 is detected.

The setting control process is executed by detecting the on-edge of the setting key 328 (when the state of the setting key 328 changes from the off state to the on state). At this time as well, the system timer interrupt process of this time is executed. The on / off information of the setting key 328 read in is compared with the on / off information of the setting key 328 read in the previous system timer interrupt processing (masked by the exclusive OR operation), and the comparison result is obtained. Based on this, the on-edge of the setting key 328 is detected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the off-edge and on-edge detection of the setting key 328, the on / off information of the setting key 328 read in the current system timer interrupt processing and the setting key read in the previous system timer interrupt processing. By using the comparison result (result of exclusive OR operation) with the on / off information of 328 as a common flag, the start and end of the setting control process are determined.

In S11043, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key 328 is not turned off (when the determination in S11043 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 213). Return to the processing of S11034.

On the other hand, in S11043, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key 328 has been turned off (when the determination in S11043 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the first normal pre-game processing (S11044). In this process, various setting processes at the time of clearing the RAM are performed. The details of the first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 216, which will be described later. Then, after the processing of S11044, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11034 of the setting control processing (FIG. 213).

[Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the setting confirmation process performed in S11033 during the setting control process (see FIG. 213) will be described. Note that FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting confirmation process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key 328 has been turned off (S11051). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S11043 in the setting change process (see FIG. 214) described above.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S11051 that the setting key 328 is not turned off (when the determination in S11051 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation process and performs the process in the setting control process (FIG. 213). Return to the processing of S11034.

On the other hand, in S11051, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key 328 has been turned off (when the determination in S11051 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the second normal pre-game processing (S11052). In this process, various setting processes are performed when the power is restored. The details of the second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. Then, after the processing of S11052, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11034 of the setting control processing (FIG. 213).

[1st normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the first normal pre-game processing performed in S11044 during the setting change processing (see FIG. 214) will be described. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the first normal game pre-processing performed in S11044 during the setting change process (see FIG. 214) is a game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 227 described later), which is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of clearing the RAM.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM setting process at the time of clearing the backup (S11061). In this process, the main CPU 101 loads the RAM setting data table at the time of clearing the backup (when the backup clear switch 330 is pressed), and stores the data in this data table in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S11062). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 207) in the main RAM 103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S11063). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates various data (parameters) for designating the game state, and stores the generated data in a predetermined area in the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206). Specifically, the main CPU 101 is stored in each of the first special symbol game state number area, the first special symbol game state designation parameter, and the first special symbol effect variation table parameter area in the first special symbol work area table. Data (parameter) is generated and the generated data is stored in the corresponding area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the initialization command (S11064). When the first normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the initialization command reserved in the processing of S11064 to the sub-control circuit 200 is the setting control processing (FIG. 213). It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11035) in (see). Further, when the first normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initial setting processing (see FIG. 227 described later) during the main control main processing, the initialization command reserved in the processing of S11064 is used. The transmission to the sub control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). That is, in the present embodiment, the process of transmitting the initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, which is performed when the RAM is cleared, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S11064, the main CPU 101 ends the first normal game pre-process and also ends the setting change process (FIG. 214).

[Second normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S11052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 215) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second normal game pre-processing. As will be described later, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S11052 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 215) is a game control-related process during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225 described later). In the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 227 described later), which is performed before the above, it is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of recovery from power failure.

First, the main CPU 101 reads out the RAM setting data table at the time of recovery from power failure (S11071). Further, in this process, the read data is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103. By this RAM setting process, the game is permitted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) (S11072). This determination process is performed based on the data (special symbol probability change state flag value) stored in the special symbol probability change state flag area provided in the main RAM 103. The special symbol probability change state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state.

In S11072, when the main CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is not the probabilistic gaming state (low probability gaming state) (when the determination in S11072 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11074 described later. On the other hand, in S11072, when the main CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state (YES in S11072), the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol probabilistic state notification flag value to the on state (on value). (S11073).

The special symbol probability change state notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not to notify that the current game state is the probability change game state, and is set to the on state when the current game state is the probability change game state. NS. Further, the special symbol probability change state notification flag value is stored in the special symbol probability change state notification flag area provided in the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, a so-called probabilistic lamp for notifying that the gaming state is in the probabilistic gaming state is provided. When the special symbol probability change state notification flag is turned on at the time of recovery, the lamp lights up, but in other cases, the probability change lamp does not light even if the special symbol probability change state notification flag is on. In the present embodiment, a time-saving lamp for notifying that the game state is the time-saving game state is also provided, and the time-saving lamp lights up during the time-saving game state.

After the processing of S11073, or when the determination in S11072 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs the transmission reservation processing of the power failure recovery command (S11074). When the second normal game pre-processing is called in the setting change processing, the transmission of the power interruption recovery command reserved in the processing of S11074 to the sub-control circuit 200 is the setting control processing (FIG. FIG. It is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11035) in (see 213). Further, when the second normal game pre-processing is called in the startup initial setting processing (see FIG. 227 described later) during the main control main processing, the interrupt recovery command reserved in the processing of S11074 Is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). That is, in the present embodiment, the transmission process of the power failure recovery command to the sub control circuit 200, which is performed at the time of power failure recovery, is also performed when the setting change process is executed.

Then, after the process of S11074, the main CPU 101 ends the second normal game pre-process and also ends the setting confirmation process (FIG. 215).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting control processing (setting change processing and setting confirmation processing) is performed in the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec. Further, when the setting control processing is performed, the normal game pre-processing (first or second normal game pre-processing) according to the control type (setting change or setting confirmation) is performed as described above. Then, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in this setting control processing is performed before the game control-related processing in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 222 to 225 described later). The process is the same as the normal pre-game process (initial setting process) performed in. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the normal game pre-processing (first and second normal game pre-processing) performed in the setting control processing and the normal game performed before the game control-related processing during the main control main processing. The pre-processing (initial setting processing) can be shared, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

[Switch input detection processing]
Next, the switch input detection process performed in S11020 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 212) will be described with reference to FIG. 218. Note that FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch input detection process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an abnormal state monitoring process (S11081). The details of the abnormal state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol-related check process (S11082). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the first start port switch 421, the passage gate switch 491, and the second start port switch 441 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When the on-edge of the first start port switch 421 or the on-edge of the passing gate switch 491 is detected in this check process, a random number acquisition process, a random number transfer process, and the like are performed. Further, when the on-edge of the second start port switch 441 is detected in this check process, a process of updating the ordinary electric accessory winning counter, a process of invalidating the winning, and the like are performed depending on the situation.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol-related check process (S11083). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the large winning opening switch 541, the first starting port switch 421, and the second starting port switch 441. When the on-edge of the large winning opening switch 541 is detected in this check processing, the special electric accessory winning counter is updated, the winning invalidation processing, and the like are performed depending on the situation. Further, in this check process, when the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is performed, the transmission reservation process of the specific hold addition command is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, in this check process, if the on-edge of each start port winning ball switch is detected (the number of reserved special symbols is updated) and the look-ahead effect is not performed, the transmission reservation process of the hold addition command is performed. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a prize ball-related switch check process (S11084). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the data (prize ball management pointer value) stored in the payout management table at the time of the prize ball. Then, after the processing of S11084, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11021 of the system timer interrupt processing (FIG. 212).

[Abnormal status monitoring process]
Next, the abnormal state monitoring process performed in S11081 during the switch input detection process (see FIG. 218) will be described with reference to FIG. 219. Note that FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an abnormal state monitoring pre-processing (S11091). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2). The details of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing will be described later with reference to FIG. 220 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing (S11092). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in each monitoring target (each abnormality item). The details of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 221 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an induced magnetic field monitoring process (S11093). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the induction magnetic field is being detected, and if the induction magnetic field is not being detected, the main CPU 101 sets the induction magnetic field detection information bit to the ON state (ON value). Then, after the processing of S11093, the main CPU 101 ends the abnormal state monitoring processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11082 of the switch input detection processing (FIG. 218).

[Abnormal status monitoring pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 220, the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing performed in S11091 during the abnormal state monitoring process (see FIG. 219) will be described. Note that FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process of reading abnormality detection information (information of various sensor bits of the input port 2) (S11101). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the door / frame is open (whether or not the base door 12 and / or the glass door 13 is open) (S11102).

In S11102, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door / frame is not open (NO in S11102), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11104 described later. On the other hand, in S11102, when the main CPU 101 determines that the door / frame is open (YES in S11102), the main CPU 101 clears the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S11103). As a result, the detection level of the magnetic sensor is turned off, and the magnetic sensor does not detect an abnormality.

After the processing of S11103, or when the determination in S11102 is NO, the main CPU 101 updates the abnormality detection information (S11104). Then, after the processing of S11104, the main CPU 101 ends the abnormal state monitoring pre-processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11092 of the abnormal state monitoring processing (FIG. 219).

In the abnormal state monitoring preprocessing of the present embodiment, as described above, while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S11102 is YES), the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 is cleared (S11103) to perform magnetism. Although an example of setting the detection level of the sensor to the off state (non-detection level) has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be lowered while the door / frame is open. At this time, the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be gradually lowered for each system timer interrupt process (2 msec cycle), and finally the detection level of the magnetic sensor may be turned off. May be lowered to a low level that is not affected by magnetic disturbance when the door / frame is opened, and then control is performed to maintain the detection level. Further, in the present embodiment, an example of clearing the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 (S11103) while the door / frame is open (when the determination in S11102 is YES) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the vibration sensor is provided, not only the magnetic sensor bit of the input port 2 but also the vibration sensor bit may be cleared while the door / frame is open.

As described above, in the present embodiment, during the opening of the door / frame, the detection level of various sensors for abnormality detection (for example, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) is lowered or turned off in the abnormality state monitoring preprocessing. do. Therefore, when such a configuration is provided, even if magnetic disturbance or vibration occurs when the door / frame (base door 12 and / or glass door 13) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is opened, the gaming machine can be used. It is possible to suppress adverse effects on various provided sensors (for example, magnetic sensors, vibration sensors, etc.).

[General-purpose anomaly detection judgment processing]
Next, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process performed in S11092 during the abnormality state monitoring process (see FIG. 219) will be described with reference to FIG. 221. Note that FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the number of abnormality monitoring targets (the number of abnormal items to be monitored) (S11111). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the address immediately before the start address of the abnormality monitoring table, and reads out the number of monitoring targets (the number of monitoring checks) stored in the address. In the present embodiment, the monitoring targets (abnormal items) are, for example, sensor abnormality monitoring, magnetic monitoring, door / frame opening / closing monitoring, saucer full tank monitoring, payout abnormality monitoring, touch state monitoring, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an abnormality in the monitoring target (abnormal item) currently being processed (S11112).

Here, the content of the determination process of S11112 will be described in detail. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the information stored in the monitored area of the monitored target, which is currently the processing target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormal state (monitoring specific information). The information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target is information indicating the presence or absence of an abnormality in the monitoring target, and the mask value for detecting an abnormality indicates whether or not the monitoring target is a check target for abnormality detection. This is the information to be shown.

The mask value for abnormality detection is composed of, for example, 1-byte data, and it is specified whether or not the corresponding monitoring target abnormality detection check processing is performed on the data of each bit (“0” or “1”). Will be done. Then, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that performs the abnormality detection check processing, and "0" is stored in the bit corresponding to the monitoring target that does not perform the abnormality detection check processing.

Therefore, if the monitoring target currently being processed is the check target and an error has occurred in the monitoring target, the information stored in the monitoring target area of the monitoring target and the abnormal state detection The result of the logical product operation with the mask value is "1", and it is determined that there is an abnormality in S11112. In other cases, the result of the logical product operation is "0", and it is determined that there is no abnormality in S11112. .. That is, when the monitoring target currently being processed is not the target of the abnormality detection check processing, it is determined that there is no abnormality even if an abnormality occurs in the monitoring target. In this case, various processes (processing at the time of abnormality detection) related to the abnormal state flag described later are not performed.

For example, when the number of monitoring targets is "8" and the abnormal state detection mask value is "00111100B", the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing shown in FIG. 221 is the processing of S11112 to S11119 (abnormality detection check processing). Is repeated 8 times, and of these, the abnormality detection check process is actually performed only for the monitoring target that is the target in the 3rd to 6th processes from the start of the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process, and the 1st and 2nd times. For the monitoring targets targeted by the 7th and 8th processes, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not performed.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. 221 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S11112 that there is no abnormality in the monitoring target (when the determination in S11112 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11114 described later. .. On the other hand, in S11112, when the main CPU 101 determines that the monitoring target has an abnormality (YES in S11112), the main CPU 101 sets the abnormality state flag of the monitoring target (S11113).

After the processing of S11113 or when the determination in S11112 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag of the monitoring target (S11114).

In S11114, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S11114 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11116 described later. On the other hand, in S11114, when the main CPU 101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S11114), the main CPU 101 sets the monitoring timer (S11115).

After the processing of S11115 or when the determination of S11114 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the monitoring timer has elapsed (S11116).

In S11116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the monitoring timer has not elapsed (NO in S11116), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11119 described later. On the other hand, in S11116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the monitoring timer has elapsed (YES in S11116), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a change in the abnormal state flag (S11117).

In S11117, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no change in the abnormal state flag (when the determination in S11117 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11119 described later. On the other hand, in S11117, when the main CPU 101 determines that the abnormal state flag has changed (YES in S11117), the main CPU 101 updates the abnormal state flag (S11118).

After the processing of S11118, or when S11116 or S11117 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of monitoring targets and updates the update, and determines whether or not the updated monitoring target number is "0" ( S11119).

In S11119, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S11119 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the monitoring target to the monitoring target corresponding to the number of monitoring targets after the update. Instead, the processing after S11112 is performed. On the other hand, in S11119, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of monitoring targets after the update is "0" (when the determination in S11119 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process and performs the process. Return to the process of S11093 of the abnormal state monitoring process (FIG. 219).

As described above, in the general-purpose abnormality detection determination processing of the present embodiment, the abnormality detection check processing is performed only on the monitoring target defined as the check target (“1”) by the mask value for abnormality detection. For the monitoring target specified as the non-check target (“0”) by the mask value for abnormality detection, it is determined that there is no abnormality, and the abnormality detection check process is not substantially performed. When such a process is performed, the general-purpose abnormality detection determination process can be further simplified. Therefore, in this case, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main process (main control main process) controlled by the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. 22 to 225 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main control main process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a stack pointer setting process (S11201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an interrupt vector table address setting process (S11202). In this process, the address of the interrupt vector table is stored in the I register.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption signal is at the High level (S11203). In S1123, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption signal is not at the High level (NO in S1123), the main CPU 101 repeats the determination process of S1123.

On the other hand, in S1123, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption signal is at the High level (when the determination in S1123 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs flag management processing of the backup clear switch 330 and the setting key 328. (S11204). In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the state information of the backup clear switch 330 and the state information of the setting key 328.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a wait process (S11205). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a start waiting process on the sub control circuit 200 side. The start-up waiting time (wait period) is 1200.07 msec. Further, in this start-up waiting time, the main CPU 101 performs an interrupt request signal check process, a WDT output process when an interrupt request signal is generated, and a magnetic sensor initialization signal output process at a predetermined timing. The details of the weight processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 226 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure before the startup is a normal power failure (S11206). In this process, the main RAM 103 compares the value stored in the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 103 with the value of the power failure detection flag (“0A5H”) determined in advance, and if both are the same, It is determined that the power failure was normal (YES determination), but if the two are different, it is determined that the power failure was abnormal (NO determination).

In S11206, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure is not normal (NO in S11206), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11210 described later.

On the other hand, in S11206, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure was normal (YES in S11206), the main CPU 101 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 103 (S11207). .. Next, the main CPU 101 performs collation processing of the checksum value of the work area (S11208).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the collation result is normal (S11209).

In S11209, when the main CPU 101 determines that the collation result is normal (YES in S11209), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11217 described later. On the other hand, in S11209, when the main CPU 101 determines that the collation result is not normal (NO in S11209), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11210 described later.

When the determination in S11206 or S11209 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key 328 and the backup clear switch 330 are in the ON state (S11210). This determination process is performed with reference to the value (on / off value) of the setting key switch bit of the input port 0 and the value of the RAM clear bit of the input port 2.

In S11210, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key 328 and the backup clear switch 330 are in the ON state (when the determination in S11210 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11216 described later. On the other hand, in S11210, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key 328 and the backup clear switch 330 are not in the ON state (NO in S11210), the main CPU 101 is a security signal of the external terminal (security bit of the output port). Is set to the on state (S11211).

Next, the main CPU 101 displays an error on the performance display monitor 334 (S11212). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets bit data for error display in the output port to the performance display monitor 334. As a result, the predetermined LED in the performance display monitor 334 lights up, and an error occurrence is displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the setting process of the WDT clear register address (S11213). Next, the main CPU 101 clears the built-in WDT (S11214). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the built-in WDT clear value. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S11215). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the built-in WDT restart value. Then, after the processing of S11215, the main CPU 101 repeats the processing of S11213 to S11215 (WDT output processing) until the power is turned off (permanent loop processing is performed).

Here, returning to the process of S11210 again, if S11210 determines YES, the main CPU 101 stores the setting change state value in the start control flag area in the main RAM 103 (S11216). By this process, the setting change status value is stored as the value of the start control flag.

After the processing of S11216, or when the determination of S11209 is YES, the main CPU 101 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 103 (S11217).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a startup state determination process (S11218). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear) based on the value (value of the startup control flag) stored in the startup control flag area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM clear process at startup (S11219). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears a designated area in the main RAM 103 at startup.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a startup initial setting process (S11220). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing according to the current startup state (power recovery / setting change / setting confirmation / RAM clear). The details of the initial setting process at startup will be described later with reference to FIG. 227 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S11221). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a power failure process (S11222). The details of the power interruption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number (S11223). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number for the special symbol lottery.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is playable (S11224). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag, and when the value of the activation control flag (current activation state) is a value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S11224 is determined to be YES and activation is performed. If the value of the control flag is a value other than the value corresponding to the power failure recovery, S11224 is determined as NO.

In S11224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not playable (NO in S11224), the main CPU 101 performs interrupt permission processing (S11225). Then, after the processing of S11225, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S11221 and performs the processing after S11221.

On the other hand, in S11224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game is playable (YES in S11224), the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S11226). In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the accumulator A and the flag register F.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S11227). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates and updates various base values. Further, this process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the register saved in S11226 (S11228). Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11229).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the system cycle time (6 msec: three times the interrupt cycle (2 mses)) has elapsed (S11230). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area in the main RAM 103 (the current count value of the interrupt counter) is “0”. The value of the interrupt counter is incremented by 1 for each system timer interrupt process (see S11017 in FIG. 212), and becomes "3" when the system cycle time elapses. Therefore, if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is "0", S11230 is judged as YES, and if the value obtained by subtracting 3 from the value of the interrupt counter is not "0", S11230 is judged as NO. It becomes.

In S11230, when the main CPU 101 determines that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S11230), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S11221 and performs the processing after S11221.

On the other hand, in S11230, when the main CPU 101 determines that the system cycle time has elapsed (YES in S11230), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value stored in the interrupt counter area (interrupt counter value). The process is performed three times (S11231). By this process, the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt disabled section in the main control main process is reset (becomes "0").

As described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section of S11221 to S11230) of 6 msec is provided in the main control main process before executing various processes related to the game control described later. Therefore, in the present embodiment, various processes related to game control, which will be described later, are executed every 6 msec (every system cycle). In the present embodiment, an example in which the interrupt disabled section is set to three times the interrupt cycle has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the interrupt disabled section is twice or more and other than three times the interrupt cycle. It may be the value of.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the system timer (S11232). The system timer is a timer for managing the system cycle (6 msec), and the value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a main control command transmission / reception process (S11233). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a command transmission / reception process for payout control.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (S11234). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process for the special symbol game. The details of the special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (S11235). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process for the normal symbol game. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 244 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game operation display unit control process (S11236). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting display data to be output to the first special symbol display LED, the second special symbol display LED, the normal symbol display LED, the hold display LED, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (S11237). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an external terminal plate pulse signal control process, an output data setting process, a test firing test signal generation process, and the like. The test firing test signal generation process is performed using the out-of-area work area in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing (S11238). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an output data set (transfer) process to the output port and a WDT output process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state monitoring process (S11239). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a launch position determination process (if there is a change in the launch position, a launch position command transmission reservation process is performed), and a game abnormality detection determination process (if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command transmission reservation process is performed). Perform processing), perform payout abnormality detection determination processing (if there is an abnormality, perform transmission reservation processing of the payout abnormality detection command).

Then, after the processing of S11239, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S11221 and performs the processing after S11221.

As described above, in the main control main process of the present embodiment, the state information of the backup clear switch 330 and the setting key 328 are performed after the startup and before the execution of the wait process (S11205) (before the checksum collation is completed). The status information of the above state information is saved (flag management process of S11204). When such a process is provided, for example, even if an operation is performed on the setting key 328 during the wait period (even if it is turned on / off), the value of the start control flag at the time of turning on the power (state information at the time of start). ) Can be secured. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the operating status of the setting key 328 at the time of activation and the operating status of the backup clear switch 330 can be more reliably grasped, and the activated state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately identified.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section of S11221 to S11230) of 6 msec is provided before executing various processes related to game control (processes after S11231) in the main control main process. , The power interruption process (S11222), the initial value random number update process (S11223), the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S11227), and the like are performed in the interrupt prohibited section. That is, in the present embodiment, the management processing of the values that affect the ball ejection performance of the game and the values that are aggregated throughout the game is performed in the interrupt-prohibited section. Therefore, by providing such an interrupt prohibition section, the management of the game becomes simple, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 is reduced. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor aggregation / subtraction process (S11227) is performed only when the game is playable in the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance display monitor 334 is updated only when the game is possible, so that the process becomes simpler. Therefore, in such a processing configuration, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced.

[Wait processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the weight processing performed in S11205 during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 222 to 225) will be described. Note that FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure of weight processing.

First, the main CPU 101 sets, for example, "60" in the number of first loops (S11301). Next, the main CPU 101 sets, for example, "47761" in the number of second loops (S11302). The number of first loops and the number of second loops are parameters for managing the passage of the wait period, the number of first loops is set in the B register, and the number of second loops is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (S11303). In the present embodiment, when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal is output to the corresponding output port (output port 1). Therefore, in the determination process of S11303, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10, and if the number of first loops is, for example, a number other than 10. The determination result of S11303 is YES, and when the number of first loops is, for example, 10, the determination result of S11303 is NO.

In S11303, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current timing is a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S11303 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11305 described later. On the other hand, in S11303, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current timing is not a timing other than the output timing of the magnetic sensor initialization signal (when the determination in S11303 is NO), the main CPU 101 inputs the bit data of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Output to the address of the corresponding output port (output port 1) (S11304).

After the processing of S11304 or when the determination of YES in S11303, the main CPU 101 acquires the address information of the interrupt waiting monitor register (S11305). Next, the main CPU 101 checks the data stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register (S11306).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal has been generated (S11307). In this determination process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an interrupt request signal is generated according to the on / off information of the specific bit in the interrupt waiting monitor register, and if the specific bit is in the ON state, S11307 The determination result is YES, and if the specific bit is off, the determination result of S11307 is NO.

In S11307, when the main CPU 101 determines that the interrupt request signal has not been generated (NO in S11307), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S11306 and performs the processing after S11306.

On the other hand, in S11307, when the main CPU 101 determines that an interrupt request signal has been generated (YES in S11307), the main CPU 101 performs a WDT clear register address setting process (S11308). Next, the main CPU 101 clears the built-in WDT (S11309). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restart process of the built-in WDT (S11310).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of second loops, and sets (updates) the subtraction result as a new number of second loops (S11311). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of second loops is "0" (S11312).

In S11312, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of second loops is not "0" (when the determination in S11312 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S11305 and performs the processes after S11305.

On the other hand, in S11312, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of second loops is "0" (when the determination in S11312 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of first loops and obtains a new subtraction result. It is set (updated) as the number of first loops, and it is determined whether or not the subtraction result (the number of first loops after update) is not "0" (S11313).

In S11313, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is not "0" (when the determination in S11313 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S11302 and performs the processing after S11302. ..

On the other hand, in S11313, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of first loops after the update is "0" (when the determination in S11313 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the wait process and controls the process. The process returns to the process of S11206 of the main process (FIGS. 222 to 225).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor initialization signal output process (S11304) is performed at a predetermined timing during the wait process (the number of first loops is, for example, 10 times), and the magnetism is increased. The sensor is initialized. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if magnetic disturbance occurs when the door / frame (base door 12 and / or glass door 13) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is opened, the magnetic sensor is reset by this process. , The adverse effect on the magnetic sensor due to the magnetic disturbance can be suppressed.

Note that "initializing (clearing) the magnetic sensor" here may include "initializing the magnetic sensor", and "initializing the settings (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself". , "Initialize the detection state of the magnetic sensor (for example, forcibly turn off the detection, or when the detection signal = 0, if magnetism is detected, the detection signal is set to a value other than 0." To do) is possible. Further, as the magnetic sensor initialization signal, when the detection signal = 0 in order to change the detection state of the magnetic sensor, if it is assumed that magnetism is detected, a value other than 0 is transmitted as the magnetic sensor initialization signal. Or, a predetermined signal (1 or 0, etc.) is transmitted to a predetermined input terminal (port, etc.) of the magnetic sensor so that the setting (driver, etc.) of the magnetic sensor itself can be initialized. It is also possible to do.

[Initial setting process at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the startup initial setting process performed in S11220 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225) will be described. Note that FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial setting process at startup.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process of reading the start control flag (S11321).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the startup state is a power failure recovery (S11322). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S11322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the activation state is the power failure recovery (YES judgment in S11322), the main CPU 101 performs the second normal game preprocessing (power failure recovery) described with reference to FIG. 217. Various initial setting processes for time) are performed (S11323). Then, after the process of S11323, the main CPU 101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S11221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to 225).

On the other hand, in S11322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the startup state is not a power failure recovery (NO determination in S11322), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation). S11324). Note that this determination process is performed based on the value of the activation control flag.

In S11324, when the main CPU 101 determines that the startup state is a setting change or a setting confirmation (when the determination in S11324 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a pre-setting operation process (S11325). The details of the pre-setting operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 228 described later. Then, after the process of S11325, the main CPU 101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S11221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to 225).

On the other hand, in S11324, when the main CPU 101 determines that the startup state is neither a setting change nor a setting confirmation (when the determination in S11324 is NO), the main CPU 101 is the first normal game described with reference to FIG. 216. Pre-processing (various setting processing at the time of clearing RAM) is performed (S11326). Then, after the process of S11326, the main CPU 101 ends the initial setting process at startup, and returns the process to the process of S11221 of the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to 225).

[Pre-setting operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, the pre-setting operation process performed in S11325 during the initial setting process at startup (see FIG. 227) will be described. Note that FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-setting operation process.

In the setting operation pre-processing, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the setting operation command (S11331). The setting operation command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212).

Then, after the process of S11331, the main CPU 101 ends the pre-setting operation process and also ends the initial setting process at startup (FIG. 227).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting change process (see FIG. 214) or the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 215) is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 212), but the setting change or setting confirmation is performed. The transmission reservation process of the setting operation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 when performed is performed in the main control main process.

If the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed in the system timer interrupt processing, the transmission reservation processing of the setting operation command is performed for each interrupt processing for the executed setting operation, so that there are multiple transmission reservation processes of the setting operation command. May be executed several times. On the other hand, when the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is performed in the main control main process as in the present embodiment, the transmission reservation process of the setting operation command is only executed once for the executed setting operation. I'm done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the transmission reservation process of the extra setting operation command. As a result, in the present embodiment, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

[Power disconnection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the power interruption process performed in S11222 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225) will be described. Note that FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the power failure processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (S11341).

In S11341, when the main CPU 101 determines that the XINT detection flag is not in the ON state (NO in S11341), the main CPU 101 ends the power interruption process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to 22). Return to the process of S11223 of 225). On the other hand, in S11341, when the main CPU 101 determines that the XINT detection flag is in the ON state (YES in S11341), the main CPU 101 performs a checksum value calculation process (S11342).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the checksum value calculation process is completed (S11343).

In S11343, when the main CPU 101 determines that the checksum value calculation process has not been completed (NO in S11343), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S11342 and performs the process after S11342. On the other hand, in S11343, when the main CPU 101 determines that the checksum value calculation process is completed (YES in S11343), the main CPU 101 sets the checksum value and the power failure detection flag value (“0A5H”). Each is stored in a corresponding predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 (S11344).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the XINT detection flag (S11345). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S11346). Then, after the processing of S11346, the main CPU 101 repeats the CPU reset waiting processing (S11347).

[Special symbol control processing]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S11234 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225) will be described with reference to FIGS. 230 and 231. Note that FIGS. 230 and 231 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol address setting process (S11401). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the first special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 207) in the main RAM 103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S11402). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (first special symbol waiting time) of the first special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the first special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232 described later. In the variable display time management process of the special symbols (first and second special symbols) of the present embodiment, as described above, the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time are the upper two-byte timer and the latter half, respectively. It is managed separately by the lower 2-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol address setting process (S11403). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the second special symbol-related definition data table (see FIG. 209) in the main RAM 103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 208) to IY. Set in the register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol-related timer update process (S11404). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates (subtracts) the variation display time (second special symbol waiting time) of the second special symbol, and determines whether or not the variation display time of the second special symbol has elapsed. Perform processing, etc. The details of the special symbol-related timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 232 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol-related timer update process called in S11404 is the same as that called in S11402, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 208) in the main RAM 103, and reads out the control status number of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol control status number area. (S11405). The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating a transition destination (transition destination) of the state (control state) of the control process related to the variable display (special symbol game) of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, as described later, " Any of "0" to "6").

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S11406). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the second special symbol read in S11405 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S11406, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S11406 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11409 described later.

On the other hand, in S11406, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S11406 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. Do (S11407). In this process, the same process as that performed in S11403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol management process (S11408). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S11405. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later.

After the processing of S11408 or when the determination in S11406 is YES, the main CPU 101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206) in the main RAM 103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S11409).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S11410). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the first special symbol read in S11409 is the special symbol fluctuation start value (“0”).

In S11410, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S11410 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11413 described later.

On the other hand, in S11410, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S11410 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. Do (S11411). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S11401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol management process (S11412). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S11409. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S11412 is the same as that called in S11408, and in both processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S11412, or when the determination in S11410 is YES, the main CPU 101 is stored in the second special symbol control state number area with reference to the second special symbol work area table (see FIG. 208) in the main RAM 103. The control state number of the second special symbol is read out (S11413).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (S11414). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S11406 is performed.

In S11414, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S11414 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11417 described later.

On the other hand, in S11414, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the second special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol (when the determination in S11414 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the second special symbol address setting process. (S11415). In this process, the same process as that performed in S11403 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol management process (S11416). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a control process corresponding to the control state number of the second special symbol read in S11413. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S11416 is the same as that called in each of S11408 and S11412, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed.

After the processing of S11416 or when the determination in S11414 is NO, the main CPU 101 is stored in the first special symbol control state number area with reference to the first special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206) in the main RAM 103. The control state number of the first special symbol is read out (S11417).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (S11418). In this process, the same process as the determination process performed in S11410 is performed.

In S11418, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is not the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S11418 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S11235 of the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to 225).

On the other hand, in S11418, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state of the first special symbol is the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol (when the determination in S11418 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the first special symbol address setting process. (S11419). In this process, the same process as the process performed in S11401 is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol management process (S11420). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a control process corresponding to the control state number of the first special symbol read in S11417. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the special symbol management process called in S11420 is the same as that called in each of S11408, S11412 and S11416, and in these processes, a common process is called and executed. Then, after the processing of S11420, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11235 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 222 to 225).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol address setting process is performed before each of the special symbol-related timer process and the special symbol management process is executed, and the special symbol to be processed (the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol). 2 Set the address of the special symbol work area table of (2 special symbol) in the IY register. In this case, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, directly from the special symbol work area table based on the address set in the IY register. , The necessary data can be read (acquired). That is, in the present embodiment, when reading (acquiring) various data used in the special symbol-related timer processing and the special symbol management processing from the work area table, it is necessary to perform the reference processing of the address of the special symbol work area table. It disappears. Therefore, when such a special symbol address setting process is provided, the address reference process of the special symbol work area table can be omitted, so that the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 is reduced. be able to.

[Special symbol related timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the special symbol-related timer update process performed in S11402 and S11404 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 230 and 231) will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol-related timer update process.

In the special symbol-related timer update process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-related timer update process. It is a special design to be done. For example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S11402 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the first special symbol. On the other hand, for example, when the special symbol-related timer update process is called and executed in S11404 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol.

First, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state number of the special symbol (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "6" as described later) (S11431). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol control state number area (first special symbol control state in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol is read out from the number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 208). In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is changing (S11432). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the control state number of the special symbol read in S11431 is the special symbol variation end value (“1”), and the control status number of the special symbol is the special symbol variation end value (“1”). If it is not "1"), it is determined that the special symbol is changing (YES determination).

In S11432, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is not changing (NO in S11432), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11435 described later.

On the other hand, in S11432, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is changing (YES in S11432), the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S11433). In this process, similarly to the process of S11431, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (in FIG. 206). The value of the special symbol pause flag is read from the first special symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 208). In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag is a flag for setting the stop or suspension of the fluctuation of the later special symbol when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change at the same time, that is, the variation display of the later special symbol. This is a flag for determining the control mode of the above, and is provided separately for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (S11434). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is on (whether or not the change start stop or fluctuation interruption of the special symbol is set), and the special symbol pause flag is turned on. If it is in the state, S11434 is determined to be YES, and if the special symbol pause flag is off, S11434 is determined to be NO.

In S11434, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set for the special symbol to be processed (when the determination in S11434 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process. , The process is returned to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11405.

On the other hand, in S11434, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol to be processed (when S11434 determines NO), or when S11432 determines NO, the main CPU 101 Reads the value (value of the upper 2-byte timer) stored in the address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol (S11435). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to wait for the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (waiting for the first special symbol in FIG. 206). The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S11436). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the upper 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol) read in S11435.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed based on the value of the upper 2-byte timer after subtraction (S11437).

In S11437, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has not elapsed (NO in S11437), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol-related timer update process and performs the process. , Return to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11405.

On the other hand, in S11437, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol has elapsed (when the determination in S11437 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the current timing of the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is the timing when (the value of the upper 2-byte timer) becomes "0" (S11438). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol waiting time (value of the upper 2-byte timer) in the first half of the special symbol has just become "0" by the subtraction process of S11436 this time.

When the determination process of whether or not the value of the upper 2-byte timer has just become "0" is not performed, that is, when the progress determination process of the upper 2-byte timer is limited to the process of S11437, Even at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes "0" (at the end of counting the special symbol waiting time in the first half), the processing of S11440 described later (lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the second half of the special symbol)). Subtraction process) will be performed. In this case, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is 1 at the timing when the subtraction (update) process of the lower 2-byte timer should not be performed (the timing before the first subtraction process of the special symbol waiting time in the latter half). Since it will be performed once, it will not be possible to accurately count the special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol. However, when the process of S11438 is provided as in the present embodiment, the subtraction process of the lower 2-byte timer is not performed at the timing when the value of the upper 2-byte timer becomes exactly "0". It is possible to prevent a malfunction of the counting process of the lower 2-byte timer and accurately count the waiting time of the special symbol in the latter half of the special symbol.

In S11438, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (when the determination in S11438 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol-related timer update process. It ends and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11405.

On the other hand, in S11438, the main CPU 101 does not have the timing when the special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol becomes "0" (the special symbol waiting time in the first half has already become "0" before the subtraction process of S11436 this time. If it is determined, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the lower 2-byte timer (special) stored in the address (address two bytes ahead) added by 2 to the start address of the special symbol waiting time management timer area of the special symbol. The special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the symbol) is read (S11439).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a word counter subtraction process (S11440). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a subtraction process (update process) of the lower 2-byte timer (special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol) read in S11439.

Then, after the processing of S11440, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol-related timer update processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, if the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11402 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11403, and the special symbol-related timer update process is called in S11404 during the special symbol control process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11405.

[Special symbol management process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the special symbol management process performed in S11408, S11412, S11416 and S11420 in the special symbol control process (see FIGS. 230 and 231) will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol management process.

In the special symbol management process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol management process. be. For example, when the special symbol management process is called and executed in S11408 or S11416 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the second special symbol, and the special symbol management process. Is called and executed in S11412 or S11420 during the special symbol control process, the "special symbol" to be processed in the following description becomes the first special symbol.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “6”) in parentheses written in parallel with the code of each processing step shown in FIG. 233 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed, and are in the special symbol work area table. It is stored in the special symbol control state number area (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 206 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 208). Then, the main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number.

First, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the upper 2-byte timer, and determines whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (the special symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0 in the first half) (S11451). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the upper 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the value of the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S11451, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S11451 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol management process and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S11408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S11413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S11416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S11451, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the first half of the special symbol (when the determination in S11451 is NO), the main CPU 101 reads the value of the lower 2-byte timer and the latter half of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not there is a special symbol waiting time (the special symbol waiting time management timer value in the latter half is ≠ 0) (S11452). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol waiting time management timer area (first special symbol in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The value of the lower 2-byte timer stored in the waiting time management timer area or the second special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the value of the lower 2-byte timer of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

In S11452, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (when the determination in S11452 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol management process, and performs the process in the special symbol control process. Return to (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S11408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S11413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S11416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

On the other hand, in S11452, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no special symbol waiting time in the latter half of the special symbol (NO determination in S11452), the main CPU 101 reads out the control state number of the special symbol (S11453). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to control the special symbol control status number area (first special symbol control in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The control state number of the special symbol stored in the state number area or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 208 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the control state number of the special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reference processing of the special symbol control branch table (S11454). In the special symbol control branch table, the correspondence between each control state number (“0” to “6”) of the special symbol and the storage address of the corresponding processing program is defined.

Then, the main CPU 101 performs the processing after S11455 according to the control state number of the special symbol read in S11453. The processing contents after S11455 include, for example, updating the control status number (any of "0" to "6") of the special symbol read in S11453 and the control status number of the special symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of, that is, the game situation of the special symbol game, and the like.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation start process (S11455). However, the process of S11455 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (special symbol variation start value) at the start time of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes for starting the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). The details of the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 234 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S11455, the processing of S11455 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation end process (S11456). However, the process of S11456 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (special symbol variation end value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when ending the variable display of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol variation end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S11456, the processing of S11456 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game determination process (S11457). However, the process of S11457 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (special symbol game determination value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a determination process of the derivation result (big hit / small hit / loss) of the special symbol. The details of the special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S11457, the processing of S11457 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S11458). However, the process of S11458 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (large winning opening opening start value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening (special electric accessory), an opening pattern of the large winning opening, a process of generating open / close control data of the special electric accessory, and the like. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S11458, the processing of S11458 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening control process (S11459). However, the process of S11459 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (large winning opening opening control value) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, an opening / closing control process for a special electric accessory (large winning opening). The details of the large winning opening opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 242 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S11459, the processing of S11459 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening preparation process (S11460). However, the process of S11460 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (preparation value for opening the large winning opening) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a selection process of a type of a large winning opening, an opening pattern of a large winning opening, a process of generating open / close control data of a special electric accessory, and the like. The details of the large winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 241 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "5" at the start of the processing of S11460, the processing of S11460 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol hitting end process (S11461). However, the process of S11461 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (end value per special symbol) at the start of the process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when ending the game (special symbol game) at the time of hitting the special symbol. The details of the special symbol hitting end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 243 described later. On the other hand, if the control state number of the special symbol is other than "6" at the start of the processing of S11461, the processing of S11461 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Then, after the processing of S11461, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol management processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIGS. 230 and 231). At this time, when the special symbol management process is called in S11408 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11409, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11412 during the special symbol control process. Returns the process to the process of S11413. Further, when the special symbol management process is called in S11416 during the special symbol control process, the process is returned to the process of S11417, and when the special symbol management process is called in S11420 during the special symbol control process. , The special symbol control process is also completed.

[Special symbol change start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the special symbol variation start processing performed in S11455 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 233) will be described. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation start processing. In the special symbol variation start processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation start processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S11471).

In S11471, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (when the determination in S11471 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start process and manages the process. The process returns to the process of S11456 of the process (FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11471, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (when the determination in S11471 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol game standby process (S11472). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a game state (“game start” or “game standby”) check process. The details of the special symbol game standby process will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game state is "game standby" (S11473).

In S11473, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game state is "game standby" (when the determination in S11473 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process (when the game is determined to be YES). Return to the process of S11456 in FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11473, when the main CPU 101 determines that the game state is not "game standby" ("game start") (when S11473 is NO determination), the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process (when the game state is NO) ( S11474). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a subtraction process of the number of special symbol reservations, a transfer process of a random number value (lottery result), a transmission reservation process of the hold subtraction command, and the like. In the random number value (lottery result) transfer process, the random number value stored in the random number storage area at the time of winning the special symbol that starts to fluctuate is transferred to the random number work area of the special symbol. At this time, a process of moving the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol of the next fluctuation to the random number storage area (process of shifting the holding ball) is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol hit determination process (S11475). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery result (big hit / small hit / loss) determination process. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, a determination process of whether or not it is a big hit is performed, and when it is determined that the special symbol hit is not a big hit, a determination process of whether or not it is a small hit is performed. If it is determined in the process that it is not a small hit, the determination result is determined to be a loss. The contents of the special symbol hit determination process (S11475) will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process (S11476). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to a lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern setting process (S11477). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs lottery processing of the first half variation display pattern and the second half variation display pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the lottery determination result (big hit / small hit / loss), and sets each variation display pattern. .. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation display time setting process (S11478). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the fluctuation display time of the first half of the special symbol (special symbol waiting time of the first half) and the fluctuation display time of the second half (special symbol waiting time of the second half) into the upper 2-byte timer and the lower 2-byte timer, respectively. set.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the designated storage area (S11479). In this process, the random number work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 103 is cleared, and the random number value acquired at the time of winning the special symbol whose fluctuation is started is cleared.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "1" to the control state number of the special symbol (S11480). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol variation end process (S11456) is performed after the end of the special symbol variation start process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S11481). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S11482).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state management process (S11483). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates various flags related to the management of the game state. As other processes, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a game state offset value generation process, a special symbol effect mode management process, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect start command (S11484). The special symbol effect start command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11485). Then, after the processing of S11485, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation start processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11456 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233).

(Details of special symbol hit judgment processing)
Here, the content of the special symbol hit determination process performed in S11475 will be described in more detail. First, the content of the special symbol hit determination process when the simultaneous fluctuation function is operating will be described.

In the special symbol hit determination process, if the special symbol that is not the processing target (the other special symbol) is already changing, the special symbol that is the processing target (one special symbol) is hit by a big hit. Whether or not it is determined is not performed, but a small hit or loss determination process is performed. At this time, if the random number value (lottery result) of one special symbol is a random value corresponding to a small hit or a loss, the judgment result will be a small hit or a loss, respectively, but the random value of one special symbol When is a random number value corresponding to a big hit, the random number value is determined to be a random number value other than a small hit (a random number value corresponding to a loss), and the determination result is forcibly lost. That is, if the other special symbol that is not the processing target is already changing at the start of the fluctuation of one special symbol that is the processing target in the special symbol hit determination processing, the random value of one special symbol. Even if is a random value corresponding to a big hit (even if the lottery result is a big hit), the variable display of one of the special symbols is controlled so as to be a variable display corresponding to the loss.

Next, the specific contents of the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S11475) will be described in more detail.

First, the main CPU 101 reads out the address of the jackpot determination value data table (not shown) of the special symbol to be processed. In the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range (lottery value) of the random value that becomes the jackpot set for each set value ("1" to "6") is defined. In addition, in the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots in the normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) and the probabilistic gaming state (high probability gaming state) is defined for each set value. ing. Then, in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol, the range of random numbers that are jackpots is defined from the start address side in ascending order of the set value. Specifically, in the big hit judgment value data table of the special symbol, from the start address side, the range of the random number value that becomes a big hit when the setting is "1" and the normal game state is set, and the setting is "1" and the probability variation game state. The range of random numbers that will be a big hit when the setting is "2", the range of random values that will be a big hit when the setting is "2" and the normal gaming state, and the randomness which will be the big hit when the setting is "2" and the probabilistic gaming state The range of numerical values, ..., The range of random numbers that will be a big hit when the setting is "6" and in the normal gaming state, and the range of the random numbers that will be the big hit when the setting is "6" and the game is in the probabilistic game state. Stored in order.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the set value (loads the contents of the set value area in the main RAM 103). Next, the main CPU 101 doubles the read set value, and further sets the special symbol probability variation state flag value (“0” in the normal gaming state, “1” in the probability variation game state) to the doubled value. to add. As a result, the address offset value (offset value from the start address) of the storage area in which the range (lottery value) of the random number value to be referred to in the jackpot determination value data table of the special symbol is stored is calculated. Then, by adding the address offset value to the start address of the jackpot judgment value data table of the special symbol, the storage area of the reference random number value range (lottery value) in the jackpot judgment value data table is specified, and the randomness is concerned. A range of numerical values (lottery value) can be obtained.

Next, the main CPU 101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and acquires the big hit lottery determination result. At this time, if the special symbol is a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be a value other than "0 (00H)" (for example, "FFH"), and if the special symbol is not a big hit, the lottery judgment result will be "0". .. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation of the lottery determination result and a preset jackpot flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "001H"). Then, the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a big hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", the special symbol Is not a big hit.

Next, when the result of the logical product operation described above is "0" and it is determined that the special symbol is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 reads out the special symbol selection value. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to store the special symbol selection value in the special symbol-related definition data table to be processed. The special symbol selection value stored in (the storage area of the first special symbol selection value in FIG. 207 or the storage area of the second special symbol selection value in FIG. 209) is read out. The special symbol selection value is a value indicating the type of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and is "0" when the special symbol to be processed is the first special symbol, and is the processing target. When the special symbol of is the second special symbol, it is "1".

Next, the main CPU 101 reads out the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table (not shown). In the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, the address of the special symbol small hit determination value data table (not shown) is defined for each type of special symbol. However, for the type of special symbol for which a small hit is not provided as a result of the lottery of the special symbol, the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table. No. That is, in the present embodiment, the address of the small hit determination value data table for the first special symbol is not defined in the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol selection value (type of special symbol) and the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and provides a small hit in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the address of the small hit judgment value data table of the special symbol is specified in the special symbol small hit judgment value data selection table).

When it is determined in this determination process that a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 101 refers to the randomness in the small hit determination value data table of the special symbol. Calculate the address of the numerical range (lottery value). If it is determined in this determination process that no small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is lost.

Next, when a small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 calls the lottery determination process, executes the lottery determination process with reference to the random number value and the lottery value, and draws the small hit. Acquire the judgment result. At this time, if the special symbol is a small hit, the lottery determination result will be a value other than "0", and if the special symbol is not a small hit, the lottery determination result will be "0". The lottery determination process read by the small hit determination process is the same as the lottery determination process read by the large hit determination process described above. That is, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation of the small hit lottery determination result and a preset small hit flag value (for example, a value other than "0" such as "002H"). Then, the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol to be processed is a small hit if the result of the logical product operation is "1", and if the result of the logical product operation is "0", it is special. It is determined that the design is lost.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a common process (module) is used for the lottery determination process of big hit / small hit / loss performed in the special symbol hit determination process (S11475). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, as described above, the small hit determination value data selection table for the special symbol is referred to, and only when the small hit is provided in the lottery result of the special symbol to be processed, the small hit is provided. Although an example of performing a winning lottery determination process has been described, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the read special symbol selection value is used as an argument (identifier indicating the type of the special symbol) of the lottery determination process, and the lottery determination process is executed with reference to the random number value and the lottery value corresponding to this argument. The winning lottery determination result may be acquired. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned special symbol small hit determination value data selection table, and the amount of data managed by the main control circuit 100 can be further reduced. Further, in this case, since various processes executed by referring to the special symbol small hit determination value data selection table can be omitted, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can also be reduced. ..

[Special symbol game standby processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the special symbol game standby process performed in S11472 during the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 234) will be described. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game standby process. In the special symbol game standby process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game standby process. Is.

First, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the special symbol pause flag (S11491). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 206). Alternatively, the value of the special symbol pause flag stored in the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the value of the special symbol pause flag from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S11492).

In S11492, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is set (when the determination in S11492 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11503 described later.

On the other hand, in S11492, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag is not set (NO in S11492), the main CPU 101 reads out the number of reserved special symbols (S11493). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol hold number area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol hold number area in FIG. 206). Alternatively, the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the number of reserved special symbols from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (S11494).

In S11494, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is not "0" (NO in S11494), the main CPU 101 sets "game start" in the gaming state (S11495). Then, after the process of S11495, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S11473 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 234).

On the other hand, in S11494, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved special symbols is "0" (YES in S11494), the main CPU 101 reads out the special symbol demo flag value (S11496). The special symbol demo flag is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is demonstrating (waiting), and if the current gaming state is the standby state, the special symbol demo flag is turned on. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register to display the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table (first special symbol demo in FIG. 206). The special symbol demo flag value stored in the display state flag area or the second special symbol demo display state flag area in FIG. 208 is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the special symbol demo flag value from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is being demoed based on the value of the special symbol demo flag read in S11496 (S11497).

In S11497, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is being demoed (YES in S11497), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11503 described later.

On the other hand, in S11497, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the demo (NO in S11497), the main CPU 101 sets the demo display command transmitted flag (S11498). In this process, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the special symbol demo display state flag area in the special symbol work area table by using the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S11499). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S11500). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the demo display command (S11501). The demo display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11502).

After the processing of S11502, or when S11492 or S11497 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 sets "game standby" in the game state (S11503). Then, after the process of S11503, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game standby process, and returns the process to the process of S11473 of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 234).

As described above, in the special symbol game standby process of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for the special symbol to be processed, the special symbol is held. The series of processes of S11493 to S11502 including various processes related to the number, various processes related to the demo display, and the like are not executed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game standby process can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced, and the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently to reduce the processing load of the main control circuit 100. ..

[Special symbol change end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the special symbol variation end process performed in S11456 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 233) will be described. 236 and 237 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol variation end processing. In the special symbol variation end processing described below, the "one special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing. It is a special symbol, and the "other special symbol" is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table that is not set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol variation end processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of one of the special symbols is "1" (S11511).

In S11511, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of one of the special symbols is not "1" (when the determination in S11511 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and specializes the processing. Return to the process of S11457 of the symbol management process (FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11511, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of one special symbol is "1" (when the determination in S11511 is YES), the main CPU 101 has a special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol. Is read out (S11512). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of one special symbol work area table set in the IY register to use the special symbol pause flag area (first special in FIG. 206) in one special symbol work area table. The special symbol pause flag value stored in the symbol pause flag area or the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 208) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 can directly read the special symbol pause flag value of one special symbol from the work area in the main RAM 103 without performing the address reference processing of the one special symbol work area table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (whether it is in the ON state) (S11513).

In S11513, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one of the special symbols is set (when the determination in S11513 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation end processing and performs the processing. Return to the process of S11457 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11513, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol pause flag of one special symbol is not set (when the determination in S11513 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the control state number of one special symbol to ". 2 ”is set (S11514). By the update processing of the control state number of one of the special symbols, the special symbol game determination process (S11457) is performed on the one special symbol after the completion of the special symbol variation end processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol effect stop command for one of the special symbols (S11515). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of one of the special symbols reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). It is said.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S11516). The symbol fixed number counter is a counter for counting the fixed number of special symbols (the number of times of variable display of the special symbol), and the counted value is stored in the symbol fixed number counter area in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads out the address of the storage area of the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol (S11517). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address of one special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register to use the special symbol of the other special symbol stored in one special symbol-related definition data table. The address of the pause flag storage area (the storage area of the address of the second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 207 or the storage area of the address of the first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 209) is read out. In this case, the main CPU 101 does not perform the address reference processing (reading processing) of the other special symbol-related definition data table and the address switching processing of the special symbol-related definition data table set in the IX register, and the main RAM 103 The address of the storage area for the special symbol pause flag value of the other special symbol can be read directly from the work area (one special symbol related definition data table).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S11518). In this process, the main CPU 101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 206 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 208) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the small hit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (S11519).

In S11519, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a small hit (when the determination in S11519 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11521 described later. On the other hand, in S11519, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a small hit (when the determination in S11519 is YES), the main CPU 101 has a special symbol pause flag in the other special symbol pause flag area. Set the value (on value) (S11520).

After the processing of S11520 or when S11519 is NO determination, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot confirmation processing (S11521). In this process, the main CPU 101 is stored in the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 206 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 208) in one of the special symbol work area tables. Based on the value, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols corresponds to the big hit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the variation display of one of the special symbols is a big hit (S11522).

In S11522, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of one of the special symbols is not a big hit (when the determination in S11522 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation end process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S11457 in FIG. 233.

On the other hand, in S11522, when the main CPU 101 determines that the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit (when the determination in S11522 is YES), the main CPU 101 has a special symbol pause flag value in the other special symbol pause flag area. (On value) is set (S11523).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the other special symbol-related definition data table in the main RAM 103 in the IX register, and sets the address of the other special symbol work area table in the IY register (S11524).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S11525). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the other special symbol control state number area in the other special symbol work area table (the first special symbol control state number area in FIG. 206 or the second special symbol control state number area in FIG. 208). It is determined whether or not the control state number of the other special symbol stored in is "1", and if the control state number of the other special symbol is "1", the determination process of S11525 is a YES determination. If the control state number of the other special symbol is not "1", the determination process of S11525 is a NO determination.

In S11525, when the main CPU 101 determines that the other special symbol is not in the variable display (NO determination in S11525), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation end process, and performs the process in the special symbol management process (when the special symbol management process (NO). Return to the process of S11457 in FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11525, when the main CPU 101 determines that the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (when the determination in S11525 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the symbol fixed number counter (S11526).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a fluctuation stop flag setting process (S11527). By this process, the test firing test signal is output to the outside.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a loss in the hit flag of the other special symbol (S11528). Specifically, the main CPU 101 loses to the special symbol hit flag area (first special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 206 or second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 208) in the other special symbol work area table. Set the value corresponding to.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol (S11529). Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined fixed waiting time in the upper 2-byte timer for managing the special symbol waiting time of the other special symbol (S11530).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol (S11531). Due to the update processing of the control state number of the other special symbol, the special symbol variation end processing is not performed for the other special symbol.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process for the other special symbol (S11532). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the other special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state. Performs transfer processing of specified parameters.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol (S11533). The transmission of the special symbol effect stop command of the other special symbol reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). It is said. Then, after the processing of S11533, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11457 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233).

As described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, when the special symbol pause flag is set (on state) for one special symbol, the small hit confirmation of one special symbol is confirmed. The processing after S11514 including the processing and the jackpot confirmation processing is not performed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified. In this case, the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced, and the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently to reduce the processing load of the main control circuit 100. ..

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, in the series of processing of S11518 to S11524, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit or a small hit, in any case. , Set the special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol (turn it on). That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the cancellation or interruption of the fluctuation start of the other special symbol can be controlled by a common flag (special symbol pause flag). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified, and the capacity of the processing program managed by the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

Further, as described above, in the special symbol variation end processing of the present embodiment, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and When the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a control process (loss confirmation process) for confirming the change in the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly performed. Specifically, in the loss confirmation process, the special symbol hit flag of the other special symbol is set to the loss (S11528), and the control state number of the other special symbol is set to "2" (S11531: the other special symbol). The special symbol change end processing of) is performed. When such a loss confirmation process is provided, the special symbol pause flag is not set for one special symbol, the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, and the other special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When it is in the middle, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly lost and the control state number of the other special symbol is advanced, so that unnecessary processing such as confirmation processing of a big hit or a small hit for the other special symbol is performed. (Special symbol change end processing) can be omitted. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine provided with the simultaneous fluctuation function as in the present embodiment, when the above processing of S11531 is provided, the processing at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol is usually performed when the variation display time of the special symbol has elapsed. In the present embodiment, when the stop mode of the variation display of the identification information is to shift to the special gaming state, the processing at the end of the variation of the other special symbol can be simplified. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special symbol variation end processing can be simplified by providing the above-mentioned loss confirmation processing. As a result, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 can be executed more efficiently, and the processing load of the main control circuit 100 can be reduced.

[Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, the special symbol game determination process performed in S11457 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 233) will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239. 238 and 239 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the special symbol game determination process. In the special symbol game determination process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game determination process. Is.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S11541).

In S11541, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (when the determination in S11541 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game determination process and manages the process. Return to the process of S11458 of the process (FIG. 233). On the other hand, in S11541, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (when the determination in S11541 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S11542).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot confirmation process (S11543). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 208), and based on this hit flag value, a process of confirming whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit is performed. conduct.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (S11544).

In S11544, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit (YES in S11544), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11549 described later.

On the other hand, in S11544, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (NO in S11544), the main CPU 101 performs a small hit confirmation process (S11545). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the data (address of the special symbol work area table) set in the IY register to set the special symbol per flag area (first special symbol in FIG. 206) in the special symbol work area table. The hit flag value of the special symbol is directly read from the hit flag area or the second special symbol hit flag area in FIG. 208), and based on this hit flag value, a confirmation process of whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit is performed. I do.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a small hit (S11546).

In S11546, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a small hit (YES in S11546), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11549 described later.

On the other hand, in S11546, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (NO in S11546), the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process (S11547). The details of the special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 240 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11548). Then, after the process of S11548, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the process of S11458 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 233).

Here, returning to the processing of S11544 and S11546 again, when S11544 or S11546 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a start setting processing of the variation display of the special symbol at the time of a big hit or a small hit (S11549). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates and updates a special symbol hit signal (big hit signal or small hit signal) output via the external terminal plate 6140 according to the designated special symbol (special symbol selection value). I do.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a round display LED data set process according to the designated special symbol (S11550). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a set process of the upper limit value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened according to the designated special symbol (S11551).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process of the large winning opening operation selection offset value according to the designated special symbol (S11552). The large winning opening operation selection offset value is a relative address value from the start address of the selection table when the large winning opening opening / closing operation pattern is determined from the selection table. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot signal setting process according to the designated special symbol (S11553).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start display time per special symbol (S11554). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the start display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 206 or the th-order in FIG. 208. 2 Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the control state number of the special symbol (S11555). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S11458) is performed after the completion of the special symbol game determination process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S11556). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol hit start display command (S11557). The transmission of the special symbol hit start display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11558). Then, after the process of S11558, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game determination process, and returns the process to the process of S11458 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 233).

[Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the special symbol game end process performed in S11547 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 238 and 239) will be described. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game end processing. In the special symbol game end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol game end process. Is.

First, the main CPU 101 sets "0" to the control state number of the special symbol (S11561). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S11562). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol game end command (S11563). The special symbol game end command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). Then, after the processing of S11563, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol game end processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11548 of the special symbol game determination processing (FIGS. 238 and 239).

[Preparation for opening the big prize opening]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the large winning opening opening preparation process performed in S11458 and S11460 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 233) will be described. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening preparation process. In the large winning opening opening preparation process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening preparation process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (S11571).

In S11571, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is neither "3" nor "5" (when the determination in S11571 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation process. Then, the process is returned to the special symbol management process (FIG. 233). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S11458 during the special symbol management process, the process was returned to the process of S11459, and the large winning opening preparatory process was called in S11460 during the special symbol management process. In the case, the process is returned to the process of S11461.

On the other hand, in S11571, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" or "5" (when the determination in S11571 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the counter value for the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Read (S11572). The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter that counts the opening count of the large winning opening, and the counted value (large winning opening opening count counter value) is stored in the large winning opening opening count counter area in the main RAM 103. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening number counter value is the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (S11573).

In S11573, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening number counter value is not the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (NO determination in S11573), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11578 described later.

On the other hand, in S11573, when the main CPU 101 determines that the counter value of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened (when the determination in S11573 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the end display time per special symbol. Is set (S11574). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the end display time per special symbol to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 206 or the th-order in FIG. 208. 2 Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the special symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "6" in the control state number of the special symbol (S11575). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the special symbol hit end process (S11461) is performed after the end of the special winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S11576). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the special symbol per end display command (S11577). The transmission of the special symbol per end display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). Then, after the processing of S11577, the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S11458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S11459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S11460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11461.

Here, returning to the process of S11573 again, when S11573 determines NO, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter (S11578). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern of the large winning opening (S11579). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a selection process of the large winning opening (S11580).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a selection process of an opening pattern in the round of the selected large winning opening (S11581). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a selection process of setting data (table) for opening control of the selected large winning opening (S11582).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory (S11583). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an opening / closing control data generation process for the special electric accessory (shutter 610).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "4" to the control state number of the special symbol (S11584). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening control process (S11459) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening preparation process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S11585). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the large winning opening opening display command (S11586). The transmission of the large winning opening open display command reserved in this process to the sub-control circuit 200 is performed in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). Then, after the processing of S11586, the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening preparation processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233). At this time, if the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S11458 during the special symbol management process, the process is returned to the process of S11459, and the large winning opening preparatory process is called in S11460 during the special symbol management process. If so, the process is returned to the process of S11461.

[Large winning opening opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the large winning opening opening control process performed in S11459 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 233) will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the large winning opening opening control process. In the large winning opening opening control process described below, the "special symbol" to be processed corresponds to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the large winning opening opening control process. It is a special design.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S11591).

In S11591, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (when the determination in S11591 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process. Return to the process of S11460 of the management process (FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11591, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (when the determination in S11591 is YES), the main CPU 101 reads out the large winning opening winning counter value (S11592). The large winning opening winning counter is a counter that counts the number of winnings (the number of rounds) of the large winning opening, and the counted value (the large winning opening winning counter value) is stored in the large winning opening winning counter area in the main RAM 103. NS.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (S11593). In S11593, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of prizes have been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S11593 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S11597 described later.

On the other hand, in S11593, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of prizes have not been won in the large winning opening (when the determination in S11593 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed. Is determined (S11594).

In S11594, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has not elapsed (NO in S11594), the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening control process and performs the process. , Return to the process of S11460 of the special symbol management process (FIG. 233).

On the other hand, in S11594, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time of the special electric accessory operation management timer has elapsed (YES in S11594), the main CPU 101 performs opening / closing control processing of the special electric accessory (shutter 610). (S11595). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the continuation or termination of the operating state of the special electric accessory, and at the time of continuation, generates the opening / closing control data of the special electric accessory. The opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S11595 is the same process as the opening / closing control process of the special electric accessory called in S11583 during the special winning opening opening preparation process (see FIG. 241), and is between the two processes. Then, a common process is used.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to continue the operating state of the special electric accessory (shutter 610) (S11596).

In S11596, when the main CPU 101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory continues (when the determination in S11596 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening control process, and performs the process as a special symbol management process. Return to the process of S11460 in FIG. 233. On the other hand, in S11596, when the main CPU 101 determines that the operating state of the special electric accessory does not continue (when the determination in S11596 is NO) or when the determination in S11593 is YES, the main CPU 101 closes the large winning opening. Perform the setting process (S11597).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the display time between rounds (S11598). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the display time between rounds to the special symbol waiting time management timer area in the special symbol work area table (the first special symbol waiting time management timer area in FIG. 206 or the second special in FIG. 208). Set in the upper 2-byte timer of the symbol waiting time management timer area).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets "5" in the control state number of the special symbol (S11599). By the update process of the control state number of the special symbol, the large winning opening opening preparation process (S11460) is performed after the completion of the large winning opening opening control process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game state designation parameter setting process of the special symbol (S11600). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets (updates) the game state number area, the game state specification parameter area, and the effect variation table parameter area in the special symbol work area table (see FIG. 206 or 208), and the game state specification parameter. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command (S11601). The inter-round display command reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect control command transmission process (S11022) in the next system timer interrupt process (FIG. 212). Then, after the processing of S11601, the main CPU 101 ends the large winning opening opening control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11460 of the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233).

[End processing per special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the special symbol per-end processing performed in S11461 during the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 233) will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the end processing per special symbol. In the special symbol per-end processing described below, the "special symbol" to be processed is a special symbol corresponding to the address of the special symbol work area table set in the IY register at the start of the special symbol-per-end processing. Is.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S11611).

In S11611, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (when the determination in S11611 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol per-end processing and the special symbol management processing (when the special symbol management process (NO)). FIG. 233) also ends. On the other hand, in S11611, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (when the determination in S11611 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs interrupt prohibition processing (S11612).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a set process of end common data per special symbol (S11613). Next, the main CPU 101 resets (offs) the special symbol pause flag of the special symbol (S11614). In this process, the main CPU 101 is stored in the special symbol pause flag area (first special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 206 or second special symbol pause flag area in FIG. 208) in the special symbol work area table. Set the special symbol pause flag value to the off value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a selection process of end setting data per special symbol (S11615). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the end setting process of the special symbol game (S11616).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 240 (S11617). By this process, the control state number of the special symbol is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs interrupt enable processing (S11618). Then, after the processing of S11618, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol hitting end processing and also ends the special symbol management processing (FIG. 233).

[Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the normal symbol control process performed in S11235 during the main control main process (see FIGS. 222 to 225) will be described. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol control process.

The numerical values (“0” to “4”) written in parentheses in parallel with the processing name of each processing step shown in FIG. 244 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols, and the control state numbers are the normal in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the symbol control status number area. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each processing step corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a normal symbol waiting time (the remaining variable display time of the normal symbol) (whether or not the normal symbol waiting time management timer value ≠ 0) (S11701).

In S11701, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a normal symbol waiting time (YES in S11701), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process and performs the process as the main control main process (FIGS. 222 to FIG. Return to the process of S11236 of 225). In S11701, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no normal symbol waiting time (NO in S11701), the main CPU 101 reads out the control status number of the normal symbol (S11702).

Then, the main CPU 101 performs the processing after S11703 according to the control state number of the read normal symbol. The processing contents after S11703 include, for example, updating the control state number (any of "0" to "4") of the normal symbol read in S11702 and the control state number of the normal symbol in each processing step. It changes according to the presence or absence of, that is, the game situation of the normal symbol game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation start process (S11703). However, the process of S11703 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates, for example, the transfer process of the normal symbol information, the hit determination process of the normal symbol, the normal symbol determination process, the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". Perform various processes such as processing to be performed as appropriate. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "0" at the start of the processing of S11703, the processing of S11703 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variation end process (S11704). However, the process of S11704 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 101 appropriately performs various processes for ending the variation display of the normal symbol, such as a process of selecting the waiting time after the normal symbol is confirmed and a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". conduct. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "1" at the start of the processing of S11704, the processing of S11704 is not performed internally and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game determination process (S11705). However, the process of S11705 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if the lottery result of the normal symbol is lost, it is normal. The process of updating the control state number of the symbol to "0" is performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "2" at the start of the processing of S11705, the processing of S11705 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (S11706). However, the process of S11706 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3" at the start of this process. In this process, for example, if the number of winnings of the ordinary electric accessory 460 reaches the winning specified number, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the control state number of the ordinary symbol to "4". Further, in this process, for example, if the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has not elapsed for a predetermined time, the main CPU 101 ends the process of S11706 without updating the control state number of the ordinary symbol. Further, in this process, for example, when the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 elapses for a predetermined time and the operating state of the ordinary symbol is not continued, the main CPU 101 updates the control state number of the ordinary symbol to "4". Perform the processing to be performed. If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "3" at the start of the processing of S11706, the processing of S11706 is not performed internally, and the process proceeds to the next processing step.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol hitting end process (S11707). However, the process of S11707 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4" at the start of this process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes for ending the normal symbol game (including, for example, a process of updating the control state number of the normal symbol to "0"). If the control state number of the normal symbol is other than "4" at the start of the processing of S11707, the processing of S11707 is not performed internally.

Then, after the processing of S11707, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the processing of S11236 of the main control main processing (FIGS. 222 to 225).

[9. 9th Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. Hereinafter, the ninth embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as the components of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, the description of the portion to which the description in the first to eighth embodiments also applies to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is limited to, for example, "in the first embodiment," or "in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first embodiment, ...". Even if it is described as such, it can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment as long as it does not deviate from the gist of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, the description limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second to eighth embodiments also relates to the ninth embodiment as long as the gist of the ninth embodiment is not deviated. It can also be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to eighth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment. It is possible to combine and combine.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the configurations having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments has the same shape and the same processing, different codes and step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is controlled to a high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed until a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of the special symbol is performed, and the result of the special lottery is ". This is a so-called ST machine, which is a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to a low-probability gaming state after a predetermined number of times (50 times) of variable display of a special symbol is performed without becoming a “big hit”. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the probability variation flag is set to ON from the so-called first hit until the jackpot gaming state is executed a predetermined number of times (5 times), and the jackpot gaming state is set to a predetermined number of times (5 times). It is a pachinko game machine with a so-called limiter in which the probability change flag is set to OFF when it is executed (5 times).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment includes a gaming board unit 17 (see FIG. 139) similar to that of the fourth embodiment. As a result, in the open state where the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) can be driven to open and the game ball can be won (or easily) in the large winning opening 540, almost all the game balls flowing down the right area. Will win the big prize opening 540. If it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to win the big prize opening 540, the game ball flowing down the right area does not win the big prize opening 540 and is further downstream as a normal electric player. It flows down toward the object 460 and thus the second starting port 440B.

If it is in a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball in the large winning opening 540 and it is in an open state where it is possible (or easy) to win a game ball in the second starting port 440B, the right area Almost all of the game balls that flow down the game win the second starting port 440B. When both the large winning opening 540 and the second starting opening 440B are closed, the game ball flowing down the right side region wins the small hit winning opening 560 if the small hit winning opening 560 is in the open state. If all of the large winning opening 540, the second starting opening 440B, and the small hit winning opening 560 are closed, most (at least half or more) of the game balls flowing down the right area win the second starting opening 440A. It is configured to do.

Further, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 holds up to four start information of the normal symbol (random number value for normal hit determination and random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern). In addition, the main CPU 101 holds up to four start information (big hit determination random value and symbol random value) of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and of course, the second Even when a game ball wins in the starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, up to four start information (big hit determination random value or symbol random value) of the second special symbol is retained.

[Basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 250. Each table shown in FIGS. 245 to 250 is stored in the main ROM 102.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 245 is an example of a hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 245, when the first special lottery is performed, it is determined to be a "big hit" or a "loss". If the second special lottery is held, it will be decided as "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (= off)” or For each "1 (= on)"), the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "miss judgment" The relationship with "value data") is specified. Further, as the data used for the second special lottery executed based on the winning of the second starting port 440A or the second starting port 440B, the value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)". ) ”) For each, the range (width) of the random number for big hit judgment determined as“ big hit ”,“ small hit ”or“ loss ”, and the corresponding judgment value data (“big hit judgment value data”, “small hit” The relationship with "judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") is defined.

In the ninth embodiment, the total random number of the jackpot determination random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number, and the small hit probability is determined by the number of small hit determination value data for the total random number of the jackpot determination random number. The range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination may be changed as appropriate. The jackpot probability and the small hit probability are shown as selectivity in FIG. 245.

Although not shown in FIG. 245, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be different for each set value so that the high setting is higher than the low setting.

[Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 246 is an example of a special symbol determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 246, the special symbol determination table (first special symbol, second special symbol) is a symbol acquired when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 or the second starting ports 440A and 440B. This is a table referred to for determining the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol based on the random number value and the above-mentioned determination value data. For example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440A, the judgment value data is "big hit judgment value data", and the symbol random value is "77", the hit selection symbol command is "z2". The "design designation command" is determined to be "zA4".

[4-2-3. Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 247 is an example of a jackpot type determination table for the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 247, the jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type (number of rounds, probability variation flag) based on the above-mentioned hit time selection symbol command. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the probability variation flag is determined to be ON.

Regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is "z0" to "z2", if the jackpot game state is not continuously executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the probability changes after the jackpot game state ends. The flag is set to ON. However, after the first big hit game state is over, the game is played by right-handed, so the second special lottery is held, but in this second special lottery, when the big hit is won, there is a 10% probability of 10 rounds. It will be decided in 2 rounds with a 90% probability.

Further, regardless of whether the hit selection symbol command is any of "z0" to "z2", the general electric function does not accelerate (the number of electric support is 0). That is, the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment is a gaming machine in which the general electric function is not promoted, but is not limited thereto. The general electric function is a function that enables (or facilitates) a prize for a game ball to the second starting port 440B. For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (when the shutter 442 is driven, the first 2 The time during which the game ball can be opened (or easily) to win the starting port 440B), the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, and at least one of the ordinary hit probabilities. It is a control that changes so that the second starting port 440B can be won (or easily). Therefore, when the general electric function is promoted, the frequency with which the game ball can be awarded (or easily) to the second starting port 440B is increased.

[Variation pattern table of special symbols]
FIG. 248 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment. The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the game ball wins in the first start port 420, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol when the game ball wins in the second start ports 440A and 440B. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 248, when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the first starting port 420. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the game ball wins a prize. If the result of the first special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is the status of the probability change flag, the reach determination random number extracted when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, and the effect. Determined based on the random number for selection.

When the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and the game balls at the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted when the prize is won. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec. It is decided to be one of the productions D to F.

Even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF), and the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the random number for effect selection extracted at the time of. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the fluctuation time is determined. It is determined to be an ultra-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec.

When the result of the second special lottery is lost, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is the status of the probability change flag (whether it is ON or OFF) and when the game ball wins the second starting ports 440A and 440B. It is determined based on the reach determination random number (only when the probability variation flag is ON) and the effect selection random number extracted in. In particular, if the probability change flag is OFF, the fluctuation time is determined to be one of the long fluctuations A to C in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a long time such as about 600,000 msec, and if the probability change flag is ON, the probability change is in progress. Although it may be determined to be a reach effect, in most cases, it is determined to be an ultra-fast variation in which the variation display of the second special symbol is performed only for an extremely short period of time such as 1000 msec.

Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. Further, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU201).

Further, the column of "effect content" in FIG. 248 is shown for convenience for easy understanding, and an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 via the display control circuit 204. The content of the voice (for example, the fluctuating sound of the decorative symbol) output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 by the sub CPU 201 is shown.

Although not shown in FIG. 248, the random number range for effect selection may be changed for each set value so that the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be determined can be different.

The fluctuation time of the special symbol shown in FIG. 248 is an example, and as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, an arbitrary fluctuation time can be appropriately set according to the result of the special lottery. For example, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is lost and the probability variation flag is ON, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is lost and the probability variation flag is ON. And may be configured to have the same fluctuation time (for example, 4500 ms). Further, it may be configured so that the fluctuation time of the special symbol is the longest (for example, 299500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is OFF. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be set to be short (for example, 2000 ms). Further, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 4500 ms) when the result of the second special lottery is a 2R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON, and the result of the second special lottery is a 10R jackpot and the probability variation flag is ON. The fluctuation time of the special symbol in a certain case (for example, 29500 ms) is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (for example, 2000 ms) when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the probability variation flag is ON. You may. Further, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit and the probability variation flag is ON may be configured to be the shortest (for example, 500 ms).

[Random number judgment table per normal]
FIG. 249 is an example of a normal hit random number determination table of the pachinko gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 249, when the ordinary lottery is performed, it is determined to be "ordinary hit" or "loss". In the normal hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102, normal hit or loss is determined as data used for the normal lottery executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 49. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number for hit judgment and the corresponding judgment value data (“normal hit judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) is defined.

In the ninth embodiment, the total random number of the normal hit determination random number is 1024. That is, the above-mentioned normal hit determination random number is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 1023. This range is set as a fixed value. The normal hit probability is determined by the number of normal hit judgment value data with respect to the range of random numbers for normal hit judgment. The range (width) of the random number for normal hit determination may be changed as appropriate. The normal hit probability is shown as a selectivity in FIG. 249. That is, in this ninth embodiment, the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of approximately once every 43 times. It goes without saying that the selection rate shown in FIG. 249 is not limited to this, but it is preferable that the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" at a rate of about 30 to 50 times.

[Fluctuating pattern table of ordinary symbols]
FIG. 250 is an example of a variation pattern table of a normal symbol of a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment.

Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol using, for example, the fluctuation pattern table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 250.

As shown in FIG. 250, when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the fluctuation pattern (01H) with a fluctuation time of 500 msec.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing", the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol has a different variation time based on the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49. It is determined to be one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns (02H to 05H). In particular, when the result of the ordinary lottery is "missing" and the random number for determining the ordinary symbol variation pattern is a specific random number (98,99), the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed for an extremely long time, for example, 600,000 msec. Determined by the pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 250, the probability that the above specific pattern is determined is higher in the high setting than in the low setting by changing the random number range for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern for each set value. The fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined for each set value may be different.

[Flow of the game]
The flow of the subsequent game when the game is started in the normal game state in which the probability change flag is OFF will be described. In the normal game state, as shown in the variation pattern table of the special symbol (see FIG. 248), the variation pattern of the second special symbol is different from the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation time is extremely long. It is determined to be one of the fluctuations A to C. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, a general player plays the game by left-handed. When the game is left-handed, the game ball launched toward the game area 20 may win the first start port 420 instead of the second start ports 440A and 440B.

When the game ball wins the first start port 420 in the normal game state, the main CPU 101 performs the first special lottery. The probability that the result of the first special lottery will be a "big hit" in the normal game state is approximately 1/319 as shown in the hit random number determination table (see FIG. 245).

Even when the player hits the right side in the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened when the right-handed game ball passes through the passing gate 49 and a normal hit result is obtained. Then, there is a possibility that the game ball wins in the second starting port 440B, but only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball in the second starting port 440B. Further, even if the game ball wins the second starting port 440A without opening the ordinary electric accessory 460, only one prize ball is paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 440A. Further, when the game ball wins in the second starting openings 440A and 440B, the small hit winning opening 560 is opened because the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in any of the long variation A to C having an extremely long variation time. Very infrequently. On the other hand, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 420, more prize balls (for example, four) are paid out than when the game ball wins in the second starting ports 440A and B. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 is approximately 10,000 msec. Therefore, there is no actual benefit for the player to make a right-handed hit in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the normal game state, the probability that the result of the normal lottery will be a normal hit (the opening probability of the normal electric accessory 460) is high (see FIG. 249), and the normal symbol when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit Since the fluctuation time is relatively short (see FIG. 250), when the player strikes right, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is in a considerably open state. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 49 is likely to win the second starting port 440B, and even if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, it is distributed downstream from the second starting port 440B. It is unlikely that a game ball will flow into the small hit winning opening 560 provided. Further, even if the result of the normal lottery is lost in the normal game state and the normal electric accessory 460 is not opened, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. Is extremely long, so it is still difficult to get a ball from a small hit.

The large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be different large winning openings or may be the same large winning opening. Further, the arrangement position of the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit can be appropriately designed. For example, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 460, and the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit may be provided upstream of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Further, both the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Further, a large winning opening (combined large winning opening) that opens at the time of a big hit or a small hit may be provided downstream of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Further, in the present embodiment, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, a game ball that does not win the big winning opening that opens at the time of a big hit, and a second starting opening 440B are won. A second starting port 440A (a starting port for special drawing 2 in which an ordinary electric accessory is not provided) is provided so that a game ball or the like that did not exist can win a prize. The second starting port 440A is arranged downstream from the normal electric accessory 460 and downstream from the large winning opening that opens at the time of a small hit, or opens at the time of a small hit with the ordinary electric accessory 460. It is possible to assume the distance between the winning opening and the winning opening. Even when such a second starting port 440A is arranged, the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit and the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit may be used in combination. In addition, in a mode in which the large winning opening opened at the time of a big hit is provided downstream from the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit, the large winning opening opened at the time of a small hit and the opening at the time of a big hit are opened. It is possible to assume a case where the second starting port 440A is arranged between the large winning opening and the large winning opening, or a case where the second starting port 440A is arranged downstream from the large winning opening which is opened at the time of a big hit. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which a starting port for special drawing 2 (second starting port 440B) is provided as a starting port provided with the ordinary electric accessory is described, but the ordinary electric accessory is provided. As the starting port provided with the above, the starting port for FIG. 1 may be arranged. For example, separately from the first starting port 420A (starting port for special figure 1 in which the ordinary electric accessory is not provided), the first starting port 420B (starting for special figure 1 in which the ordinary electric accessory is provided) The mouth) may be arranged.

When the result of the first special lottery performed in the normal game state is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the hit selection symbol command with reference to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 246). After that, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 247), determines the jackpot type (number of rounds) based on the determined hit time selection symbol command, and controls the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 139, since the big winning opening 540 is arranged in the right side region, the game is played by right-handed in the big hit game state.

Next, the game state after the big hit game state based on the so-called first hit is completed will be described.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the normal electric function does not promote and the jackpot game state based on the so-called first hit is always set to ON, so that the jackpot based on the first hit is set to ON. After the gaming state is completed, the main CPU 101 controls the high accuracy and low base state. In this high-accuracy low-base state, when the result of the second special lottery is "small hit", the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be a super-fast fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is extremely short, for example, 1000 msec. (See FIG. 248), the game is played by hitting right.

In the high-accuracy low-base state after the big hit game state based on the first hit is completed, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is determined to be super-fast fluctuation with a high probability and the small hit is derived, so the small hit winning opening 560 Is repeatedly released at an extremely high frequency compared to the normal gaming state. However, when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal hit, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 500 msec. Further, since most of the right-handed game balls pass through the passing gate 49 and continuously hit the normal electric ball, the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 are in a substantially fully open state. Therefore, when the result of the normal lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is a normal hit, all or almost all of the right-handed game balls win the second starting opening 440B, so even if the small hit winning opening 560 is high. Even if it is opened frequently, the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is hindered. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball wins the second starting port 440B is one.

On the other hand, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be one of 10000 msec, 20000 msec, 30000 msec and 600,000 msec. Since the main CPU 101 stops the variable display of the normal symbol and opens the normal electric accessory 460 and thus the shutter 442 based on the derivation of the mode indicating the normal hit, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Or, even if the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, if the normal hit is not derived, the normal electric accessory 460 is not released. Therefore, while the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the winning of the small hit winning opening 560 is not hindered, and most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit winning opening 560. As described above, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small hit winning opening 560 is 10. Therefore, in a high-accuracy low-base state in which the result of the normal lottery can be determined to be a normal loss, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss, the ball output increase speed increases as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol increases.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the result of the normal lottery is usually lost and the fluctuation time is longer until the jackpot game state is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). It is a game-like nature such as whether it is possible to draw a long fluctuation pattern of a normal pattern.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, there is a pattern in which the result of the normal lottery is never lost during one high-accuracy low-base state, or the result of the normal lottery is only once. Even if it is a normal loss, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 10000 msec, or the result of the normal lottery is twice the normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec both times. , Various patterns can occur.

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the result of the ordinary lottery is a normal loss, a big hit game is provided with a simple configuration in which a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times of the normal symbols are provided. As a high-accuracy low-base state that is advantageous to players different from the state, it is possible to realize an advantageous gaming state (high-accuracy low-base state) with various ball output increase patterns. It becomes possible to provide, and it is possible to enhance the interest.

Further, when the result of the ordinary lottery in the high accuracy and low base state is the ordinary loss, it is preferable that the sub CPU 201 that has received the ordinary symbol variation pattern command executes the effect based on the variation time of the ordinary symbol. That is, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10,000 msec, when it is 20000 msec, and when it is 30,000 msec, the expected value of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained differs depending on the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Then, an effect that can grasp the degree of advantage (for example, the degree of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained) may be executed. For example, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10000 msec, an effect such as "per round!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 20000 msec, the effect such as "per 2 rounds!" Is executed. When the fluctuation time of the pattern is 30,000 msec, an effect such as "per 3 rounds!" Is executed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 600,000 msec, an effect such as "super hit" is executed. In this way, when an advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may exceed 1 is executed, an effect indicating the degree of advantage is executed. , It becomes possible to enhance the interest.

The effects executed by the sub CPU 201 include a display effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, a sound effect output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205, and an LED control circuit 206. At least one or more of the light emitting effect of the LED 25 executed via the above and the operation effect of the accessory group 1000 executed via the accessory control circuit 207 corresponds to the effect.

By the way, in the high accuracy and low base state, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, for example, before the fluctuation of the normal symbol is completed, for example, in the second special lottery. It is possible that the result will be a "big hit" and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. Furthermore, since the time controlled to the jackpot gaming state is approximately 180,000 to 300,000 msec, even after the jackpot gaming state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol with a fluctuation time of 600,000 msec continues without ending. Can occur. As described above, since the ordinary electric accessory 460 is not opened while the ordinary symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 does not hinder the winning of the small hit winning opening 560, and the game is hit right. Most of the balls will win the small hit winning opening 560. In this way, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even if the jackpot game state is controlled before the fluctuation display of the normal symbol ends, it is normal when the jackpot game state ends. If the fluctuation display of the symbol continues without stopping, even if the result of the normal lottery does not become "normal loss" in the game state after the jackpot game state ends, the advantageous game state immediately after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to enhance the game interest while being controlled to the jackpot game state. For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot gaming state of, for example, 300,000 msec is started after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, approximately 300,000 msec after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a small hit prize. You can win as many prizes as you like in the mouth 560, and you will be able to enhance your interest.

In the present embodiment, it is described that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is consumed even in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, but in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, It may be configured so that the fluctuation time of a normal symbol is not digested (the lapse of the fluctuation time is stopped). For example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec and the jackpot game state starts when 300,000 msec has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the jackpot game state ends and then reaches 300,000 msec. It is also possible to continue the fluctuation of the normal symbol (during the big hit game state, the remaining time of the normal symbol fluctuation does not decrease).

In addition, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment does not promote the normal power function, the pachinko game machine in which the normal power function is promoted and operates in the game state after the jackpot game state ends is also included in the present invention. The invention can be applied. In particular, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal loss and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be 600,000 msec, even though the normal electric function is promoted and operated in the game state after the jackpot game state ends. It is possible to cause that most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit winning opening 560.

<Transition flow of production mode>
FIG. 251 (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of the effect mode according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 251 (b) is a table summarizing the transition conditions of the effect mode according to the ninth embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the effect mode (sub-game state) as shown in FIG. 251 (a) is managed by the sub control circuit 200. As the production mode, a normal mode, a first hit mode, a probability variation mode, and a bonus mode are provided.

More specifically with reference to FIGS. 251 (a) and 251 (b), when the jackpot gaming state starts in the normal mode (see step S52150 in FIG. 157), the sub-control circuit 200 first hits from the normal mode. The effect mode is shifted to the mode (see transition condition (1)).

When the big hit game state ends in the first hit mode (see FIG. 158), the sub control circuit 200 shifts the effect mode from the first hit mode to the probability variation mode (see transition condition (2)). When the variation display (special symbol variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probability variation mode, the sub control circuit 200 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the normal mode (see transition condition (3)). ..

When the jackpot gaming state starts in the probabilistic mode, the sub-control circuit 200 shifts the effect mode from the probabilistic mode to the bonus mode (see the transition condition (4)). Further, in the probability variation mode, when the variation display of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol loss length variation) by the variation pattern “05H” (see FIG. 250) starts, the sub control circuit 200 shifts the effect mode from the probability variation mode to the bonus mode. (Refer to the transition condition (4)).

When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is completed in the bonus mode, the sub control circuit 200 shifts the effect mode from the bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (5)). Further, when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit is less than a predetermined number of times (5 times) (if the limiter has not been reached), the sub control circuit 200 , Shift the production mode from the bonus mode to the probabilistic mode (see transition condition (5)). In addition, if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being executed when the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, the bonus mode is maintained, and when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends in the bonus mode, the jackpot game state is in progress. If there is, you may keep the bonus mode.

When the jackpot game state ends in the bonus mode, if the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit is a predetermined number of times (5 times) (if the limiter is reached), the sub control circuit 200 is in the bonus mode. Shifts the production mode from to the normal mode (see transition condition (6)).

The normal mode is an effect mode controlled in the normal game state. In the normal mode, the effect stage is managed by the sub control circuit 200. As the production stage, a first production stage, a second production stage, and a third production stage are provided. Each production stage will be described in detail later.

Further, although not shown, a special effect mode may be provided as a normal mode (effect mode controlled in a normal game state). The special effect mode can be set to an effect mode in which the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol variation) is controlled a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the bonus mode ends.

<Lottery process for the first production stage notice>
FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the first production stage notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

In the lottery process for the first effect stage notice shown in FIG. 252, after the game ball wins the first start port 420 in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)), the special symbol change related to the start prize is generated. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) at the time of starting. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command (see step S40134 in FIG. 133).

In the first production stage notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a pseudo continuous stage production outline lottery process (step S9001). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the outline of the effect performed during the special symbol variation related to the first start opening winning based on the sub variation pattern by performing a lottery based on the random number value. Although the details will be described later, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize before the first production stage notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 252 is started. I have decided. The sub-variation pattern contains information about the pseudo-continuous production.

The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative symbol is stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped) between the time when the special symbol is changed and displayed based on one start memory and the time when the special symbol is finally confirmed and displayed. .. The state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped. In the present specification, the pseudo-ream effect may be simply referred to as "pseudo-ream", and the effect in which the pseudo-ream does not occur may be referred to as "no pseudo-ream". As the pseudo continuous effect in the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated once and a pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display is generated twice are provided. The pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs once is referred to as "pseudo 2", and the pseudo continuous effect in which the temporary stop display occurs twice is referred to as "pseudo 3".

In "pseudo 2", after the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the decoration is performed. The symbol is finally stopped and displayed. In "pseudo 3", the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol occurs once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the second pseudo variable display is performed), and then the second time. Temporary stop display is generated, and the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted from the temporary stop display state (the third pseudo variable display is performed). The stage from the start of the first temporary stop display to the occurrence of the second temporary stop display is called "pseudo 1", and the stage from the start of the second pseudo variable display to the occurrence of the second temporary stop display is "pseudo 1". It is called "2", and the stage after the start of the third pseudo fluctuation display may be called "pseudo 3". Further, in the production of "no pseudo", the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as "pseudo 1".

The sub-variation pattern includes information indicating whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred, information indicating the number of occurrences of the temporary stop display state of the decorative symbol (how far the pseudo-continuous effect progresses), and information regarding the pseudo-continuous effect. , Contains information that indicates the outline of the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-continuous production. For example, a sub-variation pattern that includes information that "pseudo 1" is a 20-second production, "pseudo 2" is a 16-second production, and "pseudo 3" develops after the reach is established and leads to the latter half of the super reach. When is determined, in the process of step S9001, the sub CPU 201 uses what kind of effect (while the decorative icon is fluctuating over 20 seconds) in "pseudo 1" to be described later as "bell". An overview of the effect, such as whether to stop the icon or what kind of effect to stop the "watermelon" icon, which will be described later, in "Pseudo 2" (while the decorative pattern is changing for 16 seconds). decide. As a result, the outline of the production at each stage and the final variation in the pseudo-ream is determined.

As the outline of the effect performed at each stage in the pseudo continuous effect, for example, a [24] 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, a [24] 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, and the like are provided. [24] In the 10-second reach (bonus) pattern, after 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the tempai has been reached, and then 24 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol 22 seconds. The icon is displayed over a time point, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" shown in FIG. 258). [24] In the 6-second effect (bonus) pattern, after 6 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol, the effect is successful and 22 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The icon is displayed for 24 seconds from the elapsed time, and then a notice is generated after the icon is stopped for 4 seconds (see, for example, the effect number "76" shown in FIG. 264).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect intensity lottery process (step S9002). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect intensity at each stage of the pseudo-ream based on the sub-variation pattern by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Specifically, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo-less" is determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect intensity for pseudo 1, and the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 2" is determined. If so, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and the effect intensity for pseudo 2 are determined, and if the sub-variation pattern corresponding to "pseudo 3" is determined, the effect intensity for pseudo 1 and pseudo are determined. The effect strength for 2 and the effect intensity for pseudo 3 are determined. The effect intensity is an index showing the degree of expectation of the effect performed at each stage of the pseudo-ream. Levels 1 to 7 are provided as the effect intensity, and the higher the level, the easier it is to perform an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. The effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2 is set to be equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 1, and the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 3 is equal to or higher than the effect intensity (level) for pseudo 2. Is set to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9003). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9004). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (step S9005). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. 253.

When it is determined in step S9004 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9005 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (step S9006). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 254.

When it is determined in step S9003 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9006 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (step S9007). The notice content lottery process for Pseudo 1 will be described later with reference to FIG. 255. After executing the process of step S9007, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process according to the 9th embodiment.

The pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 253 is a process performed in the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 252).

In the pseudo 3 variation main notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 3 variation main notice content based on the pseudo 3 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 3) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 252 (step S9011). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot notice effects that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3", a plurality of types of jackpot notice effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, fourth notice effect, etc.) ) Is provided. In addition, a plurality of production contents are provided as the contents of each jackpot notice production. For example, as the contents of the first notice effect, the first notice effect content A, the first notice effect content B, the first notice effect content C, the first notice effect content D, and the like are provided. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described in detail later.

In the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 201 determines one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from among a plurality of types of big hit notice effects as the pseudo 3 fluctuation main notice content, and also determines the big hit notice effect. As the content, one production content (for example, the first notice production content A) is determined. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In the pseudo 3 notice content lottery process (see step S9005 in FIG. 252), prior to performing the pseudo 3 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 253, a process of determining the outline of the reach effect is performed. May be good. In the reach effect, the decorative design is displayed in the reach mode (decorative design located on the left side (left decorative design), decorative design located on the right side (right decorative design), and decorative design located in the center (medium decorative design). ), Two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the remaining one decorative symbol is variablely displayed). In this case, in the process of step S9011, the sub CPU 201 may determine the effect content whose effect time is shorter than the time from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the establishment of the reach. For example, when there is an effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds and an effect content that takes 10 seconds or more to complete, from the start (restart) of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the reach is established. When the reach effect is determined so that the time is 10 seconds, the pseudo 3 variable main notice content may be configured so that the effect content that can be completed within 10 seconds can be determined. ..

<Pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

The pseudo 2 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 254 is a process performed in the pseudo 2 notice content lottery process (see step S9006 in FIG. 252).

In the pseudo 2 variation main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 sets the pseudo 2 variation main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 2 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 2) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 252. Select (step S9021). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the type of jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous effect and the content of the jackpot advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice production that can be performed at the "pseudo 2" stage, the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first notice effect, second notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9021, the sub CPU 201 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects (for example, the first notice effect) as the pseudo 2 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. One effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content B) is selected as the content of the advance notice effect. The pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 2 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9024).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9022). The specific jackpot notice production is a jackpot notice production in which the production performed at each stage in the pseudo-ren has a story, and a predetermined story is developed as the stages of the pseudo-ren progress. be. For example, the first notice effect, which is one of the specific jackpot notice effects, is an effect in which the characters have a conversation, and the lines of the characters emitted at each stage in the pseudo-ren are associated with each other. For example, the conversation content in "pseudo 3" is based on the conversation content in "pseudo 2", so that the conversation progresses as the stage of the pseudo-ream progresses. ing. The conversation content is set as an index showing the degree of expectation of a big hit. In the present embodiment, as a specific jackpot notice effect, a fifth notice effect is provided in addition to the first notice effect. On the other hand, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect do not correspond to the specific jackpot advance notice effect.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 201 determines the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see step S9011 in FIG. 253) determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (step S9023). In this process, for example, the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional) are both in the first notice effect. In some cases, the sub CPU 201 considers these types to be the same. On the other hand, one of the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) and the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional) is the first notice effect. If the other is the fifth notice effect, the sub CPU 201 considers that these types are different. If the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 252 is not executed), the sub CPU 201 is selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined that the type of is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 2 The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo-2 variable main notice content (step S9024).

In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Although not shown, in the conversation content replacement table, for each production content (conversation content) before replacement, the production content after replacement (already) with respect to the conversation content (pseudo 3 variable main notice content) that has already been determined. Conversational content that can be selected for the determined pseudo-3 variable main notice content) is specified. As a result, for example, in a situation where the first notice effect is determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), when the first notice effect is selected as the pseudo 2 change main notice content (provisional), the "pseudo 2" is performed. The conversation content should be comfortable with the conversation content in "Pseudo 3" (for example, the expectation of the conversation content in "Pseudo 2" should be higher than the expectation of the conversation content in "Pseudo 3". It is possible to make adjustments. In the process of step S9024, the sub CPU 201 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9022 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9023. When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional) selected in step S9021. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9025).

After executing the process of step S9024 or step S9025, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing a pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

The pseudo 1 variable main notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 255 is a process performed in the pseudo 1 notice content lottery process (see step S9007 in FIG. 252).

In the pseudo 1 variation main notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 sets the pseudo 1 variation main notice content (provisional) based on the pseudo 1 effect intensity (effect intensity for pseudo 1) determined in step S9002 of FIG. 252. Select (step S9031). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby performing a type of jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo-continuous effect or "pseudo-less" effect, and the jackpot advance notice. Determine the content of the production. In the present embodiment, as the jackpot advance notice production that can be performed at the "pseudo 1" stage, the same type of jackpot advance notice effect as the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the "pseudo 3" stage (first notice effect, second notice effect, The third notice production, the fourth notice production, etc.) are provided. Further, as the content of each jackpot notice effect, the same content as the content of the jackpot advance notice effect that can be performed at the stage of "pseudo 3" is provided.

In the process of step S9031, the sub CPU 201 selects one big hit notice effect (for example, the first notice effect) from a plurality of types of big hit notice effects (for example, the first notice effect) as the pseudo 1 fluctuation main notice content (provisional), and the big hit. One effect content (for example, the first advance notice effect content C) is selected as the content of the advance notice effect. The pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) selected here is tentative, and the pseudo 1 variable main notice content may be replaced with another effect content (see step S9034 and step S9036). ).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect (step S9032). As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect and the fifth notice effect are provided as specific jackpot notice effects.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is a specific jackpot notice effect, the sub CPU 201 determines the jackpot notice selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional). It is determined whether or not the type of the effect is the same as the type of the jackpot advance notice effect (see steps S9024 and S9025 in FIG. 254) determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (step S9033). In this process, when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur (when the process of step S9006 in FIG. 252 is not executed), the sub CPU 201 has the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional). , Pseudo 2 It is judged that it is not the same as the type of big hit notice effect determined as the main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 The change main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 change main notice content (step S9034). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content that has already been determined is the pseudo-2 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9034, the sub CPU 201 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined in step S9033 that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 2 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 201 determines. Whether or not the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (see step S9011 in FIG. 253). Is determined (step S9035). In this process, if the pseudo-continuous effect does not occur or if the pseudo-continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3" (when the process of step S9005 in FIG. 252 is not executed), the sub CPU 201 has the pseudo 1 variable main notice content. It is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as (tentative) is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) is the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content (provisional), the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 The variable main notice content (provisional) is replaced with another effect content, and the effect content after the replacement is determined as the formal pseudo 1 variable main notice content (step S9036). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect content after the replacement by referring to the main notice content replacement table. As described above, as the main notice content replacement table, for example, a conversation content replacement table is provided. Here, the conversation content already determined is the pseudo-3 variable main notice content. In the process of step S9036, the sub CPU 201 maintains only the content of the jackpot advance notice effect while maintaining the type of the jackpot advance notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main advance notice content (provisional) for the type of the jackpot advance notice effect. Replace.

When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9032 is not a specific jackpot notice effect, or selected as the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional) in step S9035. When it is determined that the type of the jackpot notice effect is not the same as the type of the jackpot notice effect determined as the pseudo 3 variable main notice content, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 variable main notice content (provisional 1 variable main notice content) selected in step S9031. ) Is determined as the formal pseudo-2 fluctuation main notice content (step S9037).

After executing the process of step S9034, step S9036, or step S9037, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Big hit notice production (only for the first production stage)>
As described with reference to FIGS. 252 to 255, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", respectively. Can occur in. For example, the first notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", the second notice effect is generated at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo". The third notice effect occurs at all stages of "1" to "pseudo 3", the fourth notice effect occurs at all stages of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 3" The first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3", or the second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1" and "pseudo 2" and the third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3". An effect is generated, a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1", a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", and a first notice effect is generated in "pseudo 1". A second notice effect is generated in "pseudo 2", and a third notice effect is generated in "pseudo 3".

As described above, the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in each stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3" is determined regardless of the type of the jackpot advance notice effect performed in the other stages. However, when the first notice effect is performed over a plurality of stages, the degree of expectation decreases as the pseudo-ream stage progresses so that the conversation content generated in these first notice effects does not feel strange. Predetermined control is being performed (see step S9024 in FIG. 254 and steps S9034 and S9036 in FIG. 255).

Here, in the present embodiment, an icon may be displayed as the stage in the pseudo-continuous production progresses. For example, when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2", when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3", or "pseudo 3". When the "cherry" icon is displayed in "3", it shifts to super reach (the one with a relatively high expectation of a big hit among the reach). Based on the above, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect will be described below.

<First notice production>
FIG. 256A is a diagram showing a flow of the first notice effect. FIG. 256B is a diagram showing a time chart of the first notice effect.

The first notice effect shown in FIGS. 256 (a) and 256 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)).

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "1", the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the conversation for the first stage from the time when the change of the decorative pattern starts (restarts) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. This is an effect of fading out after being displayed on the device 16. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "2", the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the conversation for the first stage from the time when the change of the decorative pattern starts (restarts) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. It is displayed on the device 16, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed. After that, it is a production that fades out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "3", the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the conversation for the first stage from the time when the change of the decorative pattern starts (restarts) to the time when 6.5 seconds have passed. It is displayed on the device 16, and the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as a conversation for the second stage from the time when 6.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 10 seconds have passed. From the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as a conversation for the third stage, and then fade-out is performed. It is a production.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "4", the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the conversation for the first stage from the time when the change of the decorative pattern starts (restarts) to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. After being displayed on the device 16, the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then, from the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 13.5 seconds have passed, for the second stage. This is an effect in which the dialogue of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as a conversation or a conversation for the third stage, resulting in a fade-out. The button image is an image imitating the effect button 62. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. When the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, a predetermined character is used as a conversation for the second stage or a conversation for the third stage for 3.5 seconds from the time when the effect button 62 is operated. May be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, if the effect button 62 is not operated during the button effective time, the dialogue of a predetermined character may not be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the production corresponding to the production number "5", the dialogue of the predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display as the conversation for the first stage from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. After being displayed on the device 16, the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from 10 seconds to 13 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is the effect that is displayed. The button effective time is set from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 10 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. When the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, the icon may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when the effect button 62 is operated. At this time, the icon may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, regardless of the timing when the effect button 62 is operated. Further, even if the effect button 62 is not operated during the button effective time, the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 12 seconds have passed. You may do so. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

A plurality of conversation contents (lines) are provided for each of the conversation for the first stage, the conversation for the second stage, and the conversation for the third stage, and one conversation content is selected. Each conversation content is associated with a predetermined character color, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the corresponding character color. The character color is associated with the jackpot expectation. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when a pseudo-ream does not occur, but the conversation content is displayed in purple, suggesting that a pseudo-ream occurs. .. In addition, when super reach (SP) occurs, the expectation of big hits is higher than when super reach does not occur, but when the conversation content is displayed in red, super reach occurs (than purple). Is also highly expected). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in gold suggests that the probability of being a big hit is very high (higher expectations than red). In addition, the fact that the conversation content is displayed in rainbow color suggests that it has been confirmed that it is a big hit (premier SP will occur) (higher expectations than gold). The conversation content is displayed in any of the default colors, purple, red, and gold for the first-stage conversation, and the default color, purple, and red for the second-stage conversation. , And, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of gold, and as the conversation for the third stage, the conversation content is displayed in any of the colors of red, gold, and rainbow.

As the icons that can be displayed in the first notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon ("premium" icon), and a second specific icon are provided. In the present embodiment, the "bell" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 1", and when the "bell" icon is displayed in "pseudo 1", it shifts to "pseudo 2". The "watermelon" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 2", and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in "pseudo 2", it shifts to "pseudo 3". The "cherry" icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it shifts to a predetermined super reach. The first specific icon is an icon that can be displayed only in "pseudo 3", and when the first specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the first specific super reach (premier SP). The second specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the second specific icon is displayed, it shifts to the second specific super reach.

<Second notice production>
FIG. 257 is a diagram showing a flow of the second notice effect. FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a time chart of the second notice effect. FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the relationship between the second notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The second notice effect shown in FIGS. 257 and 258 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)).

The effect corresponding to the effect number "11" is after the cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 1.5 seconds have passed to the time when 3 seconds have passed. , It is a production that becomes a fade-out. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "12", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotated counterclockwise, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). This is an effect in which the item is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 4.5 seconds have passed since the time when 7.5 seconds have passed. Items that can be displayed here include at least items that suggest that reach will occur, at least items that suggest that super reach will occur, items that at least suggest that specific super reach will occur, and items that are not good. Can be mentioned.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 6 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotated counterclockwise, and 6 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when seconds have passed to the time when 8 seconds have passed, and from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 19 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. , An image related to the execution of the mission is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the result of the mission is unsuccessful from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 6 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotated counterclockwise, and 6 from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image related to the start of a predetermined mission is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when seconds have passed to the time when 8 seconds have passed, and from the time when 8 seconds have passed to the time when 19 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. , The image related to the execution of the mission is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the result of the mission is successful from 19 seconds to 22 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. The image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 22 seconds have passed since the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 24 seconds have passed. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. In addition, during the execution of the mission, the reward (icon) given when the mission is successful is suggested, and the icon will be definitively displayed when the mission is successful.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "15", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have elapsed, and the decoration is performed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating clockwise, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). This is an effect in which reliability items are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as a result of a roulette effect in which a plurality of items are variably displayed from the time when 4.5 seconds have passed since the time when 10 seconds have passed. As reliability items, a plurality of items having different jackpot expectations (for example, a first item with a low jackpot expectation, a second item with a medium jackpot expectation, and a third item with a high jackpot expectation). Etc.) are provided. For example, in the case of loss, the first item is easily selected, and in the case of a big hit, the third item is easily selected. The display of one of these items suggests a jackpot expectation.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "16", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating clockwise, and the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts). From 4.5 seconds to 10 seconds, a plurality of items are displayed in a variable manner. As a result of the roulette effect, the icon suggestion type item is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the decorative pattern starts to change ( This is an effect in which the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 10 seconds have passed since the time when 12 seconds have passed since the restart). If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

Icon suggestion items include "bell" icon stop suggestion item, "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item, "cherry" icon stop suggestion item, first specific icon stop suggestion item, and second specific icon stop suggestion item. Has been done. When the "bell" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "bell" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "watermelon" icon is displayed immediately after. When the "cherry" icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the "cherry" icon is displayed immediately after. When the first specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the first specific icon is displayed immediately after. When the second specific icon stop suggestion item is displayed as a result of the roulette effect, the second specific icon is displayed immediately after.

The icons that can be displayed in the second notice effect include a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, a "cherry" icon, a first specific icon, a second specific icon, and a third specific icon. .. The "bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon are icons that can be displayed even in the first notice production, and these icons are as described above. Is. In the second notice effect, in addition to these icons, a third specific icon can be displayed. The third specific icon is an icon that can be displayed at any stage of "pseudo 1" to "pseudo 3", and when the third specific icon is displayed, the process shifts to the third specific super reach.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "17" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (resumes) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "18" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated clockwise from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "19", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed as if it is rotating upward, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). From 4.5 seconds to 10 seconds, an image related to the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure of the result of the battle effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time point to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "20", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed as if it is rotating upward, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). From 4.5 seconds to 10 seconds, an image related to the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. An image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 for 12 seconds from the time point, and then 14 seconds from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. This is an effect in which the above-mentioned reliability items are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 over a period of seconds.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "21", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed as if it is rotating upward, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). From 4.5 seconds to 10 seconds, an image related to the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and 10 seconds have passed from the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. From the time point to the time point 12 seconds have passed, an image corresponding to the success of the battle effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and 14 seconds have passed from the time point 12 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. The above-mentioned icon suggestion items are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 over a period of time, and then the icon suggestion items are supported from 14 seconds to 16 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. This is an effect in which the icon to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "22" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "23" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated upward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "24", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating downward, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). From 4.5 seconds to 9 seconds, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and 9 seconds to 15 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern. The button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 over (the time for accepting the repeated hits of the effect button 62), and the continuous hit effect is performed from the time when 15 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 18 seconds have passed. An image corresponding to the failure of the result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "25", a cut of a predetermined character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1.5 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and the decoration is displayed. From the time when 3 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the symbol to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner as if it is rotating downward, and the change of the decorative symbol is started (restart). From the time when 4.5 seconds have passed since the time when 9 seconds have passed since then, the image related to the start of the continuous striking effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when 9 seconds have passed since the start (restart) of the change of the decorative pattern and 15 seconds have passed. The button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 over (the time for accepting the repeated hits of the effect button 62), and the continuous hit effect is produced from the time when 15 seconds have passed from the time when the change of the decorative symbol has started (restarted) to the time when 18 seconds have passed. An image corresponding to the success of the result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from 18 seconds to 20 seconds after the start (restart) of the change of the decorative symbol. It is a production displayed in. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The notice after the icon is stopped will be described later. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous striking effect, a reward (icon) given when the continuous striking effect is successful is suggested, and the icon is definitively displayed when the continuous striking effect is successful.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "26" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "13", except that the effect is the same. The effect corresponding to the effect number "27" is displayed in such a manner that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is rotated downward from the time when the change of the decorative symbol starts (restarts) to the time when 3 seconds have passed to the time when 6 seconds have passed. The effect is the same as the effect corresponding to the effect number "14", except that the effect is the same.

FIG. 259 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “24” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "24" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have passed, and then 2 seconds. It stops over and the design is confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "24".

FIG. 259 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “25” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "25" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (b), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 20 seconds have elapsed. .. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "25".

FIG. 259 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “13”, “17”, “22”, and “26” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, and then 2 seconds. It stops over and the design is confirmed. As a result, from the player's point of view, when the second notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, each decorative symbol appears to be stopped. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "13", "17", "22", and "26".

FIG. 259 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “14”, “18”, “23”, and “27” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and maintain a state of high-speed fluctuation from the start (restart) of fluctuation to the time when 24 seconds have elapsed. .. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "14", "18", "23", and "27".

<Third notice production>
FIG. 260 is a diagram showing a flow of the third notice effect. FIG. 261 is a diagram showing a time chart of the third notice effect. FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the relationship between the third notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The third notice effect shown in FIGS. 260 and 261 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" can occur only in "pseudo 2". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" can occur only in "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the third notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

In "pseudo 2" and "pseudo 3", an enemy attack effect is performed. In the enemy attack effect, the three numerical symbols are repeatedly changed and stopped, and each time the continuous roll is stopped and displayed, the ally character attacks the enemy character. As continuous rolls (combination of three number symbols), "1 ・ 2 ・ 2", "2 ・ 3 ・ 3", "3 ・ 4 ・ 4", "4 ・ 5 ・ 5", "5.6"・ 6 ”,“ 6 ・ 7 ・ 7 ”, and“ 7 ・ 1 ・ 1 ”are provided. When a friendly character attacks an enemy character, the enemy character's health gauge decreases. The health gauge suggests the possibility of acquiring the icon. If the enemy character collapses in conjunction with whether or not the icon stops (icon stop fanning), situations such as icon acquisition and tempai (expansion to SP) will be given to the player. .. In addition, when the enemy character is defeated, a predetermined character may be displayed, and the color of the character suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "41" is an effect that fades out after the image related to the title completion fanning of the third notice effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "42", after the image related to the title completion fan of the third notice effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the image corresponding to the success of the title completion fan is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After that, the "bell" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the "bell" icon is displayed (the "bell" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

There are four timings at which the title completion can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 1 second has passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), the title is completed from the time when 5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative design. When the image related to the fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (timing 2), and when the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from 9 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3). ), And the case where the image related to the title completion fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 13 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 4). The title completion fanning occurs at one of these four timings.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "43", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the "watermelon" icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is an effect that is definitely displayed (stopped) on. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "44", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the image corresponding to the failure of the icon stop fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed. 16 is a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "45", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the "watermelon" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 16. .. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "46", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fan (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed. Such an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, an image corresponding to the failure to stop the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. be.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "47", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fan (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the "watermelon" icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the "watermelon" icon is displayed (the "watermelon" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "48", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fan (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the numerical symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a tempai manner, and the effect develops into the third specific super reach (first half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "49", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the "cherry" icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is an effect that is definitely displayed (stopped) on. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "50", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display, the image related to the icon stop fanning (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the "cherry" icon is definitively displayed (stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 16. .. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the effect corresponding to the effect number "51", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fan (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the “cherry” icon is deterministically displayed (stopped) on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the "cherry" icon is displayed (the "cherry" icon is acquired), then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "52", after the enemy attack effect is performed, the image related to the icon stop fanning (first time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the continuous result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After the stop display is displayed, the image related to the icon stop fan (second time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and after the continuous roll is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the numerical symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a tempai manner, and the effect develops into the third specific super reach (second half) through a predetermined connecting effect.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "49" to "52", the image related to the icon stop fan (first time), the icon stop fan (second time), or the icon stop fan (third time) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. When displayed on 16, the button image is also displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. As a result, the operation of the effect button 62 is accepted. When the button image is displayed, a predetermined button effective time (for example, 2 seconds in which the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed ... See FIG. 261) is set. If the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, the display following the icon stop fanning is displayed at the time when the effect button 62 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation). (Display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous roll, or display of tempai of number pattern) is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 62 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), the display following the icon stop fanning (icon display, continuation) Display of the outcome or tempai display of the number pattern) is performed. Such a button image is not displayed in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48". That is, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "43" to "48", even if the production button 62 is operated while the image related to the icon stop fanning is displayed, the operation is triggered (icon). Before the expiration of 2 seconds when the image related to the stop fan is displayed), the display following the icon stop fan (display of "cherry" icon, display of continuous roll, or tempai display of number pattern) is performed. There is no. In addition, when the enemy attack effect starts, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit by operating a predetermined movable accessory. The relationship between the operation mode of the movable accessory and the jackpot expectation is the same as the notice after the icon is stopped, which will be described later.

FIG. 262 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 12 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 262 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, after stopping for 1 second, it fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 1).

FIG. 262 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 16 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 262 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 2).

FIG. 262 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 3) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 262 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed again. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 3).

FIG. 262 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “42” (timing 4) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 262 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 2.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed again. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, and then fluctuates again at high speed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then fluctuates at high speed again. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "42" (timing 4).

The "stop" of the decorative symbol in FIG. 262 means a temporary stop display. As described above, the state of the temporary stop display is a state in which the decorative symbol is vibrating or the like, and it cannot be said that the display is completely stopped.

<4th notice production>
FIG. 263 is a diagram showing a flow of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 264 is a diagram showing a time chart of the fourth notice effect. FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the relationship between the fourth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The fourth notice effect shown in FIGS. 263 and 264 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)).

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "71" and "72" can occur only in "pseudo 1". The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "77" can occur in "pseudo 2" or "pseudo 3". As the icons that can be displayed in the fourth notice effect, a "bell" icon, a "watermelon" icon, and a "cherry" icon are provided. The icon displayed in "pseudo 1" is defined as the "bell" icon, and the icon displayed in "pseudo 2" is defined as the "watermelon" icon, and is displayed in "pseudo 3". The icon is defined as a "cherry" icon, and when the "cherry" icon is displayed in "pseudo 3", it develops into a predetermined super reach. In the fourth notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "71", the image related to whether or not the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol and the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) is displayed. After being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, an image corresponding to the failure of the four-symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "72", the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol is stopped as the left decorative symbol and the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan). After being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, an image corresponding to the success of the four-symptom tempai fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, an image that becomes normal reach in the dedicated background state after the success is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon. Is an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

4 There are two timings at which the symbol tempai can occur. Specifically, when the image related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 3.5 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and when 7 seconds have passed from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. 4 A case where the image related to the symbol tempai fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (timing 2) is provided. The four-symbol tempai tenpai occurs at one of these two timings.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "73" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped. The effect corresponding to the effect number "74" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then. , The icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "75" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai. The image related to the fanning (7 symbol tempai fanning) and the image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "76" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai. The image related to the fanning (7 symbol tempai fanning) and the image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. This is an effect in which the image related to the fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the icon is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the icon is displayed, then the notice shifts to the notice after the icon is stopped.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "77" is an image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides after the dedicated background state is set. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image relating to whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai (7 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An image related to whether or not the "4" symbol becomes a tempai (4 symbol tempai fan) and an image in which the "4" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and whether or not the "7" symbol becomes a tempai. The image related to the fanning (7 symbol tempai fanning) and the image in which the "7" symbol slides are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and which of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol becomes the tempai. The image related to the fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then any one of the "4" symbol and the "7" symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display 16 in a tempai manner, and after a predetermined connecting effect, the first symbol is displayed. 3 It is a production that develops into a specific super reach.

In "Pseudo 1", after the notice is given after the icon is stopped via the production corresponding to the production number "72", the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" is performed in "Pseudo 2". In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 2", the "4" symbol became a tempai as a result of the production in "pseudo 1" before the dedicated background state was set. The background behind is displayed. In addition, after a notice is given after the icon is stopped via any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "73" to "76" in "pseudo 2", the effect number "73" is used in "pseudo 3". When the production corresponding to "pseudo 3" is performed, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "73" to "77" in "pseudo 3", the production in "pseudo 2" is performed before the dedicated background state is set. As a result, the background after the "4" symbol becomes a tempai is displayed.

FIG. 265 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 20 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 265 (a), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 9 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then further. It fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. As a result, the player has determined the sub-variation pattern in which the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds after the fourth advance notice effect is completed and the background is returned to the normal background, which is the same as the default variation. Each decorative pattern will appear to fluctuate depending on the aspect. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 1). The default fluctuation will be described later.

FIG. 265 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “71” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 24 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 265 (b), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 2 seconds, stops for 1 second, and then shakes for 9 seconds. Further, it fluctuates at high speed for 0.5 seconds, decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 22 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have passed, shakes for 0.5 seconds, decelerates for 3 seconds, slides for 1 second, and stops for 1 second. After shaking for 2 seconds, it fluctuates at high speed for 1 second, decelerates for 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "71" (timing 2).

FIG. 265 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 1) and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1) may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is determined to be 20 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 265 (c), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and continues for 12 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 14 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 1).

FIG. 265 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “72” (timing 2) and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2) may occur when a sub-variation pattern is determined such that the variation time of the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1" is 24 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 265 (d), the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and lasts for 8.5 seconds. After shaking, it fluctuates at high speed for another 2 seconds. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at a high speed from the start of the fluctuation to the time when 18 seconds have elapsed, then operates at a speed of one frame advance every 0.5 seconds, and then fluctuates at a high speed for another 2 seconds. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 3 seconds, shakes for 7 seconds, and then fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds. Such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern is a variation pattern dedicated to the effect corresponding to the effect number "72" (timing 2).

<Notice after icon stop>
FIG. 266 is a diagram showing the effect content of the notice after the icon is stopped. 267 and 268 are diagrams showing the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the first mode. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is an effect performed after the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed, the predetermined movable accessory operates in the second mode.

The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is an effect performed after the "cherry" icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is an effect performed after the first specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", a third connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is an effect performed after the second specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed. The notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is an effect performed after the third specific icon is stopped (determinically displayed). In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connecting effect is performed. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect numbers "93" to "96", the predetermined movable accessory does not operate.

Note that "the icon has stopped (confirmedly displayed)" means that the icon is stopped and displayed separately from the decorative design. As described in detail in this embodiment, the icon serves as a mark indicating that the next stage in the pseudo-ream or super reach is developed. Therefore, at the time when the icon is stopped and displayed, the result of the jackpot determination has not yet been derived, and at that time, at least one of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol changes. It is in the displayed state. In addition, when one icon is stopped and displayed, it is assumed that the icon is temporarily displayed before the display is confirmed. Therefore, in the above, the expression "confirmedly displayed" is used. It is clarified that it is not such a provisional display. "Temporary display" means that the icon is displayed in a manner that suggests that there is a possibility that one icon will be confirmed and displayed (an effect that encourages the icon to be stopped and displayed). Is done).

FIG. 267 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “91” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second and the predetermined movement is performed for 1 second. The accessory operates in the first aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. The first connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (first background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

FIG. 267 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “92” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", after the first connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds, the illumination lights are turned on for 1 second, and the predetermined one is set for 2.5 seconds. The movable accessory operates in the second aspect, and then the movable accessory is stored. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "bell" icon in "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2" is displayed 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. Become. In addition, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated by displaying the "watermelon" icon in "pseudo 2", "pseudo 3" is 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ". That is, the operation of the predetermined movable accessory is performed at the next stage in the pseudo-ream.

A predetermined movable accessory is configured to be capable of being displaced between a first state, a second state and a third state. Specifically, when the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state, the predetermined movable accessory goes through the second state. That is, the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state by being displaced from the first state to the second state and then from the second state to the third state. It is possible. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the second state (one-step displacement). On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is displaced from the first state to the third state (two-step displacement). The first state is a state in which the predetermined movable accessory is stored in the predetermined position, and when the advance notice ends after the icon is stopped, the predetermined movable accessory returns to the first state.

Further, during the time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92", the predetermined movable accessory is operating in the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91". It's longer than the time I'm there. The time during which the predetermined movable accessory is operating corresponds to the jackpot expectation, and the longer the time, the higher the jackpot expectation. The jackpot expectation degree is the probability that the jackpot determination result related to the special symbol change this time is a jackpot, and is an index showing how much the jackpot can be expected when the effect occurs. As a result, when a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "92" is generated, a big hit is given to the player as compared with the case where the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" is generated. You can have a great sense of expectation for.

FIG. 268 (a) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “93” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93", the second connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The second connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (second background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in "pseudo 3", the predetermined super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped. ..

FIG. 268 (b) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “94” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94", the third connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The third connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (third background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "94" is generated by displaying the first specific icon, the first specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 268 (c) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “95” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95", the fourth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fourth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fourth background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "95" is generated by displaying the second specific icon, the second specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

FIG. 268 (d) shows the relationship between the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number “96” and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96", the fifth connecting effect is performed for 4 seconds. The fifth connecting effect is an effect in which a predetermined background image (fifth background image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. When a notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "96" is generated by displaying the third specific icon, the third specific super reach is reached 4 seconds after the start of the notice after the icon is stopped.

In the first connecting effect, the second connecting effect, the third connecting effect, the fourth connecting effect, and the fifth connecting effect, the background images (first background image to fifth background image) are different from each other. ) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the "bell" icon is displayed and when the "watermelon" icon is displayed, basically the same connecting effect (first connecting effect) is performed, but as the first connecting effect, the first A connecting effect (common) and a first connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the first connection effect (common) is performed in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon in the third notice effect, the first connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the first joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the first joint effect (common). In the third notice effect, a background image different from the usual one is displayed as the background image for the third notice effect, but the background image dedicated to the third notice effect is also adopted as the background image displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped. doing. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by the normal background image being displayed in the notice after the icon is stopped, which occurs following the third notice effect.

Similarly, as the second connecting effect, a second connecting effect (common) and a second connecting effect (dedicated) are provided. In the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the big hit notice effect other than the third notice effect, the second connection effect (common) is performed. On the other hand, in the notice after the icon is stopped, which is generated by displaying the "cherry" icon in the third notice effect, the second connection effect (dedicated) is performed. The background image displayed in the second joint effect (dedicated) is slightly different from the background image displayed in the second joint effect (common). As described above, in the third notice effect, the first specific icon, the second specific icon, and the third specific icon are not displayed, so that the third connection effect, the fourth connection effect, and the third As for the connecting effect of 5, there is no effect dedicated to the third notice effect.

In the present specification, the “connecting effect” refers to an effect in which a background image is displayed to fill the gap time between the end of one effect and the start of another effect. The first connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated to the case where the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed. Further, the second connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the "cherry" icon is displayed, and the third connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the first specific icon is displayed. The connecting effect is a dedicated connecting effect when the second specific icon is displayed, and the fifth connecting effect is a connecting effect dedicated when the third specific icon is displayed.

Further, the "bell" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), and the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the third specific super reach (second half). When the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the first connecting effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the first connecting effect ( It is slightly different from the background image displayed in (common). Similarly, when the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach, the second connection effect is performed as a notice after the icon is stopped, but the background image displayed at that time is the second. It is slightly different from the background image displayed in the joint effect (common). In the third specific super reach, a battle between a friendly character (first friendly character) and an enemy character is performed. If the "bell" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (first half), the process shifts to the third specific super reach (second half). If the "cherry" icon is displayed during the third specific super reach (second half), the process shifts to the predetermined super reach.

The third specific super reach is a super reach that can occur only in the first production stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). On the other hand, the predetermined super reach is a super reach that can occur in any of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage. When the "cherry" icon is displayed in the big hit notice effect, the process shifts to the same super reach (predetermined super reach) regardless of the type of the big hit notice effect. In a predetermined super reach, another ally character participates in one ally character. The first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage are each associated with a main ally character (a ally character with a high frequency of appearance), and the first production stage is basically the first. One ally character appears, the second ally character basically appears in the second production stage, and the third ally character basically appears in the third production stage. For example, the predetermined characters (friend characters) appearing in the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect described above are all the first ally characters. When a predetermined super reach occurs in the first production stage, the second ally character participates in the first ally character. In addition, when a predetermined super reach occurs in the second production stage, a third ally character participates in the second ally character, and when a predetermined super reach occurs in the third production stage, the third ally character participates in the war. The first ally character participates in the battle against the three ally characters.

As described above, when the icon is displayed in the jackpot notice effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol continue to fluctuate at high speed. In the present embodiment, when developing from one stage to the next stage in the pseudo-continuous production, the decorative symbol may or may not be temporarily stopped. If the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed when developing from one stage to the next in the pseudo-continuous production, it is a condition for developing to the next stage that the icon is displayed.

<Specific mode of jackpot notice production>
269 to 271 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the first notice effect. 272 to 274 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the second notice effect. FIGS. 275 to 278 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the third notice effect. 279 to 281 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the fourth notice effect. 282 and 283 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the notice after the icon is stopped. FIG. 284 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon.

FIG. 269 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect corresponding to the effect number “3” (see FIG. 256 (a)). In the effect shown in FIG. 269, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 269 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears (see FIG. 269 (b)). ), Then, as a conversation for the first stage, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“Is it hot?”) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 269 (c)), and then for the second stage. The dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“hot!”) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 269 (d)), and then the first ally character 9002 has a conversation for the third stage. The dialogue (“too hot!”) Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 16 (see FIG. 269 (e)), after which the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 269 (f)).

FIG. 270 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 256 (a)) corresponding to the effect number “5”. In the effect shown in FIG. 270, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 270 (a)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears. At the same time, the dialogue of the first ally character 9002 (“pressing the button”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 270 (b)) as the conversation for the first stage, and then the button image 9003 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Displayed on the device 16 (see FIG. 270 (c)), followed by a large "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 270 (d)), followed by pseudo-continuous step notification. The bell image 9021 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 270 (e)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 270 (f)). The “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “bell” icon is deterministically displayed. The bell image 9021 for pseudo-ream step notification is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 2", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 16 during "pseudo 2". ..

In FIG. 271, after the effect shown in FIG. 270 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “5” is performed in “pseudo 2” and “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 256 (a)). An example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is shown. In the production shown in FIG. 271, after shifting to "pseudo 2" as shown in FIG. 270 (f), after talking with the first ally character 9002 and displaying the button image 9003 (not shown), "watermelon". The icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 271 (a)), and the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and shifts to “pseudo 3” (FIG. 271). See (b)). The “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “watermelon” icon is deterministically displayed. The watermelon image 9022 for pseudo-continuous stage notification is an image corresponding to the pseudo-ream stage being "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 16 during "pseudo 3". ..

After that, after the conversation of the first ally character 9002 and the display of the button image 9003 (not shown), the "cherry" icon confirmation image 9013 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 271 (c)), and the pseudo-ream. The stage notification cherry image 9023 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 271 (d)), and shifts to a predetermined super reach (not shown). The “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is an image corresponding to the fact that the “cherry” icon is deterministically displayed. The pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023 is an image corresponding to the development of super reach in "pseudo 3", and is continuously displayed at a predetermined position on the liquid crystal display device 16 during super reach. After that, if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 271 (e)), and the big hit is obtained (see FIG. 271 (f)).

FIG. 272 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 257) corresponding to the effect number “13”. In the effect shown in FIG. 272, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 272 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is largely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. (See FIG. 272 (b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 272 (c)), and then the first ally character 9002 is rotated counterclockwise. Displayed (see FIGS. 272 (d)), followed by an image relating to the description and start of the mission displayed on the LCD display device 16 (see FIGS. 272 (e) and (f)), after which the mission result fails. Corresponding to the above, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 272 (g)).

273 and 274 show an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 257) corresponding to the effect number “16”. In the effects shown in FIGS. 273 and 274, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 273 (a)), and then the cut of the first ally character 9002 is the liquid crystal display device 16. (See FIG. 273 (b)), then the display of the first ally character 9002 is reduced (see FIG. 273 (c)), and then the first ally character 9002 appears to rotate clockwise. (See Fig. 273 (d)), followed by multiple items (here, "chance", "CHANGE", "chans", "gekiatsu", "super heat", "iron plate", A roulette effect is performed in which one item is selected from the "NEXT" and "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031) (see FIGS. 273 (e) to 274 (a)), followed by the roulette effect. As a result, the "bell" icon stop suggestion item 9031 is selected (see FIGS. 274 (b) and (c)), and subsequently the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed larger on the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. 274 (d)). ), Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 274 (e)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2”. (See FIG. 274 (f)).

FIG. 275 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 260) corresponding to the effect number “41”. In the effect shown in FIG. 275, first, the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 275 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. FIG. (See 275 (b)), subsequently, in response to the failure of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning image 9004 disappears, and the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (FIG. 275 (c)). ) And (d)).

FIG. 276 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 260) corresponding to the effect number “42”. In the effect shown in FIG. 276, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 276 (a)), and then the title completion fan image 9004 is displayed on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display device 16 (see FIG. 276 (b)), and subsequently, in response to the success of the title completion fanning, the title completion fanning success image 9005 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (FIG. FIG. 276 (c)), the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 276 (d)), and subsequently, the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 276 (e)). Subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 smaller than the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011 (see FIG. 276 (f)), and then shifts to “pseudo 2” (FIG. See 276 (g)).

In FIG. 277, after the effect shown in FIG. 276 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “43” (see FIG. 260) is performed in “pseudo 2”, which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An example of the image to be displayed is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 277, after shifting to “pseudo 2” as shown in FIG. 276 (g), an enemy character 9006 appears on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 277 (a)), and subsequently continues. Every time the result (for example, "2, 3, 3") is stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9006 (enemy attack effect) (FIGS. 277 (b) to (d)). )), Subsequently, the icon stop fanning in which the display of the fanning watermelon image 9007 on the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes larger and larger is performed (see FIGS. 277 (e) and (f)), and subsequently, the icon stop fanning is successful. In response to this, the enemy character 9006 collapses, and the "watermelon" icon confirmation image 9012 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 277 (g)), followed by the pseudo-continuous step notification watermelon image 9022. Is displayed smaller than the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 277 (h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 3".

In FIG. 278, when the effect shown in FIG. 277 is performed in “pseudo 2” and then the effect corresponding to the effect number “49” is performed in “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 260), the effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An example of the image to be displayed is shown. In the effect shown in FIG. 278, after shifting to "pseudo 3", an enemy character 9008 appears on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 278 (a)), followed by continuous rolls (for example, "3.4"). Every time 4 ”) is stopped and displayed, the first ally character 9002 attacks the enemy character 9008 (enemy attack effect) (see FIGS. 278 (b) to (d)), and then the liquid crystal display is displayed. The display of the cherry image 9009 for fanning in the device 16 becomes larger and larger. Icon stop fanning is performed (see FIGS. 278 (e) and (f)), and subsequently, in response to the successful icon stop fanning, the enemy character. As 9008 collapses, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 278 (g)), and subsequently, the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as "cherry". It is displayed smaller than the icon confirmed image 9013 (see FIG. 278 (h)), and then shifts to super reach.

When the "bell" icon or the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the third notice effect, the third notice effect may be performed without fail in the next pseudo-continuous stage. That is, when the "bell" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 1") corresponding to the effect numbers "41" and "42", the effect corresponds to the effect numbers "43" to "48" as "pseudo 2". You may make sure to execute any one of the effects. Further, when the "watermelon" icon is displayed in the effect ("pseudo 2") corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48", it corresponds to the effect numbers "49" to "52" as "pseudo 3". You may make sure that any one of the effects is executed.

FIG. 279 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the effect (see FIG. 263) corresponding to the effect number “72”. In the effect shown in FIG. 279, first, as the effect in "pseudo 1", the decorative symbol 9001 starts to fluctuate in the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 279 (a)), and then "4" as the left decorative symbol 9001L. The symbol is stopped (see FIGS. 279 (b) and (c)), and then, as the right decorative symbol 9001R, the display of the "4" symbol becomes larger and larger, and the four symbol tempai is fanned (see FIG. 279 (d)). ), Then, in response to the success of the 4 symbol tempai fanning, the background is displayed only when the 4 symbol tempai fanning is successful (background after the success of the 4 symbol tempai) (not shown), and the left. The "4" symbol is displayed in large size as the decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (see FIG. 279 (e)), followed by the reach of the intermediate decorative symbol 9001C in a horizontally rotated state (see FIG. 279 (f)). Subsequently, the "bell" icon confirmation image 9011 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 279 (g)), and subsequently, the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 to confirm the "bell" icon. It is displayed smaller than the image 9011 (see FIG. 279 (h)), and then shifts to "pseudo 2". It should be noted that the normal background is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after the success of the four symbol tempai and before the background (at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 9001).

In FIG. 280, after the effect shown in FIG. 279 is performed in “pseudo 1”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “73” is performed in “pseudo 2” (see FIG. 263), which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An example of the image to be displayed is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 280 (when shifting to "pseudo 2"), it is a specific background. The background may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbol tempai. Then, the subsequent production is performed in a dedicated background state. The background in the dedicated background state may be the same background as the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, or may be a background different from the background after the success of the four symbol tempai, and may be the same background as the specific background. It may be a background different from the above-mentioned specific background. In the dedicated background state, as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R, the four symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed is performed (see FIGS. 280 (a) and (b)), and the "4" symbol After the display disappears, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 280 (c)), and subsequently, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 as "watermelon". The icon is displayed smaller than the confirmed image 9012 (see FIG. 280 (d)), and then shifts to “pseudo 3”.

In FIG. 281, after the effect shown in FIG. 280 is performed in “pseudo 2”, the effect corresponding to the effect number “75” is performed in “pseudo 3” (see FIG. 263), which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. An example of the image to be displayed is shown. At the start of the effect shown in FIG. 281 (when shifting to "pseudo 3"), it is the above-mentioned specific background. Then, the subsequent production is performed in the above-mentioned dedicated background state. In the dedicated background state, the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R are subjected to 4 symbol tempai fanning in which the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed (see FIG. 281 (a)), followed by the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decoration. As the symbol 9001R, the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed. The 7 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 281 (b)), and then the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R, the "4" symbol fluctuates at high speed. 4 symbol tempai fanning is performed (see FIG. 281 (c)), followed by 7 symbol tempai fanning in which the "7" symbol fluctuates at high speed as the left decorative symbol 9001L and the right decorative symbol 9001R (Fig. 281 (d)). ), After the display of the "7" symbol disappears, the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed large on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 281 (e)), and subsequently, the cherry for pseudo continuous stage notification. The image 9023 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 to be smaller than the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 (see FIG. 281 (f)), and then shifts to super reach.

The mode of the 4 symbol tempai fanning to the 7 symbol tempai fanning is not particularly limited, and as described above, the "4" symbol to the "7" symbol may be changed at high speed, or "4". The symbol to "7" symbol may be vibrated.

282 (a) and 282 (b) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 266) corresponding to the effect number “91”. There is. 282 (c) and 282 (d) show an example of an image and a movable accessory 9041 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 266) corresponding to the effect number “92”. There is. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 282 (a) and 282 (b), after the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011 (or "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012) is displayed (see FIG. 282 (a)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the first aspect (see FIG. 282 (b)). In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIGS. 282 (c) and 282 (d), after the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012 (or "bell" icon confirmed image 9011) is displayed (see FIG. 282 (c)). , The movable accessory 9041 operates in the second aspect (see FIG. 282 (d)). The movable accessory 9041 is an accessory that imitates a predetermined character, and has a first state (stored state), a second state (a state in which the character has his arm lowered ... see FIG. 282 (b)), and a second state. It is configured so that it can be displaced from the state of 3 (the state in which the character raises his arm ... see FIG. 282 (d)).

FIG. 283 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 266) corresponding to the effect number “93”. In the notice after the icon is stopped shown in FIG. 283, the background image 9042 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013 is displayed (see FIG. 283 (a)) (FIG. 283 (b)). reference). After that, it develops into a predetermined super reach, and a battle between a friendly character (for example, the first friendly character 9002) and an enemy character 9043 is performed (see FIGS. 283 (c) to (e)), and the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. If it is a big hit, the decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the big hit (see FIG. 283 (f)).

As described above, a specific example of the jackpot notice effect has been described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 283. In this example, a case where a predetermined pattern is adopted as an icon, such as the “bell” icon confirmed image 9011, the “watermelon” icon confirmed image 9012, and the “cherry” icon confirmed image 9013, has been described. As the icon in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof. For example, in FIG. 284 (a), as an example of the first specific icon, the first specific icon confirmed image 9014 composed of a symbol including the numbers or characters "7" and "PREMIUM" is shown. Further, for example, the character image "NEXT" may be adopted as an icon, and when "NEXT" is displayed, it may be developed to the next stage in the pseudo-ren.

Further, for example, instead of the "bell" icon confirmed image 9011, the "watermelon" icon confirmed image 9012, and the "cherry" icon confirmed image 9013, the "X" icon as shown in FIGS. The confirmed image 9051, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052, and the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 may be adopted. As described above, as the icon in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately adopt a pattern in which a predetermined character (for example, an English word) is surrounded by a square. In this case, instead of the pseudo continuous stage notification bell image 9021, the pseudo continuous stage notification watermelon image 9022, and the pseudo continuous stage notification cherry image 9023, the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y Image 9062 and Z image 9063 for pseudo-continuous step notification may be adopted (see FIGS. 284 (e) and (f)). In FIG. 284 (e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061 and the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062 are displayed brightly, while the pseudo continuous stage notification Z image 9063 is displayed darkly. It is shown to be "pseudo 3". By displaying the “Z” icon confirmed image 9053 in this state, in FIG. 284 (e), the pseudo continuous stage notification X image 9061, the pseudo continuous stage notification Y image 9062, and the pseudo continuous stage notification Z. All images 9063 are displayed brightly. As a result, it will then develop into super reach.

Further, in the above, in the liquid crystal display device 16, the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed large (in the center of the liquid crystal display 16), and the decorative symbol 9001 is displayed small (in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display 16). explained. In the present embodiment, the larger decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, the smaller decorative symbol 9001 is not displayed, or both decorations are displayed while the icon is displayed and before and after the icon is displayed. The symbol 9001 may be configured not to be displayed. Further, when the icon is displayed, a symbol corresponding to the icon may be displayed as a part of the smaller decorative symbol 9001 (for example, the intermediate decorative symbol 9001C), or the part thereof. (For example, the left decorative icon 9001L and the right decorative icon 9001R may be stopped and displayed), or the left decorative icon 9001L, the intermediate decorative icon 9001C, and the right may be displayed in a variable manner. All the decorative symbols 9001R may be left in a variable display.

<Big hit notice production (common to each production stage)>
For the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect described above, the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). ), It can occur only in the first production stage. On the other hand, the sixth notice effect and the seventh notice effect described below can occur in any of the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage. Further, while the first notice effect, the second notice effect, the third notice effect, and the fourth notice effect are the effects that can occur during the pseudo continuous effect, the sixth notice effect to the seventh notice effect occur. If so, the pseudo-continuous production does not occur. In the following, after explaining the variation pattern of the decorative pattern in each effect stage, the sixth notice effect and the seventh notice effect will be described.

<Variable pattern of decorative pattern>
FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the first effect stage. FIG. 286 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the second production stage. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the third effect stage.

FIG. 285 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 2 seconds have passed, then decelerate over 1 second, stop for 1 second, and so on. The design is confirmed.

FIG. 285 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1 second, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 285 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 10.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 8.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 285 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the first effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 3.5 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 14.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 1.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 286 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 3 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 286 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 7 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 286 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 12 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 286 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the second effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 16 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds to 0.5. It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 287 (a) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 4 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 2.5 seconds elapse, and then decelerate over 0.5 seconds, 1 It stops for a second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 287 (b) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 8 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 4.5 seconds have passed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 6.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 5.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 1 second, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 287 (c) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 13 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 7.5 seconds elapse, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 9.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 287 (d) shows a case where the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds in the third effect stage. In this case, the left decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 11.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 4 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed. Become. The intermediate decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 15.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, and the symbol is confirmed. The right decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed from the start of fluctuation to the time when 13.5 seconds have elapsed, then decelerates over 0.5 seconds, stops for 1 second, shakes for 2 seconds, and then the symbol is confirmed.

The variation pattern of the decorative symbol shown in FIGS. 285 to 287 is a default variation pattern, and in the present embodiment, except for cases described separately (for example, FIG. 259, FIG. 262, FIG. 265, FIG. 290, etc.), The decorative pattern basically fluctuates according to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern.

<6th notice production>
FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a flow of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 289 is a diagram showing a time chart of the sixth notice effect. FIG. 290 is a diagram showing the relationship between the sixth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The sixth notice effect shown in FIGS. 288 and 289 occurs when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). It is a production to get. In the sixth notice production, the first special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the first special zone is rushed. The first special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fourth specific super reach.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "101" is an effect that fades out after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated. In the production corresponding to the production number "102", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) occurs, the second sign (effect for the second stage) occurs, and then fade out. It is a production. In the production corresponding to the production number "103", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign (effect for the second stage) is generated. It is a production in which a sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) occurs, and then it fades out.

In the production corresponding to the production number "104", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. Corresponding to the occurrence of a sign of bullets (effect for the third stage), subsequently, an image related to the first special zone rushing fan was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the failure of the first special zone rushing fan. This is an effect in which the image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the production corresponding to the production number "105", after the first sign (effect for the first stage) is generated, the second sign (effect for the second stage) is generated, and further, the third sign is generated. A sign of a bullet (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and an image corresponding to the success of the first special zone rushing. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the first special zone is entered. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the production corresponding to the production number "106", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then. This is an effect in which an image corresponding to the failure to enter the first special zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the production corresponding to the production number "107", the third sign (effect for the third stage) is generated, and then the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. 1 The image corresponding to the success of entering the special zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the image related to the title of the first special zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then the effect of entering the first special zone. Is. When the first special zone is completed, the process shifts to the fourth specific super reach.

In the first special zone, switching is performed between the screen corresponding to the first character and the screen corresponding to the second character, and the decorative symbol is tempered on either screen. After that, the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and develops into the fourth specific super reach, and in the fourth specific super reach, an effect corresponding to the character corresponding to the screen on which the tempai is generated is performed. In addition, in the first sign, the second sign, or the third sign, instead of (or in addition to) generating a predetermined effect, an image related to the first special zone rushing is displayed. It may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this case, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "106" and "107", the first special zone rushing fanning suddenly occurs without going through the sign. When the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball has won the first start opening 420 and before the special symbol change related to the start prize starts (when the sixth notice effect occurs via the look-ahead effect). , In the sixth notice effect that occurs when the special symbol changes, the sign may always be passed. On the other hand, when the sixth notice effect occurs without going through the look-ahead effect, the sign may or may not be passed in the sixth notice effect that occurs when the special symbol changes.

FIG. 290 (a) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “104” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "104" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 290 (a), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 15 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 290 (b) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “105” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 290 (b), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at a high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

FIG. 290 (c) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “106” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. The effect corresponding to the effect number "106" may occur when a sub-variation pattern such that the variation time of the decorative symbol is 17 seconds is determined. In the example shown in FIG. 290 (c), the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each show the same behavior, fluctuate at high speed from the start of fluctuation until 15 seconds have passed, and then decelerate over 1 second. Then, it stops for 1 second and the symbol is confirmed.

FIG. 290 (d) shows the relationship between the effect corresponding to the effect number “107” and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 290 (d), the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol each exhibit the same behavior, and fluctuate at a high speed from the start of fluctuation to at least entering the first special zone.

Here, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106", the image related to the first special zone entry fanning is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the time when 11 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the default fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 285 (d) and 287 (d)) in the first effect stage and the third effect stage, the left decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped at the same timing. When the decorative symbol is stopped, a predetermined stop sound (for example, a sound that is determined to be lost) is output from the speaker 24, but if the first special zone rushing fan is performed. In addition, when the stop sound is generated, the player may be aware of the result of the fanning during the first special zone entry fanning. In view of this point, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" to "106" is performed, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (first special zone rushing fan) as shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c) The decorative design is changed by a variable pattern) in which the decorative design stops after the end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the success or failure of the first special zone rushing fan from being spoiled through the stop sound of the decorative pattern. If the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, the stop sound of the decorative symbol can be a sound peculiar to the loss (a sound that can occur only in the case of a loss).

Such fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c) are adopted when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage, while the effects are adopted. When the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the default variation patterns (FIG. 286 (d)) are used instead of the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c). (See), the decorative design may be changed. In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 286 (d), the timing at which the decorative symbol is decelerated and stopped is delayed. Therefore, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers “104” and “106” is performed, the variation pattern is used. Even if the decorative pattern is changed, the above-mentioned concerns about spoilers do not occur. However, even when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed in the second effect stage, the decorative symbols may be changed according to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c).

It should be noted that the variation pattern depends on whether the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the first production stage and the production corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" is performed on the third production stage. May be different. For example, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" are performed on the third effect stage, each decorative symbol is changed at a higher speed than the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c). The time may be increased by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) and the deceleration time may be shortened by a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Further, in one of the first production stage, the second production stage, and the third production stage (for example, the second production stage), the sixth notice production is not performed during the pre-reading production. It may be configured as. In this case, in the production stages other than the one production stage (for example, the first production stage and the third production stage), the sixth notice production may be performed even during the execution of the look-ahead production. ..

<7th notice production>
FIG. 291 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the seventh notice effect. FIG. 291 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the seventh notice effect.

The seventh notice effect shown in FIG. 291 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). be. In the 7th notice production, the second special zone rushing is performed, and if the rushing is successful, the second special zone is rushed. The second special zone is a special zone in the pre-stage that develops into the fifth specific super reach.

Specifically, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "121", after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the liquid crystal display device 16 was turned off, the effect is restored from the freeze and the second special zone is formed. The image related to the rush fan is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation of the effect button 62 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the failure of the second special zone rush fan. Is an effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. After that, the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is related to the second special zone rushing after returning from the freeze after the screen becomes dark (the screen freezes) as if the liquid crystal display device 16 was turned off. The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation of the effect button 62 is accepted, and then the image corresponding to the success of entering the second special zone (second special). This is an effect in which the zone rushing success image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the player enters the second special zone, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays a state in which the predetermined enemy character is defeated after the predetermined ally character appears. After that, it develops into the 5th specific super reach, and in the 5th specific super reach, a production corresponding to the final battle with the enemy character is performed. The fifth specific super reach is the reach with the highest expectation of a big hit (except for the first specific super reach where the big hit is confirmed).

Two timings are provided as the timings at which the screen freeze may occur. Specifically, there are a case where the screen freezes 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and a case where the screen freezes 12 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). Has been done. The screen freeze occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects following the freeze occur with a delay of 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

Further, while the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. If the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 62 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the second special zone is entered. A production corresponding to failure or success is performed. On the other hand, if the effect button 62 is not operated during the button valid time, at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends), the second special zone rushing is unsuccessful or successful. The corresponding production is performed.

Although not shown, as a production corresponding to the success of the second special zone rushing (successful production of the second special zone rushing), the second special zone rushing success image (for example, the title of the second special zone) is related. In addition to the effect of displaying an image and an image related to a predetermined icon), an effect of emitting a predetermined decorative lamp (logo lamp) is performed. The logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the logo cover. The logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 16) of the game board unit 17 and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin). In addition, the logo cover is decorated in the shape of characters (for example, characters displayed as icons) indicating a logo or the like according to the model. A full-color LED is adopted for the logo lamp, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green, and the effect color of the logo cover can be changed.

It should be noted that the successful effect of entering the second special zone (for example, the light emission of the logo lamp) is performed for a predetermined time (3 seconds) regardless of whether or not the effect button 62 is operated or the operation timing. Even if the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, the time is not extended. Since the timing of entering the second special zone (the timing at which a predetermined ally character appears) is fixed (if the above timing is 1, 30 seconds have passed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and if the above timing is 2, the decorative symbol is displayed. If the effect button 62 is operated during the button valid time (36 seconds after the start of fluctuation), there is a gap between the end time of the successful production of entering the second special zone and the timing of entering the second special zone. However, the gap time is compensated for by displaying the predetermined icon in a swaying state.

<Stage change>
FIG. 292 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a stage change notice effect. FIG. 292 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the stage change notice effect. FIG. 292 (c) is a diagram showing a state of the character lamp before and after the stage change occurs.

In the present embodiment, basically, in each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), the special symbol variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (20 times). Stay. After shifting to one production stage, if the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (20 times), the production stage may shift to another production stage. On the other hand, when the 7th notice production occurs, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage has not reached the predetermined number (20 times), the production stage must be performed. A migration occurs.

In the present specification, such a transition of the production stage is also referred to as a “stage change”. In addition, although the production stage after the transition is randomly determined by lottery, the same production stage as the production stage before the transition may be determined as the production stage after the transition. The transition of the production stage (stage change) is a concept that includes such cases.

When the stage change is performed, the stage change notice effect shown in FIG. 292 is performed. The effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (stage change notice effect) is an image showing the name of the effect stage after the transition after the background transition image corresponding to the effect stage after the transition is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the display content of the counter image on the liquid crystal display device 16 is reset (recovered).

As the background transition image, a first background transition image, a second background transition image, and a third background transition image are provided. The first background transition image is an image suggesting the first effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the first effect stage, the first background transition image is displayed. The second background transition image is an image suggesting a second effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the second effect stage, the second background transition image is displayed. The third background transition image is an image suggesting a third effect stage, and when the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the third background transition image is displayed.

The counter image is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs. When a stage change occurs, "0/20" is displayed as a counter image after reset. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator numbers indicate the number of special symbol changes that have taken place after the stage change has occurred. While staying at each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage), the counter image is basically always (a part of the production) at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is displayed (except while it is being performed). As the number of special symbol changes performed after the stage change occurs, the counter image changes to "1/20", "2/20" ... "19/20".

Here, the counter image (0/20) when the stage change occurs is displayed in various colors (white, blue, green, purple, red, rainbow, or gold). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6") in which various data related to the pachinko game are different from each other are provided. White, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow colors correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the color of the counter image (0/20) displayed when a stage change occurs. Is the color corresponding to the set value. As a result, the counter image (0/20) suggests the set value.

The method of suggesting the set value by the counter image is not limited to this example, and for example, a counter image including the numbers (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the set value may be displayed. For example, when the set value is "6", the counter image "0/66" may be displayed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbol changes related to the stage change occurrence condition is a specified value (20 times), but the number of special symbol changes may be determined by lottery. good. On top of that, for example, when the set value is "6", it is possible to configure it so that "66" can be relatively easily determined as the number of times the special symbol changes.

Further, when the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change is displayed in gold, it is confirmed that the player has entered the second special zone. In this regard, as the seventh notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" and an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" are provided. Regardless of which of these effects occurs, a stage change will always occur. On top of that, the counter image (0/20) at the time of the stage change can be displayed in gold only when the stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "122". It is configured as follows.

Two timings are provided as the start timing of the stage change notice production. Specifically, when the background transition image is displayed from the beginning of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and when the background transition image is displayed 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). And are provided. The stage change notice effect occurs at one of these two timings. At timing 2, all the effects are delayed by 6 seconds as compared with timing 1.

When a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect, the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed is the timing at which the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed. It corresponds to. That is, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 1) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 1), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 1) is performed. On the other hand, when a stage change occurs based on the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" (timing 2) or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (timing 2), the effect number "131" The production corresponding to (timing 2) is performed.

On the other hand, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 1) is basically performed. Will be done. In this case, the stage change notice effect will be performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative pattern. Exceptionally, when the 7th notice effect occurs in the special symbol change (game that reaches the specified number) in which the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes reaching the predetermined number (20 times). Is to produce an effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (timing 2). That is, the following conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change, and if both conditions are satisfied in the same special symbol change, 6 seconds from the start of the change of the decorative symbol. From the time of lapse, stage change notice production will be performed

Condition (I): The number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times) Condition (II): The seventh notice production occurs (effect number " The production corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected)

The fact that the number of special symbol changes has reached the predetermined number (20 times) can be grasped by the player through the counter image, but when the number of special symbol changes reaches the predetermined number (20 times), It is highly probable that the player is aware that a stage change will occur. In this respect, by configuring as described above, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the stage change notice effect is not performed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol in the game in which the specified number is reached. In this case, the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" is performed at the timing 2. As a result, the player can be expected to generate the 7th notice effect (entering the 2nd special zone) after the stage change notice effect is performed.

Further, as described above, the first effect stage, the second effect stage, and the third effect stage are associated with the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character, respectively. .. Although not shown, the game board unit 17 is provided with a first character lamp, a second character lamp, and a third character lamp. The first character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first character decoration unit, and the second character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second character decoration unit. The third character lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third character decoration portion.

The first character decoration unit is provided at a first predetermined location (for example, the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16) of the game board unit 17, and the second character decoration portion is a second predetermined location (for example, a liquid crystal display) of the game board unit 17. The third character decoration unit is provided on the upper left side of the display device 16), and is provided on the third predetermined position (for example, the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 16) of the game board unit 17. The first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are decorated in the shape of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character, respectively. .. Further, the first character decoration part, the second character decoration part, and the third character decoration part are each formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). Full-color LEDs are adopted for the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp, respectively, and it is possible to emit a plurality of kinds of colors including red, blue, and green. As a result, the effect colors of the first character decoration section, the second character decoration section, and the third character decoration section can be changed.

In the present embodiment, the first character lamp is basically on and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are off while staying in the first production stage. While staying in the second production stage, the second character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the third character lamp are off. While staying in the third production stage, the third character lamp is basically on, and the first character lamp and the second character lamp are off. Although not shown, in the stage change notice production, any one of the first character lamp, the second character lamp, and the third character lamp (the character lamp corresponding to the production stage after the transition) blinks.

Specifically, when the production stage after the transition is the first production stage, the first character lamp blinks, and when the production stage after the transition is the second production stage, the second character lamp blinks. However, if the effect stage after the transition is the third effect stage, the third character lamp blinks. Such blinking of the character lamp is performed for 1.5 seconds, and the blinking period coincides with the display period of the background transition image. That is, while the first background transition image is displayed, the first character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the second background transition image is displayed, the second character lamp is lit. It blinks for 1.5 seconds, and while the third background transition image is displayed, the third character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds.

FIG. 292 (c) shows the state of each character lamp before and after the transition from the first production stage to the second production stage. In the previous game of the game of reaching the specified number, the first character lamp is lit, and the second character lamp and the third character lamp are turned off. When the game for reaching the specified number starts, the first character lamp switches from the lit state to the extinguished state, the second character lamp switches from the extinguished state to the blinking state, and the third character lamp remains in the extinguished state. After that, the second character lamp blinks for 1.5 seconds and then turns on. After that, the lighting state of the second character lamp continues until the next stage change notice effect occurs, and the lighting state of the first character lamp and the third character lamp continues.

After the stage change notice production is performed, the background shifts to the background corresponding to the production stage after the transition (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage). As described above, after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the normal background is restored. Further, after the production in the fifth specific super reach, which is transferred via the production corresponding to the production number "122", is completed, the normal background is restored. The normal background is a background corresponding to the post-transition production stage (rather than the pre-transition production stage).

In the above, it has been described that the above conditions (I) and (II) are provided as the conditions for generating the stage change. Here, regarding the above condition (I), the number of times the special symbol changes is displayed when the variation is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420). However, it is not counted when the variation display on the second special symbol display unit 74 (variation display corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440) is performed. Therefore, in the normal game state, even if the player plays the game by right-handed and the variation display on the second special symbol display unit 74 is repeatedly performed, the count is not performed, and in this case, the stage change. Is never done. The count is performed when the special symbol change starts.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the stage change may be performed other than the case where the above condition (I) or (II) is satisfied. Specifically, as an effect performed when a special symbol change is performed in a situation where the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage has not reached a predetermined number (20 times). , When a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) occurs, a lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is performed. Then, on condition that the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won, the transition of the production stage occurs.

Further, even if the number of special symbol changes performed after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times), the stage change may not be performed. Specifically, when a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the fifth specific super reach) occurs in a game that reaches the specified number, a lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is performed. When the specified number is reached If the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage is not won, the production stage is transferred in the game in which the specified number is reached. On the other hand, if the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached is won, the production stage does not shift in the game that reaches the specified number, and the production stage shifts in the next special symbol change of the game that reaches the specified number. Occurs.

<Stage change section hold ball>
293 to 295 are diagrams for explaining the stage change section holding ball.

Although the details will be described later, when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, the sub control circuit 200 selects the sub fluctuation pattern by lottery. Here, the result of the lottery (sub-variation pattern selection lottery) may differ depending on the production stage staying during the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize, but the first start opening prize occurs. If a stage change occurs between the time when the special symbol change related to the first start opening prize is performed, the special symbol change (stage change game) in which the stage change is performed starts in the production stage after the transition. Not decided until. Therefore, for such a first start opening prize, the sub-variation pattern cannot be selected at least until the stage change game is started. Then, the lottery related to the look-ahead effect is performed based on the sub-variation pattern, but if the sub-variation pattern is not selected, the lottery related to the look-ahead effect cannot be performed.

In view of this point, in the present embodiment, the concept of "stage change section reserved ball" is provided. The stage change section hold ball is a hold ball corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game, and a special symbol change related to the stage change game after the first start opening prize related to the stage change game occurs. It refers to the reserved ball corresponding to the first starting opening prize that occurred before the start. It is said that the look-ahead effect is not performed for such a stage change section reserved ball. Of the stage change section reserved balls, the reserved balls corresponding to the first start opening prize related to the stage change game are also particularly referred to as "stage change section reserved balls".

FIG. 293 (a) shows a state in which the 16th special symbol change is performed after the transition to the current production stage and a state in which the reserved ball does not exist. FIG. 293 (b) shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 420 during the 16th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 293 (a). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the 17th to 20th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. FIG. 293 (c) shows a state in which the 17th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 293 (b). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the 18th to 20th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 293 (d) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 during the 17th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 293 (c). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball (the stage change section reserved ball), and the pre-reading effect cannot be performed on the fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 293 (e) shows a state in which the 18th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage after the state shown in FIG. 293 (d). In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls becomes the 19th to 20th special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage, and corresponds to the third reserved ball. The special symbol change to be performed is the first special symbol change after the transition to the next production stage. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 294 (a) shows a state in which one game ball is won in the first starting port 420 during the 18th special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 293 (e). ing. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball becomes the second special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. The fourth reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the fourth reserved ball.

In FIG. 294 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 294 (a), the 18th to 20th special symbol changes are performed, and during that time, two game balls are won in the first starting port 420, and then two game balls are won. It shows the state in which the first special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs and the stage shifts to the next production stage. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is the second to fourth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 3rd reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 3rd reserved balls cannot be pre-read. There is no fourth reserved ball.

FIG. 294 (c) shows a state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 during the first special symbol change after the state shown in FIG. 294 (b). ing. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the fourth reserved ball is the fifth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The fourth reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. Therefore, the fourth reserved ball is not a stage change section reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball can be pre-read.

In FIG. 294 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 294 (c), the first and second special symbol changes are performed after the stage change occurs, and during that time, two games are played in the first starting port 420. It shows the state in which the ball wins a prize and then the third special symbol change is performed after the stage change occurs. In this state, the special symbol change corresponding to the first reserved ball is the fourth special symbol change after the stage change occurs. The first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the first reserved ball. On the other hand, the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to fourth reserved balls is the fifth to seventh special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The second to fourth reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the second to fourth reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the second to fourth reserved balls can be pre-read.

In FIG. 295 (a), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , A state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 420 is shown. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the 21st to 24th special symbol variation after the transition to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st to 24th special symbol changes are performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the first to fourth special symbol variation after the transition to the next production stage. As a result, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 4th reserved balls cannot be pre-read.

In FIG. 295 (b), after the 20th special symbol change is started after the transition to the current production stage in the absence of the reserved ball, while the 20th special symbol change is being performed. , A state in which one game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 is shown. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. In the 21st special symbol change, a stage change occurs, and the 21st special symbol change is performed in the production stage after the transition. That is, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball becomes the first special symbol variation after shifting to the next production stage. As a result, the first reserved ball is a stage change section reserved ball, and the look-ahead effect cannot be performed on the first reserved ball. There are no second to fourth reserved balls.

In FIG. 295 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 295 (b), the 20th special symbol change is performed, and then a stage change occurs, and the first special after shifting to the next production stage. It shows a state in which four game balls have won a prize in the first starting port 420 while the symbol change is being performed. In this state, the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to fourth reserved balls is the second to fifth special symbol variation after the stage change occurs. The 1st to 4th reserved balls are reserved corresponding to the first start opening prize that occurs after the special symbol change corresponding to the reserved ball in the stage change section (special symbol change related to the stage change game) has started. It is a sphere. Therefore, the 1st to 4th reserved balls are not stage change section reserved balls, and the 1st to 4th reserved balls can be pre-read.

As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 295 (a), the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is 4, whereas the examples shown in FIGS. 295 (b) and 295 (c). Then, the number of times of special symbol change in which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is one. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations for which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed is not fixed uniformly, but the timing of the stage change occurrence and the timing of winning the game ball to the first starting port 420. The number of times is changed according to the context of.

<Processing at the time of winning the first starting port>
FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the first starting port winning process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing the stage change section determination process according to the ninth embodiment. 298 and 299 are diagrams for explaining the look-ahead effect.

The first start port winning process shown in FIG. 296 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) when the game ball wins the first start port 420. Is. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 420 by receiving the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers in the first starting port winning (see step S744 in FIG. 110). ..

In the first start opening winning process, the sub CPU 201 first executes the stage change section determination process (step S9001). Hereinafter, the stage change section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 297.

In the stage change section determination process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball in the stage change section exists in the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times held (step S9151). As described with reference to FIGS. 293 to 295, the stage change section said the reserved ball is a reserved ball corresponding to the first start opening prize in the stage change game (special symbol change in which the stage change is performed). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the information indicating the stage change section holding ball (stage change section holding ball information) is stored in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203.

Specifically, the work RAM 203 includes a first sub-holding area (0), a first sub-holding area (1), a first sub-holding area (2), a first sub-holding area (3), and a first sub. A holding area (4) is provided. Information corresponding to the current special symbol change (the change) is stored in the first sub-holding area (0), and is held in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). Information corresponding to the four special symbol fluctuations is stored. That is, the first sub-holding area (0) to the first sub-holding area (4) are the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, respectively. It corresponds to. The hold number increase command for the first start opening prize (see step S744 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. .. By receiving the command for increasing the number of reserved numbers of the first start opening prize, the sub CPU 201 stores the information corresponding to the information in the first sub hold area corresponding to the current first start opening winning.

Further, when the stage change is performed in one special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 stores the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the special symbol change (see step S9155). In the process of step S9151, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in any of the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (3). When one special symbol change ends and the next special symbol change starts, the sub CPU 201 displays the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4). Each is shifted from the first sub-holding area (0) to the first sub-holding area (3). At that time, when the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in the first sub-holding area (1), the sub CPU 201 is the information from the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (0). With the transfer of, the stage change section the reserved ball information is deleted. Therefore, the situation in which the stage change section holding ball information is stored in the first sub-holding area (0) does not occur.

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section exists among the reserved balls for the upper limit of four times held, the sub CPU 201 holds the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time in the stage change section. It is specified as a sphere (step S9152). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information (stage change section hold ball information) indicating that the ball is a stage change section hold ball in the first sub hold area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. As a result, for example, in a situation where the stage change section said holding ball information is stored in the first sub holding area (3), when the first starting opening winning corresponding to the fourth holding ball occurs, The stage change section hold ball information is stored in the first sub hold area (4) (see FIG. 294 (a)).

In step S9151, when it is determined that the reserved ball in the stage change section does not exist in the reserved balls for the upper limit of 4 times held, the sub CPU 201 changes the special symbol counted after shifting to the current production stage. (Step S9153), it is determined whether or not the number of times (the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift) reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time (step S9153). The number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift is stored in the work RAM 203, and the value is updated every time a special symbol fluctuation is performed.

If it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift does not reach the predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 201 is specially corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. It is determined whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated in the symbol variation (step S9154). In this process, in the sub CPU 201, the variation pattern (main variation pattern) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time is the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). Judge whether or not the fluctuation pattern corresponds to. Since the command for increasing the number of reserved first start opening prizes (see step S744 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 contains information indicating the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the first start opening prize is awarded. By receiving the hold number increase command, the sub CPU 201 can recognize the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. In addition, the variation pattern includes information corresponding to the effect performed during the special symbol variation. Based on the information, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is performed during the special symbol change.

In step S9153, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift reaches a predetermined number (20 times) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the current first start opening prize, or corresponding to the current first start opening prize. When it is determined that the seventh notice effect is generated in the special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 specifies the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time as the reserved ball in the stage change section (step S9155). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. As a result, for example, when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning (corresponding to the fourth reserved ball) is the 21st special symbol variation after shifting to the current production stage. Will store the stage change section holding ball information in the first sub-holding area (4) (see FIG. 293 (d)). Further, although not shown, for example, when the 7th notice effect occurs during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning (corresponding to the 4th holding ball), the 1st sub-holding area Stage change section The reserved ball information is stored in (4).

Although not shown, similarly, a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) will occur during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening winning. Further, when the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number is won, the stage change section and the reserved ball information may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. In addition, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth identification) is reached during the special symbol variation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you do not win the production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached, you will be in the first sub hold area corresponding to this first start opening prize. , Stage change section The reserved ball information may be stored. On the other hand, in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the number of variation counts after the stage transition reaches a predetermined number (20 times), and a specific super reach (for example, the fifth identification) is performed during the special symbol variation. (Any super reach except super reach) will occur, and if you win the production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached, the stage will be in the 1st sub hold area corresponding to the next 1st start opening prize. Change section The reserved ball information may be stored.

After executing the process of step S9152 or step S9155, or when it is determined in step S9153 that the seventh notice effect does not occur in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 201 executes this subroutine. finish.

As described above, the stage change section determination process performed in step S9101 of FIG. 296 has been described with reference to FIG. 297. The explanation is returned to FIG. 296.

After executing the process of step S9101, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a stage change section reserved ball (including the stage change section holding ball) (step). S9102). When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning is the stage change section reserved ball, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the holding ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is not the stage change section holding ball, the sub CPU 201 sets the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time to a fixed value. It is determined whether or not it corresponds (step S9103). Although not shown, in the present embodiment, as a result of the jackpot determination relating to the first special symbol, it is relatively advantageous to the first jackpot (for example, a jackpot with a large number of rounds or a jackpot with a short time) which is relatively advantageous to the player. A second jackpot that is disadvantageous (for example, a jackpot with a small number of rounds or a jackpot with no time saving) may be provided. On top of that, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the first jackpot and the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) will be selected in the case of the second jackpot. Is the same, the probability that a predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the first jackpot is made, and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot) is selected when the second jackpot is reached. It may be configured to be different from the probability. In this case, in the predetermined fluctuation pattern (fixed value) and the predetermined fluctuation pattern (indefinite jackpot), the special symbol variation may be performed with the same variation pattern. In the process of step S9103, the sub CPU 201 has a variation pattern (variation pattern corresponding to a fixed value) other than a predetermined variation pattern (indefinite jackpot) in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the first start opening winning is not the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening prize this time is the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fixed value, the sub CPU 201 determines that the timing when the first start opening prize is generated this time is set. It is determined whether or not it is within a predetermined time (for example, a time corresponding to 41 frames) after the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed (step S9104). When it is determined that the timing at which the first start opening winning is generated is within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the timing at which the first start opening prize is generated is not within a predetermined time from the start of the special symbol change in which the stage change is performed, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub change pattern (second half) lottery process. Execute (step S9105). The sub-variation pattern is composed of the first half portion and the second half portion, and the main fluctuation pattern (variation pattern of the special symbol) is also composed of the first half portion and the second half portion. In the process of step S9105, the sub CPU 201 includes the main variation pattern information (variation of the special symbol) included in the hold number increase command (see step S744 of FIG. 110) of the first start port winning prize transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The content of the latter half of the sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value based on the information indicating the pattern) and the current production stage.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub fluctuation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9106). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub fluctuation pattern (second half) determined in step S9105, the main fluctuation pattern, and the current production stage, the first half portion of the sub fluctuation pattern. Determine the content. Information indicating the current production stage is stored in the production stage flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the production stage flag storage area to display the current production stage. Can be recognized.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is in progress (step S9107). When it is determined that the change of the second special symbol is being displayed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the second special lottery corresponding to the change of the second special symbol is a loss or a small hit (step S9108). ). When it is determined that the result of the second special lottery is not a loss or a small hit (a big hit), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, a method (simultaneous fluctuation type) capable of simultaneously changing the first special symbol and the second special symbol is adopted. Therefore, it is assumed that a big hit related to the second special symbol suddenly occurs, but by executing the processes of steps S9107 and S9108, unintended playability may occur even in such a situation. There is no such thing.

If it is determined in step S9107 that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or if it is determined in step S9108 that the result of the second special lottery is a loss or a small hit (not a big hit), the sub CPU 201 , The look-ahead effect lottery process is executed (step S9109). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and based on the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106, regarding the current first start opening winning (for the sub-variation pattern). ) Whether or not to generate the look-ahead effect is determined, and when the look-ahead effect is generated, the content of the look-ahead effect (for example, the look-ahead effect pattern shown in FIG. 305) is determined (step S9109).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening winning this time based on the result of the look-ahead effect lottery process in step S9109 (step S9110). When it is determined that the look-ahead effect will occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag to ON (step S9111). The look-ahead flag is a flag indicating that a look-ahead effect is generated for one first start opening winning, and is set to off when the special symbol variation corresponding to the first starting opening winning starts. This suggests the result of the first special lottery related to the first starting opening prize between the occurrence of the first starting opening winning and the start of the special symbol change corresponding to the first starting opening winning. The production (look-ahead production) will be performed.

When it is determined in step S91110 that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, or after executing the process of step S9111, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

The processing of steps S9109 to S9111 may be configured as follows. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect does not occur for the first start opening prize this time, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a hold ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect. do. The reserved ball on which the look-ahead effect can be performed is a specific sub-variation pattern (for example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 304) and is based on the main variation pattern corresponding to the fixed value. It is a reserved ball in which the effect is performed according to the determined sub-variation pattern. When it is determined that the hold ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a hold ball capable of performing the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 201 sets the look-ahead in the first sub hold area corresponding to the first start opening prize this time. Possible information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect can be performed) is stored. When it is determined that the reserved ball related to the first start opening winning this time is a reserved ball that cannot perform the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 201 enters the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time. Unable information (information indicating that the look-ahead effect cannot be performed) is stored.

In FIG. 298 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 420 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is pre-read. Indicates the state in which the available information is stored. In FIG. 298 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 298 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. In FIG. 299 (a), one game ball wins in the first starting port 420 while one special symbol change is being performed, and the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first holding ball is pre-read. Indicates the state in which the available information is stored. In FIG. 299 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 299 (a), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the second one. It shows a state in which pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball. In FIG. 299 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 299 (b), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which read-ahead information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball.

When it is determined that the pre-reading effect is generated for the first starting port winning this time, the sub CPU 201 performs the pre-reading effect for the first starting port winning in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting port winning this time. Information indicating that (pre-reading relevant information) is stored. Then, when the look-ahead information is stored in all the first sub-holding areas (excluding the first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the first starting point winning before the first starting point winning this time, the sub The CPU 201 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in these first sub-holding areas into the pre-reading information. The pre-reading information is information indicating that the pre-reading effect is performed until the special symbol variation corresponding to the first sub-holding area in which the pre-reading information is stored starts.

In FIG. 298 (c), after the state shown in FIG. 298 (b), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the third one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first to second holding balls instead of the pre-reading information. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls is being performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the third reserved ball is performed. In addition, in FIG. 298 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 298 (c), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and four balls are won. It shows a state in which pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the holding ball of the eye. In this way, when the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to one holding ball, the pre-reading non-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the next holding ball.

In addition, when it is determined that a look-ahead effect will occur for the first starting opening winning this time, the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0) corresponding to the first starting opening winning before the first starting opening winning this time). ), When there is a first sub-holding area in which pre-readable information is stored, there are a plurality of first sub-hold areas in which the pre-readable information is stored. In this case, the read-ahead information stored in the first sub-holding area having a larger number than the first sub-holding area having the highest number is rewritten into the look-ahead information. In FIG. 299 (d), after the state shown in FIG. 299 (c), one game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 420 while the one special symbol fluctuation continues, and the fourth one. It shows a state in which the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the hold ball. At this time, the pre-reading information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the third holding ball instead of the pre-reading information. As a result, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to second reserved balls is being performed, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the third reserved ball is performed. During this time, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball, the pre-readable information may be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. good. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 294 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, the look-ahead stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first reserved ball is stored. The pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the second to third hold balls may be rewritten to the pre-reading information while keeping the impossible information as it is. In this case, the look-ahead effect cannot be performed while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first reserved ball is being performed, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the second to third reserved balls is performed. During the process, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination relating to the fourth reserved ball will be performed.

Alternatively, when the reserved ball related to the first starting opening winning this time is the holding ball in the stage change section, the pre-reading non-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning this time. If the reserved ball related to the first start opening prize this time is a stage change section reserved ball other than the stage change section, the look-ahead information can be stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the current first start opening prize. May be memorized. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 294 (d), when it is determined to generate the look-ahead effect for the fourth reserved ball, it is stored in the first sub-reserved area corresponding to the first to third reserved balls. The pre-readable information that has been set may be rewritten to the pre-reading information. In this case, while the special symbol variation corresponding to the first to third reserved balls is performed, a look-ahead effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the fourth reserved ball is performed. Become.

As described above, the first sub-holding area is provided in the work RAM 203, and corresponds to the first special symbol start storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Information similar to the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 203 can be configured to be stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 203 is controlled so as to be generated by the sub-control circuit 200 according to the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 103. Is possible. Further, the determination as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect may be performed by the main control circuit 100 based on the information stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 103. Further, the information stored in the first sub-holding area of the work RAM 203 may be configured to perform a suggestion effect according to the information to the extent that the player can recognize it.

<Processing at the start of the first special symbol change>
FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start processing according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence presence / absence determination process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the stage count process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing a stage change occurrence lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 304 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern selection table. FIG. 305 is a diagram showing a sub-variation pattern replacement table.

In the first special symbol change start processing shown in FIG. 300, in the normal mode (see FIG. 251 (a)), after the game ball wins the first start opening 420, the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. Occasionally, the sub-control circuit 200 performs the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41). The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command (see step S40134 in FIG. 133). Further, prior to executing the process shown in FIG. 300, the sub CPU 201 stores the information stored in the first sub-holding area (1) to the first sub-holding area (4) in the first sub-holding area, respectively. It is shifted from (0) to the first sub-holding area (3).

In the first special symbol change start processing, first, the sub CPU 201 executes a stage change occurrence / non-occurrence determination process (step S9201). Hereinafter, the process of determining whether or not a stage change has occurred will be described with reference to FIG. 301.

In the stage change occurrence determination process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation this time is the first special symbol variation after the transition to the normal mode (step S9251). When it is determined that the special symbol variation this time is the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9252). The stage change flag is a flag indicating that the condition for generating the stage change is satisfied, and the stage change is performed when the stage change flag is set to ON. After executing the process of step S9252, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9251 that the special symbol variation this time is not the first special symbol variation after shifting to the normal mode, the sub CPU 201 executes the stage count process (step S9253). Hereinafter, the stage counting process will be described with reference to FIG. 302.

In the stage count process, first, the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift (step S9261). The value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition indicates the number of first special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after the stage transition) counted after the transition to the current production stage, and is stored in the work RAM 203. The sub CPU 201 adds the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition every time the first special symbol variation (variation display in the first special symbol display unit 73) is performed, while the second special symbol variation (second special symbol display). Even if the fluctuation display in unit 74) is performed, the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not added.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is 20 (step S9262). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition is not 20, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage shift is 20, the sub CPU 201 sets the specified number arrival flag to ON (step S9263). The specified number arrival flag is a flag indicating that the number of fluctuation counts after the stage shift has reached the number of special symbol fluctuations (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. If the specified number arrival flag is set to on when one special symbol change starts, basically (unless the specified number is reached, the production stage transition hold lottery (see step S9273 in FIG. 303) is won). , The stage will be changed in the special symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9263, the sub CPU 201 sets "0" in the fluctuation count counter after stage transition (clears the value of the fluctuation count counter after stage transition) (step S9264). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

The stage counting process performed in step S9253 of FIG. 301 has been described above with reference to FIG. 302. The explanation is returned to FIG. 301.

After executing the process of step S9253, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the read-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 296) is set to ON (step S9254). If it is determined that the look-ahead flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes the stage change occurrence lottery process (step S9255). Hereinafter, the stage change occurrence lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 303.

In the stage change occurrence lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is set to ON (step S9271). The change flag at the time of the next change has reached the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition after the stage transition in one special symbol change, but the stage change occurs next time. This is a flag indicating that the fluctuation has been carried over (see step S9279). When it is determined that the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9272). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9272, the sub CPU 201 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to off (step S9273), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9271 that the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the specified number arrival flag (see step S9263 in FIG. 302) is set to ON (step). S9274). If it is determined that the specified number arrival flag is set to ON, does the sub CPU 201 generate a specific super reach (for example, any super reach other than the 5th specific super reach) during this special symbol change? Whether or not it is determined (step S9275). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol variation this time is a variation pattern corresponding to a specific super reach. As described above, the command for increasing the number of pending first start port prizes (see step S744 in FIG. 110) transmitted from the main control circuit 100 includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the sub CPU 201 includes the sub CPU 201. Based on the information, it is possible to recognize the effects that may occur during this special symbol change.

If it is determined that a specific super reach will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 executes a production stage transition hold lottery when the specified number is reached (step S9276). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has been won (step S9277).

If it is determined in step S9275 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, or if it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has not been won, the sub CPU 201 The stage change flag is set to on (step S9278). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9278, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9277 that the lottery for holding the transition to the production stage when the specified number is reached has been won, the sub CPU 201 sets the change flag at the time of the next fluctuation to ON (step S9279). As a result, the stage will be changed in the next special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9279, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9274 that the specified number arrival flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the seventh notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change (step S9280). In this process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the process result of step S9154 of FIG. 297. In the process of step S9154, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the 7th notice effect is generated in the special symbol variation corresponding to the first start opening winning, the sub CPU 201 is placed in the first sub holding area corresponding to the first starting opening winning. Information indicating that the 7th notice effect is generated during the special symbol change corresponding to the 1st start opening prize (7th notice effect generation information) is stored. At the time of executing the process of step S9280, the information stored in the first sub-holding area is shifted to the first sub-holding area (0). In the process of step S9280, the sub CPU 201 determines that the 7th notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change when the 7th notice effect generation information is stored in the 1st sub hold area (0).

When it is determined that the seventh notice effect will occur during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9281). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. After executing the process of step S9281, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the 7th notice effect does not occur during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 may perform a specific super reach (for example, any super reach except for the 5th specific super reach) during the current special symbol change. ) Occurs (step S9282). This process is the same as the process of step S9275. When it is determined that a specific super reach occurs during this special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 executes a pre-specified number production stage transition lottery (step S9283). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. At that time, the sub CPU 201 makes the winning probability of the effect stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number different according to the value of the fluctuation number counter after the stage transition.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the lottery for shifting to the production stage before reaching the specified number has been won (step S9284). When it is determined that the production stage transition lottery before reaching the specified number has been won, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage change flag to ON (step S9285). As a result, the stage will be changed in this special symbol change. If it is determined in step S9282 that a specific super reach does not occur during this special symbol change, if it is determined in step S9284 that the pre-specified number production stage transition lottery has not been won, or the process of step S9285 is performed. After execution, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the stage change occurrence lottery process performed in step S9255 of FIG. 301 has been described with reference to FIG. 303. The explanation is returned to FIG. 301.

When it is determined in step S9254 that the look-ahead flag is set to on, or after executing the process of step S9255, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. In addition, when the seventh notice effect occurs during the special symbol change this time, all the reserved balls existing at the time when the special symbol change is started are the stage change section reserved balls (see FIG. 297). Since the pre-reading effect is not performed on the stage change section reserved ball (see FIG. 296), if the 7th notice effect occurs during this special symbol change, the determination result in step S9254 is always "NO".

As described above, the stage change occurrence / non-existence determination process performed in step S9201 of FIG. 300 has been described with reference to FIG. 301. The explanation is returned to FIG. 300.

After executing the process of step S9201, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 303) is set to on (step S9202). ).

When it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes the stage change destination lottery process (step S9203). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the production stage after the transition due to the stage change by performing a lottery based on the random number value with reference to the stage change destination lottery table. Although not shown, in the stage change destination lottery table, each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after the transition is defined in association with the random value range. Has been done. As the stage change destination lottery table, a stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, a stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and a stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage are provided. In the stage change destination lottery table, the random value ranges are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 201 draws a lot with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the first production stage, and when the current production stage is the second production stage. Lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the second production stage, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the lottery is performed with reference to the stage change destination lottery table for the third production stage. I do.

As a result, when the production stage after the transition is determined, the sub CPU 201 controls the transition to the determined production stage. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates the information stored in the effect stage flag storage area to the information corresponding to the effect stage after the transition. Then, the sub CPU 201 sets "0" in the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition (clears the value of the fluctuation count counter after the stage transition) (step S9204).

When it is determined in step S9202 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 201 determines the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9105 in FIG. 296 and It is determined whether or not (see step S9106) has been determined (step S9205). When it is determined that the sub-variation pattern is determined when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol change occurs, the sub CPU 201 determines when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol change occurs. It is determined whether or not the effect stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296 are executed) and the current effect stage are the same (step S9206).

When it is determined in step S9205 that the sub-variation pattern (see steps S9105 and S9106 in FIG. 296) is not determined when the first start opening winning corresponding to the special symbol variation is generated, or in step S9206. It was determined that the production stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296 were executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurred was not the same as the current production stage. In the case, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub-variation pattern (second half) lottery process (step S9207), and further executes the sub-variation pattern (first half) lottery process (step S9208). Since the processes of steps S9207 and S9208 are the same as the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296, the description thereof is omitted here.

The effect stage (at the time when the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296 are executed) when the first start opening prize corresponding to the special symbol variation this time occurs in step S9206 is the same as the current effect stage. If it is determined, or after executing the process of step S9208, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the look-ahead flag (see step S9111 of FIG. 296) is set to ON (step S9209).

When it is determined that the look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub-variation pattern replacement process (step S9210). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of replacing the already determined sub-variation pattern with another sub-variation pattern as needed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305.

In the sub-variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 304, the main variation pattern and the sub-variation pattern are defined in association with each other. As the main fluctuation pattern, a main fluctuation pattern "1", a main fluctuation pattern "2", a main fluctuation pattern "3", and the like are provided. For example, although not shown, the main variation pattern "10" is a main variation pattern (see step S9154 in FIG. 297) corresponding to the seventh notice effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"). There is. A plurality of sub-variation patterns are associated with one main fluctuation pattern, and when the one main fluctuation pattern is selected, any one of the plurality of sub-variation patterns is used. It is supposed to be selected. For example, in the processes of steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296, when the sub CPU 201 receives information indicating that the main fluctuation pattern is "1" from the main control circuit 100 as a fluctuation pattern command, the sub fluctuation pattern One sub-variation pattern is selected from "1" to "30" (30 types of sub-variation patterns).

The sub-variation pattern includes a sub-variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect can be performed (a look-ahead possible sub-variation pattern) and a sub-variation pattern in which the look-ahead effect cannot be performed (a look-ahead non-pre-reading sub-variation pattern). FIG. 304 also shows whether each sub-variation pattern is classified into a pre-readable sub-variation pattern and a non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns, and the sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" are pre-readable sub-variation patterns. For example, when it is determined in step S9110 of FIG. 296 that the pre-reading effect does not occur for the first start opening winning this time, the sub CPU 201 may use the pre-readable sub-variation pattern as the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106. For example, the pre-readable information (information indicating that the pre-reading effect can be performed) is stored in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first winning opening winning this time. On the other hand, if the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 is a pre-reading non-pre-reading sub-variation pattern, the pre-reading non-predictable information (pre-reading effect is performed in the first sub-holding area corresponding to the first start opening winning this time. (Information indicating that it cannot be done) is memorized.

After that, when the first start opening prize is generated and the look-ahead effect is generated for the first start opening prize (when the look-ahead flag is set to ON in step S9111), it will be described with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299. As described above, the sub CPU 201 rewrites the pre-readable information stored in the first sub-holding area into the pre-reading information. In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 300, when the sub CPU 201 stores the pre-reading information in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9105 and When the sub-variation pattern determined in step S9106 is a look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is replaced. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 is the sub determined in steps S9105 and S9106 when the pre-readable information is stored in the first sub-holding area (first sub-holding area (0)) corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. If the fluctuation pattern is a non-look-ahead sub-variation pattern), the sub-variation pattern is not replaced.

In the sub-variation pattern replacement table shown in FIG. 305, the sub-variation pattern after replacement is defined in association with the look-ahead effect pattern for each sub-variation pattern before replacement. As the sub-variation pattern before replacement, only the pre-readable sub-variation pattern is defined among the pre-readable sub-variation pattern and the non-pre-readable sub-variation pattern. The look-ahead effect pattern indicates the type of look-ahead effect, and is determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 in FIG. 296). The sub-variation pattern after replacement is a sub-variation pattern (pre-reading sub-variation pattern) corresponding to the look-ahead effect. In FIG. 305, as an example of the look-ahead sub-variation pattern, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns “31” to “50” corresponding to the main fluctuation pattern “1” are shown. The look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "35" are associated with the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "1" to "5", and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "36" to "40" are the look-ahead sub-variation patterns. The fluctuation patterns "6" to "10" are associated with each other, and the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "41" to "45" are associated with the look-ahead possible sub-variation patterns "11" to "15". Sub-variation patterns "46" to "50" are associated with pre-readable sub-variation patterns "16" to "20".

In the process of step S9210 of FIG. 300, the sub CPU 201 newly uses the pre-reading sub-variation pattern instead of the already determined sub-variation pattern (pre-readable sub-variation pattern) by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table. Determined as a sub-variation pattern. For example, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296 is the sub-variation pattern "1", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 296) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of A, the sub CPU 201 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern "31" as the sub-variation pattern after replacement. Further, the sub-variation pattern determined in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296 is the sub-variation pattern "10", and the look-ahead effect pattern determined in the look-ahead effect lottery process (see step S9109 of FIG. 296) is the look-ahead effect pattern. In the case of B, the sub CPU 201 determines the look-ahead sub-variation pattern "37" as the sub-variation pattern after replacement.

In this way, for example, when the main fluctuation pattern "1" is selected, any one of the sub fluctuation patterns "1" to "50" can be selected, but the sub fluctuation pattern selection table In, the look-ahead sub-variation patterns "31" to "50" are not specified. Thereby, in both the case where the look-ahead effect is performed and the case where the look-ahead effect is not performed, it is possible to select the sub-variation pattern by the common method in steps S9105 and S9106 of FIG. 296, and the sub-variation pattern can be selected. It is possible to improve the efficiency of the process related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern. After that, when the look-ahead effect is performed, the sub-variation pattern replacement table is referred to, and the sub-variation pattern is replaced with the look-ahead sub-variation pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect pattern. The decorative pattern can be changed with. The sub-variation pattern selection table and the sub-variation pattern replacement table are stored in the program ROM 202.

Although not shown, the sub-variation pattern selection table includes a sub-variation pattern selection table for the first effect stage, a sub-variation pattern selection table for the second effect stage, and a sub-variation pattern selection table for the third effect stage. Has been done. In these sub-variation pattern selection tables, the random value range assigned to each sub-variation pattern is different from each other, and the sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the first effect stage and the second effect stage only. A sub-variation pattern that can be selected and a sub-variation pattern that can be selected only in the third effect stage are set. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 201 selects the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the sub-variation pattern selection table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage is selected. The sub-variation pattern is selected by referring to the pattern selection table.

Similarly, as the sub-variation pattern replacement table, there are a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and a sub-variation pattern replacement table for the third production stage. It is provided. In these sub-variation pattern replacement tables, the correspondence between the sub-variation pattern before the replacement and the sub-variation pattern after the replacement is different from each other, and some of the types of the look-ahead effect pattern are different from each other. When the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 201 replaces the sub-variation pattern by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the first production stage, and the current production stage is the second production stage. If, the sub-variation pattern is replaced by referring to the sub-variation pattern replacement table for the second production stage, and if the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub-variation for the third production stage is performed. Sub-variation patterns are replaced by referring to the pattern replacement table.

If it is determined in step S9209 that the look-ahead flag is not set on, or after executing the process of step S9210, the sub CPU 201 changes the already determined sub fluctuation pattern into a sub fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation scale. The replacement process is performed (step S9211). In this process, when the already determined sub-variation pattern is a normal sub-variation pattern (sub-variation pattern corresponding to the default variation pattern shown in FIGS. 285 to 287), the sub CPU 201 fluctuates as necessary. Change the time. For example, at the time when the first start opening prize corresponding to this special symbol change occurs, the first start opening prize corresponds to the fourth reserved ball, and the sub change corresponding to the 4-second change. When a pattern is selected, but all the reservations are subsequently exhausted and the special symbol variation is reached, a process of replacing the pattern with a sub-variation pattern corresponding to the 13-second variation is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stage change flag (see step S9273, step S9278, step S9281, and step S9285 in FIG. 303) is set to ON (step S9212). When it is determined that the stage change flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 executes the stage change wipe color lottery process (step S9213). The stage change wipe color lottery process will be described below.

As described above, when the stage change is performed based on the number of special symbol changes (number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) reaching a predetermined number (20 times), the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" (FIG. 292) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed, the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after the transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage). Move to the background corresponding to. Further, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the seventh notice effect, an effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or an effect corresponding to the effect number "122" (see FIG. 291) is performed. After the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" is performed, the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display, and the effect stage after the transition (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage). Move to the background corresponding to. In addition, after the production in the fifth specific super reach that shifts via the production corresponding to the production number "122" is completed, the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display, and the production stage after the transition (first production). It shifts to the background corresponding to the stage, the second production stage, or the third production stage).

When shifting to the background corresponding to the effect stage after the shift in this way, a predetermined wipe image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The wipe image can be displayed in various colors (default color, gold color, or special color). Specifically, when the production stage after the transition is the first production stage, the wipe image for the first production stage in the default color, the wipe image for the first production stage in gold, or the first production stage in a special color. Wipe image is displayed. When the production stage after the transition is the second production stage, the default color wipe image for the second production stage, the golden wipe image for the second production stage, or the special color wipe image for the second production stage is displayed. Is displayed. When the production stage after the transition is the third production stage, the default color wipe image for the third production stage, the golden wipe image for the third production stage, or the special color wipe image for the third production stage is displayed. Is displayed. In the process of step S9213, the sub CPU 201 determines the color of the wipe image by referring to the stage change wipe color lottery table and performing a lottery based on a random number value. Although not shown, in the stage change wipe color lottery table, various colors (default colors) are used for each production stage (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage) that can be the production stage after the transition. , Gold, and special colors) and the random value range are defined in association with each other.

The stage change wipe color lottery table includes the first stage change wipe color lottery table, the second stage change wipe color lottery table, the third stage change wipe color lottery table, the fourth stage change wipe color lottery table, and the fifth stage. A change wipe color lottery table and a sixth stage change wipe color lottery table are provided, and in these stage change wipe color lottery tables, the random number value ranges are different from each other. The 1st stage change wipe color lottery table to the 6th stage change wipe color lottery table correspond to the set values of "1" to "6", respectively, and the sub CPU 201 corresponds to the stage change corresponding to the current set value. The wipe color lottery table is referenced. Then, in each stage change wipe color lottery table, a random value range for the special color is set so that the probability that the special color is selected increases as the set value increases. For example, the probability that a special color wipe image is displayed is higher when the set value is "4" than when the set value is "2", and "6" is higher than when the set value is "4". In the case of, the probability that the special color wipe image is displayed is higher. As a result, the set value is suggested through the appearance frequency of the special color wipe image.

In the above, as an example, when a stage change occurs based on the occurrence of the 7th notice effect (including the case where the 7th notice effect occurs in a game that reaches the specified number), the effect number "121" is set. It has been described that the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" is performed before the corresponding effect or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. However, in this case, only the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" may be performed, and the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" may not be performed. Further, while both the production corresponding to the production number "121", the production corresponding to the production number "122", and the production corresponding to the production number "131" are performed, the production number "131" is set. Even if the wipe image is not displayed after the corresponding effect is performed, and the wipe image is displayed only after the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or the effect corresponding to the effect number "122" is performed. good. When such a configuration is adopted, the wipe image is displayed only once in one stage change. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the wipe image.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, when a predetermined look-ahead effect occurs, the stage change wipe color lottery process may be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game. The predetermined look-ahead effect is a look-ahead effect that can be performed during the previous special symbol change of the stage change game when the change pattern corresponding to the seventh notice effect is determined as the main change pattern in the stage change game. In the look-ahead effect, the game freezes while the predetermined image is displayed, and the stage change game is started in that state. In this case, in the stage change game, the processes of steps S9212 and S9213 may not be performed (the wipe image is based on the result of the stage change wipe color lottery process performed during the previous special symbol change). May be displayed). Further, the predetermined look-ahead effect may be configured so that it can occur only in one effect stage (for example, a second effect stage).

When it is determined in step S9212 that the stage change flag is not set to ON, or after the process of step S9213 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect lottery process according to the effect stage (step S9214). In this process, the sub CPU 201 includes a sub-variation pattern finally determined by performing a lottery based on a random number value (a sub-variation pattern determined by executing the process of step S9211) and a current production stage. Based on the above, a process for determining a specific production content is performed. For example, when the current production stage is the first production stage, the sub CPU 201 executes the first production stage notice content lottery process (see FIG. 252). Further, when the current production stage is the second production stage, the sub CPU 201 executes the second production stage notice content lottery process, and when the current production stage is the third production stage, the sub CPU 201 is the third production stage. Production stage notice content Lottery processing is executed. In the second production stage notice content lottery process and the third production stage notice content lottery process, as in the first production stage notice content lottery process, the special symbol variation related to the first start opening prize is based on the sub-variation pattern. The content of the production performed inside is decided. After executing the process of step S9214, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Basic screen display at each production stage>
FIG. 306 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. FIG. 306B is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the second effect stage. FIG. 306 (c) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the third effect stage.

As shown in FIG. 306 (a), in the first effect stage, the first effect stage name image 9101 showing the name of the first effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the liquid crystal display device 16. .. As shown in FIG. 306 (b), in the second effect stage, the second effect stage name image 9102 showing the name of the second effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the liquid crystal display device 16. .. As shown in FIG. 306 (c), in the third effect stage, the third effect stage name image 9103 showing the name of the third effect stage is displayed at a predetermined position (for example, upper left) on the liquid crystal display device 16. .. The first effect stage name image 9101, the second effect stage name image 9102, and the third effect stage name image 9103 are each displayed at the same position on the liquid crystal display device 16.

Further, in each effect stage, the counter image 9104 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. As described above, the counter image 9104 is an image corresponding to the number of special symbol fluctuations (number of fluctuation counts after stage transition) performed after the occurrence of the stage change. The number (20) in the denominator indicates the number of special symbol changes (20 times) related to the stage change occurrence condition. The numerator number indicates the number of fluctuation counts after the current stage transition.

Further, as shown in FIG. 306 (a), in the first production stage, a bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, a watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and a cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed. ing. As described above, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are in any of a dark mode and a bright mode, respectively. It is possible to display with (see FIG. 284). On top of that, the bell image 9021 for pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous stage notification are always displayed while staying in the first production stage. It has become.

Specifically, when the pseudo-ream effect is not generated, or when the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the pseudo-ream stage is "pseudo 1", the pseudo-ream stage notification bell image 9021 and the pseudo-ream stage notification The watermelon image 9022 and the cherry image 9023 for pseudo continuous step notification are displayed darkly. When the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-ream is "pseudo 2", the bell image 9021 for the pseudo-ream stage notification is displayed brightly, and the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo-ream stage notification and the pseudo-ream stage notification are used. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the pseudo-ream effect is generated and the stage of the pseudo-ream is "pseudo 3", the bell image 9021 for the pseudo-ream stage notification and the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo-ream stage notification are displayed brightly for pseudo-ream stage notification. The cherry image 9023 is displayed dark. When the super reach is developed via the pseudo continuous effect, the bell image 9021 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, the watermelon image 9022 for the pseudo continuous stage notification, and the cherry image 9023 for the pseudo continuous stage notification are displayed during the super reach. It is displayed brightly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 306 (b), the stock timer image 9110 is displayed in the second effect stage. The stock timer image 9110 is an image corresponding to any numerical value (“PLAY TIME”) from “00:00” to “99:99”. The "PLAY TIME" indicates the length of time during which the super reach is performed, and the effect in the super reach is performed over a period of time corresponding to the "PLAY TIME" indicated by the stock timer image 9110. Such "PLAY TIME" is added (stocked) according to the production (time stock notice) performed during the second production stage.

Although not shown, the first time stock notice, the second time stock notice, and the third time stock notice are provided as the time stock notice. In the first time stock notice, a predetermined item lamp emits light, a predetermined item decoration part (movable accessory) rattles, and the item decoration part pops forward and at the same time, a numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME". Will increase. The item lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the item decoration unit. The item decoration part is provided at a predetermined position of the game board unit 17 (for example, as a part of the second character decoration part), and is formed of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin or the like). In addition, the item decoration section is decorated in the shape of a predetermined item. In the second time stock notice, there is no light emission of the item lamp and rattling operation of the item decoration part as in the first time stock notice, and the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" suddenly increases. In the third time stock notice, after the predetermined effect appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the item decoration portion, and at the same time, the numerical value indicated as "PLAY TIME" increases.

Further, the display pattern of the stock timer image 9110 corresponds to the display pattern of the background image. When "00:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the default pattern. When any numerical value from "05:00" to "30:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 1 pattern. When any numerical value from "35:00" to "60:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 2 pattern. When any numerical value from "65:00" to "95:00" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level 3 pattern. When "99:99" is displayed as the stock timer image 9110, the background image is displayed in the effect level MAX pattern. The stock timer images 9110 include "00:01" to "04:99", "30:01" to "34:99", "60:01" to "64:99", and "95:01" to. The numerical value of "99:98" is not displayed.

The effect level 1 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the default pattern, the effect level 2 pattern has a higher jackpot expectation than the effect level 1 pattern, and the effect level 3 pattern has an effect level 2 pattern. In comparison, the jackpot expectation is high, and the effect level MAX pattern has the highest jackpot expectation. In the effect level 1 pattern to the effect level 3 pattern, a background image based on orange is displayed, and as the effect level becomes higher, the display mode becomes more flashy. In the effect level MAX pattern, a background image based on red is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 306 (c), the character appearance meter image 9120 is displayed on the third production stage. The character appearance meter image 9120 is configured to include a left character appearance meter image 9120L and a right character appearance meter image 9120R. The left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the left character appearance meter image 9120L and the right character appearance meter image 9120R have an initial display mode (a state in which the meters are not accumulated), a level 1 display mode (a state in which the meters are accumulated in one stage), and respectively. Of the level 2 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in two stages), the level 3 display mode (state in which the meters are accumulated in three stages), and the level MAX display mode (state in which the meters are full). It can be displayed in any of the modes.

The meters shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 are accumulated according to the production (meter UP notice) performed during the third production stage. In the meter UP notice, there are cases where the meters are accumulated in one stage, two stages, and three stages. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L becomes the level MAX display mode, the left character 9121L appears on the liquid crystal display device 16 (becomes a standby state). When the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R becomes the level MAX display mode, the right character 9121R appears on the liquid crystal display device 16 (becomes a standby state).

Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the left character 9121L is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the left character) corresponding to the left character 9121L. Of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R, when only the right character 9121R is in the standby state, it develops into a super reach (super reach for the right character) corresponding to the right character 9121R. When both the characters of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are in the standby state, the super reach corresponding to both characters (super reach for both characters) is developed.

In the left character super reach, when the right character 9121R appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, it shifts to the super reach for both characters, and in the right character super reach, when the left character 9121L appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, it is for both characters. Move to Super Reach. Further, in the super reach for the left character, when the first ally character appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, it develops into a predetermined super reach. Similarly, in the right character super reach, when the first ally character appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, it develops into a predetermined super reach. In addition, in the super reach for both characters, if the button repeated hitting effect is successful, it develops into a predetermined super reach. These predetermined super reach are the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 268 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first production stage.

Even when the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the silhouettes of the left character 9121L and the right character 9121R are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Specifically, when the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the default state, and the right character appearance meter image 9120R is displayed. When the mode is the initial display mode, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the default state. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 1 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in blue, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 1 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in blue.

When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 2 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is blinked in green, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 2 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is displayed blinking in green. When the display mode of the left character appearance meter image 9120L is the level 3 display mode, the silhouette of the left character 9121L is lit in red, and the display mode of the right character appearance meter image 9120R is the level 3 display mode. In this case, the silhouette of the right character 9121R is lit and displayed in red. In this way, as the stage of the meter shown by the character appearance meter image 9120 goes up, the jackpot expectation becomes higher.

Even if the meter indicated by the character appearance meter image 9120 is not full, the left character 9121L to the right character 9121R may be in the standby state. Specifically, when the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach mode, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a rotating manner, and various icons may be stopped and displayed after the rotation is completed. As the icons that can be stopped and displayed in this way, a left character icon, a right character icon, a "cherry" icon, and the like are provided. When the left character icon is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the left character super reach. When the right character icon is stopped and displayed, it shifts to the super reach for the right character. When the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed, the process shifts to the above-mentioned predetermined super reach.

<8th notice production>
FIG. 307 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 307 (b) is a diagram showing a time chart of the eighth notice effect. FIG. 307 (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the eighth notice effect and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol.

The eighth notice effect shown in FIG. 307 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). The eighth notice effect can occur only in the second effect stage.

In the production corresponding to the production numbers "151" to "155", first, a sign that the decorative design is tempered (becomes a reach mode) occurs. The sign suggests that the tempai fanning occurs when the second character lamp (see FIG. 292 (c)) blinks. In the above, it has been described that the corresponding character lamps are always turned on while staying at each production stage. However, in a game other than the game in which the specified number is reached, the corresponding character lamp may be basically turned off. In the case of such a configuration, the lighting of the second character lamp may be used as the above-mentioned sign.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "151" is an effect that fades out after the above-mentioned sign occurs. In the effect corresponding to the effect number "152", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image related to whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai (tempai fan) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. An image corresponding to the failure of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning failure image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the liquid crystal display device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background. .. In the production corresponding to the production number "153", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is an effect that is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and then an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, the notice shifts to the notice after the tempai success.

In the production corresponding to the production number "154", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. An image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (successful tempai fanning image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and the "PLAY TIME" is stocked. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, the notice shifts to the notice after the tempai success. In the production corresponding to the production number "155", after the above-mentioned sign occurs, a predetermined movable accessory operates, and an image relating to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tempai is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is an effect that is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and then an image corresponding to the success of the tempai fanning (tempai fanning success image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When the tempai fanning success image is displayed, it shifts to the intense heat notice after that.

The predetermined movable accessory that operates in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "152" to "155" is the same movable accessory that operates in the notice after the icon is stopped (see FIG. 267). Further, when the tempai fanning success image is displayed in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "153" to "155", the decorative pattern is displayed in the reach mode. In addition, after the productions corresponding to the production numbers "153" and "154" are performed, the notice shifts to the notice after the success of the tenpai, and when the notice after the success of the tenpai ends, the 6th specific super reach, the 7th specific super reach, and Develops into one of the first specified super reach. In the notice after the success of Tempai, a connecting production corresponding to the super reach of the development destination will be performed.

In particular, in the case of developing into the sixth specific super reach, an image showing the title of the sixth specific super reach is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the notice after the success of the tempai. In the sixth specific super reach, a predetermined slot game is played. In the slot game, a plurality of types of icons including the "cherry" icon are variablely displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16, and then stopped and displayed. In a slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The predetermined super reach is the same super reach as the super reach (see FIG. 268 (a)) that shifts when the “cherry” icon is displayed in the first production stage. Therefore, it can be said that the slot game is a mission for shifting to a predetermined super reach.

When the slot game starts, the "PLAY TIME" shown in the stock timer image 9110 gradually decreases. While "PLAY TIME" remains (a value greater than 0), the slot game is repeated. Then, when "PLAY TIME" becomes 0, the slot game ends. That is, the slot game is played over a period of time according to the "PLAY TIME". If three "cherry" icons are lined up within the time, the mission is cleared and the game develops into the prescribed super reach. In other words, "PLAY TIME" is the time limit given to clear the mission.

As described above, in the production corresponding to the production number "154", "PLAY TIME" is stocked, and the stock is due to the above-mentioned second time stock notice. In the second production stage, both the time stock notice and the jackpot notice production (for example, the eighth notice production) may occur during one special symbol change.

In the intense heat notice that shifts after the effect corresponding to the effect number "155" is performed, one or more of the first ally character, the second ally character, and the third ally character are displayed on the liquid crystal display. Appears in 16. Then, it develops into a super reach according to the combination of characters that have appeared. The intense heat notice can also occur in the first production stage and the third production stage.

Four timings are provided as the timings at which the above-mentioned signs can occur. Specifically, when the sign occurs 4.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1) and when the sign occurs 8.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 2). When a sign occurs from 12.5 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3), and when a sign occurs from 16.5 seconds after the start of change of the decorative symbol (timing 4). Is provided. The sign occurs at one of these four timings. At timing 2, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 1, and at timing 3, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds compared to timing 2. However, at the timing 4, all the effects following the sign occur with a delay of 4 seconds as compared with the timing 3. In FIG. 307 (b), only timing 1 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 307 (c), in the effect (timing 1) corresponding to the effect number "152", each decorative symbol (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, and right decorative symbol) starts to change. It is designed to stop when 11 seconds have passed (when the display of the tempai fanning failure image ends). As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that each decorative symbol is stopped when the wipe display is displayed after the tempai fanning fails and the background is returned to the normal background. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the result of the fanning during the tempai fanning. Regarding timings 2 to 4, from the same viewpoint, the stop timings of the decorative symbols are 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, 19 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 23 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, respectively.

<Logo lamp notice production>
FIG. 308 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo lamp notice effect. FIGS. 308 (b) and 308 (c) are diagrams showing a time chart of the logo lamp notice effect.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 16) of the game board unit 17, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. Hereinafter, the logo lamp will be described in more detail.

The logo cover includes a first logo portion, a second logo portion, and a third logo portion. The first logo part is decorated in the shape of the first word, and the second logo part is decorated in the shape of the second word. The logo part is decorated in the shape of the third word. The first word, the second word, and the third word are predetermined words (character strings), respectively. In the present specification, for convenience, the first word is "X", the second word is "Y", and so on. The third word may be called "Z". The first logo portion is provided on the left side portion of the logo cover, the second logo portion is provided on the central portion of the logo cover, and the third logo portion is provided on the right side portion of the logo cover. ..

The logo lamp is composed of a first logo lamp, a second logo lamp, and a third logo lamp. The first logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the first logo portion, and the second logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the second logo portion. The third logo lamp is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided on the back side of the third logo portion. As a result, the letter "X" is lit by emitting the first logo lamp, the letter "Y" is lit by emitting the second logo lamp, and the letter "Z" is lit by emitting the third logo lamp. It is possible to create an appearance that lights up.

In the present embodiment, the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed using such a logo lamp. The logo lamp advance notice effect shown in FIG. 308 is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage, the second effect stage, or the third effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). .. The logo lamp notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other big hit notice effects during one special symbol change.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "161", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the first logo lamp (character "X") is turned on. It is a production that turns off the lights. In the production corresponding to the production number "162", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). Lights up for (seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to light), then the first logo lamp (letter "X") and the second logo lamp (letter "Y"). Is a production that turns off.

In the production corresponding to the production number "163", after the first logo lamp (character "X") is lit for a predetermined time (1 second), the second logo lamp (character "Y") is lit for a predetermined time (1). Lights up for (seconds) (during which the first logo lamp (letter "X") continues to light), after which the third logo lamp (letter "Z") lights up (first logo lamp ("X"). (Letter) and the second logo lamp (the letter "Y") will continue to light). The lighting of the first logo lamp (letter "X"), the second logo lamp (letter "Y"), and the third logo lamp (letter "Z") continues until the end of the special symbol change.

The productions corresponding to the production numbers "161" to "163" are productions related to the fanning (tempai fanning) of whether or not the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai. As the letters are lit in sequence, such as "X"-> "Y"-> "Z", the possibility that the decorative pattern becomes a tenpai increases. Then, when all the characters are lit (when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is performed), it is determined that the decorative pattern is a tenpai (always a reach mode). That is, the logo lamp notice effect is an effect in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of lit logo lamps increases.

FIG. 308 (b) shows a time chart in the case where the logo lamp advance notice effect is performed in the first effect stage or the third effect stage. Here, two timings are provided as the lighting timing of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 5.5 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative pattern (for 10 seconds tempai), 9.5 seconds have passed since the start of the change of the decorative pattern. The case where the first logo lamp (the letter "X") is lit from the time point (for 14-second tempai) is provided. In the first effect stage and the third effect stage, when the decorative symbol fluctuates with the default fluctuation pattern, the reach mode is set 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (10 seconds tempai) and the reach mode is 14 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. There is a time (14 seconds tempai) (see FIGS. 285 and 287).

The two timings in FIG. 308 (b) correspond to these two types of tempai timings. As a result, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "10 seconds for tempai" in FIG. 308 (b). Further, when the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the logo lamp can be turned on at the timing shown in "14 seconds for tempai" in FIG. 308 (b).

When the logo lamp advance notice production is performed on the second production stage, four timings are provided as the lighting timing of the logo lamp. Specifically, when the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up 6 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing 1), and when the first logo lamp (the letter "X") lights up 10 seconds after the start of the change of the decorative symbol (the first logo lamp) When the letter "X" is lit (timing 2), when the first logo lamp (letter "X") is lit 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (timing 3), and when the decorative symbol is lit (timing 3). The case where the first logo lamp (the letter "X") is turned on (timing 4) is provided from the time when 18 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. In FIG. 308 (c), only timing 1 is illustrated. Each of these four timings corresponds to the four timings at which the above-mentioned eighth notice effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to turn on the logo lamp at the timing when the tempai fanning is performed in the eighth notice production.

The logo lamp advance notice effect described above may also be performed at each stage of the pseudo-continuous effect. That is, any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" can occur in each of the "pseudo 1", "pseudo 2", and "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous effect. For example, in "pseudo 1", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up from the time when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, and in "pseudo 2", the first from the time when a predetermined time elapses from the resumption of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. The logo lamp (letter "X") lights up, and in "pseudo 3", the first logo lamp (letter "X") lights up after a predetermined time has elapsed from the resumption of fluctuation of the decorative symbol. At this time, for example, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 1", the process does not shift to "pseudo 2", while the effect number "163" is supported in "pseudo 1". When the effect is performed, the transition to "pseudo 2" may be performed. Further, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 2", the production does not shift to "pseudo 3", while the production corresponding to the production number "163" in "pseudo 2" is performed. If it is done, it may shift to "pseudo 3". Further, when the production corresponding to the production numbers "161" and "162" is performed in "pseudo 3", the process does not shift to the super reach, while the production corresponding to the production number "163" is performed in "pseudo 3". In that case, it may be possible to shift to super reach.

<1st production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing the first production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

The first effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 309 is the first effect stage when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 200 after the lottery process (see FIG. 252).

First production stage logo lamp notice content In the lottery process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous production occurs based on the information included in the sub fluctuation pattern (step S9301). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9302). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9303). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 310.

In the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9321). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 3". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 3". do.

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 3 based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9322). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in the "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 3".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 determines that the logo lamp advance notice production is not performed in "pseudo 3" (step S9323). .. After executing the process of step S9322 or step S9323, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo-3 logo lamp notice content lottery performed in step S9303 of FIG. 309 has been described with reference to FIG. 310. The explanation is returned to FIG. 309.

When it is determined in step S9302 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9303 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9304). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 311.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9341). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 2". do.

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 3 is determined (step S9342). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 of FIG. 310 is being executed, while the sub CPU 201 is otherwise (step S9323 of FIG. 310). When the process of Pseudo 3 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not progress to "Pseudo 3"), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 3 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9343). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9344). .. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2".

If it is determined in step S9341 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 determines that the logo lamp warning effect is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9345). ). After executing the process of step S9343, step S9344, or step S9345, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery performed in step S9304 of FIG. 309 has been described with reference to FIG. 311. The explanation is returned to FIG. 309.

When it is determined in step S9301 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9304 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9305). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 312.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production. (Step S9361). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a sub-variation pattern (10-second tempai variation pattern) in which the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of the variation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". ) And the sub-variation pattern (14-second tempai fluctuation pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation in "pseudo 1". do.

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9362). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9343 or step S9344 of FIG. 311 is being executed, while in other cases (FIG. 311). When the process of step S9345 of step S9345 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9363). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp advance notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pseudo 3 logo lamp advance notice content has been determined (step S9364). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9322 of FIG. 310 is being executed, while the sub CPU 201 is otherwise (step S9323 of FIG. 310). If the process of Pseudo-continuous production does not proceed to "Pseudo 3", or if the pseudo-continuous production does not occur), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 3 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content (step S9365). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 3 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9366). .. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S9361 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 201 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9367). After executing the processing of step S9363, step S9365, step S9366, or step S9367, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery performed in step S9305 of FIG. 309 has been described with reference to FIG. 312. The explanation is returned to FIG. 309.

After executing the process of step S9305, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the second production stage logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

The second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 313 is the second effect stage when the current effect stage is the second effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 200 after the lottery process.

In the second effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 307) occurs during this special symbol change (step S9401). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the effect performed during the special symbol change based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change in the second effect stage notice content lottery process. I have decided. In the process of step S9401, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the eighth notice effect is determined as the effect to be performed during the special symbol variation this time.

When it is determined that the eighth notice effect is generated during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 determines the logo lamp notice content based on the sub change pattern corresponding to the current special symbol change (step S9402). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the eighth notice effect does not occur during the special symbol change this time, the sub CPU 201 determines that the logo lamp advance notice effect is not performed (step S9403). After executing the process of step S9402 or step S9403, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Third production stage logo lamp notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing the third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

The third effect stage logo lamp notice content lottery process shown in FIG. 314 is the third effect stage when the current effect stage is the third effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300). Production stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 200 after the lottery process.

Third effect stage logo lamp notice content In the lottery process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not a pseudo continuous effect occurs based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9451). When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9452). In the third production stage, the stage in the pseudo-continuous production progresses only to "pseudo 2". Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice contents of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 315.

In the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production (step S9461). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 201 uses a pattern of decorative symbols at the "pseudo 2" stage during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S9461, the sub CPU 201 includes a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 2". In "pseudo 2", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

If it is determined that a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai will occur at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 will notify the logo lamp for pseudo 2 based on the sub-variation pattern corresponding to this special symbol variation. Is determined (step S9462). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 2".

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production, the sub CPU 201 determines that the logo lamp advance notice production is not performed in "pseudo 2" (step S9463). .. After executing the process of step S9462 or step S9463, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content lottery performed in step S9452 of FIG. 314 has been described with reference to FIG. 315. The explanation is returned to FIG. 314.

When it is determined in step S9451 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9452 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process (step S9453). Hereinafter, the lottery process for the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 316.

In the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a 10-second tempai or a 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production. (Step S4971). Prior to executing this process, the sub CPU 201 uses a pattern of decorative symbols at the "pseudo 1" stage during the special symbol variation based on the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time. It is decided whether to stop (decorative pattern stop pattern). In the process of step S4971, the sub CPU 201 includes a decorative symbol stop pattern (10-second tempai stop pattern) such that the decorative symbol stop pattern becomes a reach mode 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the decorative symbol in "pseudo 1". In "pseudo 1", it is determined whether or not the decorative symbol is one of the decorative symbol stop patterns (14-second tempai stop pattern) in which the decorative symbol reaches the reach mode 14 seconds after the start of fluctuation. ..

When it is determined that the 10-second tempai or the 14-second tempai is generated at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the notice content of the logo lamp for pseudo 2 is determined. Determine (step S9472). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined when the process of step S9462 of FIG. 315 is being executed, while the sub CPU 201 is otherwise (step S9463 of FIG. 310). When the process of Pseudo 2 is executed, or when the pseudo continuous effect does not occur), it is determined that the content of the notice of the logo lamp for Pseudo 2 has not been determined.

When it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content (step S9473). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. For example, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". -Determine any of the effects corresponding to "163". Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "162" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". One of the effects corresponding to "162" is determined. Further, when the effect corresponding to the effect number "161" is determined as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 2", the sub CPU 201 has the effect number "161" as the logo lamp advance effect performed in "pseudo 1". Determine the production corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo 2 logo lamp notice content has not been determined, the sub CPU 201 determines the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content based on the sub fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time (step S9474). .. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value. As a result, one of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" is determined as the logo lamp advance notice effect performed in "pseudo 1".

If it is determined in step S4971 that neither the 10-second tempai nor the 14-second tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous production or the "pseudo-less" production, the sub CPU 201 performs the logo lamp warning effect in "pseudo 1". It is determined that there is no such thing (step S9475). After executing the process of step S9473, step S9474, or step S9475, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the lottery process for the pseudo 1 logo lamp notice content lottery performed in step S9453 of FIG. 314 has been described with reference to FIG. 316. The explanation is returned to FIG. 314.

After executing the process of step S9453, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Screen display in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 317 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the probability variation mode.

As described above, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 251 (a)). In the bonus mode, most of the right-handed game balls win the small hit winning opening 560 while the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal symbol fluctuation) is being performed (over 600,000 msec), and a large number of games are played. The ball is paid out.

Therefore, in the probability variation mode, the player plays the game while expecting that a variation pattern (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250) having a variation time of 600,000 msec is determined as a normal symbol variation pattern. For this reason, in the probability variation mode, every time the normal symbol change is performed, an effect (drum variation effect) corresponding to the pattern of the normal symbol variation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 317, in the probability variation mode, the drum image 9201 (left drum image 9201L, middle drum image 9201C, and right drum image 9201R) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The drum image 9201 is an image imitating a drum (reel). Then, in the area where each drum image 9201 is displayed, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the drum symbol 9202 (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R).

In the example shown in FIG. 317 (a), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in such a manner that they are fluctuating. In the example shown in FIG. 317 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped as the "bell" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol, and the "cherry" symbol, respectively. It is displayed in such a manner. In this way, in the probability variation mode, every time the symbol is changed, an effect (drum variation effect) that imitates the reel variation display and the stop display (slot game) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 317, in the probability variation mode, the remaining ST number image 9203 and the prize ball number image 9204 are also displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The remaining ST number image 9203 is an image corresponding to the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations (remaining ST number) performed in the probability variation mode. When the probability variation mode is started, "50" is displayed as the remaining ST number image 9203, and thereafter, each time the special symbol change is performed, the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 is decremented by one. When the number indicated as the remaining ST number image 9203 becomes "0", the probability variation mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. The prize ball number image 9204 is an image corresponding to the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode.

Here, in the present specification, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is referred to as the first bonus mode. In the first bonus mode, as in the probability variation mode, the value indicating the remaining number of STs is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed once. Then, when the value indicating the remaining number of STs becomes 0, the mode shifts from the first bonus mode to the normal mode. Therefore, the probability variation mode and the first bonus mode are collectively referred to as the remaining ST number subtraction mode. When shifting from the probabilistic mode to the first bonus mode, the remaining ST number in the probabilistic mode is not reset, and the remaining ST number is inherited in the first bonus mode as well. In the present specification, the remaining ST number subtraction mode may be referred to as a probability variation mode.

On the other hand, even when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the probability variation mode, the mode shifts to the bonus mode (see FIG. 251 (a)). In the present specification, the bonus mode that shifts with the start of the jackpot game state as a trigger is referred to as a second bonus mode. When the mode shifts to the second bonus mode, the remaining ST number is reset, and the remaining ST number is not updated (managed) in the second bonus mode. When the second bonus mode ends, if the limiter has not been reached, "50" is set as the remaining number of STs.

<Drum fluctuation production determination process>
FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing a drum variation effect determination process according to the ninth embodiment.

The drum variation effect determination process shown in FIG. 318 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49 (passing through the gate). Is. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 49 by receiving the ball passage detector passage detection command. The ball passage detector passage detection command is set by the main control circuit 100 in the ball passage detector passage detection process (see step S65 in FIG. 109) and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

In the drum variation effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 251 (a)) (step S9501). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203, and the sub CPU 201 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol variation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time corresponds to the variation in the normal symbol loss length (variation shown in FIG. 250). It is determined whether or not the pattern is “05H”) (step S9502). Since the ball passage detector passage detection command includes information indicating the normal symbol variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 receives the ball passage detector passage detection command, and the sub CPU 201 performs the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the current gate passage. Can be recognized.

When it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more. (Step S9503). The remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode (probability variation mode and first bonus mode). A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 203, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is less than the predetermined number (10 times), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the ST recovery is confirmed (whether it is determined to shift to the jackpot game state) (step). S9504). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the ST recovery when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the currently performed special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot. It is judged that the ball is in the jackpot game state (it has been decided to shift to the jackpot game state). As described above, after the jackpot game state ends, the probability change flag is set to ON (see FIG. 247), and the state returns to the probability change mode (ST recovers). However, when the jackpot game state is executed and the number of jackpot game states executed from the first hit reaches a predetermined number (5 times) (when the limiter is reached), the probability change mode is not restored. , Shift to normal mode. Therefore, in this case, it may be determined that the ST recovery has not been confirmed.

When it is determined in step S9502 that the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined by passing through the gate this time is not a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, or in step S9504, ST recovery is not confirmed (big hit game state). (Step S9505), the sub CPU 201 determines the drum variation effect pattern to be a loss pattern. As the loss pattern, all the loss patterns and some loss patterns are provided. The all-loss pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which all different symbols are stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As for some lost patterns, of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, the same symbol is stopped and displayed as two symbols, and the remaining one symbol is different from the two symbols. Is a drum fluctuation effect pattern in which is displayed as a stop.

As all the lost patterns, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. Such a pattern or a pattern in which the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. Etc. are provided. As some lost patterns, for example, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. The "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the right drum symbol 9202R. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern are provided.

In the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value to obtain one loss pattern from among such a plurality of loss patterns (a plurality of all loss patterns and a plurality of partial loss patterns). It is determined as the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the passage of the gate this time. After executing the process of step S9505, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S9503, it is determined that the number of remaining STs is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (10 times), or in step S9504, it is determined that ST recovery is confirmed (it is determined to shift to the jackpot gaming state). In this case, the sub CPU 201 determines the drum variation effect pattern as the hit pattern (step S9506). The hit pattern is a drum variation effect pattern in which the same symbols are all stopped and displayed as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R. As the hit pattern, for example, as the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, all the "bell" symbols are stopped and displayed, and all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped and displayed. A plurality of patterns such as a pattern in which the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed are provided. In the process of step S9506, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value to select one of the plurality of hit patterns during the normal symbol variation corresponding to the current gate passage. Determined as a pattern for drum fluctuation production.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a loss length variation look-ahead lottery (step S9507). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9508). When it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 201 sets the loss length variation look-ahead flag to ON (step S9509). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation is determined in the subsequent drum variation effect (the loss length variation look-ahead effect is performed) (see FIG. 319). The loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is set to off when the normal symbol variation (normal symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the current gate passage starts.

When it is determined in step S9508 that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9509, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the start of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of the drum variation effect according to the ninth embodiment.

The processing at the start of the drum variation effect shown in FIG. 319 is the effect mode determination process (FIG. 41) by the sub control circuit 200 when the normal symbol variation related to the passage of the game ball starts after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 49. This is the process performed in step S205). The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 40).

In the drum variation effect start processing, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (see FIG. 251 (a)) (step S9521). Information indicating the effect mode is stored in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203, and the sub CPU 201 recognizes the current effect mode by referring to the effect mode flag storage area. Can be done.

When it is determined that the current effect mode is not the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current effect mode is the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 201 has a lost pattern (step of FIG. 318) in which the drum variation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation of this time occurs. It is determined whether or not it is (see S9505) (step S9522).

When it is determined that the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is not a loss pattern, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation this time occurs is the loss pattern, the sub CPU 201 determines the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag (see step S9509 in FIG. 318). ) Is set to on (step S9523)

When it is determined that the loss length fluctuation look-ahead flag is not set on, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loss length variation look-ahead flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 201 changes the drum variation effect pattern to the look-ahead pattern (step S9524). The look-ahead pattern is the partial loss pattern described above.

In the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 201 has a random value when all the drum fluctuation effect patterns (see step S9505 in FIG. 318) determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation this time occurs are lost patterns. By performing a lottery based on the above, one partial loss pattern is selected from a plurality of partial loss patterns, and the pattern of the drum fluctuation effect performed during the current normal symbol variation is the selected partial loss pattern. Replace with a pattern. If the drum fluctuation effect pattern determined when the gate passage corresponding to the normal symbol variation this time occurs is a partial loss pattern, the sub CPU 201 does not perform such a replacement process and has already been determined. Maintain the drum fluctuation effect pattern. After executing the process of step S9524, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Specific aspects of drum fluctuation production>
FIG. 320 is a diagram showing the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation currently being performed and the normal symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball. 321 to 323 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the drum fluctuation effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, up to four start information of the normal symbol (random number value for normal hit determination and random number for determining the normal symbol fluctuation pattern) are reserved. In FIG. 320 (a), there are three reserved balls in a situation where one normal symbol change is performed, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol change this time, and the first reserved ball. 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to, and 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the normal symbol corresponding to the third reserved ball. It shows a state in which 500 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the symbol variation.

In FIG. 320 (b), after the state shown in FIG. 320 (a), one game ball passes through the passage gate 49 while the normal symbol change is being performed, and the normal lottery accompanying the passage ( It shows a state in which 600,000 ms is determined as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation corresponding to the fourth reserved ball). FIG. 320 (c) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (b) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 320 (d) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (c) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 320 (e) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (d) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (500 ms) is being performed. FIG. 320 (f) shows a state in which the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (e) is completed and the next normal symbol variation (600,000 ms) is being performed.

FIG. 321 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b). In FIG. 321 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 321 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 321 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 321 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (c). In FIG. 321 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 321 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 321 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 321 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (d). In FIG. 321 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 321 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (d) of 500 ms, in FIG. 321 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 321 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (e). In FIG. 321 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 321 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (e) of 500 ms, in FIG. 321 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 321 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are displayed in a variable manner in the state shown in FIG. 320 (f). In FIG. 321 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 321 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 321 (k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, one drum variation effect is a variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol. It is composed of a stop display of 9202R. The variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R starts at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation and is performed for 500 ms, and each drum symbol 9202 stops at the same time. Here, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is 500 ms, so that the stop timings of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are normal. It matches the stop timing of the symbol.

Further, the stop display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed for 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the variation display of the next drum variation effect 1500 ms after the variation of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R has stopped in one drum variation effect. be. On the other hand, when the result of the normal lottery is a normal hit, the time from the end of the normal symbol fluctuation (after the normal symbol is stopped) to the end of the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 is 1500 ms. Therefore, it is possible to start the next normal symbol change after 1500 ms has elapsed from the stop of the normal symbol in one normal symbol change. As a result, the cycle of the drum fluctuation effect and the cycle of the normal symbol fluctuation can be matched.

FIG. 321 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, but the loss length fluctuation look-ahead lottery is not won. On the other hand, FIG. 322 shows an example in which a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined as the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the lose length fluctuation look-ahead lottery is won.

FIG. 322 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b). In FIG. 322 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 322 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 322 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 322 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (c). In FIG. 322 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 322 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 322 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (c) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 322 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (d). In FIG. 322 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 322 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 322 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (d) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 322 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (e). In FIG. 322 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 322 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 322 (h), the left drum symbol 9202L and the middle drum correspond to the fact that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (e) is 500 ms and the loss length variation look-ahead lottery is won. The symbol 9202C and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 322 (i) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (f). In FIG. 322 (j), the variation display shown in FIG. 322 (i) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 322 (j), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are hit patterns corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (f) being 600,000 ms. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 322 (k), an image corresponding to the start of "BONUS" (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 322, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 322 (j)), and are left. The drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in a lost pattern (see FIGS. 322 (d), 322 (f), and 322 (h)). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was determined (the normal symbol loss length variation was won). Even if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, there is a possibility that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are partially stopped and displayed in the loss pattern ( See step S9505 in FIG. 318). If a partial loss pattern appears even though the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, it can be said that the stop display of the partial loss pattern is a ghost effect.

In the above, as an effect of pre-reading the loss length fluctuation, an example in which a part of the loss pattern is stopped and displayed has been described. The loss length variation look-ahead effect is not limited to this example, and for example, the loss length variation look-ahead effect as shown in FIG. 323 may be adopted.

FIG. 323 (a) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b). In FIG. 323 (b), the variation display shown in FIG. 323 (a) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 323 (b), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 320 (a) and 320 (b) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 323 (c) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (c). In FIG. 323 (d), the variation display shown in FIG. 323 (c) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (c) of 500 ms, in FIG. 323 (d), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are lost patterns. It is stopped and displayed at.

FIG. 323 (e) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the states shown in FIGS. 320 (d) and 320 (e). As described above, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is usually performed over 500 ms. On the other hand, the variation display shown in FIG. 323 (e) is performed over 4500 ms. In FIG. 323 (f), the variation display shown in FIG. 323 (e) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. In FIG. 323 (f), the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R correspond to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIGS. 320 (d) and (e) being 500 ms. However, it is stopped and displayed with a loss pattern.

FIG. 323 (g) shows that the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are variably displayed in the state shown in FIG. 320 (f). In FIG. 323 (h), the variation display shown in FIG. 323 (g) is completed, and the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (f) of 600,000 ms, in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at. In FIG. 323 (i), an image corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the bonus mode) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the example shown in FIG. 323, one drum fluctuation effect is performed while the normal symbol fluctuation shown in FIG. 320 (d) and the normal symbol fluctuation (two normal symbol fluctuations) shown in FIG. 320 (e) are performed. It is supposed to be done. This suggests that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won. As described above, the loss length variation look-ahead effect may be configured such that one drum variation effect is performed while a plurality of normal symbol variations are performed. It is desirable that such a longer-than-normal drum fluctuation effect (long-time drum variation effect) be performed when the normal symbol loss length variation is won, but the normal symbol loss length variation is not won. It may be done in some cases. In a form in which a long-time drum fluctuation effect can be performed in both cases where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won. In this case, it is preferable to configure the drum fluctuation effect to be performed for a long time with a high probability as compared with the case where the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won.

As described above, in FIGS. 321 to 323, the gate passage occurs in the situation where the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number (10 times) or more, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation corresponds to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. An example in which the pattern was determined was described. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern. On the other hand, the gate passage occurred in the situation where the remaining number of STs was less than the predetermined number (10 times), and the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation was determined as the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the gate passage. In this case, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a loss pattern (see step S9503 in FIG. 318).

The normal symbol loss length fluctuation is performed over a long period of time (600,000 ms), but if the normal symbol loss length fluctuation occurs after the number of remaining STs is reduced, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed. Then, the probability change mode (probability change game state) ends. When the probability variation game state ends, if the result of the second special lottery is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes very long (see Fig. 248), so the game ball is won in the small hit winning opening 560. You can hardly make it. Therefore, in this case, since the meaning of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is lost, it is decided to refrain from making the hit pattern appear.

Although it is explained that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 600,000 ms, the variation time is not limited to this example. For example, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, a plurality of fluctuation times such as 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, and 600 seconds are provided. It may be done. In this case, the remaining number of STs in which the hit pattern can appear may be made different according to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. _{For example, when T 1} second (for example, 60 seconds) and T ₂ seconds (for example, 120 seconds) (T ₁ <T ₂ ) are provided as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation _{, T 1} second is normal. When the symbol loss length fluctuation is determined _{, a hit pattern appears on condition that the remaining ST number is N 1} time (for example, 10 times) or more, while when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation of _{T 2 seconds is determined.} The hit pattern may appear on condition that the remaining number of STs is N ₂ times (for example, 20 times) or more (N ₁ <N _2).

Further, the mode of the hit pattern may be different depending on the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length variation is determined. For example, when the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is 40 or more, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined. When the number of remaining STs is 20 or more and less than 40, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202, and the number of remaining STs when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is determined is less than 20. The "bell" symbol may be stopped and displayed as the drum symbol 9202.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is started at the same time as the start of the normal symbol variation. The start timing of the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 is not limited to this example, and the variation display of the drum symbol 9202 may be started while the normal symbol variation is being performed. For example, the variation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R may be started from the time when 1000 ms has elapsed from the start of the normal symbol variation. In this case, for example, the fluctuation display of the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R is performed from the time when one normal symbol change is started to the time when 1000 ms has elapsed to the time when 1500 ms has elapsed. , The left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped from the time when 1500 ms elapses from the start of the normal symbol change to the time when 1000 ms elapses from the start of the next normal symbol change. It can be configured to display.

By performing the fluctuation display and the stop display of the drum symbol 9202 so as to straddle the two normal symbol fluctuations in this way, for example, while the normal symbol variation shown in FIG. 320 (e) is being performed ( For example, the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in the hit pattern (see FIG. 321 (j)) after 1500 ms have elapsed since the normal symbol fluctuation was started. Is possible. As a result, the stop display shown in FIG. 321 (j) is performed before the normal symbol loss length fluctuation shown in FIG. 320 (f) is started. As a result, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is started. Immediately after that, the image as shown in FIG. 321 (k) can be displayed. From this point of view, the stop display shown in FIG. 321 (j) may be terminated before the start of the normal symbol loss length variation or at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length variation.

In the above, it has been described that the image as shown in FIG. 321 (k) is displayed after the stop display shown in FIG. 321 (j) is performed, and then or at the same time, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts. When the normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts, it may be configured not to display either the stop display shown in FIG. 321 (j) or the image displayed as shown in FIG. 321 (k). However, both may be configured not to be displayed. Further, by displaying a small symbol instead of (or in addition to) the stop display shown in FIG. 321 (j) and the image display as shown in FIG. 321 (k), the normal symbol loss length is obtained. It may be configured to indicate that the fluctuation starts.

<Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion production>
FIGS. 324 and 325 are diagrams showing an example of the effect of suggesting the remaining time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length.

As described above, in the probability variation mode (see FIG. 251 (a)), when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation display of the normal symbol such that the fluctuation time is 600,000 msec) starts, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. .. In the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect is performed. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time suggestion effect, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is an image showing the time corresponding to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is suggested through the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. ..

In FIG. 324 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a, after the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R are stopped and displayed in a hit pattern (see FIG. 321 (j)), the drum symbol 9202 Is displayed when the display of is finished. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an example of an image (see FIG. 321 (k)) corresponding to the start of “BONUS” (shifting to the first bonus mode). In this example, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a is an image corresponding to the number "600: 00" as the normal symbol fluctuation of 600,000 ms starts as the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

After the state shown in FIG. 324 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 324 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9210j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Although not shown in the figure, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210a → normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image. 9210b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j, the color of the image becomes lighter as the number shown by the image changes. It will become. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

In the above, the example in which the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is displayed at the start of the first bonus mode has been described, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed in the middle of the first bonus mode. ..

In the first bonus mode, a battle effect may be performed during the first bonus mode as an effect suggesting that the result of the second special lottery may have been a big hit. In the battle effect during the first bonus mode, the appearance of the ally character and the enemy character fighting is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. When a ally character defeats an enemy character in such a battle effect during the first bonus mode, a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image may be displayed. That is, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image can be displayed in a situation where the expectation that the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is relatively high.

In FIG. 325 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this example, in the battle production during the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at the time when the ally character defeats the enemy character is about 30,000 ms, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a Is an image corresponding to the number "30:00".

After the state shown in FIG. 325 (a), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image is, as shown in FIGS. 325 (b) to (j), the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation Remaining time image 9211j, and so on. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j are sequentially displayed for a short time (for example, about 500 ms), and the numbers indicated by the images decrease with time.

Similar to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9210a to j, they do not appear in the figure, but the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time images 9211a to j have different color depths, and the normal symbol loss length is lost. Length fluctuation remaining time image 9211a → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211b → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211c → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211d → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211e → Normal symbol loss Long fluctuation remaining time image 9211f → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211g → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211h → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211i → Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j and the image As the number indicated by changes, the color of the image becomes lighter. The color of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is considerably lightened, and after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211j is displayed, the display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image disappears. There is.

It should be noted that the numbers shown by the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image do not necessarily correspond exactly to the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time As an image, a plurality of remaining times (for example, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds) , And 600 seconds) are provided. Normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time When an image is displayed, the image corresponding to the remaining time closest to the (actual) remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at that time is selected, and the selected normal symbol loss length is selected. The variable remaining time image is displayed. The normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9210 shown in FIG. 324 is a normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image corresponding to 600 seconds, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image 9211 shown in FIG. 325 corresponds to 30 seconds. It is an image of the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image as described above is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the drum fluctuation effect is not performed (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and , The right drum symbol 9202R is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16).

<Processing at the time of big hit in the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing according to the ninth embodiment.

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing shown in FIG. 326, when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the first bonus mode and the jackpot gaming state starts, the sub-control circuit 200 determines the effect mode (FIG. FIG. This is the process performed in step S205 of step 41). As described above, the first bonus mode is a bonus mode in which the transition is triggered by the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the jackpot gaming state starts by receiving the jackpot start command (see step S40148 in FIG. 134).

In the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the prize ball counter addition processing (step S9601). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 329.

Next, the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the second bonus mode (step S9602). The second bonus mode is a bonus mode that shifts when the start condition of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied in the probability variation mode or the first bonus mode. In the process of step S9602, the sub CPU 201 stores information indicating the second bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of the second bonus mode according to the ninth embodiment.

The process at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 327 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) when the jackpot gaming state ends in the second bonus mode. .. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the jackpot game state ends by receiving the jackpot end command. The jackpot end command is set by the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when the jackpot flag is cleared (see step S40226 in FIG. 138).

In the process at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of limiters has been reached based on the current jackpot game state (step S9621). In this process, the sub CPU 201 has a predetermined number of times (5 times) of the big hit game states executed from the first hit (the big hit game state ending this time is the fifth big hit after the first hit (including the first hit). Judge whether or not it is in a gaming state).

When it is determined that the number of limiters has not been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length is changing (currently, the normal symbol loss length is changing). Determine (step S9622). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern related to the normal symbol variation has expired after the variation display of the normal symbol related to the normal symbol loss length variation is started. The sub CPU 201 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the above-mentioned normal symbol change start command. Further, since the normal symbol change start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol change pattern (see FIG. 250), the sub CPU 201 can change the normal symbol by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The fluctuation time of the pattern can be recognized. Then, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub-control circuit 200. The remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is updated by a timer update process (not shown) performed in a predetermined cycle. In the process of step S9622, when the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is larger than 0, the sub CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is in progress.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is fluctuating, the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the first bonus mode (step S9623). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information indicating the first bonus mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the probability variation mode (step S9624). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information indicating the probability variation mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9625). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In the present embodiment, even when the game ball passes through the passing gate 49 during the big hit game state, the normal lottery is performed (the normal symbol variation pattern is determined) as in the non-big hit game state. It is supposed to be. The normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate may be performed during the big hit game state, or may be performed after the end of the big hit game state.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9626). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot.

After executing the process of step S9623, if it is determined in step S9625 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, or if it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 has the number of prize balls. The counter addition process is executed (step S9627). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 329. After executing the process of step S9627, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9621 that the number of limiters has been reached due to the current jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the second bonus mode to the normal mode (step S9628). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information indicating the normal mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203.

If it is determined in step S9626 that the jackpot has not been won, or after executing the process of step S9628, the sub CPU 201 executes the result display process during the bonus mode (step S9629). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 330. After executing the process of step S9629, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of the first bonus mode>
FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of the first bonus mode according to the ninth embodiment.

The process at the end of the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 328 is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) when the normal symbol loss length variation ends in the first bonus mode. Is. As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 200, and the sub control circuit 200 has the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. By referring to the remaining time, it can be recognized that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation ends.

In the process at the end of the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9641). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9642). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a jackpot.

When it is determined in the step S9641 that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, or when it is determined in the step S9642 that the jackpot is won, the sub CPU 201 executes the prize ball counter addition process (step S9643). ). The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 329.

If it is determined in step S9642 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the result display process in the bonus mode (step S9644). The result display processing in the bonus mode will be described later with reference to FIG. 330.

After executing the process of step S9643 or step S9644, the sub CPU 201 shifts the effect mode from the first bonus mode to the probability variation mode (step S9645). In this process, the sub CPU 201 stores information indicating the probability variation mode in the effect mode flag storage area (not shown) of the work RAM 203. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Prize ball counter addition processing>
FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the prize ball counter addition processing according to the ninth embodiment.

The prize ball counter addition processing shown in FIG. 329 is the first bonus mode medium jackpot processing (see step S9601 in FIG. 326), the second bonus mode end processing (see step S9627 in FIG. 327), or the first bonus. This is a process performed at the end of the mode (see step S9643 in FIG. 327).

In the prize ball counter addition process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the extra game flag is set to ON (step S9661). The extra game flag is a flag indicating that an extra game has occurred. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation mode is changed to the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode, and after the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode is completed, the player stays in the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode. There is. In this case, it is considered that the bonus mode is continuing (consecutive villa). In the following, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode that first shifts from the probability variation mode will be referred to as an initial game. Further, the first bonus mode or the second bonus mode in which the player stays continuously after the end of the initial game is referred to as an extra game.

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set to on, the sub CPU 201 initially sets the game prize ball counter (step S9662). The value of the initial game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). The total number of game balls paid out during this bonus mode is managed at any time in the work RAM 203. In the process of step S9662, the sub CPU 201 stores the total number as the value of the initial game prize ball counter in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203. Subsequently, the sub CPU 201 sets the extra game flag to ON (step S9663).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the extra game prize ball counter to the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as an extra game). The total number of game balls paid out in the game is added (step S9664). The value of the extra game prize ball counter indicates the total number of game balls paid out during the extra game, and is stored in the work RAM 203. In the process of step S9664, the sub CPU 201 pays out to the value of the extra game prize ball counter value stored in the work RAM 203 during the current extra game (first bonus mode or second bonus mode). The value obtained by adding the total number of the above is stored in the work RAM 203 as the value of the new extra game in-game prize ball counter.

After executing the process of step S9663 or step S9664, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Result display processing during bonus mode>
FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the result display processing in the bonus mode according to the ninth embodiment.

The bonus mode result display process shown in FIG. 330 is a process performed in the second bonus mode end process (see step S9629 in FIG. 327) or the first bonus mode end process (see step S9644 in FIG. 328). be.

In the result display processing during the bonus mode, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the extra game flag (see step S9663 in FIG. 329) is set to ON (step S9881).

If it is determined that the extra game flag is not set on, the sub CPU 201 determines the total number of game balls paid out during the current bonus mode (first bonus mode or second bonus mode as the initial game). Initially, the value of the game prize ball counter) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S9682).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the extra game flag is set to on, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the total value of the value of the initial game prize ball counter and the value of the extra game prize ball counter. (Step S9683). The total value corresponds to the total number of game balls paid out during the period from the transition from the probability variation mode to the initial game to the present (bonus mode consecutive villa section). Subsequently, the sub CPU 201 sets the extra game flag to off (step S9684).

After executing the process of step S9682 or step S9684, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Direction processing at the end of the second bonus mode>
FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode according to the ninth embodiment.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode shown in FIG. 331, for example, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 327 that the normal symbol loss length is changing, the sub control circuit 200 is performed before the processing of step S9623 is performed. Is done by.

In the effect processing at the end of the second bonus mode, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more (step S9701). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 10 seconds, the sub CPU 201 sets the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode (step S9702). The effect data for returning to the probability change mode is effect data corresponding to an effect indicating that the state returns to the probability change mode (probability change mode return effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9702, the probability change mode return effect is performed. For example, a probability change mode return image (an image indicating that the probability change mode is returned) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 10 seconds or more, the sub CPU 201 sets the extra game entry effect data (step S9703). The extra game rush effect data is the effect data corresponding to the effect indicating that the extra game is rushed (extra game rush effect), and is stored in the program ROM 202. By executing the process of step S9703, the extra game rush effect is performed. For example, an extra game rush image (an image indicating that the extra game is rushed) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

After executing the process of step S9702 or step S9703, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When the process of step S9702 is executed, the sub CPU 201 may move to the process of step S9625 of FIG. 327. Further, when it is determined in step S9622 of FIG. 327 that the normal symbol loss length is not fluctuating, the sub CPU 201 is the same as the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode set in step S9702 (for entering the extra game set in step S9703). The effect data (different from the effect data) may be set, or the effect data different from the effect data for returning to the probability variation mode (different from the effect data for entering the extra game) may be set.

<Processing during the 1st bonus mode>
FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing the processing during the first bonus mode according to the ninth embodiment.

The process during the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 332 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) by the sub-control circuit 200 in the first bonus mode. For example, the processing during the first bonus mode is performed when the second special symbol change starts in the first bonus mode.

In the process during the first bonus mode, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more (step S9721). As described above, while the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is managed by the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 recognizes the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. can do.

When it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the sub CPU 201 executes the process (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9722). The first bonus mode processing (I) will be described later with reference to FIG. 333.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won (step S9723). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the first bonus mode processing (II) (step S9724). The first bonus mode processing (II) will be described later with reference to FIG. 334.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the first bonus mode processing (III) (step S9725). The first bonus mode processing (III) will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

After executing the process of step S9722, step S9724, or step S9725, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (I)>
FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (I) according to the ninth embodiment.

The first bonus mode processing (I) shown in FIG. 333 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9722 in FIG. 332).

In the first bonus mode processing (I), first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9741). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 203, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9742). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (A) during the first bonus mode (step S9743). In the first bonus mode, the effect (A) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9743, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 executes the first bonus mode end fanning lottery, and when the lottery is won, displays the first bonus mode end fanning image on the liquid crystal display device 16. The first bonus mode end fanning image is an image that fangs the end of the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9743, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9742 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (B) during the first bonus mode (step S9744). In the first bonus mode production (B), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9744, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the bonus mode will continue for the time being. The image displayed by the process of step S9744 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode. After executing the process of step S9744, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9741 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9745). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (C) during the first bonus mode (step S9746). In the first bonus mode, the effect (C) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9746, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9746 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9746, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9745 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (D) during the first bonus mode (step S9747). In the first bonus mode, the effect (D) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is 15 seconds or more, the remaining ST number is less than 5, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9747, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9747 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9747, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (II)>
FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (II) according to the ninth embodiment.

The first bonus mode processing (II) shown in FIG. 334 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9724 in FIG. 332).

In the first bonus mode processing (II), first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9761). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 203, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9762). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (E) during the first bonus mode (step S9763). In the first bonus mode production (E), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is won. In the process of step S9763, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9763 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (A) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9763, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9762 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (F) during the first bonus mode (step S9764). In the first bonus mode production (F), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining number of STs is 5 times. This is the effect that is performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9764, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9764 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (E) during the first bonus mode. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (B) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9764, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9761 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9765). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (G) during the first bonus mode (step S9766). In the first bonus mode production (G), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, the remaining ST number is less than 5 times, and This is a production that is performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9766, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9766 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (C) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9766, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9765 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (H) during the first bonus mode (step S9767). In the first bonus mode production (H), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times. It is a production performed when the number is less than and the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9767, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (E) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9767 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effect (D) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9767, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during the first bonus mode (III)>
FIG. 335 is a flowchart showing the first bonus mode processing (III) according to the ninth embodiment.

The first bonus mode processing (III) shown in FIG. 335 is a processing performed in the first bonus mode processing (see step S9725 in FIG. 332).

In the first bonus mode processing (III), first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the remaining number of STs is 5 or more (step S9781). As described above, the remaining ST number is the remaining number of special symbol fluctuations performed in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. A value indicating the remaining number of STs is stored in the work RAM 203, and the value is updated every time a special symbol change is performed.

When it is determined that the number of remaining STs is 5 or more, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9782). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (I) during the first bonus mode (step S9783). In the first bonus mode production (I), in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining ST number of times is 5 times or more. And, it is a production performed when a big hit is won. In the process of step S9783, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is small. .. The image displayed by the process of step S9783 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (A) to (E) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9782 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (J) during the first bonus mode (step S9784). In the first bonus mode, the production (J) has less than 15 seconds remaining in the normal symbol loss length fluctuation in the first bonus mode, has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and has 5 or more remaining STs. And, it is a production performed when the big hit is not won. In the process of step S9784, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won again although the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is small. .. The image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the effect (I) during the first bonus mode. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9784 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (B) to (F) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9781 that the number of remaining STs is less than 5, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9785). In this process, the sub CPU 201 wins the jackpot when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation and the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball performed this time is a jackpot. Judge.

If it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (K) during the first bonus mode (step S9786). In the first bonus mode production (K), the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the remaining ST number of times is less than 5, and the jackpot It is a production that is performed when you are elected. In the process of step S9786, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low but the ST recovery is confirmed. The image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (J) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9786 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (C) to (G) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

If it is determined in step S9785 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect (L) during the first bonus mode (step S9787). In the first bonus mode, the effect (L) is that in the first bonus mode, the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is less than 15 seconds, the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, and the remaining number of STs is less than 5 times. It is a production that is performed when the jackpot is not won. In the process of step S9787, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the number of STs is low and the bonus mode is about to end. The image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (I) to (K) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image. Further, the image displayed by the process of step S9787 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the effects (D) to (H) during the first bonus mode, or may be a different image.

After executing the processes of step S9783, step S9784, step S9786, or step S9787, the sub CPU 201 extends the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length variation (step S9788). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the fluctuation time (for example, 600,000 ms) of the winning normal symbol fluctuation as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The winning ordinary symbol variation is the ordinary symbol variation related to the ordinary symbol loss length variation among the pending ordinary symbol variations. If the pending normal symbol fluctuations include a plurality of winning normal symbol fluctuations, the sub CPU 201 will start the fluctuation first among the plurality of winning normal symbol fluctuations. The fluctuation time is set as the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. The remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length change set in this way is not updated by the timer update process until the winning normal symbol change starts, and is subtracted after the start of the winning normal symbol change.

After executing the process of step S9788, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. As a result, after that, the production will be performed according to the remaining time of the new normal symbol loss length fluctuation. In other words, when the content of the production is decided, it is usually treated as if the remaining time of the symbol loss length fluctuation was extended. For example, in the second special symbol variation this time, any one of the effects (I) to (L) in the first bonus mode shown in FIG. 335 is caused by the processing of step S9725 in FIG. 332. On the other hand, in the next second special symbol change, the process of step S9722 of FIG. 332 is performed, and any of the first bonus mode in-stage effects (A) to (D) shown in FIG. 333 is performed. It will be.

As described above, the processing during the first bonus mode described with reference to FIGS. 332 to 335 may be performed in the first bonus mode as the initial game described above, or the first bonus as an extra game (see FIG. 329). It may be done in a mode or in both of these first bonus modes. As described above, in the first bonus mode, a plurality of times including the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the presence or absence of winning the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, the number of remaining STs, and the presence or absence of winning the jackpot. It is possible to perform an effect according to one of the elements or any two or more elements.

In the first bonus mode, the drum variation effect described above may be performed as an effect according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. For example, when the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in the hit pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). If the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is not a jackpot, the drum symbol 9202 is stopped and displayed in a loss pattern as a drum variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (performed during the special symbol variation). It may be done. In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination related to one special symbol variation is a jackpot, a look-ahead effect (for example, an effect similar to the above-mentioned loss length variation look-ahead effect) is performed before the special symbol change is started. It may be said. As such a look-ahead effect, the same effect may be performed regardless of the number of remaining STs, or depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, when the number of remaining STs is 5 or more and less than 5). It may be possible that different effects can be performed (in some cases).

Further, when the drum variation effect is performed as the effect according to the special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be associated with one special symbol variation. For example, while one special symbol variation is being performed, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. Further, before the start of one special symbol variation, a plurality of drum variation effects may be performed as an effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation. As described above, one drum variation effect can be completed in about 2 seconds, and it is possible to configure the drum variation effect to be repeated a plurality of times.

<Remaining ST count adjustment process>
FIG. 336 is a flowchart showing the remaining ST number adjustment process according to the ninth embodiment.

In the above, it has been described that the remaining ST number image 9203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the probability variation mode (remaining ST number subtraction mode) (see FIG. 317). The remaining ST number image 9203 may show an accurate value of the remaining ST number, or may not necessarily show an accurate value of the remaining ST number (suggest the remaining ST number). In the following, the remaining ST number image 9203 will be described as suggesting the remaining ST number.

The remaining ST number adjustment process shown in FIG. 336 is a process performed at a predetermined timing in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. For example, the remaining ST number adjustment process is performed when the first bonus mode starts or when the first bonus mode ends.

In the remaining ST number adjustment process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number (step S9801). Actually, the value of the remaining ST number is an accurate value of the remaining ST number, and as described above, the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time the special symbol change is performed. The value of the remaining ST number for display is an approximate value of the remaining ST number, and the value is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. Remaining ST Count The number shown as the image 9203 corresponds to the value of the remaining ST count for display. The actual remaining ST count value and the display remaining ST count value are stored in the work RAM 203, respectively.

When it is determined that there is a difference between the value of the remaining ST count for display and the value of the actual remaining ST count, the sub CPU 201 sets the value of the actual remaining ST count to the value of the remaining ST count for display (step S9802). ). As a result, the value of the remaining ST number for display is changed to the value of the actual remaining ST number, and the image 9203 of the remaining ST number is corrected so as to show an accurate value of the remaining ST number. For example, when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) starts or when the first bonus mode (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) ends, the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203 increases or decreases. ..

When it is determined in step S9801 that there is no difference between the value of the remaining ST number for display and the value of the actual remaining ST number of display, or after executing the process of step S9802, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

The ST number adjustment process is not limited to the process shown in FIG. 336. For example, in the normal time, the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, but the value of the remaining ST number for display is actually the remaining ST. If it is larger (smaller) than the number of times, it can be configured to increase (decrease) the update frequency or increase (decrease) the value to be subtracted in one update. ..

<Remaining ST count update process for display>
FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing the display remaining ST number update process according to the ninth embodiment.

In the above, it has been described that the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated (subtracted by 1) every time a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses. The timing at which the value of the remaining ST count for display is updated is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the remaining ST number for display may be updated every time the drum fluctuation effect is performed (when the fluctuation of the drum symbol 9202 starts), or the special symbol variation (first special symbol variation) may be updated. The value of the remaining number of STs for display may be updated when the second special symbol variation) starts. Hereinafter, an example in which the value of the remaining ST number for display is updated when the second special symbol variation starts will be described.

The display remaining ST number update process shown in FIG. 337 is a sub-control circuit when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is started after the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 in the remaining ST number subtraction mode. This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41) according to 200. The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command (see step S40134 in FIG. 133).

In the display remaining ST number update process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S9821). When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot this time is a 10R jackpot (see FIG. 247) (step S9822). Since the special symbol effect start command includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination and the type of jackpot, the sub CPU 201 can make these determinations by receiving the special symbol effect start command. be.

When it is determined in step S9821 that the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol change this time is not a jackpot (loss or small hit), or in step S9822, the jackpot this time is not a 10R jackpot (2R jackpot). If it is determined, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the error in the number of remaining STs for display is a predetermined value (10) (step S9823). The error of the remaining ST number for display is a value obtained by subtracting the value of the remaining ST number for display from the value of the actual remaining ST number. Here, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 50 is actually set as the value of the remaining ST number, and 40 is set as the value of the remaining ST number for display. Therefore, the initial value of the error of the remaining ST number for display is 10.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the remaining ST number for display stored in the work RAM 203 (step S9824). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error of the remaining ST number for display is not the predetermined value (10), it is determined whether or not the error of the remaining ST number for display is larger than the predetermined value (10) (step S9825). When it is determined that the error of the remaining number of STs for display is larger than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 203 (step S9826). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to perform either a process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining ST count for display or a process of maintaining the value of the remaining ST count for display. May be decided. After executing the process of step S9826, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined that the error of the remaining number of STs for display is smaller than the predetermined value (10), the sub CPU 201 subtracts 2 from the value of the remaining STs for display stored in the work RAM 203 (step S9827). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9822 that the current jackpot is a 10R jackpot, the sub CPU 201 subtracts 3 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 203 (step S9827). Here, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 10R jackpot is 15 seconds. The sub CPU 201 may subtract 1 from the value of the remaining number of STs for display stored in the work RAM 203 (subtract 3 in total) every 5 seconds while the special symbol change is being performed. .. After executing the process of step S9827, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

The total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the 2R jackpot (see FIG. 247) and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the large winning opening 540 is 10 seconds. There is. Further, the total time of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the small hit and the time from the end of the special symbol fluctuation to the completion of the opening of the small hit winning opening 560 is 5 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation related to the loss is 5 seconds. Further, when a big hit game state occurs, the value of the remaining ST number for display may or may not be reset, but in the mode in which the remaining ST number for display update process shown in FIG. 337 is performed. , It is preferable to configure it so that it is not reset (after the end of the second bonus mode, the value of the remaining number of STs for display before the start of the second bonus mode is inherited).

In the above, it has been described that the remaining ST number is suggested by the number shown as the remaining ST number image 9203. In the present embodiment, as an image suggesting the remaining ST number of times, a rank image (not shown) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the remaining ST number of times image 9203. The rank image is, for example, an image corresponding to characters such as "A", "B", "C", "D", and the like, and the character (rank) suggests the remaining number of STs. For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode is started, 100 is set as the display remaining ST number managed in the process of FIG. 337, and when the display remaining ST number is 60 or more, the rank image is "A". Is displayed, and when the number of remaining STs for display is 40 or more and less than 60, "B" is displayed as a rank image, and when the number of remaining STs for display is 20 or more and less than 40, it is displayed as a rank image. When "C" is displayed and the number of remaining STs for display is 5 or more and less than 20, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which "D" is displayed as a rank image. When the number of remaining STs for display is less than 5, the rank image may be deleted.

Further, when the value of the remaining ST count is actually a predetermined value (for example, 5), the value of the remaining ST count for display is always set to a specific value (for example, 0). The update may be controlled (subtraction or addition). For example, when the remaining ST number subtraction mode starts, 100 is set as the remaining ST number for display, and each time the special symbol change is performed thereafter (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining ST number for display is set by 5 each. After subtraction and the value of the remaining ST number for display reaches 30, control is performed so that the remaining ST number for display may not be subtracted (added or maintained) by lottery even if a special symbol change is performed. .. As a result, when the value of the remaining ST count for display becomes 30 when the value of the remaining ST count actually reaches 11, each time the special symbol change is performed thereafter (when the special symbol change ends), the remaining display count remains. The number of STs is subtracted by 5, and when the value of the number of remaining STs actually reaches 5, the value of the number of remaining STs for display becomes 0. It is possible to adopt such a configuration. When the value of the actual remaining ST number is equal to or less than a predetermined value (for example, 5) (when the value of the display remaining ST number becomes a specific value (for example, 0)), the actual remaining ST number is calculated. It may be possible to shift to a mode in which a background is displayed different from the case where the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 5).

Further, in the above, it has been explained that the remaining number of STs (rank) for display is updated based on the result of the jackpot determination or the type of jackpot, but for display based on the result of the ordinary lottery or the type of the ordinary symbol variation pattern. It may be configured so that the remaining ST number (rank) is updated. For example, when the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be increased (smaller) than when the normal symbol lost length fluctuation is not won. good. Similarly, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the value to be subtracted or added in one update may be larger (smaller) than in the case where the result of the jackpot determination is not a jackpot. As a result, it is possible to suggest whether or not the jackpot has been won and whether or not the normal symbol loss length has been won through the remaining ST number image 9203 and the rank image.

<Probability change mode, normal map look-ahead effect processing>
FIG. 338 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading effect processing of the normal drawing in the probability variation mode according to the ninth embodiment.

The pre-reading effect process in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 338 is performed by the sub control circuit 200 when the special symbol variation related to the start winning is started after the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 in the probabilistic mode. This is a process performed in the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41). The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the special symbol variation starts by receiving the special symbol effect start command (see step S40134 in FIG. 133).

In the probabilistic mode pre-reading effect processing, the sub CPU 201 first executes the pre-reading lottery (step S9841). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the drawing pre-reading lottery has been won (step S9842). When it is determined that the normal drawing look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal map look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot (step S9843). Since the special symbol effect start command includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 201 can make the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command.

When it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination relating to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9844). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A) (step S9845). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (A), when the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol variation this time is a jackpot, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9845, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The sub CPU 201 may display different images on the liquid crystal display device 16 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9845, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9844 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (B) (step S9846). In the normal symbol look-ahead effect (B), in the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead lottery is won, the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a big hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9846, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won. The sub CPU 201 may display different images on the liquid crystal display device 16 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9846 may be the same image or a different image from the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effect (A). After executing the process of step S9846, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9843 that the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is not a big hit, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of the big hit determination related to the current special symbol change is a small hit ( Step S9847). Since the special symbol effect start command includes information indicating the result of the jackpot determination, the sub CPU 201 can make the determination by receiving the special symbol effect start command.

When it is determined that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is a small hit, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9848). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) (step S9849). In the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (C) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, the result of the big hit judgment related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9849, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that both the small hit and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9849 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9849, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9848 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (D) (step S9850). In the probability variation mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (D) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, the result of the big hit judgment related to this special symbol change is a small hit, and the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9850, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the small hit has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9850 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9850, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9847 that the result of the big hit determination related to the special symbol variation this time is not a small hit, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the normal symbol loss length variation has been won (step S9851). In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a pattern in which the fluctuation pattern of at least one of the reserved normal symbol fluctuations corresponds to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (variation pattern “05H” shown in FIG. 250). In that case, it is judged that the player has won the normal symbol loss length fluctuation.

When it is determined that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) (step S9852). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (E) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length variation is won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9852, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won. The image displayed by the process of step S9852 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (D), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9852, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9851 that the normal symbol loss length variation has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the normal symbol look-ahead effect (F) (step S9853). In the probabilistic mode, the normal symbol look-ahead effect (F) is won in the normal symbol look-ahead lottery, and the result of the jackpot judgment related to the special symbol change this time is a loss, and the normal symbol loss length variation is not won. It is a production performed in. In the process of step S9853, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that neither the big hit to the small hit nor the normal symbol loss length variation is won. The image displayed by the process of step S9853 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the normal drawing look-ahead effects (A) to (E), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9853, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), the normal figure look-ahead effect (B), the normal figure look-ahead effect (D), and the normal figure look-ahead effect A specific image (an image suggesting that the normal symbol loss length variation has been won) is displayed with a higher probability than in (F). This suggests that the normal symbol loss length variation was won during the special symbol variation. As the images that can be displayed in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won). An image) that confirms that the work has been done may be provided.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the normal figure look-ahead effect (A), the normal figure look-ahead effect (C), and the normal figure look-ahead effect (E), different images are displayed on the liquid crystal display according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation. It may be displayed on the display device 16.

Further, in the above, it has been described that the pre-reading effect processing in the probabilistic mode shown in FIG. 338 is performed in the probabilistic mode, but also in the first bonus mode, the same processing as the processing in steps S9841 to S9853 is performed. It may be that.

<Special figure look-ahead effect processing in probabilistic mode>
FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability variation mode according to the ninth embodiment.

In the probability variation mode, the special figure look-ahead effect process shown in FIG. 339 is produced by the sub control circuit 200 when the normal symbol variation related to the passage of the game ball starts after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 49. This is a process performed in the determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 41). The sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the normal symbol change starts by receiving the normal symbol change start command. The normal symbol variation start command is set by the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 when the normal symbol variation starts, for example, in the normal symbol memory check process (see step S192 in FIG. 40).

In the special figure look-ahead effect processing during the probability change mode, the sub CPU 201 first executes the special figure look-ahead lottery (step S9861). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines winning or non-winning by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won (step S9862). If it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure look-ahead lottery has been won, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length (variation pattern "05H" shown in FIG. 250). Whether or not it is determined (step S9863). Since the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the type of the normal symbol variation pattern (see FIG. 250), the sub CPU 201 may make the determination by receiving the normal symbol variation start command. It is possible.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9864). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (A) (step S9865). In the special figure look-ahead effect (A), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9865, for example, the sub CPU 201 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9845 of FIG. 338) that suggests that both the jackpot and the normal symbol loss length variation have been won. It is displayed on the display device 16. The sub CPU 201 may display different images on the liquid crystal display device 16 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). After executing the process of step S9865, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9864 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (B) (step S9866). In the special figure look-ahead effect (B), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9866, for example, the sub CPU 201 displays an image (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9852 of FIG. 338) on the liquid crystal display device 16 that suggests that the sub CPU 201 has won the normal symbol loss length variation. Display it. The image displayed by the process of step S9866 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effect (A), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9866, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S9863 that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S9867). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines that the jackpot has been won when the result of the jackpot determination relating to at least one special symbol variation among the special symbol variation corresponding to the reserved ball is a jackpot.

When it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (C) (step S9868). In the special figure look-ahead effect (C), the special figure look-ahead lottery is won in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not the pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, and the jackpot is won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9868, for example, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image suggesting that the jackpot has been won (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9846 of FIG. 338). The sub CPU 201 may display different images on the liquid crystal display device 16 depending on the type of jackpot (2R jackpot or 10R jackpot). The image displayed by the process of step S9868 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (B), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9868, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S9867 that the jackpot has not been won, the sub CPU 201 executes the special figure look-ahead effect (D) (step S9869). The special figure look-ahead effect (D) won the special figure look-ahead lottery in the probability variation mode, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation this time is not a pattern corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length, and the jackpot is not won. It is a production that is performed in some cases. In the process of step S9869, for example, an image suggesting that the sub CPU 201 has not won the jackpot or the normal symbol loss length variation (for example, the same image as the image displayed in step S9853 of FIG. 338). Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The image displayed by the process of step S9869 may be the same image as the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (C), or may be a different image. After executing the process of step S9869, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), a specific image (winning a big hit) has a higher probability than the special figure look-ahead effect (B) and the special figure look-ahead effect (D). An image that suggests) is displayed. This suggests that the jackpot was won during the normal symbol fluctuation. As the image that can be displayed in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (C), an image that cannot be displayed in other effects (an image that confirms that the jackpot has been won) may be provided. Further, in the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D), depending on the number of remaining STs (for example, the number of remaining STs is 10 times or more, 5 times or more and less than 10 times, and 5 times, respectively. It may be configured to display different images (if less than). Further, the special figure look-ahead effects (A) to (D) may be configured so that the above-mentioned drum fluctuation effect is performed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds). , 300 seconds, and 600 seconds) may be provided. In this case, in the special figure look-ahead effect (A) and the special figure look-ahead effect (B), different images may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the fluctuation time of the winning normal symbol loss length fluctuation. ..

Further, in the above, it has been described that the special figure look-ahead effect processing in the probability variation mode shown in FIG. 339 is performed in the probability variation mode, but the same processing as the processing in steps S9861 to S9869 is also performed in the second bonus mode. It may be that.

When the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol fluctuation becomes a pattern corresponding to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation, basically, the effect corresponding to the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (FIGS. 321 (j) and (Fig. 321 (j)) and ( k)) will be performed, but if the jackpot is won (for example, if the process of step S9865 is performed), the effect may not be performed. That is, in this case, the mode shifts to the jackpot gaming state (second bonus mode) shortly after the normal symbol loss length fluctuation (first bonus mode) starts, and until the start time of the jackpot gaming state, "BONUS" The production corresponding to the start of "" may be suspended. For example, when the process of step S9865 is performed, the drum symbol 9202 may be stopped and displayed in the loss pattern (despite the fact that the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is won), or the drum symbol 9202 may be displayed as a stop. The hit notification effect (see FIG. 321 (k)) may not be performed at that time while the stop display is displayed in the hit pattern. After that, when shifting to the big hit game state, it is possible to configure to perform an effect (hit notification effect) that excites the start of "BONUS".

<Icon stop suggestion notice production>
FIG. 340 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in the first effect stage. FIG. 340 (b) is a diagram showing a pattern of the icon stop suggestion notice effect.

As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the first production stage, the icon stop suggestion meter image 9301 (“bell” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “watermelon” icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and “ The "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. The "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are images that imitate the meters, respectively.

Specifically, the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a, the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b, and the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c are each in the initial display mode (meters are accumulated). Level 1 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in one stage), level 2 display mode (state in which the meter is accumulated in two stages), and level MAX display mode (state in which the meter is full). ) Can be displayed in any of the modes.

Icon stop suggestion meter The meters shown by the image 9301 are accumulated according to the effect (icon stop suggestion notice effect) performed during the first effect stage. The icon stop suggestion advance notice effect shown in FIG. 340 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change. The icon stop suggestion notice effect is an effect that can be performed only in the first effect stage.

Specifically, the effect corresponding to the effect number "171" is an effect in which the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "172" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "173" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "bell" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is "bell" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a is higher than that of the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "bell" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to "pseudo 2".

The effect corresponding to the effect number "174" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "175" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "176" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting the stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "watermelon" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is more "watermelon" than when the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b is higher than the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "watermelon" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is confirmed that the transition to "pseudo 3" is performed.

The effect corresponding to the effect number "177" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 1 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "178" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level 2 display mode. The effect corresponding to the effect number "179" is an effect in which the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting the stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" are effects that suggest the possibility that the above-mentioned "cherry" icon is (stopped) displayed. When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is "cherry" as compared with the case where the display mode is the initial display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 1 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 1 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level MAX display mode, the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c is the level 2 display mode, as compared with the case where the display mode is the level 2 display mode. The icon is likely to be displayed (stopped). When the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting stop of the "cherry" icon is the level MAX display mode, the "cherry" icon is always (stopped) displayed. That is, in this case, it is decided to shift to a predetermined super reach.

The effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "179" are basically the special when the special symbol related to the start prize is changed after the game ball has won the first start opening 420. It is performed as an effect to suggest to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the symbol variation progresses. That is, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting that the "bell" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "bell" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Similarly, the display mode of the meter image 9301b for suggesting stop of the "watermelon" icon during one special symbol change suggests that the "watermelon" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change. Further, the display mode of the meter image 9301c for suggesting that the "cherry" icon is stopped during one special symbol change suggests that the "cherry" icon may be displayed during the special symbol change.

On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173", the look-ahead effect is performed after the game ball wins the first start opening 420 and before the special symbol change related to the start prize starts. In some cases, in the look-ahead effect, it may be performed as an effect for suggesting to what stage the pseudo-continuous effect performed during the special symbol change progresses. In this case, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting stop of the "bell" icon during one special symbol change may be that the "bell" icon is displayed during the next and subsequent special symbol changes (targeted for pre-reading). Will be suggested. Therefore, when the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon is the level MAX display mode in the look-ahead effect for one start prize, the pseudo symbol performed during the special symbol change related to the start prize. In the continuous production, it is confirmed that at least "pseudo 2" will be transferred.

<Icon stop suggestion notice content lottery processing>
FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

Icon stop suggestion notice content shown in FIG. 341 The lottery process is the first effect stage notice when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300). This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 after the content lottery process (see FIG. 252).

Icon stop suggestion notice content In the lottery process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not a look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change based on the information included in the sub change pattern (step S9901). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is the look-ahead sub-variation pattern (see FIG. 305).

When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is generated during the special symbol variation this time, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is generated based on the information included in the sub variation pattern (step S9902). When it is determined that the pseudo-continuous effect will occur, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pseudo-continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3" based on the information included in the sub-variation pattern (step S9903).

When it is determined that the pseudo continuous effect proceeds to "pseudo 3", the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 3 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9904). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 3". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "177" to "179" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 3". As a result, in "pseudo 3", the display mode of the "cherry" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301c can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not proceed to "pseudo 3", or after the process of step S9904 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 2 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9905). ). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 2". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "174" to "176" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 2". As a result, in "pseudo 2", the display mode of the "watermelon" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301b can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9903 that the pseudo continuous effect does not occur, or after the process of step S9905 is executed, the sub CPU 201 executes the pseudo 1 icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9906). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1" by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and also performs the icon stop suggestion notice effect in "pseudo 1". In that case, the content of the production is determined. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion warning effect performed in "pseudo 1". As a result, in "pseudo 1", the display mode of the "bell" icon stop suggestion meter image 9301a can be changed.

When it is determined in step S9901 that the look-ahead effect occurs during the current special symbol change, the sub CPU 201 executes the look-ahead icon stop suggestion notice content lottery process (step S9907). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to perform the icon stop suggestion notice effect in the look-ahead effect by performing a lottery based on the random number value, and when performing the icon stop suggestion notice effect in the look-ahead effect, Determine the content of the production. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines any of the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "171" to "173" as the icon stop suggestion advance notice effect performed in the look-ahead effect. As a result, in the look-ahead effect, the display mode of the meter image 9301a for suggesting the stop of the "bell" icon can be changed.

After executing the process of step S9906 or step S9907, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<The pending change production lottery process>
342 and 343 are flowcharts showing the pending change effect lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 340 (a), the holding ball image 9302 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the first effect stage. The reserved sphere image 9302 is an image corresponding to the current (currently performed) special symbol change (the reserved sphere). Further, one or more of the first reserved sphere image 9303a, the second reserved sphere image 9303b, the third reserved sphere image 9303c, and the fourth reserved sphere image 9303d, depending on the number of reserved special symbol fluctuations. Image is displayed. The first reserved ball image 9303a is an image corresponding to the first reserved ball, the second reserved ball image 9303b is an image corresponding to the second reserved ball, and the third reserved ball image 9303c is an image corresponding to the second reserved ball. It is an image corresponding to the third reserved ball, and the fourth reserved ball image 9303d is an image corresponding to the fourth reserved ball.

In the present embodiment, an effect of changing the color of the hold ball image 9302 (the hold change effect) is performed. Through the color of the reserved ball image 9302, the result of the jackpot determination related to the special symbol variation this time is suggested. The pending change effect is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)). The pending change effect is an effect that can occur in combination with another jackpot notice effect during one special symbol change. The colors of the first reserved sphere image 9303a, the second reserved sphere image 9303b, the third reserved sphere image 9303c, and the fourth reserved sphere image 9303d may change due to the look-ahead effect.

The pending change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 342 and 343 is the first effect when the current effect stage is the first effect stage in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300). Stage notice content This is a process performed by the sub control circuit 200 after the lottery process (see FIG. 252). The pending change effect lottery process may be performed even when the current effect stage is the second effect stage or the third effect stage.

In the hold change effect lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 executes the hold change pattern combination lottery process (step S9921). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the hold change effect (at what timing and how the color of the hold ball image 9302 is changed) by performing a lottery based on a random number value. The content of the pending change effect is defined by the combination of the pending change patterns. The pending change patterns include a pending change pattern (1), a pending change pattern (2), a pending change pattern (3), a pending change pattern (4), a pending change pattern (5), a pending change pattern (6), and a pending change. A pattern (7), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) are provided.

Examples of the combination of the pending change patterns include the combination of the pending change pattern (1) and the pending change pattern (9), the pending change pattern (1), the pending change pattern (2), the pending change pattern (3), and the pending change pattern (3). Combination of change pattern (9), hold change pattern (1), hold change pattern (2), hold change pattern (3), hold change pattern (4), hold change pattern (7), hold change pattern (8), And the combination of the hold change pattern (9), the hold change pattern (1), the hold change pattern (2), the hold change pattern (3), the hold change pattern (4), the hold change pattern (5), and the hold change pattern (5). A combination of 6), a pending change pattern (8), and a pending change pattern (9) is provided. The pending change pattern (9) is always included in the combination of the pending change patterns. Further, when the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns, the pending change pattern (8) is always included in the combination. In the process of step S9921, the sub CPU 201 selects one combination from a plurality of combinations of pending change patterns provided in advance.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pending change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns determined in step S9921 (step S9922). The hold change pattern (1) changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo" starts (when the special symbol change starts this time). It is a pattern that makes you want to.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (1) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (1) (step S9923). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 1" stage in the pseudo-continuous effect or the "pseudo-less" effect starts. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S992 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 1", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9922 is performed is the same as the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a immediately before the start of the special symbol variation this time. When the color of the reserved sphere image 9303 is changed due to the look-ahead effect, the sub CPU 201 determines the color change mode of the reserved sphere image 9302 with reference to the color of the first reserved sphere image 9303a.

When it is determined in step S9922 that the pending change pattern (1) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9923, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (2) is included in the combination of (step S9924). The hold change pattern (2) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the effect of "no pseudo". The combination including the pending change pattern (2) can be selected only when the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol has the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 1".

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (2) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (2) (step S9925). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 1" in the pseudo continuous effect or the "pseudo-less" effect. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9924 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9924 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9923 when the process of step S9923 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9923 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9922.

When it is determined in step S9924 that the pending change pattern (2) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9925 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (3) is included in the combination of (step S9926). The hold change pattern (3) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (3) can be selected only when the pseudo continuous effect occurs.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (3) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (3) (step S9927). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 2" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9926 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 2", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9926 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9925 when the process of step S9925 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9925 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9924.

When it is determined in step S9926 that the pending change pattern (3) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9927, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (4) is included in the combination of (step S9928). The hold change pattern (4) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo-continuous production. The combination including the pending change pattern (4) can be selected only when the pseudo continuous effect occurs and the sub-variation pattern in which the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode is determined in "pseudo 2". It has become.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (4) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (4) (step S9929). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 2" in the pseudo continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9928 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9928 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9927 when the process of step S9927 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9927 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9926.

When it is determined in step S9928 that the pending change pattern (4) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9929 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (5) is included in the combination of (step S9930). The hold change pattern (5) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production starts. The combination including the pending change pattern (5) can be selected only when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs and the pseudo-continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3".

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (5) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (5) (step S9931). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the "pseudo 3" stage in the pseudo-continuous production starts. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9930 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, at the start of the "pseudo 3", the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9930 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9929 when the process of step S9929 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9929 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9928.

When it is determined in step S9930 that the pending change pattern (5) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9931, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (6) is included in the combination of (step S9932). The hold change pattern (6) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 when a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo-continuous production. In the combination including the pending change pattern (6), a pseudo continuous effect is generated, the pseudo continuous effect progresses to the stage of "pseudo 3", and the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode in "pseudo 3". It can be selected only when a sub-variation pattern is determined.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (6) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (6) (step S9933). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 when the tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3" in the pseudo continuous production. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9932 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 3" stage, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes in the determined mode. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9932 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9931 when the process of step S9931 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9931 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9930.

When it is determined in step S9932 that the pending change pattern (6) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9933 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (7) is included in the combination of (step S9934). The hold change pattern (7) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. .. As the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (7), for example, the first half of the super reach and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (7) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (7) (step S9935). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains two more times. decide. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9934 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined manner in the situation where the color change remains two more times. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9934 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9933 when the process of step S9933 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9933 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9932.

When it is determined in step S9934 that the pending change pattern (7) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9935, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (8) is included in the combination of (step S9936). The hold change pattern (8) is a pattern that changes the color of the hold ball image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the hold ball image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. .. Examples of the timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (8) include the first half and the second half of the super reach.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (8) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (8) (step S9937). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in a situation where the color change that occurs until the reserved sphere image 9302 reaches the final color remains once more. decide. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9936 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode in the situation where the color change remains once more. The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9936 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9935 when the process of step S9935 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9935 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9934.

When it is determined in step S9936 that the pending change pattern (8) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after the processing of step S9937 is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines the pending change pattern in step S9921. It is determined whether or not the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of (step S9938). The hold change pattern (9) is a pattern used to change the color of the hold ball image 9302 to the final color. Although detailed description will be omitted, the color of the hold ball image 9302 is finally changed to which color by a lottery based on a random number value before the hold change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 342 and 343 is performed. (The final color of the reserved ball image 9302) has been determined. In the process of step S9938, the sub CPU 201 always determines that the pending change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the pending change patterns. The timing of the color change based on the hold change pattern (9) is, for example, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 1" stage, when the "pseudo 2" starts, when the tempai occurs in the "pseudo 2" stage, and "pseudo 3". , When a tempai occurs at the stage of "pseudo 3", the first half and the second half of the super reach, and the like can be mentioned.

When it is determined that the hold change pattern (9) is included in the combination of the hold change patterns, the sub CPU 201 determines the hold change content based on the hold change pattern (9) (step S9939). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines how to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 in order to change the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 to the final color. For example, the sub CPU 201 has "no color change", "blinking → blue", "blinking → green", and "blue" based on the color of the reserved ball image 9302 determined by the time the process of step S9938 is performed. → Green ”,“ Blinking → Purple ”,“ Blue → Purple ”,“ Green → Purple ”,“ Blinking → Red ”,“ Blue → Red ”,“ Green → Red ”,“ Purple → Red ” To determine the aspect of. As a result, the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is changed in the determined mode, and the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 is a lottery performed before the reserved change effect lottery process shown in FIGS. 342 and 343 is performed. It will be the final color determined by (original lottery). The color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is the changed color determined by the process of step S9937 when the process of step S9937 is performed. If there is, and the process of step S9937 is not performed, it is the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 that has been determined by the process of step S9936.

When it is determined in step S9938 that the pending change pattern (9) is not included in the combination of the pending change patterns, or after executing the process of step S9939, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 determined by the process of step S9938 is already the final color, the sub CPU 201 determines "NO" in the process of step S9938. May be good. In this case, the sub CPU 201 may display the reserved sphere image 9302 in the final color, or may display it in another color (default color). When the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 changes to another color after the color of the reserved sphere image 9302 becomes the final color, it may be determined that the reserved sphere image 9302 is a false effect.

<Slot game during the 6th specific super reach>
FIG. 344 is a diagram showing the contents of the effect block in the sixth specific super reach. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process according to the ninth embodiment.

As described above, in the second effect stage (see FIG. 251 (a)), the eighth notice effect (see FIG. 307) may be performed, and when the eighth notice effect is performed, the sixth notice effect is performed. It may develop into a specific super reach. In the 6th specific super reach, a game (slot game during the 6th specific super reach) in which a plurality of types of icons are fluctuated and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16 and then stopped is displayed. It is said. In the 6th specific super reach middle slot game, when the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (when all three are aligned), it develops into a predetermined super reach. The sixth specific super reach slot game is composed of a plurality of production blocks. FIG. 344 illustrates the contents of the effect block.

In the effect block "1", an image corresponding to the description of the sixth specific super reach slot game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the production block "2", an image (for example, an image showing the title of the predetermined super reach) indicating that the slot game during the sixth specific super reach was successful (developing into a predetermined super reach) is a liquid crystal display device. It is displayed at 16. In the effect block "3", an image indicating that the sixth specific super reach slot game has failed (the sixth specific super reach slot game ends) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

In the production block "4", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16 for 8 seconds, and the "additional" icons are aligned. After the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "additional" icons are not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "additional" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "4" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production block "5", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16 for 8 seconds, and the "additional" icons are aligned. After the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "additional" icons are stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (three "additional" icons are aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "5" is performed, a predetermined number of values of the above-mentioned "PLAY TIME" (see FIG. 306 (b)) are added, and the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. ..

In the production block "6", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16 for 8 seconds, and the "mission" icons are aligned. After the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "mission" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "mission" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "6" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach ends. In the production blocks "7" and "8", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the liquid crystal display 16 on the left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and the "mission" icons are aligned. After a fanning image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "mission" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "mission" icons are aligned), and the user enters a predetermined mission. After that, the mission fails in the production block "7", and the mission succeeds in the production block "8". When the production corresponding to the production block "7" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues, and when the production corresponding to the production block "8" is performed, the predetermined super reach Develops into.

In the production block "9", a plurality of types of icons are variably displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right on the liquid crystal display device 16 for 8 seconds, and the "cherry" icons are aligned. After the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "cherry" icon is not stopped and displayed in the three columns of left, middle, and right (the "cherry" icons are not aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "9" is performed, the slot game during the sixth specific super reach continues. In the production block "10", a plurality of types of icons are displayed in three columns on the liquid crystal display 16 on the left, middle, and right for 8 seconds, and the "cherry" icons are aligned. After the image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the "cherry" icon is stopped and displayed in three columns of left, middle, and right (three "cherry" icons are aligned). When the production corresponding to the production block "10" is performed, it develops into a predetermined super reach.

The sixth specific super reach content lottery process shown in FIG. 345 is performed in step S9214 of the first special symbol change start process (see FIG. 300) when the current effect stage is the second effect stage, the effect number “153”. This is a process performed by the sub-control circuit 200 when it is determined that the effect corresponding to "" or "154" is to be performed. The content of each production block will be determined by performing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process.

In the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the final production block (step S9941). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect block "2" as the final effect block when the sub variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub variation pattern that develops into a predetermined super reach. .. On the other hand, when the sub-variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol variation this time is a sub-variation pattern that does not develop into a predetermined super reach, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect block "3" as the final effect block.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the effect block in the stage immediately before the final effect block (step S9942). In this process, when the effect block "2" is determined as the final effect block, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value to use the effect block as the effect block immediately before the final effect block. Determine "8" or "10". On the other hand, when the production block "3" is determined as the final production block, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value to perform the production block "4" as the production block immediately before the final production block. "Or" 6 "is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9943). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a new stock timer by subtracting a value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9942 from the value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts. Is stored in the work RAM 203 as the value of. The value of the stock timer at the time when the 6th specific super reach starts corresponds to the value of "PLAY TIME" shown by the stock timer image 9110 at the time when the slot game during the 6th specific super reach starts during this special symbol change. doing. The value is determined before the sixth specific super reach content lottery process is started.

Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "4" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "4". The time corresponding to the effect block "6" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "6". The time corresponding to the production block "8" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding the mission) corresponding to the production block "8". The time corresponding to the effect block "10" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "10". The value of the stock timer at the time when the sixth specific super reach starts is always a value corresponding to 8 seconds or more.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the value of the stock timer is larger than 0 (step S9944). When it is determined that the value of the stock timer is larger than 0, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the last effect block among the undetermined effect blocks (step S9945). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery based on a random number value, and as the final effect block, any one of the effect block "5", the effect block "7", and the effect block "9". Determine the production block.

Next, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the value of the stock timer (step S9946). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a value obtained by subtracting the value corresponding to the time corresponding to the effect block determined in step S9945 from the value of the stock timer stored in the work RAM 203 as the value of the new stock timer. Stored in the work RAM 203. Here, the time corresponding to the effect block "5" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "5". The time corresponding to the production block "7" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the production (excluding the mission) corresponding to the production block "7". The time corresponding to the effect block "9" is the time (8 seconds) required to perform the effect corresponding to the effect block "9". When the effect block "5" is determined in step S9945, the sub CPU 201 subtracts the value of the stock timer and adds the value of the stock timer by a predetermined number (additional time). The value of the stock timer is configured to be N times 8 seconds (N is an integer).

After executing the process of step S9946, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S9944. If it is determined in step S9944 that the value of the stock timer is 0, the sub CPU 201 determines the content of the first effect block (step S9947). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect block "1" as the first effect block. After executing the process of step S9947, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

By executing the sixth specific super reach content lottery process described above, the content of the sixth specific super reach middle slot game is determined. For example, in the sixth specific super reach content lottery process, the production block "2" is sequentially determined in step S9941, the production block "10" is determined in step S9942, the production block "9" is determined in step S9945, and further. If the production block "5" is determined in step S9945, the production block "7" is further determined in step S9945, and then the production block "1" is determined in step S9947, the production is performed in the sixth specific super reach. Block "1"-> Production block "7"-> Production block "5"-> Production block "9"-> Production block "10"-> Production block "2" (6th specific super reach content The order determined by the lottery process In the reverse order), the effects corresponding to each effect block will be performed.

<Effects and logo lamps on the LCD screen>
FIG. 346 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage. FIG. 346 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of a logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage. 347 to 349 are diagrams showing a specific mode of the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage.

As described above, a logo cover is provided at a predetermined position (for example, the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 16) of the game board unit 17, and a logo lamp is provided on the back side of the logo cover. As an effect using such a logo lamp, a logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage and a logo effect advancer effect for the second effect stage may be performed.

The logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage shown in FIG. 346 (a) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the first effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the first production stage can occur only in the first production stage. In addition, the logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change.

Although not shown, first, the decorative design becomes a tenpai 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, prior to the production corresponding to the production numbers "181" to "184". After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "181" to "184", the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and the operation of the effect button 62 is accepted. Then, a predetermined effect appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the production corresponding to the production number "181", nothing in particular occurs and the production ends. On the other hand, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "182" to "184", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode after waiting for a predetermined time (1 second) to elapse from the absorption of the effect.

Specifically, in the production corresponding to the production number "182", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in white in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively. Further, in the production corresponding to the production number "183", the logo lamp emits red light. This creates an appearance in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in red in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, respectively.

In the production corresponding to the production number "184", the logo lamp emits white light. This creates the appearance of a given word (eg, "CHANGE") lit in white throughout the logo cover. A large number of LEDs are arranged side by side in a matrix (lattice pattern) on the back side of the logo cover, and an arbitrary word can be formed by appropriately selecting the LEDs to emit light.

The production corresponding to the production number "182" has a higher expectation of a big hit than the production corresponding to the production number "181", and the production corresponding to the production number "183" corresponds to the production number "182". The jackpot expectation is higher than that of the production, and the production corresponding to the production number "184" has the highest jackpot expectation.

The logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage shown in FIG. 346 (b) is an effect that can occur when a special symbol change is performed in the second effect stage. The logo effect notice effect for the second production stage can occur only in the second production stage. In addition, the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage is an effect that can occur in combination with other jackpot notice effects during one special symbol change.

In the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the image display is such that the screen (monitor) of the liquid crystal display device 16 is reduced after the decorative design starts to fluctuate (see FIG. 347 (a)). (See FIG. 347 (b)). Then, the reduced monitor (decorative symbol) becomes an image display that moves to the left (see FIG. 347 (c)), and a plurality of icons are displayed instead of the decorative symbol, and each icon is illuminated in sequence. The displayed roulette effect is performed (see FIG. 347 (d)), the button image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the operation of the effect button 62 is accepted (see FIG. 347 (e)). After that, one icon is selected as a result of the roulette effect, and an image showing the title of the effect corresponding to the icon (for example, "CHANGE" shown in FIG. 347 (f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. “CHANGE” indicates the title of the effect (for example, the effect shown in FIGS. 348 and 349) in which the effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 is absorbed by the logo cover.

While the button image is being displayed, a predetermined button effective time is set. When the effect button 62 is operated during the button effective time, when the effect button 62 is operated (even if the button effective time has not expired, immediately after the operation), the next screen (for example, " The screen showing that "CHANGE" is selected) is displayed. On the other hand, if the effect button 62 is not operated during the button valid time, the next screen (for example, "CHANGE" is selected at the end of the button valid time (at the moment when the button valid time ends). Screen).

After that, in the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "191" to "193", the effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). In the effect absorption effect, a predetermined effect appears on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the image display is such that the effect is absorbed by the logo cover. After that, in the effect corresponding to the effect number "191", the image corresponding to the fact that the logo lamp does not emit light in a predetermined mode and the result of the effect absorption effect fails is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and displayed on the liquid crystal display. The device 16 becomes a wipe display and returns to the normal background.

On the other hand, in the production corresponding to the production numbers "192" and "193", the logo lamp emits light in a predetermined mode. As a result, in the first logo section, the second logo section, and the third logo section, an appearance is created in which the letters "X", "Y", and "Z" are lit in predetermined colors, respectively. As a predetermined effect, a plurality of types of effects having different colors (white effect, red effect, etc.) may be provided, and the logo lamp may be configured to emit light in the same color as the appearing effect. .. After the logo lamp emits light, the decorative design becomes a tenpai. At this time, in the production corresponding to the production number "193", "PLAY TIME" is stocked. After that, it shifts to the notice after the success of Tempai. As described above, in the notice after the success of the tempai, a connecting effect corresponding to the super reach of the development destination is performed (see FIG. 307 (b)).

FIG. 348 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “192”. As shown in FIG. 348, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 348 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. However, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 348 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 is displayed. As it disappears, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 348 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (FIG. 348 (c)). (See), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 348 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (FIG. 348 (d)). (See), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears and the third logo portion 9401R emits light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410R of "Z" is formed (see FIG. 348 (e)). After that, the reduced monitor (decorative symbol) moves to the right (see FIG. 348 (e)), and the decorative symbol 9001 becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 348 (f)).

FIG. 349 shows an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after the start of the effect absorption effect in the effect corresponding to the effect number “191”. As shown in FIG. 349, when the effect absorption effect is started, the first effect image 9402 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 349 (a)), and then the first effect image 9402 is gradually reduced. However, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the first logo portion 9401L (see FIG. 349 (b)), and when the first effect image 9402 moves to a position where it overlaps with the first logo portion 9401L, the first effect image 9402 is displayed. As it disappears, the first logo unit 9401L emits light. As a result, the first effect image 9402 appears to be absorbed by the first logo portion 9401L, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410L of "X" is formed (see FIG. 349 (c)).

Subsequently, after the second effect image 9403 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the second effect image 9403 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the second logo portion 9401C while being gradually reduced (FIG. 349 (c)). (See), when the second effect image 9403 moves to a position where it overlaps with the second logo portion 9401C, the second effect image 9403 disappears and the second logo portion 9401C emits light. As a result, the second effect image 9403 appears to be absorbed by the second logo portion 9401C, and the logo lamp is turned on so that the letter 9410C of "Y" is formed (see FIG. 349 (d)).

Subsequently, after the third effect image 9404 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the third effect image 9404 is displayed in such a manner that it approaches the third logo unit 9401R while being gradually reduced (FIG. 349 (d)). (See), when the third effect image 9404 moves to a position where it overlaps with the third logo portion 9401R, the third effect image 9404 disappears, but the third logo portion 9401R does not emit light. As a result, the third effect image 9404 appears to be absorbed by the third logo portion 9401R, but the character 9410R of "Z" is not formed. After that, the logo lamp goes out (the letter 9410L of "X" and the letter 9410C of "Y" go out), and the reduced monitor (decorative pattern) moves to the right (see FIG. 349 (e)). , The decorative symbol 9001 is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to the loss (see FIG. 349 (f)).

As described above with reference to FIGS. 348 and 349, in the logo effect notice effect for the second effect stage, the effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 is absorbed by the logo cover (effect absorption effect). .. Although not shown, the same effect absorption effect is performed in the logo effect notice effect for the first effect stage. The effect absorption effect is an effect in which the image displayed in the vicinity of the logo cover becomes smaller or disappears, so that the image appears as if it acts on the logo cover (is absorbed by the logo cover). Is.

In addition, in FIG. 348 and FIG. 349, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R are divided (adjacent logo portions are not continuously formed, and a gap is formed. Although the example (formed) has been described, the first logo portion 9401L, the second logo portion 9401C, and the third logo portion 9401R may be integrally formed. In particular, when displaying an arbitrary word on the entire logo cover as in the effect corresponding to the effect number "184", it is desirable that the entire logo cover is integrally formed.

As described above, as one embodiment of the present invention, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) An effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
An icon display means capable of displaying an icon (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, etc.) in the effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The icon display means are of the same system as each other when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed by the effect execution means and when the second effect (second notice effect) is executed. It is possible to display an icon ("bell" icon),
The effect executing means differs from each other after the icon is displayed depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect or the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform the production,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed and when the second effect (second notice effect) is executed, each other It is possible to display icons of the same type (“bell” icon). Then, when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), and the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system in the second effect (second notice effect). ) Is displayed, and after the icon (“bell” icon) is displayed, different effects can be executed. As a result, while giving variations to the effects performed before and after the icons are displayed, by making the icons displayed between those effects the same system, it is easy for the player to understand the development of the effects. can do. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

As described in the ninth embodiment, as the icon in the present invention, an icon composed of characters, figures, symbols, colors, or a combination thereof and the like can be appropriately adopted. "Icons of the same type" means that at least a part of characters, figures, symbols, and colors is the same in one icon and another icon. For example, when the “X” icon confirmed image 9051 (see FIG. 284 (b)) is adopted as an icon, the first effect (first notice effect) is executed and the second effect (second notice effect) is executed. ) Is being executed, the exact same "X" icon confirmed image 9051 may be displayed, and when the first effect (first notice effect) is being executed, "X" may be displayed. When the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character is the first color (for example, blue) is displayed and the second effect (second notice effect) is executed, the character "X" is displayed. The “X” icon confirmed image 9051, which is the second color (for example, red), may be displayed. Further, when the first effect (first notice effect) is executed, the "X" icon confirmation image 9051 in which the character "X" is a predetermined color (for example, yellow) is displayed, and the second effect is displayed. When the effect of (second notice effect) is being executed, the “Y” icon confirmed image 9052 (FIG. 284 (FIG. 284)) in which the character “Y” is the same color as the character “X” (for example, yellow). c) See) may be displayed.

In the ninth embodiment, each of the various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, second specific icon, and third specific icon) is a notice of various jackpots. In the effects (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect), they are displayed as "icons of the same system". For example, the various icons (“bell” icon, “watermelon” icon, “cherry” icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) are, respectively. With various icons ("bell" icon, "watermelon" icon, "cherry" icon, first specific icon, and second specific icon) displayed in the second production (second notice production) and "same system" be.

(A-2) The gaming machine according to (A-1).
The effect executing means is common to the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect (FIG. 266). After executing the effect number "91" or "92" corresponding to the icon stop notice), it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the case where the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the case where the second effect (second notice) is displayed. Performing a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) when the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed in the effect). Is configured to be possible. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect) Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, the effect control can be simplified.

(A-3) The gaming machine according to (A-1) or (A-2).
In the effect executing means, a first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system, and a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon is displayed. It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the case where the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system is different from the first icon (“bell” icon). It is possible to execute a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) when the icon 2 ("watermelon" icon) is displayed. It is configured in. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through a common effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). It can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon is displayed, both the data for the first icon (“bell” icon) and the data for the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are stored. Since it is not necessary to keep it, the effect control can be simplified.

Note that "common" is a concept that can be paraphrased as "same type" as in the case of "same system" described above, and one effect and the other effect do not have to be exactly the same. As long as the same element is included in at least a part of one production and the other production, these productions can be said to be common productions. For example, if the basic landscape is the same in the background image displayed in one effect and the background image displayed in the other effect, even if a part of the landscape is slightly different, these background images May be considered "common".

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means (sub-control circuit 200 for performing the effect shown in FIG. 282) is expected to perform the advantageous control throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed. It is possible to suggest,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, it is expected that control advantageous to the player will be performed throughout the operating time of the movable member. It is structured so that the degree can be suggested. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the same type of icon (“bell” icon), and from the display of the same type of icon (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4).
Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
Notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the first specific effect (effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) performed when the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed as the icon of the same system. ), While it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed through the operating time of the movable member, a third icon (“cherry” icon) different from the first icon. In the second specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "93" shown in FIG. 266), which is performed when is displayed, the control to operate the movable member is not performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first specific effect (effect number “1” shown in FIG. 266) is performed when the first icon (“bell” icon) is displayed as an icon of the same system. In the notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to "91" or "92"), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the control advantageous to the player is performed through the operation time of the movable member. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in displaying the same type of icon (“bell” icon), and from the display of the same type of icon (“bell” icon) to the operation of the movable member. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the development of the production. On the other hand, it corresponds to the second specific effect (effect number "93" shown in FIG. 266) performed when a third icon ("cherry" icon) different from the first icon ("bell" icon) is displayed. In the notice after the icon is stopped), the control for operating the movable member is not performed. In this way, by making the presence or absence of the movement of the movable member different depending on the type of the displayed icon, it is possible to associate the type of the displayed icon with the effect mode after the icon is displayed. It is possible to make it easier to understand the development of the effect after the icon is displayed.

The operation of the movable member may be started after the display of the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is completed, or the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) may be started while the operation of the movable member is being performed. The display of the "bell" icon) may be continued.

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5).
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, in the pre-effect that suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed (in the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 257). It is possible to execute (display of icon suggestion items),
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), a specific effect (effect number shown in FIG. 266) is displayed. While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "91" or "92" (notice after the icon is stopped), the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). Even in this case, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is suggested that the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed before the icon of the same system ("bell" icon) is displayed. It is configured so that the pre-effect to be performed (display of the icon suggestion type item in the effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 257) can be executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6).
Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
While it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect. , The specific effect can be executed even when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect.
In the second effect, a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect (roulette effect) is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is
A first suggestion means (sub-control circuit 200 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number “16” shown in FIG. 257) capable of suggesting that the icon of the same system is displayed, and
It is provided with a second suggestion means (sub-control circuit 200 that performs an effect corresponding to the effect number “15” shown in FIG. 257) capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed.
The effect executing means is
When it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed by the first suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect), a specific effect (effect number shown in FIG. 266) is displayed. While it is possible to execute the icon corresponding to "91" or "92" (notice after the icon is stopped), the same type of icon ("bell" icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect). Even in this case, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266). As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266), so that the development of the effect is further enhanced. It can be made easy to understand. Further, in the second effect (second notice effect), it is possible to execute a predetermined effect (roulette effect), and in the predetermined effect (roulette effect), an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed. There are cases where it is suggested that it is displayed, and there are cases where it is suggested that the player is expected to perform favorable control. Then, when it is suggested that the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is displayed in the second effect (second notice effect), the same type of icon (“bell” icon) is displayed. After that, it is possible to execute a specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266), while the above expectation level is achieved in the second effect (second notice effect). Is suggested, the specific effect (notice after the icon is stopped corresponding to the effect number "91" or "92" shown in FIG. 266) is not executed. As a result, when it is suggested that an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the player can be made to predict the development of the effect one step ahead. On the other hand, when the above degree of expectation is suggested, it is possible to create a sense of expectation of the player without developing the effect, so that the attractiveness of the second effect (second notice effect) should be improved. Can be done.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7).
The effect executing means is
A common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. ), Then it is possible to execute the different effects.
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the third effect different from the second effect (third notice effect), the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first effect). It is possible to execute 1 connecting effect (dedicated),
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the case where the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the first effect (first notice effect) and the case where the second effect (second notice) is displayed. It is configured so that a common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)) can be executed when an icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed in the effect). As a result, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the progress mode of the effect through the common specific effect (first joint effect (common)), so that the development of the effect can be made easier to understand. Further, as the data for the effect performed when the icon of the same system (“bell” icon) is displayed, the data for the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect) Since it is not necessary to store both of the data for the purpose, the effect control can be simplified. Further, when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the specific effect is different from the above-mentioned common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)). It is configured so that the effect (first connecting effect (dedicated)) can be executed. As a result, it is possible to realize an appropriate specific effect according to the content of the third effect (third notice effect) different from the first effect (first notice effect) and the second effect (second notice effect). Can be done.

In the present invention, an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect) for the specific effect different from the common specific effect (first connecting effect (common)). It may appear only when the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the production other than the third production (third notice production). It may be. Further, in the present invention, even when an icon (“bell” icon) of the same system is displayed in the third effect (third notice effect), the above-mentioned common specific effect (first connection effect (common)). ) May be performed.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8).
Equipped with an operation means (effect button 62) capable of accepting operations by the player
The icon display means is
A first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated (when the effect button 62 is operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "49" to "52" shown in FIG. 260). When,
A second icon capable of displaying an icon when the operating means is not operated (when the effect button 62 is not operated in the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "43" to "48" shown in FIG. 260). With display means,
The effect executing means executes a specific effect (connecting effect) in either case where the icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the icon is displayed when the operating means (effect button 62) is operated, and the icon is displayed even if the operating means (effect button 62) is not operated. It may be displayed. Then, it is configured so that a specific effect (connecting effect) can be executed regardless of the situation in which the icon is displayed. As a result, the situation in which the specific effect (connecting effect) is executed when the operating means (effect button 62) is operated and the specific effect (connecting effect) are executed even if the operating means (effect button 62) is not operated. It is possible to create various situations, and through such situations, it is possible to provide variations in the development of the production.

A specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 62) is operated, and a specific effect (connecting effect) executed when the operating means (effect button 62) is not operated. May be a common effect (partially different effect) or may be exactly the same effect.

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9).
The effect executing means is
A symbol effect execution means capable of executing a symbol effect on which a symbol is displayed, and a symbol effect execution means.
When a specific symbol display (image display related to 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (normal background is displayed), the first effect state is changed to the first. It is equipped with an effect state switching means that can switch to 2 effect states (a state in which the background is displayed after the success of 4 symbol tempai).
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, it is possible to display the first icon (“bell” icon) as the icon of the same system.
A second icon (“watermelon”) different from the first icon when the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect after being switched to the second effect state by the effect state switching means. Icon) can be displayed,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a specific symbol display (image display related to the four symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state (the state in which the normal background is displayed). It is possible to switch from the first effect state (normal background is displayed) to the second effect state (the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), and the same system. It is possible to display the first icon (“bell” icon) as the icon of. Then, after switching to the second effect state (the state in which the background is displayed after the success of the 4 symbol tempai), when a specific symbol display (image display related to the 4 symbol tempai fanning) is performed in the symbol effect, It is configured so that a second icon (“watermelon” icon) different from the first icon (“bell” icon) can be displayed. In this way, the first icon (“bell” icon) and the second icon (“watermelon” icon) are displayed step by step, and a specific symbol display (image display related to the four symbol tempai fanning) and the effect state are displayed. By associating the switching of, it is possible to create an attractive production development.

The first effect state and the second effect state may be in a state in which different backgrounds are displayed, and the frequency of appearance of a predetermined effect (for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed) is high. They may be in different states. For example, in the first effect state, the probability that the first effect is performed is higher than that in the second effect, while in the second effect state, the probability that the second effect is performed is higher than that in the first effect. It may be configured to be. Further, in the first effect state, the probability of the first character appearing is higher than that of the second character, while in the second effect state, the probability of the second character appearing is higher than that of the first character. It may be configured to be.

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10).
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying variable and stop symbols
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is used when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the variable display of the above is resumed, it is possible to execute the different effects.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the icon of the same system (“pseudo 1”) in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol (“pseudo 1”). When the "bell" icon) is displayed, it is configured so that the above-mentioned different effects can be executed in the second pseudo game ("pseudo 2") after the variable display of the symbol is restarted. .. As a result, it is possible to shift from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) with the display of the icon (“bell” icon) of the same system as a mark. Therefore, the development of the production can be made easier to understand.

In the present invention, one unit game (special symbol variation game) is configured from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the final stop display of the symbol. One unit game (special symbol fluctuation game) corresponds to one special symbol start prize (one reserved ball), and the number of reserved balls does not decrease even if the symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It can be configured as follows.

<Appendix B>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), It is provided that the player shifts to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

As such a conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine configured to perform various effects is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-221523).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying various effects performed on a gaming machine, it may be possible to improve the interest of the game by devising the development of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) An effect mode control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided.
In the plurality of effect modes, the rate of occurrence of each effect is different from each other.
The effect mode control means is one effect mode when a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied. It is possible to transition from to another production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, in the plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), the generation ratios of the respective effects are different from each other. When a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is satisfied, the other production mode (production stage) is changed to another. It is configured so that it can be transitioned to the production mode (production stage). As a result, as the game progresses, by gradually transitioning between the production modes (production stages) in which the production tendencies are different from each other, which production mode (production stage) is currently staying and which production mode (production stage) is next. It can be interesting to the player as to whether to move to. As a result, it is possible to create an interesting development of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the ninth embodiment, in a plurality of production modes (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), a lottery is performed based on a random number value, and the lottery is generated based on the production lottery table. The content of the production to be performed is decided. In each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), different production lottery tables are used. In the production lottery table used in each production mode (first production stage, second production stage, and third production stage), at least one of the lottery values (random value range) specified for each production Some are different. As a result, when a predetermined effect that can occur in any of the effect modes (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage) is provided, the effect mode (first effect stage, first effect stage, third effect stage) is provided. The occurrence probability (frequency) of the production is different for each of the two production stages and the third production stage, or the production that can occur in one production mode (for example, the first production stage) is another production mode (for example). , 2nd production stage and 3rd production stage) may not occur. That is, in each effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, and third effect stage), the tendency (system) of the effect is different from each other. For example, in the first production stage, a pseudo continuous production is more likely to occur as compared with the second production stage and the third production stage. In addition, the time stock notice can occur only in the second production stage. Further, the meter UP notice can be generated only in the third production stage.

In the ninth embodiment, when a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery. I explained it as a thing. In the present invention, the method for determining the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination is not particularly limited. For example, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, the production mode (first production stage) is performed in a predetermined order (for example, first production stage → second production stage → third production stage). , The second production stage, or the third production stage) may be sequentially shifted. In addition, a mode (random mode) in which the transition destination production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) is determined by lottery, and a production mode (first production) in a predetermined order. It is configured so that the player can select one of the modes (order mode) in which the stage, the second production stage, or the third production stage shifts (order mode) by operating a button or the like. You may. Further, the player can select to play the game in any one production mode (first production stage, second production stage, or third production stage) by operating a button or the like. It may be configured as. For example, a random mode, an order mode, a first production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the first production stage), a second production stage fixed mode (a mode in which a game is played only in the second production stage), and a third production stage. One of the fixed modes (modes in which the game is played only in the third effect stage) may be configured so that the player can select one of them by operating a button or the like. At this time, even when the first effect stage fixed mode, the second effect stage fixed mode, or the third effect stage fixed mode is selected, each time a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition) is satisfied, The stage change notice effect may be generated.

In the ninth embodiment, as a specific condition (stage change occurrence condition), a condition that the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times), and An example has been described in which the condition that the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 291 is selected is adopted. The specific conditions (conditions for generating stage changes) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and any conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, the predetermined number of times may be a numerical value selected by lottery from a plurality of numerical values (for example, 0 to 99) instead of a predetermined numerical value. For example, at the start of one special symbol change (for example, after executing the process of step S9203 in FIG. 300), one numerical value is selected by lottery, and the special symbol change is performed for the number of times corresponding to the numerical value. (A specific condition according to the lottery result is satisfied), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) may be changed. At this time, when 0 is selected by the lottery, the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) is once changed in one special symbol variation, and then the special symbol is concerned. The effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) may be changed again in the fluctuation. Alternatively, when a specific condition is satisfied according to a predetermined winning (for example, winning a game ball to the first starting port 420), the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect). The stage) may be changed.

When the RAM clear is executed, it may be allowed to stay in a predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation number counter after stage transition (see step S9261 in FIG. 302). The RAM clear is a process similar to the backup clear process (see FIG. 24) described in the first embodiment, and is a process for clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM. When the RAM clear (backup clear process) is executed, information indicating that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed is sent as a command from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. By receiving the command, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the RAM clear (backup clear process) has been executed. As described in the first embodiment, in the RAM clear (backup clear process), the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle. ..

Further, when the power is turned on, the effect stage managed by the sub control circuit 200 may be allowed to stay in a predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage). As a result, the image corresponding to the effect mode (for example, the first effect stage) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 regardless of the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 100. Further, at this time, "0" may be set in the fluctuation number counter after the stage shift.

In the ninth embodiment, a normal game state and a probabilistic game state (high probability game state) are provided as game states managed by the main control circuit 100, and the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the probabilistic game state. ) When it is done, it is explained that it shifts from the probabilistic game state to the normal game state. Here, when shifting from the probabilistic gaming state to the normal gaming state, another gaming state (intervening gaming state) may be passed through. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic game state, the probabilistic game state shifts to the intervening game state, and the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening game state. Once done, it can be configured to transition from the intervening gaming state to the normal gaming state. In the intervening game state, the lottery may be performed using a table different from the various tables (for example, the variable pattern table of the special symbol) used in the normal game state and the probabilistic game state.

Further, as the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 200, an effect mode (intervene mode) corresponding to the intervening game state may be provided. For example, when the special symbol change is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the probabilistic mode, the mode shifts from the probabilistic mode to the intervening mode, and when the special symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in the intervening mode, It can be configured to transition from the intervening mode to the normal mode. For example, when the probability variation mode ends, a result screen corresponding to the result during the bonus (for example, an image showing the total number of game balls paid out after shifting to the first hit mode) may be displayed. It is conceivable that the display of the result screen may be continued even in the intervention mode.

When shifting from such an intervention mode to the normal mode, a stage change may always occur (transition to the production stage determined by lottery). Further, when irregularity (power interruption, etc.) occurs or RAM clear is executed, the gaming state managed by the main control circuit 100 is the intervening gaming state, while the effect mode managed by the sub control circuit 200. May be configured so that a situation such as a predetermined effect mode (for example, an image display corresponding to the first effect stage is performed) can occur. In this case, the player may stay in the predetermined effect mode (for example, the first effect stage) until the number of special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (20 times).

(B-2) The gaming machine of the above (B-1).
A game control means capable of controlling game execution based on a set value of one of a plurality of set values, and a game control means.
A set value suggesting means capable of suggesting the set value is provided.
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
The effect mode control means can transition from the first effect mode to the second effect mode when the specific condition is satisfied.
The set value suggesting means can suggest the set value by a display indicating the specific condition (display of a counter image when a stage change occurs).
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a specific condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied. In this case, it is possible to transition from the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage), and a display indicating the specific condition (counter when a stage change occurs). It is configured so that the set value can be suggested by the display of the image). In this way, since the display indicating the specific condition (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs) is performed, the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage) are performed. It is possible to make the player interested in the conditions for transitioning to. At the same time, since it is possible to make the player predict the set value through the display (display of the counter image when the stage change occurs), the player's interest in the condition can be increased.

In the ninth embodiment, the content of the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) is reset (while the image showing the name of the effect mode (effect stage) after the transition is displayed. It was explained that it will be recovered). As described above, in the present invention, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, it corresponds to the effect mode (first effect stage, second effect stage, or third effect stage) of the transition destination. It is possible to configure the display indicating a specific condition (display of the counter image when a stage change occurs) to be changed during the display of the image (background, name, etc.) to be displayed.

In the present invention, as a display indicating a specific condition, it is possible to adopt the display of a counter image when a stage change occurs. The counter image may be a counter image displayed in a stage change game (a special symbol change in which a stage change is performed), or a game before the stage change game (for example, 1 of a special symbol change in which a stage change is performed). It may be a counter image displayed in the previous special symbol variation). For example, in the special symbol variation immediately before the special symbol variation in which the stage change is performed, the effect of changing the color of the counter image to the color corresponding to the set value may be performed.

(B-3) The gaming machine according to (B-1) or (B-2).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means is
The first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and the second production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 288). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including.
It is possible to display the symbols in different patterns depending on whether the specific effect is executed in the first effect mode or the specific effect is executed in the second effect mode. be,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and the second production mode (shown in FIG. 288). It is possible to execute a specific effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect numbers "104" and "106"), and it is possible to execute a specific effect. There are cases where the effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and a specific effect (sixth notice effect). It is configured so that the symbols can be displayed in different patterns depending on the case of being executed in the second effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 288). There is. As a result, it is possible to display the symbols in a pattern according to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the symbol display are appropriately linked.

(B-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3).
Identification information display means (liquid crystal display device 16) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The plurality of effect modes include a first effect mode (first effect stage) and a second effect mode (second effect stage).
A first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the first effect mode among the plurality of effect modes. Has been
A second effect (eighth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed only in the second effect mode among the plurality of effect modes.
A third effect (sixth notice effect) is provided as an effect that can be executed in both the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
The effect executing means is
The first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and the second production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 288). It is possible to execute the third effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the above.
Identification is performed after the variable display of the identification information is started depending on whether the third effect is executed in the first effect mode or the third effect is executed in the second effect mode. It is possible to display the identification information in different fluctuation patterns as the fluctuation pattern of the identification information until the information is stopped and displayed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first production mode (the production mode corresponding to the production numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and the second production mode (shown in FIG. 288). It is possible to execute the third effect (sixth notice effect) in any one of a plurality of effect modes including the effect numbers "104" and "106"). The case where the third effect (sixth notice effect) is executed in the first effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" shown in FIG. 288) and the third effect (sixth notice effect). The effect) is executed in the second effect mode (the effect mode corresponding to the effect numbers "104" and "106" shown in FIG. 288), and the identification information is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the identification information is started. As the variation pattern of the identification information until the slingshot is performed, the identification information can be displayed in different variation patterns. As a result, it is possible to display the identification information in a variation pattern according to the effect mode, and it is possible to realize an effect in which the effect mode and the display of the identification information are appropriately linked. In addition, the first effect (first notice effect, second notice effect, third notice effect, and fourth notice effect) and the second effect (eighth notice effect) are each in the first effect mode (first effect). The third production (sixth notice production) is the first production mode (first production stage), whereas the production can be performed only in the production stage) and the second production mode (second production stage). It is an effect that can be executed in both the second effect mode (second effect stage) and the second effect mode. Therefore, when a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) is satisfied, for example, a transition from the first effect mode (first effect stage) to the second effect mode (second effect stage) occurs. , The first production (1st notice production, 2nd notice production, 3rd notice production, and 4th notice production) will not be performed, while the 2nd production (8th notice production) will be performed. In addition, it is possible to create a situation in which the third production (sixth notice production) is continued. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in each effect mode (effect stage) and specific conditions (stage change occurrence conditions).

In the ninth embodiment, when the effect corresponding to the effect numbers "104" to "106" is performed, the decorative pattern is changed by a dedicated variation pattern as shown in FIGS. 290 (a) to 290 (c). It was explained as. On the other hand, when the effects corresponding to the effect numbers "101" to "103" are performed, for example, the default fluctuation patterns as shown in FIGS. 285 (d) (FIGS. 290 (a) to (c)). It is possible to fluctuate the decorative symbol in a variation pattern in which the timing at which the decorative symbol stops is earlier than the variation pattern shown).

(B-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4).
The specific condition can be satisfied according to the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), but cannot be satisfied according to the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation). ,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, a specific condition (condition for generating a stage change) can be satisfied according to a variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation), while the second It is configured so that it cannot be established according to the variation display of the symbol (second special symbol variation). As a result, in the situation where the variation display of the second symbol (second special symbol variation) is performed, the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) does not occur, but the variation display of the first symbol (first special symbol variation) In the situation where is performed, a transition of the production mode (production stage) will occur. As a result, in contrast to the situation where the second symbol variation display (second special symbol variation) is performed, the situation where the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed is set to the effect mode (effect stage). ) Can be characterized as a situation in which the transition occurs, and the situation in which the first symbol variation display (first special symbol variation) is performed can be made interesting.

(B-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5).
Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information, and
When a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied, a lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and a lottery means.
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, the identification information display means can display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
It is provided with a suggestion means capable of giving a suggestion (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the display control is to change the display of the identification information based on the establishment of one of the predetermined conditions (stage change section, the reserved ball). When the effect mode transition is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the effect performed by the means, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery performed in response to the above, while suggesting the result of the lottery, the predetermined condition is satisfied before the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the one predetermined condition is started. With respect to the predetermined lottery conducted in response to the event, no suggestion regarding the result of the lottery can be made.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied a plurality of times, the predetermined condition (the first) of the plurality of times is satisfied. 1 Transition of the production mode (production stage) according to the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of one predetermined condition (stage change section, the reserved ball) among the establishment of (winning of the game ball to the starting port 420). When the above is performed, the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) is satisfied after the variable display of the identification information based on the one predetermined condition is satisfied (the stage change section, the reserved ball) is started. Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) performed in response to the event, while suggesting the result of the lottery (look-ahead effect), the one predetermined condition is satisfied (stage change section, the reserved ball). Regarding the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) before the variable display of the identification information is started, the lottery It is configured so that no suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result can be made. As a result, depending on the context of the timing of establishment of each predetermined condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420) and the timing of the variable display in which the transition of the production mode (production stage) is performed. The number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that can be suggested (look-ahead effect) regarding the result will change. Therefore, the number of predetermined lottery where the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed as compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) for which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) cannot be performed regarding the result is predetermined. There is a possibility that (big hit determination) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
Suggestion means capable of giving suggestions (pre-reading effect) regarding the result of the predetermined lottery, and
A transition destination effect mode determining means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S9203 in FIG. 300) capable of determining the effect mode of the transition destination is provided.
When the specific condition is satisfied, the effect mode control means can transition from one effect mode to the transition destination effect mode determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means.
The suggestion means
When the predetermined lottery is performed a plurality of times, among the plurality of predetermined lottery, the predetermined lottery performed after the transition destination effect mode is determined by the transition destination effect mode determining means , The result of the lottery can be suggested, while the predetermined lottery performed before the transition destination production mode is determined by the transition destination production mode determining means can be suggested regarding the result of the lottery. No,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed a plurality of times, among the plurality of predetermined lottery (big hit determination), the transition destination production mode ( Regarding a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) performed after the production stage) is determined, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the result of the lottery (look-ahead production), but before the transition destination production mode (production stage) is determined. With respect to the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) performed in the above, it is configured so that the suggestion (look-ahead effect) regarding the result of the lottery cannot be performed. As a result, suggestions regarding the result (pre-reading effect) can be performed according to the context of the timing at which each predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed and the timing at which the effect mode (effect stage) of the transition destination is determined. The number of lottery (big hit judgment) will change. Therefore, as compared with the case where the number of predetermined lottery (big hit determination) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) cannot be performed regarding the result is predetermined, the predetermined lottery (big hit) in which the suggestion (look-ahead effect) can be performed is compared with the case where the number is predetermined. There is a possibility that the number of determinations) can be increased, and it is possible to provide the player with many opportunities to give suggestions (look-ahead effects) regarding the result of a predetermined lottery.

(B-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means satisfies the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one effect stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) as the specific condition. In addition, it is possible to transition from one production mode to another production mode,
The effect executing means is
When the effect mode transition is performed by the effect mode control means in response to the first condition being satisfied, the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) is executed. The first production execution means that can be done,
A second effect executing means capable of executing a fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291) different from the fourth effect is provided.
The effect mode control means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S9281 in FIG. 303) has a second condition (effect shown in FIG. 291) relating to the fifth effect even if the first condition is not satisfied. When the main variation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), it is possible to transition from one effect mode to another effect mode.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied. In that case, it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (special symbol counted after shifting to one production stage). When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of fluctuations (20 times)), the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) is performed. It is possible to execute the production corresponding to. Further, even if the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) is not satisfied, the fourth production (figure). The second condition (the effect shown in FIG. 291) regarding the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291), which is different from the effect number "131" shown in 292). When the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the number "121" or "122" is selected), the transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage) can be performed. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (the production number "2" shown in FIG. 291. The main variation pattern corresponding to "121" or "122" is selected), and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) and the fifth effect (shown in FIG. 291). Regarding the effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122"), it is possible to make the player interested in which condition is satisfied and which effect is generated. As a result, the development of the production related to the transition of the production mode (production stage) can be made more interesting.

(B-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
The effect selection means capable of selecting the effect to be executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The effect mode control means is selected from one effect mode when a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) is selected by the effect selection means. It is possible to transition to the production mode of
The effect executing means is at any timing of a plurality of timings including the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 291 (b)) and the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 291 (b)). , It is possible to execute the predetermined effect,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) is selected, one effect mode is used. It is possible to transition from the (effect stage) to another production mode (effect stage), and the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 291 (b)) and the second timing (at FIG. 291 (b)) can be changed. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) at any of a plurality of timings including the timing 2) shown. It is configured as follows. As a result, the predetermined timing (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) related to the condition for transitioning the effect mode (effect stage) is the first timing (FIG. 291). Since it occurs at the timing 1) shown in (b) or at the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 291 (b)), there are many variations related to the transition of the production mode (production stage). However, it is possible to create a development of production.

The execution timing of the predetermined effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) is the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 291 (b)) and the first timing. In addition to the timing 2 (timing 2 shown in FIG. 291 (b)), one or more timings may be provided. For example, the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 291 (b)) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) later than the first timing (timing 1 shown in FIG. 291 (b)), and further. A predetermined effect (effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 (a)) at a predetermined timing (for example, 6 seconds) later than the second timing (timing 2 shown in FIG. 291 (b)). It may be configured so that the effect corresponding to "" can be executed.

(B-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9).
A lottery means that can perform a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment),
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
An effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) according to the effect executed by the effect execution means, and an effect pattern selection means.
An effect pattern replacing means (sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S9210 in FIG. 300) capable of replacing the effect pattern selected by the effect pattern selection means with another effect pattern is provided.
The effect executing means includes a suggestion effect executing means capable of performing a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of the predetermined lottery.
When the suggestion effect is performed by the suggestion effect execution means, the effect pattern replacement means has a first effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "1" to "20" shown in FIG. 304) by the effect pattern selection means. When is selected, the effect pattern is replaced, while when the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns “21” to “30” shown in FIG. 304) is selected by the effect pattern selection means. Does not replace the production pattern,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) that can suggest the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed, the first effect pattern (sub shown in FIG. 304) is performed. When the variation patterns "1" to "20") are selected, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced, while the second effect pattern (sub-variation patterns "21" to "30" shown in FIG. 304) is replaced. When ") is selected, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is not replaced. In this way, as the first step for determining the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern), one effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is selected without considering whether or not the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed. Then, as the second step, when the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect) is performed, the effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) is replaced as necessary to obtain an appropriate effect pattern according to the suggestion effect (look-ahead effect). In determining (sub-variation pattern), processing efficiency can be improved.

(B-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect mode control means
When the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied as the specific condition, the first production mode is started. A first effect mode control means capable of transitioning to another effect mode,
When the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 is selected) is satisfied as the specific condition, one effect mode is changed to another effect mode. A second effect mode control means capable of transitioning to
The effect executing means is
When the transition of the effect mode is performed by the first effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the first condition, the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) is performed. The first effect execution means that can be executed,
Corresponding to the fifth effect (the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291) when the effect mode transition is performed by the second effect mode control means in response to the satisfaction of the second condition. It is equipped with a second production execution means capable of executing the production).
When both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect, but the second effect executing means does not execute the fourth effect. It is possible to perform 5 productions,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the first condition (the number of special symbol changes counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number of times (20 times)) is satisfied. In that case, it is possible to transition from one production mode (production stage) to another production mode (production stage), and the first condition (special symbol counted after shifting to one production stage). When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed according to the establishment of the predetermined number of fluctuations (20 times)), the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) is performed. It is possible to execute the production corresponding to. Further, when the second condition (the main variation pattern corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 is selected) is satisfied, one effect mode (effect stage) is changed to another effect. It is possible to transition to the mode (effect stage), and the second condition (the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to the production number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291 is selected) is satisfied. When the transition of the effect mode (effect stage) is performed accordingly, it is possible to execute the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291). Then, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number "121" shown in FIG. 291). "Or the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the execution of the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 292) is executed. It is configured so that the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291) can be executed without doing so. In this way, the first condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations counted after shifting to one production stage reaches a predetermined number (20 times)) and the second condition (effect number shown in FIG. 291). When both conditions of "121" or "the main fluctuation pattern corresponding to" 122 "is selected), the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number" 131 "shown in FIG. 292) is satisfied. By preferentially executing the fifth effect (effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291), the effect corresponding to the fourth effect (effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292). ) Is not generated, which gives the player unexpectedness, and can increase the player's interest in the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number “121” or “122” shown in FIG. 291).

In the ninth embodiment, the fifth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "121" or "122" shown in FIG. 291) is higher than the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292). Was explained as being able to be executed preferentially. On the other hand, in a situation where the predetermined effect and the fourth effect (the effect corresponding to the effect number "131" shown in FIG. 292) can be performed, the fourth effect (the effect shown in FIG. 292) is higher than the predetermined effect. The effect corresponding to the number "131") may be preferentially executed. Examples of the predetermined effect include an effect (for example, a symbol action notice effect) performed when the special symbol change starts. The symbol action notice effect is an effect that generates a predetermined effect on the decorative symbol at the start of the special symbol variation. Even if it is decided to generate a symbol action notice effect at the start of one special symbol change, if a stage change is performed in the special symbol change, the symbol action notice effect is not performed. It is possible to do.

(B-12) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-11).
A symbol display means capable of displaying a variable symbol and a stop display, and
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 308).
As an effect pattern executed by the effect execution means, an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of effect patterns is provided.
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means is one of the plurality of effect patterns in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”) after the effect is executed in, and after the variable display of the symbol is restarted, it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns. can be,
The effect pattern selection means (sub CPU201 that executes the process of step S9363 of FIG. 312 and the process of step S9473 of FIG. 316) selects the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game, and then based on the pattern. , It is possible to select the pattern of the effect performed in the first pseudo game.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, there are a plurality of effect patterns in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) from the start of the variable display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. The second pseudo game ("" In the "pseudo 2"), it is possible to execute the effect with one of the plurality of effect patterns (effect patterns corresponding to the effect numbers "161" to "163" shown in FIG. 308). Then, after selecting the pattern of the effect to be performed in the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”), it is possible to select the pattern of the effect to be performed in the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) based on the pattern. It is configured to be possible. This makes it easier to design the development of the effect performed from the first pseudo game (“pseudo 1”) to the second pseudo game (“pseudo 2”).

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, an image is obtained when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied, such as the game ball passing through a passing area provided in a game area where the launched game ball can roll. Control to variablely display a symbol as identification information on the display area of the display device is executed, control to derive and display the variablely displayed symbol is executed, and the derived and displayed symbols are in a predetermined combination (specific display mode). ), A player is provided so as to shift to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-110576).

The present inventor has come up with the idea that, in the process of diligently studying the above-mentioned gaming machines, it may be possible to improve the interest of the gaming by devising the fluctuation time of the identification information. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) A first lottery means capable of performing a first lottery (ordinary lottery) and
A second lottery means capable of conducting a second lottery (second special lottery) and
Based on the result of the first lottery performed by the first lottery means, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopping the display,
Based on the result of the second lottery performed by the second lottery means, the second display means (second special symbol display unit 74) capable of variablely displaying the identification information and then stopping and displaying the identification information. Prepare
When the result of the first lottery is the first result (normal hit), the first display means can variablely display the identification information over the first time (500 ms). On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result (normal loss), the identification information may be variablely displayed over a second time (600,000 ms) longer than the first time. It is possible and
When the result of the second lottery is a specific result (small hit), the second display means fluctuates the identification information over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time. It is possible to let
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary hit), it is identified over the first time (500 ms). While it is possible to display the information in a variable manner, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the second time (500 ms) is longer than the first time (500 ms). It is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner over a period of time (600,000 ms). Further, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the identification information is provided over a third time (1000 ms) shorter than the second time (600,000 ms). It is configured so that it can be displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the second lottery is performed while the variation display of the identification information (first variation display) is performed when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss). It is possible to complete the variable display (second variable display) of the identification information when the result of the (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit). Therefore, it is possible to create a novel game property by using the time from the end of the second variation display to the end of the first variation display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1).
The first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 400) in which a game ball can be entered, and
A second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) in which a game ball can be entered, and
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, it is possible to control the first winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the first winning means. 1 Control means and
When the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time by at least the first display means, and the result of the second lottery is the specific result, the second winning means is used. A second control means capable of controlling the second winning means so that the game ball can easily enter the ball is provided.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary hit), the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 400). It is possible to control the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 400) so that the gaming ball can easily enter the ball, and at least by the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71). When the identification information is fluctuated over the second time (600,000 ms) and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a specific result (small hit), the second prize is won. The second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) can be controlled so that the gaming ball can easily enter the means (small hit winning opening 560). As a result, a second result (ordinary loss) different from the first result (ordinary hit) that triggers control to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 400) is performed. ) Occurs, while the variation display (first variation display) of the identification information based on the second result (normal loss) is being performed, the second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) is displayed. It is possible to control the game ball to easily enter, and the game ball enters the second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) by using the time until the first variation display ends. It is possible to create a situation that is easy to do.

In the ninth embodiment, while the variation display of the identification information (ordinary symbol loss length variation) based on the second result (ordinary loss) is being performed, the game is played in the second winning means (small hit winning opening 560). He explained that it would create a situation where the ball could easily enter. The second result in the present invention is not limited to loss (ordinary loss), but may be hit (ordinary hit). The second time can be about 10 times to 100,000 times (or 100 times to 10000 times, 500 times to 5000 times, 1000 times to 2000 times, etc.) of the first time. The time can be about 5 to 10000 times (or 100 to 5000 times, 500 times to 1000 times, etc.) of the third time. Further, the time for which the game ball is easily controlled to enter the first winning means (ordinary electric accessory unit 400) is 0.5 to 50 times (or 1 time to 1 times) the above-mentioned first time. The time can be about 10 times, 2 times to 5 times, etc.). In addition, the time for which the game ball is easily controlled to enter the second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) is 0.5 to 100 times (or 1 to 50 times) of the third time. It is possible to set the time to about twice, twice to ten times, etc.).

(C-3) The gaming machine according to (C-1) or (C-2).
A symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying a symbol, and
The symbol display means includes a symbol effect executing means capable of executing a symbol effect (drum variation effect) in which a plurality of symbols are displayed.
When the result of the first lottery is the first result, the symbol effect executing means is such that one of the plurality of symbols is different from at least one of the remaining symbols. On the other hand, when the result of the first lottery is the second result, the symbol effect is executed so that the plurality of symbols are all the same symbol. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the first result (ordinary hit), one of the plurality of symbols remains. While it is possible to execute the symbol effect (drum fluctuation effect) differently from at least one of the symbols in the above, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss). In some cases, it is configured so that the symbol effect (drum variation effect) can be executed so that the plurality of symbols all have the same symbol. As a result, the player is made to understand that the identification information is variablely displayed over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)) by displaying the same symbol as a plurality of symbols. Can be done.

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3).
An image display means (liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means,
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variation mode) is provided.
When the image display control means is controlled to the second state, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means, and , Right drum symbol 9202R) can be displayed on the image display means, but when the first state is controlled, the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display means.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when it is controlled to the second state (probability variation mode), it corresponds to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71). It is possible to display a predetermined image (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R), but when it is controlled to the first state (normal mode), the said image. It is configured not to display predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R). As a result, the effect (predetermined image) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (normal symbol display unit 71) is performed in the second state (probability variation mode) as compared with the first state (normal mode). The player can be made aware of the state in which (the effect using the left drum symbol 9202L, the middle drum symbol 9202C, and the right drum symbol 9202R) is performed.

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (probability variation mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the effect executing means has a predetermined effect (drum according to a hit pattern) according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state. There are cases where the variable effect) is executed and cases where the predetermined effect is not executed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times) in the second state (probability change mode), the second state (probability change mode) is terminated. It is possible. Further, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), a predetermined effect is determined according to the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode). (Drum variation effect by hit pattern) may be executed, or the predetermined effect (drum variation effect by hit pattern) may not be executed. In this regard, when the number of remaining unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is small (for example, the time required to execute the remaining unit games in the second state (probability variation mode) is the first. In the case where the result of the lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variation display time of the identification information (a situation in which the time is relatively shorter than the second time (600,000 ms))). There is a possibility that the significance of the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becoming the second result (ordinary loss) will be diminished. According to the invention of (5), it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect (drum variation effect due to a hit pattern) from being generated in such a case, so that an effect according to the situation of the game can be appropriately realized. Can be done.

In the ninth embodiment, when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is a specific number of times (10 times) or more, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second. It was explained that a predetermined effect (drum variation effect according to the hit pattern) is performed based on the result (normal symbol loss length variation). Here, as the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), a plurality of fluctuation times (for example, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds, 180 seconds, 210 seconds, 240 seconds, 270 seconds, 300 seconds, And 600 seconds, etc.), the specific number of times may be changed according to the determined fluctuation time. For example, in the probabilistic game state, when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is lost, the variation display time of the identification information is 5 seconds, and the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is It is assumed that the total time of the variation display time of the identification information in the case of a small hit and the opening time of the second winning means (small hit winning opening 560) is 5 seconds. In such a form, when 60 seconds is determined as the fluctuation time corresponding to the second result (normal symbol loss length fluctuation), the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is 12 If it is more than once, the variation display can be almost completed during the second state (probability variation mode). In this case, the specific number of times can be set to 12 times. A value obtained by dividing the determined normal symbol fluctuation time by the expected value of the special symbol fluctuation time (for small hits, the total time of the special symbol fluctuation time and the opening time of the small hit winning opening). The number of times according to the above may be defined as the specific number of times.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first determination is whether or not the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (probability variation mode) is the specific number (10 times) or more. It was explained that it is performed when the gate passage that triggered the lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs. In the present invention, the determination may be made when the normal symbol variation corresponding to the passage through the gate starts. Therefore, even if the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the gate passes occurs is the specified number (10 times) or more, the remaining number of times (remaining ST number) at the time when the normal symbol fluctuation starts is specified. If it is less than the number of times (10 times), the predetermined effect (drum variation effect according to the hit pattern) may not be performed.

As described in the ninth embodiment, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) according to the hit pattern have changes in the identification information based on the second result (normal loss). It is possible to configure the display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) to be stopped before the start. After the stop display of the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) is completed, a hit notification effect (see FIG. 321 (k)) is performed. The hit notification effect should end at the same time as the start of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to classify the effect mode, such as the probability variation mode while the hit notification effect is being performed, and the first bonus mode after the hit notification effect is being performed. In the probabilistic mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 338 and 339 are performed, and in the first bonus mode, for example, the processes shown in FIGS. 332 to 335 are performed. When the hit notification effect is being performed, the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display means (second special symbol display unit 74) in a manner corresponding to the big hit (for example, 10R big hit) (big hit game). When the start condition of the state is satisfied), a predetermined jackpot effect is performed. As a result, the mode shifts to the first bonus mode. The predetermined jackpot effect can be the same effect as the effect performed when the start condition of the jackpot game state is satisfied at other timings in the probability variation mode (when the hit notification effect is not performed). be. On the other hand, when the start condition of the big hit game state is satisfied in the first bonus mode, an effect different from the predetermined big hit effect may be performed.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5).
An image display means (liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means displays the identification information in the first display means according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the image display means, and changes the mode of the display over time so that the display gradually becomes thinner. Is possible,
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the display is performed according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71), and the display is displayed so that the display gradually becomes thinner. It is configured so that the mode can be changed over time. As a result, the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71) can be imprinted on the player's mind, and the player can be strongly aware of the time.

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6).
An image display means (liquid crystal display device 16) capable of displaying an image and
An image display control means capable of controlling the image display in the image display means is provided.
The image display control means
A first image capable of causing the image display means to display predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means. Display control means and
The image display means is provided with a second image display control means capable of displaying a time according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (displaying an image of the remaining time of a normal symbol loss length fluctuation).
The first image display control means does not display the predetermined image on the image display means when the time display is performed.
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and middle drum symbol 9202C, and corresponding to the display mode of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71), and The right drum symbol (9202R) can be displayed, and the time is displayed according to the fluctuation time of the identification information in the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71) (display of the image of the remaining time of the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length). It is possible to do. Then, when the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed, the predetermined images (left drum symbol 9202L, middle drum symbol 9202C, and right drum symbol 9202R) are not displayed. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time display (display of the image of the remaining time with the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the time.

In the ninth embodiment, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary symbol loss length fluctuation), the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed. This has been described as a matter of fact (see FIG. 324). The time may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation at the time when one normal symbol loss length fluctuation starts (that is, the fluctuation time itself of the normal symbol fluctuation related to the normal symbol loss length fluctuation). , It may be the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length change at the time when one normal symbol loss length change is being performed.

In the present invention, the situation in which the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed is not particularly limited, and the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) is the first result (normal hit). In some cases, or when the result of the second lottery (second special lottery) is a predetermined result (loss or big hit), the time display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image display) may be performed. .. For example, in a situation where the remaining time of fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length is less than a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the fluctuation patterns of all the reserved normal symbol fluctuations correspond to the first result (normal hit). If it is a pattern, or if the result of the jackpot judgment related to all the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a loss, the time display (display of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation remaining time image) is performed. It is possible to adopt. As a result, the player can be made aware that the remaining time for the fluctuation of the normal symbol loss length has decreased.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a specific state (second bonus mode) is provided.
When the specific state ends and a part or all of the second time has elapsed, the effect executing means has the remaining time of the second time (ordinary symbol loss length variation). It is possible to perform the production according to the remaining time),
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a part or all of the second time (600,000 ms) has elapsed when a specific state (second bonus mode) ends. It is configured so that the effect corresponding to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation) can be executed. As a result, when the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is the second result (ordinary loss), the variable display of the identification information (first variable display) and the specific state (second bonus mode) are displayed. In a situation that occurs in a superimposed manner, the production content is different depending on how much time (second time) of the fluctuation display remains at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode). be able to. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the remaining time of the second time (the remaining time of the normal symbol loss length fluctuation), and it is possible to make the player strongly aware of the remaining time.

In the ninth embodiment, when the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the remaining time of the second time (normal symbol) It was explained that the production will be performed according to the remaining time of the loss length fluctuation). In the present invention, the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) may be terminated at the time when the specific state (second bonus mode) is terminated. That is, when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends and the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) ends (when the remaining time of the second time is 0). When the first variation display (normal symbol loss length variation) continues (when the remaining time of the second time is not 0), different effects may be performed.

If the first fluctuation display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) continues at the end of the specific state (second bonus mode), the first lottery (normal) in the second state (probability change mode) The result of the lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery) occurs, and the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) occurs. While the normal symbol loss length fluctuation is being performed, the transition to a specific state (second bonus mode) is performed, and even when the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first fluctuation display (normal) is performed. When the symbol loss length fluctuation) continues, and in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first lottery When the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to (ordinary lottery) occurs and the specific state (second bonus mode) ends, the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) Can be assumed to continue. Here, in a specific state (second bonus mode), the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) becomes the second result (ordinary loss), and the first variation corresponding to the first lottery (ordinary lottery). When the display (normal symbol loss length fluctuation) occurs, the result of the first lottery (normal lottery) becomes the second result (normal loss) in the second state (probability variation mode), and the first lottery is concerned. An effect (special effect) different from the effect performed when the first variation display (ordinary symbol loss length variation) corresponding to the (ordinary lottery) occurs may be performed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8).
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
A state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of states including a first state (normal mode) and a second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is provided.
The state control means can end the second state when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are played in the second state.
The effect executing means executes an effect according to the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state when the identification information is displayed in a variable manner over the second time. It is possible to
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined number of times (50 times) of unit games are performed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode), the second state (remaining ST number of times) It is possible to terminate the subtraction mode). Further, when the identification information is variablely displayed over the second time (600,000 ms), it depends on the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). It is configured so that it is possible to perform various effects. As a result, when the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is large (the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) continues for the time being). ) Or when the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is small (the end of the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is approaching. In such a situation), it is possible to appropriately realize the effect according to the situation of the game.

In the ninth embodiment, the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the predetermined number (5 times) or more and less than the predetermined number (5 times). It was explained that the content of the production may differ depending on the case. In the present invention, the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) can be divided into a plurality of periods, and the content of the effect performed in each period can be different. The plurality of periods include, for example, a period in which the remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined number (for example, 30 times) (for example, 30 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (first period) and the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) or more and the first predetermined number (for example, for example). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the period (second period) less than 30 times (30 times) and the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) is the third predetermined number (for example, 5 times). The remaining number of unit games (remaining ST number) that can be executed in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode) during the period (third period) less than the second predetermined number (for example, 10 times) is the fourth. The remaining number of unit games that can be executed in a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) or more and less than a third predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) (fourth period) and in the second state (remaining ST number subtraction mode). A period (fifth period) or the like in which the (remaining ST number of times) is the fifth predetermined number of times (for example, one time) can be set.

(C-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9).
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production
The effect executing means may suggest that the result of the first lottery has become the second result while the identification information is variablely displayed in the second display means (pre-reading a normal figure). It is possible to perform production),
It is characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the result of the first lottery (ordinary lottery) is obtained while the identification information is variablely displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display unit 74). It is configured so that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect (normal figure look-ahead effect) that can suggest that the second result (normal loss) has been obtained. As a result, the first display means (ordinary symbol display unit 71) is performed through the suggestion effect (normal symbol look-ahead effect) performed while the identification information is variablely displayed on the second display means (second special symbol display unit 74). It is possible to expect the player to perform the variable display of the identification information over a relatively long time (second time (600,000 ms)).

[10. others]
Each configuration described in each pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment plays a game using a game medium, and the privilege is given based on the result of the game. Can be applied. That is, not only is the game played by the game medium being launched or thrown in by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit 100 itself is The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to enable a game performed by circulating the enclosed game ball or a game performed without a medal. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and manages the game medium that electromagnetically manages the game medium owned by the player.

In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that circulates the enclosed game balls to play a game, the game balls as a game medium are configured to be playable without being discharged to the outside, so that the prize balls are paid out when a prize is won. Instead, prize ball data as a game medium is given. In this specification, the prize includes both the meaning of the prize ball and the prize ball data. For example, when a prize is won in a prize opening with 15 prize balls, prize ball data having a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls is given to the enclosed gaming machine. Further, the prize may be not only the prize ball and the prize ball data but also the game value corresponding to the prize ball and the prize ball data.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages the game medium management device, the game medium management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to the two-way communication function through the medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides the game medium necessary for the game medium lending operation (that is, the player performs the game medium loading operation). Operation) or when a winning combination related to the payout of the game medium is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game medium (that is, the payout of the game medium to the player is performed, and the necessary game medium is acquired. It is sufficient that the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game can be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and also has a game. In addition to the case where a person directly operates the game medium, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game hall and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be recorded by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by using an imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachinko game machine is described, but the game medium management device is also used in the pachislot machine, the slot machine using the game ball, and the enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the player's game medium is managed.

As described above, by providing the game medium management device described above, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the player not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, a communication cable is used to transmit data on an enclosed game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and an increase / decrease in the game medium due to consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected so as to be able to transmit and receive by an optical signal via an optical signal, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine will be described below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the gaming area and launches a gaming ball as a gaming medium from above with respect to the gaming area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of balls held is subtracted by 1. As described above, since the gaming ball as a gaming medium is launched from above with respect to the gaming area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed gaming machine. Then, the game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The gaming balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed gaming machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of gaming balls are configured to circulate in a series of paths in the gaming machine.

In the enclosed gaming machine, since the gaming ball is not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, an upper plate or a lower plate for temporarily holding the gaming ball is not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball is not actually in the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In the enclosed gaming machine, the player starts the game after obtaining a ball by lending from the gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining a possession ball means that the player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. Then, when the game ball is launched from the launching device, the possessed ball is consumed and the number of possessed balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through each winning opening or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls held is increased by paying out the number according to the conditions set according to the winning opening. Furthermore, the number of balls held will increase by lending from the game medium management device. In addition, "consumption, lending and paying out of game media" means that the ball is consumed, lent out and paid out. In addition, "increase / decrease in game medium" means that the number of balls held increases / decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. Further, "data on increase / decrease in game media due to consumption, lending and payout of game media" is data on a decrease in the number of balls held due to the launch of a game ball and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game ball through each winning opening or the like. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Also, when the game ball is launched, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. In addition, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device is located at the upper part of the game machine, and receives a request for conversion (ball lending) from the game value managed by the game medium management device to a ball possessed (ball lending) and counting (return) of the ball possessed. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game medium management device. Here, the "game value" refers to money / banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. In the first embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted balls can be used for prize exchange and the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed gaming machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. Further, with this backup power supply, for example, the door frame opening detection by the door opening sensor may be continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent cheating at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit / receive data (transmission signal) to / from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data to be transmitted and received includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is used as a transmission source and the other is used as a transmission destination, and the transmission source transmits a transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal to determine whether or not they are the same, so that the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with. It can be confirmed that the signal has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission / reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the game system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation unit is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It may have a demodulation unit for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the game machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

Further, in the game system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, is set in addition to the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the source.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is confirmed not only that the normal signal has been transmitted / received, but also that the normal signal has been transmitted / received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent activities.

In the first to ninth embodiments, the embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in the present specification are pachinko machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. It can be applied to machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines.

16 Liquid crystal display device 24 Speaker 49 Passing gate 73 1st special symbol display unit 74 2nd special symbol display unit 80 Combined operation gate 102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
201 sub CPU
420 1st starting port 422 V winning device 440 2nd starting port 460 Normal electric accessory 540 Large winning opening 560 Small hit winning opening 600 Special electric accessory

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
An operating means that can accept operations by the player,
A production execution means that can execute a production, and
An icon display means capable of displaying an icon in an effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The icon display means is
When the first effect is executed and the second effect is executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to display icons of the same system as each other.
A first icon display means capable of displaying a predetermined icon when the operation means is operated, and
A second icon display means capable of displaying the predetermined icon when the operation means is not operated is provided.
The effect executing means is
Depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect, different effects may be executed after the icon is displayed. It is possible and
In either case where the predetermined icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the predetermined icon is displayed by the second icon display means, after the display of the predetermined icon is completed. It is possible to perform a specific effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Claims (11)

A production execution means that can execute a production, and
An icon display means capable of displaying an icon in an effect executed by the effect execution means is provided.
The icon display means can display icons of the same system as each other when the first effect is executed and the second effect is executed by the effect executing means.
The effect executing means differs from each other after the icon is displayed depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect or the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. It is possible to perform the production,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The effect executing means is after executing a common effect depending on whether the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect or the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. , It is possible to perform different effects from each other,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The effect executing means executes a common effect depending on whether the first icon is displayed as the icon of the same system and the second icon different from the first icon is displayed. Is possible,
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above. Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means can suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control will be performed throughout the operation time of the movable member when the icon of the same system is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3. Movable members and
With advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
In the first specific effect performed when the first icon is displayed as the icon of the same system, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed through the operation time of the movable member. On the other hand, in the second specific effect performed when a third icon different from the first icon is displayed, the control to operate the movable member is not performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute the specific effect when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, while the specific effect is also displayed when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. Is possible and
In the second effect, it is possible to execute a pre-effect that suggests that the icon of the same system is displayed before the icon of the same system is displayed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5. Equipped with advantageous control means capable of performing advantageous control for the player,
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute the specific effect when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect, while the specific effect is also displayed when the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect. Is possible and
In the second effect, a predetermined effect execution means capable of executing the predetermined effect is provided.
The predetermined effect executing means is
The first suggestion means that can suggest that the icon of the same type is displayed, and
A second suggestion means capable of suggesting the degree of expectation that the advantageous control is performed is provided.
The effect executing means is
When it is suggested that the icon of the same system is displayed by the first suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect can be executed after the icon of the same system is displayed. On the other hand, when the expectation degree is suggested by the second suggestion means in the second effect, the specific effect is not executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6. The effect executing means is
After executing a common specific effect between the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the case where the icon of the same system is displayed in the second effect, the effects different from each other. Is possible and
When the icon of the same system is displayed in the first effect and the third effect different from the second effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect different from the common specific effect. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7. Equipped with an operation means that can accept operations by the player
The icon display means is
A first icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is operated, and
A second icon display means capable of displaying an icon when the operation means is not operated is provided.
The effect executing means can execute a specific effect in either case where the icon is displayed by the first icon display means or when the icon is displayed by the second icon display means. ,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8. The effect executing means is
A symbol effect execution means capable of executing a symbol effect on which a symbol is displayed, and a symbol effect execution means.
It is provided with an effect state switching means capable of switching from the first effect state to the second effect state when a specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state.
The icon display means is
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect performed in the first effect state, the first icon can be displayed as the icon of the same system.
When the specific symbol is displayed in the symbol effect after being switched to the second effect state by the effect state switching means, a second icon different from the first icon is displayed. Is possible,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9. Equipped with a symbol display means capable of displaying variable and stop symbols
The symbol display means can temporarily stop and display the symbol before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed.
The effect executing means resumes the variation display of the symbol when the icon of the same system is displayed in the first pseudo game from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the provisional stop display of the symbol. In the second pseudo game after that, it is possible to execute the different effects.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 10.

Images